JP2020110208A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide desired game properties.SOLUTION: It is possible to generate a specific game state advantageous to a player on the basis that game balls have entered a first winning device, and it is possible to generate after the specific game state is over a prescribed game state that it is easy to perform control into a second state that game balls easily enter a second winning device. When, as variable display of identification information, variable display based on ball entry into the second winning device is performed with prescribed frequency, the prescribed game state can be terminated; on the other hand, even when frequency of the variable display performed on the basis of ball entry into the second winning device is below prescribed frequency, it is possible to terminate the prescribed game state in the case that the variable display is performed with specific frequency based on ball entry into the first winning device and to cause shift to a non-prescribed game state in which control into a first state that it is hard for game balls to enter the second winning device.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 159

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In a pachinko game machine, generally, when a player shoots a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko game machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is repeatedly opened for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko gaming machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, during a small hitting game, the position of the blade member changes to an open posture that opens and closes the opening/closing area, which allows a game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is an opportunity. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and since the opening/closing area is easy to open, the game ball wins the V winning opening to enter the big hitting game state. Migrate possible. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state changes, so that the number of gaming balls that the player can obtain changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

JP, 2013-233375, A

The present inventor appropriately realizes the game play intended by the developer of the game machine by carefully devising the end condition of the predetermined game state in the process of earnestly examining the above-mentioned game machine. I came to the idea that I could do it.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of achieving desired game playability.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(1) A first winning device (for example, a first starting opening 420) into which a game ball can enter,
A second winning device (for example, a second starting opening 440) into which a game ball can enter,
The state regarding the possibility of entering the game ball into the second winning device is the first state (for example, the closed state) in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the second winning device and the game ball is into the second winning device. Winning state control means capable of changing between a second state where it is easy to enter a ball (for example, an open state);
Specific game state control means capable of shifting to a specific game state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state), based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first winning device,
After the end of the specific game state, a predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (for example, a time saving game state) that can be easily controlled to the second state by the winning state control means,
Identification information display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information (for example, first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74, display device 16, etc.),
Display control means capable of changing and displaying the identification information on the identification information display means and then stopping the display based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first winning device or the second winning device. Prepare,
The predetermined game state control means, as a variable display of the identification information by the display control means, when the variable display based on the game ball entered the second winning device is performed a predetermined number of times, the predetermined game state On the other hand, even if the number of times of the variable display performed based on the game ball entering the second winning device does not reach the predetermined number, the first A non-predetermined game that is easy to end the predetermined game state and control to the first state by the prize state control means when the variable display based on the game ball entering the winning device is performed a specific number of times. It is possible to shift to the state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the invention of (1), it is possible to shift to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first winning device, and after the end of the specific game state. , It is possible to shift to a predetermined game state in which the game ball can be easily controlled into the second state in which the game ball can easily enter the second winning apparatus. Then, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first prize device or the second prize device, it is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display. It is possible to end the predetermined game state when the variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the winning device is performed a predetermined number of times, while based on the entry of the game ball into the second winning device. Even if the number of times of the variable display performed by the player does not reach the predetermined number, if the variable display based on the game ball entering the first winning device is performed a specific number of times, the predetermined game state The game ball is configured to be able to be shifted to a non-predetermined game state in which it is easy to control the game ball to the first state where it is difficult to enter the second prize device. As a result, for example, even when the player hits the first winning device instead of the second winning device with the game ball, the first winning device receives the game ball. Since it is possible to end the predetermined game state based on that, there is a situation in which the predetermined game state continues for an excessively long time due to the game ball not entering the second winning device. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. In this regard, if a situation occurs in which the predetermined gaming state continues for a longer period than expected by the gaming machine developer, it becomes impossible to realize the game play intended by the developer. There is a concern that it will end up. According to the invention of (1), it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

According to the present invention, desired game playability can be realized.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of a diagram showing an operation button group of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention from the back side. It is an example of a front view showing the external appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of the gaming board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention as seen from diagonally right above. It is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a sub-control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a voice/LED control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining an example of an output signal of a voice and LED control circuit in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a control block diagram for explaining an example of volume control by the host control circuit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic connection block diagram between the built-in relay board and the speaker of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a display control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a schematic connection configuration diagram between the sub-board and the CGROM board (NOR type) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a schematic connection configuration diagram between a sub-board and a CGROM board (NAND type) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a truth table for explaining the operation of the AND circuit provided on the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a truth table for explaining the operation of the bidirectional balance transceiver provided on the sub-board of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a functional flow of a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the probability of the big hit of a pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM of the sub-control circuit. It is a figure which shows the other example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit. It is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM of the sub-control circuit. It is a figure for explaining an outline of drawing control processing in a pachinko gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of power-on processing by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game permission processing. 4A is a flowchart showing an example of setting processing, and FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing another example of setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of backup clear processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game return processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of abnormalities. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a system timer interruption processing by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of switch input detection processing by a main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the starting mouth winning detection processing by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the setting check processing by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control main processing by a main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time reduction processing by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the big hit end interval processing by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern table setting processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of sub control main processing performed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). 6 is a flowchart showing an example of command transmission processing executed by a host control circuit (sub-control circuit). 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a message setting process executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). 7 is a flowchart showing an example of a direct table registration process executed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a flow chart which shows an example of message transmission processing performed by a host control circuit (sub control circuit). It is a table showing an example of a selection rate of the limiter number in the pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 1 for each set value. In the pachinko game machine of the expansion example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation right gate. In the pachinko game machine of the expansion example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation left gate. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control main processing executed by the host control circuit (sub-control circuit). It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interruption processing performed by the host control circuit (sub-control circuit) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example for demonstrating the subdevice input discrimination information created in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the sub device input processing in the pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of sub device input ON edge information (with a repeat function) processing in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 65. It is a figure for notionally explaining the backlight control processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the back light control processing in the pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interruption processing with a modification of backlight control processing in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the backlight control process in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the timer interruption processing which shows the backlight control processing in the pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in the sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the first embodiment of the processing of the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs is there. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in the sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the second embodiment of the processing of the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs is there. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in the sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining the third embodiment of the processing of the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs is there. It is a flow chart which shows an example of RTC acquisition processing in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of animation control main processing in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of composition reproduction control processing in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the sound amplifier check processing in the pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart showing an example of a normal amplifier check process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of amplifier check processing for deep bass in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of a sound amplifier check process for performing a normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (collective) check process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a more preferable form of sound amplifier check processing in a pachinko game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a more preferable form of the amplifier check process for normal use/amplified bass for the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable mode of the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier check processing in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, which is a flowchart continued from FIG. 83. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of a sound request control process when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing a first example of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, is a flowchart showing a second example of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, is a flowchart showing a third example of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing a fourth example of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing a fifth example of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is an attenuation table showing an example of the brightness attenuation value of each color (red, green, blue) according to the light emission intensity of high, medium, and low LED. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a block diagram showing an example of a connection state of an LED port, an LED and a solenoid. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of a data loading process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit. It is a flowchart showing an example of a random number periodic update process in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, (a) a flowchart showing an example of a random number 1 acquisition process, (b) a flowchart showing an example of a random number 2 acquisition process, (c) an example of a random number 3 acquisition process. It is a flowchart shown, and a flowchart which shows an example of (d) random number 4 acquisition processing. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of a random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit for explaining a modification of the sub-random number processing. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of a reception interrupt process executed by the host control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flow chart showing an example of the accessory initial operation process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory control process for an accessory executed by the host control circuit. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the production time command reception time processing. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of processing at the time of receiving a fluctuation start command for an accessory executed by the host control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of an initial position recovery operation process for an accessory executed by the host control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of a demo command reception time process for an accessory executed by the host control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flow chart showing an example of a variation confirmation command reception process for an accessory executed by the host control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention, it is a flowchart showing an example of a hit command reception process for a winning combination executed by the host control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hole menu task performed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when a hole menu screen is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of a hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display process is executed. It is an example of a hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display process is executed. It is a figure which shows an example of the hole menu screen displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device, when a hole menu redisplay process is performed. It is an example of a screen in which the content of the error is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and (a) a screen showing that the backup clear process without the setting change process has been executed, (b) a start mouth abnormal winning error has occurred. Screen showing that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed, and (c) the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed and the start mouth abnormal winning error has both occurred. Is a screen after the notification period indicating that the backup clear process has been executed has elapsed in the state where the backup clear process is performed. It is another example of the hole menu task executed by the host control circuit, and is a flowchart in the case where the host control circuit executes the setting judgment processing for judging the suitability of the set value information. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hole menu process performed by the sub CPU. It is an example of an error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing executed by a sub CPU. 117 is an example of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 117. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial screen of the setting change / confirmation history screen displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when "Page" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the page update screen which can update a page in a setting change / confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example when "clear" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the data clear screen in which each history data was cleared on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, which is an example of an initial screen. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when “display setting” is selected. FIG. 11 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 11 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 11 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen capable of performing page update. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of an operation procedure until a setting change/confirmation history screen capable of confirming a set value is displayed on the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flow chart which shows an example of maintenance processing performed by a sub CPU. It is a figure which shows an example when a maintenance screen is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when a guide initial image is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when a uni-memo initial image is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example when a password request screen is displayed on the display area of a liquid crystal display device. 9 is a flowchart showing a modified example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of authentication processing in Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. In the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, a diagram showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed. is there. 14 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the input password is improper in Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. In the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, the setting change/confirmation history screen for confirming the set value is displayed. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operating procedure until it. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a volume switch that generates a volume password applied to the authentication process in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of an authentication process in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. In the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, a diagram showing an example in which the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed. is there. 14 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change confirmation procedure of setting change/confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the game system which concerns on the modification 3 of the setting change / confirmation history process performed by the sub CPU. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in a pachinko gaming machine that constitutes a gaming system according to Modification 3; It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history process in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on the modification 3, and a server apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen containing a two-dimensional code in the pachinko game machine of the game system which concerns on the modification 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change / confirmation history information in the game system which concerns on the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-dimensional code display screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the password input screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on the modification 3. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting change / confirmation history screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal of the game system which concerns on the modification 3. It is a front view showing a configuration of a game board unit 17 according to a pachinko gaming machine 1 in a second embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the passage route of the game ball which entered into the 2nd big winning opening 540b. It is a side view which shows the schematic structure of the normal electric auditors product unit 400. It is explanatory drawing which shows the control circuit of the pachinko game machine 1 in 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game using the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment of this invention. 6 is a flowchart showing a switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol display time management processing by main CPU101. It is a flow chart which shows the big hit end interval processing by main CPU101. It is a flow chart which shows sub lottery processing by sub CPU201. It is a flowchart which shows the normal game state production|generation effect determination process of step S5001 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal effect determination process of step S5013 shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prefetch process. It is an example of a table referred to for determining a main variation pattern used in the case of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit game state production determination processing of step S5002 shown in FIG. 163. It is a flow chart which shows production setting processing during a round of Step S5053 shown in Drawing 168. It is a flow chart which shows the small hitting game state production decision processing of Step S5003 shown in FIG. 163. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning effect setting processing of step S5063 shown in FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the time saving game state effect determination processing of step S5004 shown in FIG. 163. It is a flowchart which shows the final decisive battle effect determination process of step S5014 shown in FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect screen displayed on the display apparatus 16 which concerns on the pachinko game machine 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view showing another composition of game board unit 17 concerning pachinko game machine 1 in a 2nd embodiment of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
[1. Game machine configuration]
[1-1. Appearance configuration]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing an appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing an appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the operation button group. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention from the back side. FIG. 5: is an example of the front view which shows the external appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7: is an example which shows the exploded perspective view which looked at the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front diagonally right upper direction. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including the first and second special symbol display portions. The directions shown in the drawings are the directions in front view. Therefore, for example, “left” described in the right direction of the drawing is a rear view, and thus “right” in the drawing is “left” in a front view. Similarly, what is described as “right” in the left direction of the drawing is “right” when viewed from the front, for the same reason.

In addition, in the following description, the front and rear sides are defined as the front side and the back side as the front side when viewed from the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1, unless otherwise specified. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface visible when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 4 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a display device 16, and a game board unit 17. The payout unit 18 and the board unit 19 are provided.

The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame body when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launching device 15, the display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front side. To support.

The glass door 13 is attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with the opening 22 and the operation button group 66. A transparent protective glass 23 is disposed in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction when the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and an LED 25 are arranged above the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a device that gives a sound notification, effects, and error notification. The LED 25 is, for example, a light emitting unit for performing notification by light or performing an effect, and is not limited to the LED as long as the light emitting effect can be executed, and may be, for example, a lamp.

As shown in FIG. 3, the operation button group 66 includes a main button 662 and a select button 664. The select button 664 includes an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c, and a right select button 664d. In the following, when referred to as the select button 664, it means the generic name of the up/down/left/right select buttons 664a to 664d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can be operated on a guide menu screen, a hole menu screen, or the like, which will be described later, by using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664. The position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13 and may be provided on the plate unit 14, for example, the upper plate 26.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is arranged below the glass door 13 at the lower front portion of the base door 12.

The upper plate 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 are shot from the launching device 15 toward a game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout opening 61 and an effect button 62. The game balls that are lent out and the game balls that are paid out as prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 26 from the payout opening 61. The effect button 62 is a so-called “CHANCE button”, “push button”, or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding upward based on the result of a special symbol big hit determination described later.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout opening 63. The game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26 are paid out to the lower plate 27 from the payout opening 63.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game balls stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launching device 15 is arranged in the lower right front part of the base door 12 and in the lower right part of the dish unit 14. The firing device 15 includes a panel body 31, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the front surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is configured by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). Thus, in the launching device 15, when the player operates the launching handle 32, the game ball is launched by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

The display device 16 displays a result of a special symbol big hit judgment (hereinafter, the special symbol big hit judgment may be simply referred to as "big hit judgment") and various effect images related to the game, for example, a liquid crystal display. The device is used. In the various effect images displayed in the display area of the display device 16, for example, effect identification patterns (decorative patterns), effect images according to the result of the big hit determination, effect images during the big hit, demonstration effect images, special effects. The variable display (variable display) of the symbols and the like are included. The display device 16 (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device) is arranged substantially at the center of the game board unit 17 (on the inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

In the present embodiment, one display device 16 is provided to display the various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. It may be done.

As shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). A sub control board 40 having, a payout/launch control board 50 having a payout/launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 described later) for controlling the payout/launch of a game ball, and a power supply circuit 338 for supplying power (will be described later). 9)), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9 described later).

In the present embodiment, the sub-control board 40 is configured as a one-board board (a board in which one control LSI or a plurality of LSIs is provided on one board), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of boards can be used. (For example, the host control circuit 2100, the voice/LED control circuit 2200, the display control circuit 2300, etc.) may be included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six stages of "1" to "6" in the present embodiment) in which various data relating to the pachinko game are different. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the value of the set value decreases, the advantage to the player gradually decreases.

In the main board case that accommodates the main control board 30, a setting switch 332 operated when changing a set value, a setting key 328 operated when changing or confirming the set value, and a performance display monitor 334 and an error notification monitor 336 (both of which are shown in FIG. 9 described later) are housed. The performance display monitor 334 displays performance display data and set values, which will be described later, for example. The error notification monitor 336 displays, for example, an error code described later. Note that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case, in consideration of security, the manager of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "game machine manager"). This is to prevent a third party other than () from easily accessing the setting switch 332 or the setting key 328. The term "inside the main board case" means that the setting switch 332 and/or the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened. When there is a gap and the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is exposed by rotating the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the island equipment where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using a key managed by the gaming machine management manager, the gaming machine management is performed. Also included are those who are allowed to access the setting switch 332 or/and the setting key 328.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the shot game balls can roll down is formed.

As shown in FIG. 5 to FIG. 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged in the transparent panel 172 in which the game area 20 in which the shot game balls can be rolled down is formed, and approximately in the center of the game area 20. The center unit 174, the normal electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, the passage gate 49, and the back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 includes an accessory group 1000 such as an upper accessory (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the display device 16. At least one of the accessory groups 1000 or an operating member that constitutes the accessory functions as a performance accessory that can operate based on the result of the special lottery, and is hereinafter referred to as a performance accessory. There is also.

An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a portion where a display area of the display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, and flows downward toward the lower side of the game area 20 while changing the traveling direction.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rails 26. The inner rail 26b is for guiding the shot game ball to the upper part of the game area 20 together with the outer rail 26a. The inner rail 26b is arranged inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the display device 16) and is formed in an arc shape in a front view. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 20 into right and left of the center rail 1742.

The game balls launched by the launching device 15 are divided into right and left of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20. Due to the collision with the provided game nail or the like, it flows downward while changing the traveling direction. The flow-down area of the game ball that has been fired is sorted according to the amount of operation of the firing handle 32. Specifically, when the operation amount of the firing handle 32 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left side region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right side region of the center rail 1742. The hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hitting", and the hitting method of letting the game ball flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hitting". It is possible to be divided by the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting opening 420, the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The special winning opening 540 is provided with a count switch 541 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward and a special winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. In the special electric auditors product 600, the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, so that the game ball can be won (or easily) in the special winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540 is opened. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible (or difficult). The opening drive by the special electric auditors product 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination made when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 described later. If it is done. The result of the jackpot determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 described later is a special symbol in the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74. Is displayed by the stop display mode.

In this specification, when simply referred to as "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

The first starting opening 420 gives a trigger for a big hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball, and also gives a result of the big hit determination displayed on the display device 16 or a first special symbol display portion 73 described later. To give. A first starting port switch 421 is arranged at the first starting port 420 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the first starting opening 420, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are discharged from the payout opening 61. It is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or to the lower plate 27 from the discharge port 63. In addition, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 is performed by left-handed hitting.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged in the lower left portion of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is disposed on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side in front view. Conventionally, many of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below the first starting port 420, for example. However, in recent years, it has been required to make the display device 16 larger, and it is difficult to arrange the display device 16 below the first starting opening 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged in the lower left part of the game area 20.

The second starting opening 440 gives a trigger for a big hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball, and also causes the result of the big hit determination to be displayed on the display device 16 or a second special symbol display portion 74 described later. To give. A second starting port switch 441 is provided at the second starting port 440 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 441, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are output from the payout opening 61. Is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate or from the discharge port 63 to the lower plate 27. The difficulty of winning a prize in the second starting opening 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. In addition, as a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is performed by right-handing.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 that is rotatable rightward, a starting opening solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the starting opening solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ) Is provided. The normal electric auditors product 460 can be moved (driven) between an open state in which the game ball can easily pass and a closed state in which the game ball can hardly pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the starting opening solenoid 4630. Is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball is won in the second starting port 440 or discharged from the out port 450 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. To be done. The opening/closing drive by the normal electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and number of times when the normal symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the normal symbol display portion 71.

The passage gate 49 gives an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition of winning (passing) the game ball. The passage gate 49 is arranged on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. The passage gate 49 is provided with a passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The game ball passes through the passage gate 49 by right-handing.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting opening 420, the special winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower right part of the game area 20. In order to arrange the attacker unit 500 substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20, it has been required in recent years to make the display device 16 larger, and to arrange various members such as the attacker unit 500 in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid the large-sized display device 16.

The special winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the big hit game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The special winning opening 540 is provided with a count switch 541 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins the special winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward and a special winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the special winning opening 540. In the special electric auditors product 600, the shutter 610 is driven by the special winning opening solenoid 620, so that the game ball can be won (or easily) in the special winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540 is opened. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible (or difficult). When the opening drive by the special electric auditors product 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74, and the jackpot gaming state is entered. To be done.

The general winning openings 53, 54, 55 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board unit 17, and the general winning opening 56 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 17. Further, the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 are provided with general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a (see FIG. 9). When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When gaming balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a preset number of gaming balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27). (Is discharged).

In the present embodiment, the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440 have three prize balls, the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 and 56 have ten prize balls, and the large winning opening 540 has The number of prize balls is set to 15 each. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The outlet 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the downflow direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flown in when the launched game ball does not win in any of the starting port and the winning port.

The LED unit 70 is disposed on the lower right side of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 26 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol holding display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, the first special It is provided with a hold display unit for symbols 75 and a hold display unit for second special symbols 76.

The normal symbol display portion 71 displays the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the normal electric auditors product 460 to be in the open state according to the result of the determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display portion 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display in which lighting and extinction are alternately repeated. The combination (display pattern) by turning on and off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is normally displayed as a symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination) is a hit (hereinafter referred to as “ordinary symbol”), the combination of turning on/off the display LEDs 71a and 71b (ordinary symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is opened, and the normal electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting opening The difficulty of winning a game ball in 440 is changed.

The normal symbol hold display section 72 is for displaying the number of executions of the variable display of the held normal symbols (hereinafter, referred to as the "holding number of the variable display of the normal symbols"). The normal symbol hold display section 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol holding display section 72 displays the number of holdings of the variable display of the normal symbol by a combination of turning on and off the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when execution of the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended twice, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 display the result of the determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the game state is determined by the result of the determination (big hit determination).

The first special symbol display portion 73 includes a display LED group 73a including eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which the eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on/off eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a lapse of a predetermined period after starting variable display.

When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 is a big hit, the combination (special symbol) of turning on/off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display portion 73 based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 is referred to as a first special symbol.

The second special symbol display portion 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs variable display upon the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on/off eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a lapse of a predetermined period after starting variable display.

When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is a big hit, the combination (special symbol) of turning on/off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and a game state in which a game ball can be won in the special winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display portion 74 based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In this way, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, is determined. In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination includes a jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 and a jackpot determination based on the winning of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 440. That is, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the round game in which the jackpot 540 is opened is shifted to the jackpot game state in which it is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76, the number of executions of the variable display of the special symbol that has been held (hereinafter, referred to as the "holding number of special symbol variable display") It is something to display. The first special symbol reserved display section 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of held variable display of special symbols by turning on and off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b. The display mode of turning on/off the display LEDs 75a/75b and 76a/76b is the same as the display LEDs 72a/72b of the normal symbol holding display section 72.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls a game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338. For the sake of convenience, the main control circuit 100, the payout/launch control circuit 300, the power supply circuit 338, and the sub-control circuit 200 will be described in order of each of these configurations.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (readable/writable memory), and the like, and is housed in a main board case.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, etc. are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various kinds of processing according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, and can store and retain the written information even in a non-energized state. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which the information of the special symbol game is stored as start memory. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol starting storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as the starting memory, and the upper limit of the first four times The first special symbol starting storage area (4) from the first special symbol starting storage area (1) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the starting memory, is provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol starting storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the starting memory, and the second special for the upper limit of four times. A second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special symbol starting storage area (4) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as a starting memory, is provided.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I/O port 105 sends input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and sends output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 sends a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, quickly supplying power to the main RAM 103 during power interruption (power OFF).

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, in the main control circuit 100, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, The second special symbol hold display section 76, a starting opening solenoid 4630 for driving the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, a special winning opening solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, etc. are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting a signal. In addition, in the main control circuit 100, in order to send data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of big hits, and the like, and a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko gaming machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 323 used is connected.

In addition, the main control circuit 100 includes a first starting opening switch 421, a second starting opening switch 441, a passage gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, a general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a performance display monitor 334, and the like. Are connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the members. Further, the main control circuit 100 is connected with a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power interruption according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key that triggers the execution of a setting change process and a setting confirmation process described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and operated, and is used for changing the set value that has been set in the setting change process described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access.

A payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected with a payout device 350 for paying out game balls, a launching device 15 for shooting game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The payout device 350 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal according to a player's operation on the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

[1-2-2. Discharge/launch control circuit]
When the payout/launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or the loan ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 350, The payout device 350 is controlled to pay out the game balls. Further, the payout/launch control circuit 300 has a firing solenoid (not shown) according to a turning angle (amount of turning) when the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates the handle 32 in a clockwise direction. No.) is supplied with power to control the game ball to be launched.

Further, the command output port 106 is connected to the sub control circuit 200 (relay board 2010). The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control in the display device 16, control regarding sound generated from the speaker 24, control regarding light from the LED 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200 while the sub control circuit 200 does not supply a signal to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control circuit 200 may be configured to be able to transmit a signal to the main control circuit 100.

The payout/launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1. The payout/launch control circuit 300 has a payout device 350 for paying out game balls, a game. A launching device 15 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330, etc. for clearing backup data at the time of power interruption according to an operation of an administrator of the game arcade are connected.

[1-2-3. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required for playing a game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the like. ..

The power switch 35 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 338. The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying the necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, but instead of this, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338. Even in this case, it is preferable that the game machine is housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the game machine manager cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. .. Even in such a case, the inside of the predetermined case means that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed without opening the case, and the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 of the case correspond to each other. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is rotated from the island equipment where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed by using a key managed by the gaming machine management officer, the back surface is exposed , The setting manager 332 can also access the setting switch 332 or/and the setting key 328.

Here, the display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a state other than the big hit game state with respect to the launch of a predetermined number (eg, 60000 shots) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

The payout/launch control circuit 300 totals the base values based on the past game history, and stores the totalized result in a specific work area, which will be described later, of the work areas of the main RAM 103. Although this specific work area will be described later, it is an area in which data is not cleared even if the backup clear processing described later is performed. The base values may be totaled based on a predetermined operation, or the base values may be constantly displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by totaling. ..

The payout/launch control circuit 300 is a total history totalizing means for totalizing all base values based on the total game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko game machine 1 is manufactured) to the present, It is provided with a set value-based history totalizing means for executing a total of set value-based base values based on a past game history for each set value.

For example, when the display operation of all the base values is performed by the gaming machine manager or the like, the all history totaling means performs the totalization of all the base values. All the base values totaled by the total history totaling means are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. Further, when the display operation of the set value-based base values is performed, the set value-based history totalizing means executes the totalization of the set value-based base values. The base value-based base value totaled by the set-value-based history totalizing means is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

The set value-based history totalizing means can also total only the base values for arbitrary set values in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base values for the set setting values but also the base values for other setting values other than the set setting values can be aggregated. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values for other setting values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting changing process described later.

In addition, the main CPU 101, for example, in accordance with an operation by a gaming machine manager or the like, both the total base value totaled by all history totaling means and the set value base value totaled by setting value history totaling means Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of them can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base values of the specific set values on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. Further, both the total base value and the base value for each set value may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all the set values in a list, or when displaying both the all base values and the base values for each set value in a list, both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means are used. It may be displayed.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes all history totalizing means and set value-based history totaling means, but in addition to these or instead of the set value-based history totaling means, from the time when the setting change processing described below is executed to the present A post-setting-change history totaling means for totaling the base values after the setting change based on the game history may be provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the base value after the setting change.

In this way, by displaying all or a part of all the base values and the base value for each set value or/and the base value for each set value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game It is possible to easily confirm the information based on the past game history in the machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, the payout is made by entering a special electric winning object (large winning hole) or a normal electric winning object with respect to the total payout amount of game balls. You may make it display the ratio of the number of game balls issued (payout by a prize). Further, it may be a display for the total number of shots, and may further be a display for the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric auditors product (large winning hole). Moreover, you may display them according to setting.

Further, the error notification monitor 336 displays an error code described later. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may also display a setting change code indicating that the setting change processing described later is being performed, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation processing is being performed later, and the like. it can. During the setting change, the special symbol display device may display a symbol (setting change symbol) which is not normally displayed.

[1-2-4. Sub control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the sub control circuit 200 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing the circuit configuration inside the sub control circuit 200 and the connection relationship between the sub control circuit 200 and its various peripheral devices.

The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect or the like according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100, and as shown in FIG. 10, the relay board 2010 and the sub board 2020 (first board). ), a control ROM substrate 2030, and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) substrate 2040 (second substrate). The sub-board 2020 is connected to the relay board 2010, the control ROM board 2030, and the CGROM board 2040. In the sub-control circuit 200, the sub-board 2020 and various ROM boards (control ROM board 2030 and CGROM board 2040) are connected via a board-to-board connector (not shown).

As shown in FIG. 9, the sub-control circuit 200 includes an effect button switch 621 that is turned on/off by operating the effect button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned on/off by operating the main button 662, and each select. The select button switches 6641a to 6641d that are turned on/off by operating the buttons 664a to 664d and the accessory detection sensor group 1002 that detects that the accessory group 1000 is at the initial position are connected, but in FIG. These are not shown. In addition, actually, select button switches 6641a to 6641d corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d are provided respectively, but in FIG. 9, these are collectively shown as a select button switch 6641 for convenience. Further, the accessory detection sensor group 1002 is provided by the number of motors provided corresponding to the movable accessory.

The relay board 2010 is a relay board for receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 and transmitting the received command to the sub-board 2020.

As the receiving means for receiving the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, when the sub control board is the one-board board described above, the sub control board itself may have the function as the receiving means. However, the command may be eventually received via the relay board or the like.

Further, when the sub-control board is composed of a plurality of boards, any board may include the receiving means, and even in this case, it is understood that the sub-control board has the receiving means. can do. Also in this case, even when the sub-control board composed of a plurality of boards receives a command via the relay board, etc., as a result, one of the boards that constitutes the sub-control board has information related to the command. It is possible to express that the sub-control board has received the command if it recognizes.

The sub-board 2020 is provided with a host control circuit 2100, a sound/LED control circuit 2200, a display control circuit 2300, an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic RAM) 250, and a built-in relay board 2600. Of these, at least the host control circuit 2100, the audio/LED control circuit 2200, and the display control circuit 2300 are configured as one board substrate.

The host control circuit 2100 is a circuit that controls the operation of the entire sub control circuit 200 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100, and includes a CPU processor, a sub work RAM 2100a, an SRAM 2100b, an RTC (real time clock), It is configured to include a watchdog timer. The host control circuit 2100 is connected to the audio/LED control circuit 2200, the display control circuit 2300, and the built-in relay board 2600 in the sub-board 2020. The host control circuit 2100 is also connected to the control ROM board 2030.

Further, the host control circuit 2100 has a sub-work RAM 2100a and an SRAM (Static RAM) 210b. The sub-work RAM 2100a is a storage device that acts as a work temporary storage area when the host control circuit 2100 executes various processes, and various flags and variables necessary when the host control circuit 2100 executes various processes. The value of is memorized. The RAM 2100b is a storage device that backs up predetermined data in the subwork RAM 2100a. Although the RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any recording medium may be used as the temporary storage area as long as it is a readable/writable storage medium. ..

The voice/LED control circuit 2200 is connected to the speaker 24 and the lamp group 25 via the built-in relay board 2600, and based on a control signal (sound request and LED request described later) input from the host control circuit 2100, the speaker 24. Is a circuit for controlling the sound reproduction operation by the and the light emission operation by the lamp group 25. Therefore, functionally, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 has a voice controller 2200a and a lamp controller 2200b. The voice controller 2200a and lamp controller 2200b are substantially included in the sound lamp control module 2260 described below. The internal configuration of the voice/LED control circuit 2200 will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings.

In this embodiment, when the control signal and data (for example, LED data described later) output from the voice/LED control circuit 2200 is transmitted to the lamp group 25 via the built-in relay board 2600, the voice/LED Communication between the control circuit 2200 and the lamp group 25 is performed by an SPI (Serial Periperal Interface) communication method (a type of serial communication method). Further, in the present embodiment, the lamp group 25 includes one or more LEDs and one or more LED drivers for controlling each LED.

The display control circuit 2300 is connected to the display device 16 and displays an image (decorative pattern image, background image, effect image, etc.) relating to the effect based on a control signal (drawing request) input from the host control circuit 2100. It is a circuit for controlling various processing operations at the time of displaying. The display control circuit 2300 has a display controller (a first display controller 2380 and a second display controller 2390 described later) and a built-in VRAM (Video RAM) 237.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is connected to the SDRAM 2500 in the sub-board 2020. Further, the display control circuit 2300 is connected to the CGROM board 2040. The display controller in the display control circuit 2300 is directly connected to the display device 16 without the relay board. The internal configuration of the display control circuit 2300 will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings.

The SDRAM 2500 is composed of a DDR2 (Double-Date Rate 2) SDRAM. Further, the SDRAM 2500 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing various image data in the drawing control process of the image (moving image and still image) displayed by the display device 16. Specifically, for example, the SDRAM 2500 is provided with a texture buffer, a movie buffer, a blend buffer, two frame buffers (first frame buffer and second frame buffer), a motion buffer, and the like.

The built-in relay board 2600 receives various signals and various data output from the host control circuit 2100 and the sound/LED control circuit 2200, and receives the various signals and various data received by the speaker 24, the lamp group 25, and the accessory group 1000. It is a relay board for transmitting to.

Further, the built-in relay board 2600 has an I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) controller 2610 and a digital audio power amplifier 2620 (amplifying means). In the present embodiment, an example in which the I2C controller 2610 and the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are mounted on the same relay board is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the relay board on which the I2C controller 2610 is mounted may be mounted on a digital audio board. It may be provided separately from the relay board on which the power amplifier 2620 is mounted.

The I2C controller 2610 is connected to the host control circuit 2100 and the motor controller 2700 of the accessory group 1000. That is, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the accessory group 1000 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700. Then, the control signal and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 2100 are input to the accessory group 1000 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700.

In this embodiment, the communication between the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 is performed by the I2C communication method (a kind of serial communication method). Further, in the present embodiment, the accessory group 1000 includes one or more motors, and the motor controller 2700 includes one or more motor drivers for driving each motor. Although FIG. 10 shows an example in which only one accessory group 1000 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of accessory groups 1000 may be provided.

In addition, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 does not directly use the motor controller 2700 to directly operate the motor of the accessory or the operating member of the accessory of the accessory group 1000. It may be configured to be driven, or a control circuit for controlling the motor may be separately provided. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, one control circuit controls a plurality of motor drivers (motors), but the present invention is not limited to this. In this embodiment, one or more (one or more) control circuits may control one or more (one or more) motors (motor drivers), or one or more (one or more) control circuits may be used. The configuration may be such that one motor (motor driver) is controlled, or one motor (motor driver) is controlled by one control circuit.

Further, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is connected to the audio/LED control circuit 2200 and the speaker 24. That is, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 is connected to the speaker 24 via the digital audio power amplifier 2620. Therefore, the audio signal output from the audio/LED control circuit 2200 is input to the speaker 24 via the digital audio power amplifier 2620.

A sub-main ROM 2050 is provided on the control ROM substrate 2030. The sub-main ROM 2050 stores various programs for controlling the staging operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the host control circuit 2100 and various data tables (see, for example, FIGS. 21 to 28 described later). The host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100) executes various processes according to the program stored in the sub-main ROM 2050.

In the present embodiment, the sub-main ROM 2050 is applied as the storage means for storing the programs used in the host control circuit 2100 and various tables, but the present invention is not limited to this. As such a storage means, a storage medium of another mode may be used as long as it is a computer-readable storage medium including a control means, and for example, a hard disk device, a CD-ROM and a DVD-ROM, a ROM cartridge, or the like. Other storage media may be applied. Moreover, each of the programs may be recorded in different storage media. Further, the program may be recorded in a recording medium in advance, or may be downloaded from the outside or the like after the power is turned on and recorded in the sub-main ROM 2050.

A CGROM 2060 is provided on the CGROM substrate 2040. The CGROM 2060 is composed of a NOR type or NAND type flash memory. Further, the CGROM 2060 stores, for example, image data displayed on the display device 16, audio data reproduced by the speaker 24 (also referred to as sound data in this specification), and the like. At this time, various data are compressed (encoded) and stored in the CGROM 2060, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various data may be stored in the CGROM 2060 without being compressed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which various ROM boards (control ROM board 2030 and CGROM board 2040) and sub-board 2020 are connected by the board-to-board connector in sub-control circuit 200 has been described. The invention is not limited to this. For example, various ROMs may be directly inserted into ports such as sockets provided on the sub-board 2020, and the sub-board 2020 may be configured by a single board having the ROM function or the ROM itself. That is, the sub-board 2020 and various ROMs may be integrally configured. Further, when the sub-board 2020 is configured by one board having the ROM function or having the ROM itself, the sub-control circuit 200 uses the sub-board according to the type of the memory used as the CGROM. A switching means for physically or electrically switching the circuit on the substrate or a switching means for switching the information of the circuit on the sub-board to be used depending on the type of memory may be provided.

Further, in the present embodiment, the relationship of data communication speed between each of the various storage means (sub-main ROM 2050, CGROM 2060, built-in VRAM 2370, SDRAM 2500) and the corresponding control circuit is as follows. ROM2050≈CGROM2060. That is, in this embodiment, the communication speed between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the various circuits in the display control circuit 2300 is the fastest, and then the communication speed between the SDRAM 2500 and the display control circuit 2300 is the fastest. Then, the communication speed between the sub-main ROM 2050 and the host control circuit 2100 and the communication speed between the CGROM 2060 and the display control circuit 2300 are the slowest. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit can be set arbitrarily. For example, the magnitude relationship of the communication speed between each of the various storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different from that in the present embodiment, or the communication speed between each storage means and the corresponding control circuit may be different. May all be the same.

Here, a configuration that can be taken by the various storage means described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the storage unit of information about image data (compressed (encoded) image data) stores information about transparency data (alpha table described below) that can be used when setting transparency for image data. The configuration example that is the same as the storage means (CGROM 2060) has been described. That is, the configuration example in which the “first information storage means” is physically the same as the “second information storage means” has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the "first information storage means" may be configured by a storage means (storage medium) that is physically different from the "second information storage means".

Further, the "information storage means" referred to in the present specification means not only the storage means such as the CGROM 2060 but also a table stored in the storage means, a data storage area in the storage means, or the like. Good. Therefore, for example, the “first information storage means” and the “second information storage means” may be different data storage areas in the same storage means, or may be different tables. Further, it may be stored in different register addresses. That is, "different information storage means" in the present specification means not only physically different storage means (storage medium) but also physically the same storage means (for example, ROM, RAM, etc.). However, it is meant to include the case where the data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) in the storage means are different.

Note that the meaning of the “information storage unit” in the present specification described above is also applicable to the “third information storage unit” (SDRAM 2500) and “fourth information storage unit” (built-in VRAM 2370) described above. Therefore, for example, the "first information storage means" to the "fourth information storage means" may be physically configured by different storage means (storage media), or "first information storage means" to The “fourth information storage means” may be configured with different data areas (storage areas distinguished by addresses, registers, tables, structures, etc.) in one storage means.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the “first information storage unit” and the “second information storage unit” are configured by different data areas in one storage unit (CGROM 2060), and the “third information storage unit” is formed. , A storage means (SDRAM 2500) physically different from the storage means (CGROM 2060) including the “first information storage means” and the “second information storage means”, and the “fourth information storage means” is A description will be given of an example in which a storage unit (CGROM 2060) including “1 information storage unit” and “second information storage unit” and a storage unit (built-in VRAM 2370) physically different from the “third information storage unit” (SDRAM 2500) are included. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Which of the data area and the storage means constitutes the "information storage means", and how is the combination of the "information storage means" defined as the data area and the "information storage means" defined as the storage means? It can be set appropriately depending on the configuration (number, type, etc.) of the storage means provided in the gaming machine, for example. For example, in the present embodiment, the "first information storage means" to the "third information storage means" are configured with different data areas in one storage means, and the "fourth information storage means" is referred to as the "fourth information storage means". It may be configured by a storage means physically different from the storage means including "1 information storage means" to "third information storage means".

[1-2-5. Voice/LED control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the voice/LED control circuit 2200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the internal circuit configuration of the voice/LED control circuit 2200 and the connection relationship between the voice/LED control circuit 2200 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit units. Note that, in FIG. 11, for simplification of description, illustration of a relay board or the like provided between the audio/LED control circuit 2200 and various peripheral devices and circuit units is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 includes an LSI (Large-Scale Integration) interface 2210, a memory interface 2220, a digital audio interface 2230, a peripheral interface 2240, a command register 2250, and a sound lamp. It includes a control module 2260, a main generator 2270, and a multi-effector 2280. The connection relation of each unit in the voice/LED control circuit 2200 is as follows.

In the sound/LED control circuit 2200, the sound/lamp control module 2260 is connected to the memory interface 2220, the peripheral interface 2240, the command register 2250, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effector 2280. The command register 2250 is connected to the LSI interface 2210 in addition to the sound/lamp control module 2260. Further, the main generator 2270 is connected to the memory interface 2220 and the multi-effector 2280 in addition to the sound/lamp control module 2260. Further, the multi-effector 2280 is connected to the memory interface 2220 and the digital audio interface 2230 in addition to the sound/lamp control module 2260 and the main generator 2270.

Next, the configuration of each unit in the voice/LED control circuit 2200 will be described.

The LSI interface 2210 is an interface circuit used when inputting/outputting control signals and the like (for example, sound request, LED request, etc.) between the host control circuit 2100 and the command register 2250. That is, the command register 2250 is connected to the host control circuit 2100 via the LSI interface 2210.

The memory interface 2220 is an interface circuit used when inputting/outputting audio data and the like between the sub-main ROM 2050 and each of the sound/lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effector 2280.

The digital audio interface 2230 is an interface circuit used when outputting a sound signal or the like from the multi-effector 2280 to the speaker 24. The digital audio interface 2230 also outputs an audio input signal to the multi-effector 2280.

The peripheral interface 2240 is an interface circuit used when inputting/outputting a lamp signal or the like (LED data or the like described later) between the lamp group 25 and the sound/lamp control module 2260. Further, the peripheral interface 2240 is provided with three physical systems as physical systems (SPI channels) when outputting data to the LED drivers included in the lamp group 25. In this embodiment, as described later, two physical systems (physical system 0 (SPI channel 0) and physical system 1 (SPI channel 1)) are used.

The command register 2250 is composed of a large number of register groups (for example, a large number of voice control registers) accessed by the host control circuit 2100. The command register 2250 sets the function control of the sound/lamp control module 2260, the main generator 2270, and the multi-effector 2280. The command register 2250 also sets the operating conditions of each interface (LSI interface 2210, memory interface 2220, digital audio interface 2230, peripheral interface 2240).

An IC (Integrated Circuit) is mounted on each register forming the command register 2250, and each register is formed by a memory chip whose operation is stabilized by memory access control. When a register having such a configuration is used, the load on the signal bus to which each register is connected is reduced. Therefore, by increasing the number of memory chips (registers), the capacity per memory module ( The capacity of the command register 2250) can be increased.

The sound/lamp control module 2260 centrally controls the sound reproduction operation and the like, and controls the operation of each component (each block) in the sound/LED control circuit 2200 according to the setting contents of the command register 2250. .. As shown in FIG. 11, the sound/lamp control module 2260 has a simple access controller 2260a, a sequencer 2260b, a lamp control unit 2260c, and a peripheral control unit 2260d.

The simple access controller 2260a is a circuit unit that collectively processes commands. The sequencer 2260b has various sequencers (automatic reproduction function section) for controlling automatic reproduction operations such as lighting of a lamp and sound. Then, each sequencer controls various operations in accordance with a timer and step conditions (for example, conditions set for each step process during sequence reproduction of LED animation, voice, etc., which will be described later).

The lamp control unit 2260c calculates the brightness value to be set in all channels (8 channels) to which LED data described later can be set, and transmits the calculation result to the outside (LED driver). Further, the peripheral control unit 2260d performs physical transmission control when transmitting the data of the calculation result output from the lamp control unit 2260c to the LED driver.

The main generator 2270 is a circuit unit that generates an audio signal. Specifically, the main generator 2270 acquires predetermined audio data stored in the CGROM 2060 based on the control signal input from the sound/lamp control module 2260, and outputs the acquired audio data to the predetermined audio signal. Convert to. The main generator 2270 is divided into reproduction channels CH1 to CH32, a decoder 2270a for reproducing compressed data, a channel volume 2270b (V1 to V4) for adjusting sound volume, and a channel mix unit 2270c for mixing reproduced sound from the decoder 2270a. And a remix unit 2270d that executes a final mixing operation.

The multi-effector 2280 has a mixer for synthesizing a sound signal input from the main generator 2270 and an audio input signal input from the digital audio interface 2230, and various effectors for giving various sound effects to sound. Then, the multi-effector 2280 outputs the audio signal synthesized by the mixer, the output signal from the effector, etc. to the speaker 24 via the digital audio interface 2230.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining output signals of the voice/LED control circuit. The CGROM 2060 stores a maximum of 8192 types of sequence code groups and a maximum of 8192 types of SAC data groups. Sequence code and SAC data, respectively, have been identified in the 13 bit long sequence code number or SAC number, a relationship of 8192 ^{= 2 13.}

In the case of the present embodiment, 16 sequences (SQ0 to SQ15) operating in parallel are provided as the sequencer 2260b, and 4 sequences (SAC0 to SAC3) operating in parallel are provided as the simple accelerator controller 2260a. There is. Corresponding to this configuration, the command register 2250 is provided with a voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer (SQ0 to SQ15) and a voice control register RGj1 for controlling the SAC (SAC0 to SAC3).

Then, when the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor writes the SAC number and its accompanying information into a predetermined voice control register RGj1 for SAC control based on the voice command transmission operation, the corresponding simple The access controller 2260a starts the function, and the simple access controller 2260a writes the group of setting data specified by the SAC number into the group of voice control registers designated by the SAC data. In this embodiment, the complicated setting operation can be completed by transmitting one SAC number and its associated information.

On the other hand, the host control circuit 2100 composed of the CPU processor, based on the voice command transmission operation, stores the sequence code number and its associated information in a predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer 2260b (SQ0 to SQ7). When written, the corresponding sequencer SQi starts its function and writes the group of setting data specified by the sequence code into the group of voice control registers designated by the sequence code.

Here, in a predetermined voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer (SQ0 to SQ7), a plurality of (up to eight) sequence code numbers for any sequencer SQi and loop information for the effect of each sequence code number. You can fill in. Therefore, for example, when n+1 sequence code numbers (X0, X1,..., Xn) are designated for the sequencer SQi, the setting operation of the sequence code number X0 → the setting operation of the sequence code number X1. →... The setting operation of the sequence code number Xn is sequentially executed, and the voice effect corresponding to the setting operation is executed.

In addition, loop information such as the number of repetitions can be specified for each sequence code number, so that after repeating the audio effect specified by the sequence code number a predetermined number of times, the audio effect specified by the next sequence code number is added. Can be migrated.

As described above, there are various kinds of data to be set in the sequencer SQi, and it is necessary to appropriately set these sequence code numbers and associated data in the voice control register RGj2 for controlling the sequencer. Therefore, in this embodiment, the entire sequence code number and associated data is divided in 1-byte units, and the divided 1-byte data and the register address of the sequencer control register RGj2 in which this 1-byte data is to be set are stored. A group of SAC data, which is a set, is secured in the CGROM 2060 (hereinafter, this is referred to as sequencer starting SAC data).

Then, the host control circuit 2100 activates the simple access controller 2260a by designating a predetermined SAC number in the voice control register RGj1 for SAC control. Here, it goes without saying that the SAC number specifies the SAC data for activating the sequencer. Then, based on the operation of the SAC (Simple Access Controller), necessary data is expanded in the sequencer control register RGj2. Therefore, the setting operation of the activation data of the sequencers SQ0 to SQ15 is easy.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 12, a plurality of operation units (sequence steps) separated by a step end code (FFFEH) are described in a group of sequence codes specified by one sequence code number. After all, after executing all the plurality of sequence steps specified by one sequence code number, the plurality of sequence steps specified by the next sequence code number are executed.

Since the waiting time can be set in each sequencer, the first sequence step (writing operation of a group of setting data) is started after the waiting time pointed out by the host control circuit 2100 configured by the CPU processor. When the step end code (FFFEH) is executed, after the waiting time, the next set of setting data is written in the set of voice control registers. As the standby time, a single time information can be set for each sequencer (SQ0 to SQ7). For example, in the preceding sequence step, the standby time applied to the succeeding sequence step is set. By doing so, the waiting time for each sequence step can be arbitrarily set.

Further, continuing the description of the internal configuration of the audio/LED control circuit 2200, as shown in FIG. 11, the output signals (mix L0, mix R0, mix L1, mix R1, mix SUB0, 6) of the channel mix unit 2270c are mixed. In the multi-effector 2280, the mixed SUB1) is subjected to digital filter processing based on the operation parameter defined in a predetermined audio control register of the command register 2250, and then is supplied to the total volume 2290 (TV0 to TV3) to obtain the total volume value. Amplified based on TV.

The total volume value TV is defined by the operation parameter written in the corresponding audio control register. As described above, this operation parameter is, in principle, set switch (hardware) operated by the staff in this embodiment. Wear switch). However, when the player operates the volume switch (screen operation) during the game operation (while waiting for the audio effect), the total volume TV is defined (changed) based on the set value. When the player operates the volume switch, the channel volume 2270b (V1 to V4) is defined (changed) instead of or in addition to defining the total volume TV based on the set value. You can

[1-2-5-1. Speaker volume control]
Next, volume control of each speaker 24 executed by the host control circuit 2100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a control block diagram for explaining an example of volume control by the host control circuit.

Sounds such as game sounds output from the speakers 24 (L0/R0/L1/R1, SUB0, SUB1) are output to all channels of the sound signals of the total volume TV0 to 3 and individual signals of all channels. The volume is controlled by a volume transition operation for gradually changing the volume value of the audio signal by multiplying the audio signal for each reproduction channel output to the channel.

The "audio signal" has volume information (for example, information such as wattage) and can be simply called "volume". For example, in this specification, the “audio signal for each reproduction channel” may be referred to as the “volume for each reproduction channel”.

The audio signals of the total volume TV 0 to 3 are output by the total value of the audio signal output by the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch and the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen, and the debug volume control 2830 during debugging. It is specified by multiplying with the audio signal. The host control circuit 2100 that executes the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch, the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen, and the debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging corresponds to the “first volume control means” of the present invention.

The volume of each reproduction channel is obtained by multiplying the audio signal of the primary volume and the audio signal of the secondary volume. The audio signal of the primary volume is the audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840 affected by the volume adjustment and the audio signal output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850 not affected by the volume adjustment. It is specified by the total value. In the first reproduction channel primary control 2840, control for changing the volume of a normal game sound (that is, a voice signal (hereinafter the same)) is performed based on, for example, an operation for changing the volume performed by a player or the like. Be seen. The second reproduction channel primary control 2850 is a control for outputting a specific game sound (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity) at a constant volume regardless of whether or not an operation for changing the volume is performed. Is done. This constant volume may always be the maximum volume. In this way, in the second reproduction channel primary control 2850 which is not affected by the volume adjustment, the specific game sound is controlled to be output at a constant volume, so that the specific reproduction channel is not specified but specified only in the specific reproduction channel. It is possible to execute the control for keeping the volume of the game sound of. The audio signal of the secondary volume is the volume incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number, and is output by the volume controls 2860, 2870, 2880. The host control circuit 2100 for executing the first reproduction channel primary control 2840, the second reproduction channel primary control 2850, and the volume controls 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the audio data is the "second volume" of the present invention. It corresponds to "control means".

In this way, the sound output from each speaker 24 (L0/R0/L1/R1, SUB0, SUB1) includes the volume of the total volume TV0 to 3 and the volume and the secondary volume of the primary volume which is the volume of each reproduction channel. Since the volume is defined by being multiplied by the volume of the volume, it is possible to give variety to the volume of the game sound. In particular, since the volume of the total volume TV0 to 3 is also defined by the volume output by the debug volume control 2830 during debugging, the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is at the time of debugging, and at the time of debugging. It is possible to improve the work efficiency of.

Regarding the volume of the normal game sound, the volume can be changed based on the operation of changing the volume by a player or the like, but a specific sound such as an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity can be changed. Regarding the game sound, a constant volume is output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850 regardless of whether or not an operation for changing the volume is performed. Therefore, it is not possible to hide the occurrence of an error or an illegal act, and it is possible to improve security.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the volume control 2810 by the hardware switch has, for example, three stages of large, medium, and small. Further, the user volume control 2820 by the volume setting screen has seven stages, and [small]=[1], [medium]=“4”, and [large]=“7” in association with the hardware switch.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for the specific sound such as the error sound, the volume can be maintained only by the control by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850, and therefore the specific sound It becomes possible to easily perform the volume control such that the volume is maintained and the volume of other normal sounds is changed according to the volume adjustment. The processing by the host control circuit 2100 when the volume adjustment is performed will be described later with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90.

[1-2-5-2. Connection configuration between digital audio power amplifier and speaker]
Next, a connection configuration between the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and its peripheral circuit provided in the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a connection configuration diagram between the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24. Note that FIG. 14 shows a state in which the speaker 24 is not connected to the built-in relay board 2600 in order to clarify the configuration of the connection portion.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the speaker box 24a provided with the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 via the harness 3000.

The built-in relay board 2600 includes a digital audio power amplifier 2620, an LC circuit 2630, a connection terminal group 2640 including four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal), two resistors 2650 and 2660, and a capacitor. 2670 and a NOT circuit (logic circuit) 2680.

The digital audio power amplifier 2620 amplifies the input audio signal (audio data), outputs the amplified audio signal to the speaker 24, and drives the speaker 24. The LC circuit 2630 is composed of a resonance circuit including a coil and a capacitor. Further, the NOT circuit 2680 is a logic circuit which inverts the level of the input signal and outputs it.

A clock input terminal (MCK) and a data input terminal (SDATA) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected to the audio/LED control circuit 2200. The clock signal (master clock signal) output from the audio/LED control circuit 2200 is input to the clock input terminal (MCK) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620, and the audio/LED is input to the data input terminal (SDATA). The audio signal (audio data) output from the control circuit 2200 is input.

The first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected to the first connection terminal in the connection terminal group 2640 of the built-in relay board 2600 via the LC circuit 2630, respectively. It is connected to the second connection terminal. In the present embodiment, an example in which two output terminals of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be appropriately changed according to, for example, the function and specifications of the speaker 24. You can

Furthermore, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has a mute terminal (MUTE: audio output control terminal). The digital audio power amplifier 2620 outputs the audio signals from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) when the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is LOW level. It has a function of stopping the output or putting these output terminals in a state of being grounded via a high resistance (hereinafter referred to as a mute function). That is, when the level of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal is the LOW level, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 outputs from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) to the first relay board 2600. It has a function of generating a state in which the output of the audio signal to the connection terminal and the second connection terminal is stopped.

On the other hand, when the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal applied to the mute terminal (MUTE) is the HIGH level, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 has the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2). Output an audio signal from.

The third connection terminal in the connection terminal group 2640 of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the input terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 via the resistor 2660. The output terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 is connected to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620. The signal wiring between the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the resistor 2660 is connected to the power supply voltage (+5V) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600 via the resistor 2650. The signal wiring between the input terminal of the NOT circuit 2680 and the resistor 2660 is connected (grounded) to the ground (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600 via the capacitor 2670. Further, the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected to the ground (GND) terminal.

As shown in FIG. 14, the speaker 24 is attached to a speaker box 24a composed of a wooden frame. Further, the speaker box 24a is provided with a connection terminal group 24b including four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal). Then, the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected to the speaker 24 via signal wiring. The third connection terminal (specific connection terminal) of the speaker box 24a is electrically connected to the fourth connection terminal by the signal wiring W1.

As shown in FIG. 14, the harness 3000 is formed by bundling four signal wires. Then, one of the four connection terminals (first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings is connected to each of the first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600. On the other hand, the other four connection terminals (fifth connection terminal to eighth connection terminal) of the four signal wirings are respectively connected to the first connection terminal to fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a. That is, the first connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the first connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by the signal wiring between the first connection terminal and the fifth connection terminal in the harness 3000, and the built-in relay board 2600. The second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a and the second connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the second connection terminal and the sixth connection terminal in the harness 3000. Further, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 and the third connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the third connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the harness 3000, and the built-in relay board 2600 is provided. The fourth connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a are connected by signal wiring between the fourth connection terminal and the eighth connection terminal in the harness 3000. As a result, the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 via the harness 3000.

Note that the number of signal wirings included in the harness 3000 is not limited to four, and may be changed as appropriate according to the specifications of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and the speaker 24, the connection configuration between the two, and the like. In the harness 3000, at least a signal wiring for connecting the output terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 and the speaker 24, and a signal wiring for grounding the mute terminal of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 via the speaker box 24a. Should be included.

When the built-in relay board 2600 and the speaker 24 are connected via the harness 3000 as described above, the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 are connected via the harness 3000. Connected to the speaker 24. The mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is grounded via the NOT circuit 2680, the harness 3000, and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a.

As a result, when the speaker 24 is connected to the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620) via the harness 3000, a LOW level voltage signal is input to the NOT circuit 2680, so the digital audio power amplifier 2620 The level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) becomes high level. In this case, an audio signal is output from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 to the speaker 24.

On the other hand, when the speaker 24 is not connected to the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620), the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is opened. In this case, since the power supply voltage (+5V) is input to the NOT circuit 2680, the level (amplitude value) of the voltage signal input to the mute terminal (MUTE) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 becomes LOW level, and the digital audio power amplifier The above described mute function of 2620 is activated.

That is, when the speaker 24 is separated from the built-in relay board 2600 (digital audio power amplifier 2620), the built-in relay board 2600 is output from the first output terminal (OUTM1) and the second output terminal (OUTM2) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620. A state is generated in which the output of the audio signal to the first connection terminal and the second connection terminal is stopped. As a result, the occurrence of a resonance phenomenon between the digital audio power amplifier 2620 (output terminal) and the first and second connection terminals of the built-in relay board 2600 is suppressed, and a malfunction such as a failure of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is prevented. Can be prevented.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mute function of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be activated regardless of the software control by the host control circuit 2100 and the audio/LED control circuit 2200. Therefore, for example, even if the host control circuit 2100 and the voice/LED control circuit 2200 recognize that the output stop control of the voice signal is being performed in a situation where the speaker 24 is detached from the built-in relay board 2600, the program control In the case where a sound signal is erroneously output due to a bug (defect), or in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a structure in which the game board cannot be replaced unless the speaker 24 is removed from the harness 3000, after the game board is replaced. Even if a situation occurs in which the door is closed by mistake and the voice output is started without connecting the speaker 24 and the harness 3000, the above-described mute function of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 operates in terms of hardware. In this case, the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be reliably protected, and the safety of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is connected via the harness 3000 and the signal wiring W1 between the third connection terminal and the fourth connection terminal of the speaker box 24a, It is connected to a ground (GND) terminal provided in the built-in relay board 2600. In such a configuration, when the signal level of the third connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is LOW, is this factor because the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600 is grounded? Since it can be determined by measuring the signal level of the fourth connection terminal of the built-in relay board 2600, the digital output operation from the digital audio power amplifier 2620 can be managed more accurately.

[1-2-6. Display control circuit]
Next, the internal configuration of the display control circuit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration inside the display control circuit 2300 and a connection relationship between the display control circuit 2300 and various peripheral devices and peripheral circuit portions thereof.

As shown in FIG. 15, the display control circuit 2300 includes a memory controller 2310, a command memory 2320, a command parser 2330, a moving picture decoder 2340, a still picture decoder 2350, an SDRAM controller 2360, a built-in VRAM 2370, and a first VRAM 2370. A display controller 2380, a second display controller 2390, a 3D (Dimension) geometry engine 2400, and a rendering engine 2410 are provided. The connection relation of each part in the display control circuit 2300 and the connection relation between the display control circuit 2300 and its various peripheral devices and peripheral circuits are as follows.

In the display control circuit 2300, the memory controller 2310 is connected to the command parser 2330, the moving image decoder 2340, and the still image decoder 2350. The command parser 2330 is connected to the command memory 2320, the moving image decoder 2340, the still image decoder 2350, and the 3D geometry engine 2400 in addition to the memory controller 2310. The video decoder 2340 is connected to the SDRAM controller 2360 in addition to the memory controller 2310 and the command parser 2330. The still image decoder 2350 is connected to the built-in VRAM 2370 in addition to the memory controller 2310 and the command parser 2330.

In addition, in the display control circuit 2300, the SDRAM controller 2360 is connected to the built-in VRAM 2370, the first display controller 2380, and the second display controller 2390 in addition to the moving image decoder 2340. The built-in VRAM 2370 is connected to the first display controller 2380, the second display controller 2390, and the rendering engine 2410 in addition to the still image decoder 2350 and the SDRAM controller 2360. Further, the 3D geometry engine 2400 is connected to the rendering engine 2410 in addition to the command parser 2330.

The SDRAM 2500 is connected to the memory controller 2310 and the SDRAM controller 2360 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the CGROM substrate 2040 is connected to the memory controller 2310 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the host control circuit 2100 is connected to the memory controller 2310 and the command memory 2320 in the display control circuit 2300. Further, the display device 16 is connected to the first display controller 2380 and the second display controller 2390 in the display control circuit 2300.

Next, the configuration of each unit in the display control circuit 2300 will be described.

The memory controller 2310 mainly controls communication between various external memories (CGROM substrate 2040 and SDRAM 2500) and the display control circuit 2300. For example, the memory controller 2310 performs processing such as transmission/reception of an address designation signal of an external memory to be controlled, memory ready, busy management, etc., and stores data (effect data) stored at an address specified in various memories. , Command data, etc.) is acquired.

The command memory 2320 is a built-in memory that stores a command list. The command list can be stored in the SDRAM 2500 and the CGROM substrate 2040 (CGROM 2060) in addition to the command memory 2320.

The command parser 2330 acquires the command list from the designated memory (command memory 2320, SDRAM 2500 or CGROM 2060). Specifically, in the present embodiment, the type of memory in which the command list is arranged (command memory 2320, SDRAM 2500 or CGROM 2060) in the system control register (not shown) in the display control circuit 2300 by the host control circuit 2100, Its start address and is set. Then, the command parser 2330 accesses the start address in the memory designated by the system control register (not shown) and acquires the command list.

The command parser 2330 analyzes the acquired command list to generate a specific control code, and outputs the control code to the moving image decoder 2340, the still image decoder 2350, and the 3D geometry engine 2400. In this embodiment, each image processing module in the display control circuit 2300 operates based on the control code output by the command parser 2330.

The moving picture decoder 2340 decodes the moving picture compressed data acquired from the CGROM substrate 2040 or the SDRAM 2500. Then, the video decoder 2340 outputs the decoded video data to the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM). The moving image data (decoding result) output from the moving image decoder 2340 is stored in the movie buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500.

The still image decoder 2350 decodes the still image compressed data acquired from the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500. Then, the still image decoder 2350 outputs the decoded still image data to the built-in VRAM 2370. The still image data (decoding result) output from the still image decoder 2350 is temporarily stored in a sprite buffer (described later) provided in the built-in VRAM 2370.

The SDRAM controller 2360 is a controller that controls operations such as storage of decoded moving image data and still image data in the RAM, and transfer of image data between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the CGROM substrate 2040 or SDRAM 2500.

The built-in VRAM 2370 operates as a work RAM when executing various processes such as a decoding process and a rendering process in the drawing control process by the display control circuit 2300. Further, in image data transfer processing between the built-in VRAM 2370 and the CGROM board 2040 or the SDRAM 2500, which is performed in each processing step in the drawing control processing described later, various image data are temporarily stored in the built-in VRAM 2370.

Each of the first display controller 2380 and the second display controller 2390 acquires the rendering result (drawing result) generated by the rendering engine 2410 and outputs the rendering result to the display device 16. As a result, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16. When two display controllers are provided like the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, two screens are provided on the display device 16 by one display control circuit 2300 (one chip) and each screen is displayed. It can be controlled independently.

The 3D geometry engine 2400 converts the three-dimensional information into two-dimensional information (projection conversion processing) based on the control code input from the command parser 2330, and performs affine transformation such as enlarging, reducing, rotating and moving a figure. (Graphic conversion) processing is performed. Then, the 3D geometry engine 2400 outputs the result of the conversion process to the rendering engine 2410.

The rendering engine 2410 refers to the texture source (SDRAM 2500 in this embodiment) in which the decompressed still image data and moving image data are stored, and performs rendering (drawing) processing on the image data. Then, the rendering engine 2410 writes the rendering result to the rendering target (in this embodiment, the built-in VRAM 2370 or SDRAM 2500).

It should be noted that the term "rendering (drawing)" in this specification means that the decoded data is edited in accordance with specified information (in this embodiment, information output from the 3D geometry engine 2400) such as scaling and rotation of a moving image. It is to be. Further, the "rendering engine" here includes, for example, a "rasterizer" and a "pixel shader". Therefore, in the rendering engine 2410, similar to the pixel shader, ARGB values (A: alpha value indicating transparency (opacity), R: luminance value of red component, G: green component) in pixel units for image data. Brightness value, B: brightness value of blue component) is also calculated.

[1-2-6-1. Connection configuration between display control circuit and CGROM]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of coping with different types (NOR type or NAND type) of CGROMs connected to the display control circuit 2300. Here, the connection configuration between the display control circuit 2300 and its peripheral circuits provided in the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM mounted on the CGROM board will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

FIG. 16 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040a when the CGROM is a NOR-type CGROM 2060a (NOR flash memory). FIG. 17 is a connection configuration diagram between the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040b when the CGROM is a NAND-type CGROM 2060b (NAND flash memory). 16 and 17, the CGROM substrate is shown in a state of being detached from the sub-board 2020 in order to make the configuration of the connection portion clearer, but in reality, both boards are connected via a board-to-board connector. Connected.

(1) Configuration of Sub Substrate First, the internal configuration of the sub substrate 2020 will be described. As is clear from the comparison between FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the configuration of the sub-board 2020 when the NOR type CGROM 2060a is mounted on the CGROM board 2040a is the same as that when the NAND type CGROM 2060b is mounted on the CGROM board 2040b. The same is true.

As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, a display control circuit 2300 is provided on the sub-board 2020, and a bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 and an AND circuit 302 (AND gate) are provided as its peripheral circuits. Further, the sub-board 2020 is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 3030 including a plurality of connection terminals which are directly or indirectly connected to the display control circuit 2300 via the various buses.

The bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 includes four input/output terminals (terminals A0 to A3 in FIG. 16) on one side and four input/output terminals (terminals A0 to A3) on the other side. It has one input/output terminal (terminal B0 to terminal B3 in FIG. 16). The bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 has two control terminals (terminals in FIG. 16) for switching control of the communication direction of signals between the input/output terminals A0 to A3 and the input/output terminals B0 to B3. OE and terminal DIR).

The bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is provided between the input/output terminal A0 to the input/output terminal A3 and the input/output terminal B0 to the input/output terminal B3 according to the combination of the signal levels of the voltage signals applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR, respectively. Switch the communication direction of the signal in. As a result, even if a mismatch occurs in the communication direction (communication operation) for some reason, the safety of the communication operation between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be ensured. The communication direction switching control operation of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 will be described in detail later. The bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 used in this embodiment can also be applied to a system having two power supplies of 3.3V and 5V.

The display control circuit 2300 is provided with four input/output terminals (terminal GMA31/GRB3 to terminal GMA28/GRB0 in FIG. 16). The I/O terminal GMA31/GRB3 to the input/output terminal GMA28/GRB0 act as the output terminal of the address bus when the CGROM is the NOR type CGROM 2060a, and the ready terminal when the CGROM is the NAND type CGROM 2060b. /Acts as a busy signal input terminal. Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with 26 output terminals (terminals GMA27 to GMA2 in FIG. 16) which serve as output terminals for data (address designation data, etc.) relating to the address of the data storage area in the CGROM. To be

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with two CG memory chip enable output terminals (terminal GCE_0 and terminal GCE_1 in FIG. 16). In the present embodiment, the display control circuit 2300 has two memory spaces corresponding to the two CG memory chip enable output terminals (GCE_0, GCE_1: specific output terminals), and each memory space has a memory space. Information such as type, bus width and access timing is set. However, in the present embodiment, the display control circuit 2300 is configured to be incompatible (useable) when the synchronous mode ROM and the asynchronous mode ROM are mixed.

Further, the display control circuit 2300 is provided with a plurality of data bus input terminals for acquiring image data (compressed data of moving images/still images) from a CGROM via a data bus.

The electrical connection relationship of the above-mentioned components provided on the sub-board 2020 is as follows.

Input/output terminals GMA31/GRB3 to input/output terminals GMA28/GRB0 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the input/output terminals B0 to B3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010, respectively, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17. To be done. The input/output terminals A0 to A3 of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 are connected to the first to fourth connection terminals of the terminal group 3030, respectively. That is, the input/output combined terminal GMA31/GRB3 to input/output combined terminal GMA28/GRB0 of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030 via the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010, respectively. It

The output terminals GMA27 to GMA2 of the display control circuit 2300 are respectively connected to the ninth to 34th connection terminals of the terminal group 3030, and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_0 and the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1 are connected to each other. , And the 35th and 36th connection terminals of the terminal group 3030, respectively. Furthermore, the plurality of data bus input terminals of the display control circuit 2300 are connected to the corresponding connection terminals of the terminal group 3030 on and after the 37th connection terminal.

The control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected to the fifth connection terminal of the terminal group 3030, and the control terminal OE is connected to the output terminal of the AND circuit 302. One input terminal of the AND circuit 302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_0, and the other input terminal of the AND circuit 302 is connected to the CG memory chip enable output terminal GCE_1. The sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal of the terminal group 3030 of the sub-board 2020 are connected to the power supply voltage (+3.3V) terminal provided on the sub-board 2020, and the eighth connection terminal is connected to the sub-board 2020. It is connected to the provided ground (GND) terminal.

(2) Configuration of CGROM Substrate (NOR Type) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM substrate 2040a on which the NOR type CGROM 2060a is mounted will be described with reference to FIG.

When the NOR type CGROM 2060a is mounted on the CGROM substrate 2040a, the CGROM substrate 2040a includes a NOR type CGROM 2060a, various signal wirings (buses), and terminals including a plurality of connection terminals connected to the CGROM 2060a via various buses. And a group 3110.

The connection terminals from the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal and the ninth connection terminal and after in the terminal group 3110 provided on the CGROM substrate 2040a are connected to the CGROM 2060a.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 16, the CGROM 2060a is a NOR flash memory (random access type flash memory), and therefore the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal and the ninth connection terminal to the 34th connection terminal in the terminal group 3110. The connection terminal is connected to the input terminal (not shown) of the address bus of the CGROM 2060a. Further, the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are connected to the CG memory chip enable input terminal (not shown) of the CGROM 2060a, and the display control circuit 2300 controls the CGROM 2060a of the connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal. It is connected to the data output terminal of the CGROM 2060a used when acquiring image data (moving image/still image compressed data) from the.

Further, the fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 3110 provided on the CGROM board 2040a is connected to the eighth connection terminal via the signal wiring W2, and the eighth connection terminal is connected to the CGROM board 2040a. It is connected to the provided ground (GND) terminal. That is, when the CGROM 2060a is a NOR flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is grounded via the signal wire W2. Further, the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 are connected to the power supply voltage (+3.3V) terminal provided on the CGROM substrate 2040a.

The number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 3110 is the same as the number of connection terminals in the terminal group 3030 for connecting the CGROM substrate provided on the sub-board 2020. When connecting (mounting) the CGROM board 2040a to the sub-board 2020, both boards are connected so that the connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a is connected to the connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 16, the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,..., The 37th connection terminal,... Of the CGROM board 2040a are the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,. 37 connection terminals, respectively.

(3) Configuration of CGROM Substrate (NAND Type) Next, the internal configuration of the CGROM substrate 2040b mounting the NAND type CGROM 2060b will be described with reference to FIG. In the configuration of the CGROM substrate 2040b shown in FIG. 17, the same components as those of the CGROM substrate 2040a having the NOR type CGROM 2060a shown in FIG. 16 are designated by the same reference numerals.

When the NAND type CGROM 2060b is mounted on the CGROM substrate 2040b, the CGROM substrate 2040b is provided with the NAND type CGROM 2060b and a transistor circuit 312 as a peripheral circuit thereof. Further, the CGROM substrate 2040b is provided with various signal wirings (buses) and a terminal group 3110 including a plurality of connection terminals directly or indirectly connected to the CGROM 2060b via the various buses.

The first to fourth connection terminals in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM substrate 2040b are connected to the drain terminals of the transistor circuit 312. The gate terminal of the transistor circuit 312 is connected to the CGROM 2060b, and the source terminal is connected to the ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM substrate 2040b. That is, the first to fourth connection terminals are connected to the CGROM 2060b via the transistor circuit 312.

In the example shown in FIG. 17, since the CGROM 2060b is a NAND flash memory (sequential access flash memory), the gate terminal of the transistor circuit 312, that is, the first connection terminal to the fourth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110. The terminal is connected to a ready/busy output terminal (not shown) provided in the CGROM 2060b.

Further, the fifth connection terminal (predetermined connection terminal) in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM substrate 2040b is connected to the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal via the signal wiring W3, and the sixth connection terminal and the seventh connection terminal are connected. The terminal is connected to the power supply voltage (+3.3V) terminal provided on the CGROM substrate 2040b. That is, when the CGROM 2060b is a NAND flash memory, the fifth connection terminal is connected to the power supply voltage (+3.3V) terminal via the signal wiring W3.

The eighth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to the ground (GND) terminal provided on the CGROM board 2040b.

Furthermore, the connection terminals after the ninth connection terminal in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM substrate 2040b are connected to the CGROM 2060b. At this time, the ninth connection terminal to the thirty-fourth connection terminal are connected to an input terminal (not shown) for data relating to an address provided in the CGROM 2060b, and the 35th connection terminal and the 36th connection terminal are connected to the CGROM 2060b. Connected to the memory chip enable input terminal. Further, the connection terminals after the 37th connection terminal are connected to a data output terminal (not shown) of the CGROM 2060b used when the display control circuit 2300 acquires image data (compressed data of moving image/still image) from the CGROM 2060b. It

Even when the NAND type CGROM 2060b is mounted on the CGROM substrate 2040b, the number of connection terminals included in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM substrate 2040b is the same as that of the CGROM substrate connection terminal group 3030 provided on the sub-board 2020. It is the same as the number of connection terminals. When connecting (mounting) the CGROM board 2040b to the sub-board 2020, both boards are connected so that the connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040b is connected to the connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 having the same terminal number. That is, as shown in FIG. 17, the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,..., The 37th connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040b are the first connection terminal, the second connection terminal,. 37 connection terminals, respectively.

[1-2-6-2. Communication operation between display control circuit and CGROM]
Next, an operation when the display control circuit 2300 acquires image data (compressed data of moving image/still image) from the CGROM will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 19. Note that FIG. 18 is a truth table showing a correspondence relationship between input signals and output signals in the AND circuit 302 provided on the sub-board 2020, and FIG. 19 is a bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 provided on the sub-board 2020. 3 is a truth table showing a correspondence relationship between signal levels applied to the control terminal OE and the control terminal DIR and communication directions in FIG.

(1) Operation of AND Circuit and Bidirectional Balance Transceiver The AND circuit 302, as shown in FIG. 18, only when a HIGH level signal (voltage signal) is input to both input terminals of the AND circuit 302. A high level signal is output to the control terminal OE, and under the other input conditions, a low level signal is output to the control terminal OE.

As shown in FIG. 19, the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 is a bidirectional balanced transceiver when a LOW level signal (voltage signal) is input to the control terminal OE and a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR. The input/output terminals A0 to A3 of 3010 act as output terminals, and the input/output terminals B0 to B3 act as input terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM is from the display control circuit 2300 to the CGROM.

In the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010, when a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE and a HIGH level signal is input to the control terminal DIR, the input/output terminals A0 to A0 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are input. The terminal A3 acts as an input terminal, and the input/output terminals B0 to B3 act as output terminals. In this case, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM is from the CGROM to the display control circuit 2300.

When the combination of the signal level input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 and the signal level input to the control terminal DIR is a combination other than the above (when the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is HIGH). (When a level signal is input), the input/output terminals A0 to A3 and the input/output terminals B0 to B3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 are in the HIGH impedance state (“Z” in FIG. 19). ) That is, the state is equivalent to the open state, and communication is not performed between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM.

(2) Communication Operation Between Display Control Circuit and CGROM (NOR Type) Here, first, consider a case where the CGROM substrate 2040a having the NOR type CGROM 2060a mounted thereon is connected (mounted) to the sub-substrate 2020.

In this case, in this embodiment, since a LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 of the display control circuit 2300, the LOW signal is output to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010. The level signal is input. The signal levels of the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 are set in the hardware initialization process (see FIG. 63 described later).

In the present embodiment, the amplitude values of the output signals from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals), which are preset by the sub-control circuit 200, differ according to the type of CGROM, so that the display control circuit The amplitude values of the signals output from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 provided in the 2300 vary depending on the type of storage means. However, the mode in which the amplitude value of the output signal changes according to the type of CGROM is not limited to this mode. As described in Modification Example 7 described later, the display control circuit 2300 detects the type of the connected storage means, and based on the detection result, outputs from the CG memory chip enable output terminals GCE_0 and GCE_1 (specific terminals). The amplitude value of the output signal may be set.

The fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected is grounded via the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040a and the signal wiring W2, as shown in FIG. Therefore, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

Therefore, when the CGROM board 2040a having the NOR type CGROM 2060a mounted thereon is connected to the sub-board 2020, as shown in FIG. 19, the input/output terminals A0 to A3 of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 serve as output terminals. The input/output terminals B0 to B3 function as input terminals. That is, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM 2060a in the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is from the display control circuit 2300 to the CGROM 2060a.

In this case, the signal wiring connected via the first to fourth connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 and the first to fourth connection terminals of the CGROM board 2040a can be used as an address bus, and display control can be performed. The circuit 2300 can normally perform the memory addressing operation for the NOR type CGROM 2060a. As a result, the display control circuit 2300 can directly specify an address through the address bus and perform a data read operation.

(3) Communication Operation Between Display Control Circuit and CGROM (NAND Type) Next, consider a case where the CGROM substrate 2040b on which the NAND type CGROM 2060b is mounted is connected (mounted) to the sub-substrate 2020.

Also in this case, in the present embodiment, since the LOW level signal is output from at least one of the two CG memory chip enable output terminals CGE_0 and CGE_1 of the display control circuit 2300, it is output to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010. Is input with a LOW level signal. That is, in the present embodiment, a LOW level signal is input to the control terminal OE of the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010 regardless of whether the type of CGROM is NOR type or NAND type. Further, the fifth connection terminal of the sub-board 2020 to which the control terminal DIR of the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is connected, as shown in FIG. 17, is supplied with the power supply voltage (via the fifth connection terminal of the CGROM board 2040b and the signal wiring W3). Since it is connected to the (+3.3V) terminal, a HIGH level signal is input to the control terminal DIR.

Therefore, when the CGROM board 2040b having the NAND type CGROM 2060b mounted thereon is connected to the sub-board 2020, as shown in FIG. The input/output terminals B0 to B3 act as output terminals. That is, the communication direction between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM 2060b in the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 is the direction from the CGROM 2060b to the display control circuit 2300.

In this case, the signal wirings connected via the first to fourth connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 and the first to fourth connection terminals of the CGROM board 2040b should be used as communication wirings for ready/busy signals. You can That is, in this case, the process of transmitting the ready/busy signal, which is referred to by the display control circuit 2300 from the CGROM 2060 to the display control circuit 2300, when the data is read from the NAND type CGROM 2060b by the sequential access method can be executed. As a result, the display control circuit 2300 can normally perform the operation of acquiring the memory state (ready/busy state) with respect to the NAND type CGROM 2060b.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the type of CGROM is changed, the communication operation between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM can be normally executed without changing the configuration of the sub-board 2020. Therefore, in this embodiment, for example, the optimum CGROM can be selected in consideration of the data capacity, the communication speed, the price, and the like. Further, for example, when a new pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured, the sub-board 2020 used in the pachinko gaming machine manufactured in the past is diverted from the conditions such as data capacity and communication speed, and only the type of CGROM is changed. Even in such a case, it can be easily dealt with. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to select the CGROM according to the mode of implementation, and the expandability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be ensured.

Further, in this embodiment, by using the bidirectional balanced transceiver 3010, the first to fourth connection terminals in the terminal group 3030 of the sub-board 2020 and the first connection in the terminal group 3110 of the CGROM board 2040. The terminals to the fourth connection terminal can be used as terminals for both input and output of data. In this case, it is not necessary to separately provide a data input terminal and a data output terminal corresponding to the first to fourth connection terminals of the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040, and the sub-board 2020 and the CGROM board 2040 can save space. Can be promoted.

As described above, in this embodiment, the bidirectional balance transceiver 3010 can switch the “communication mode” between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM according to the type of the CGROM. However, the “communication form” between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM in this specification means all transmission/reception modes of various information between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM.

For example, in the “communication form” between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM referred to in the present specification, data (image data (compressed data of moving image/still image) necessary for displaying information on the effect operation on the display device 16 is displayed. )) transmission/reception mode between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM, as well as a transmission/reception mode when communicating information designating the address of the data stored in the CGROM between the display control circuit 2300 and the CGROM, and This also includes a transmission/reception mode when the control circuit 2300 receives the ready/busy signal from the CGROM. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the “communication form” in the present specification may mean only the communication form of a portion in which the transmission/reception form of information changes depending on the type of CGROM.

[2. Function flow]
Next, a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is shot by a user's operation and a payout control process of the game ball is performed when the game ball wins various prizes. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in the special symbol game, or when it becomes a "normal hit" in the normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball will win is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. It will be easier.

In addition, in various prizes, a special symbol starting prize which is one condition for performing variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game, and one condition for performing variable display of ordinary symbols in the ordinary symbol game It also includes a normal symbol starting prize.

Hereinafter, the outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, various random number values (for example, a big hit determination random number value and a symbol determination random number value) from various counters (for example, a big hit determination counter or a symbol determination counter). ) Is extracted (acquired), and each extracted random number value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 20).

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, referring to whether or not various data such as a random number value is stored due to a special symbol starting winning, one condition that various data such as a random number value is stored is a variable display of the special symbol. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and a jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "jackpot" is performed. Then, a stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the random number for symbol determination extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described jackpot determination are referred to, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Then, the variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, the random number value, the result of the above-described jackpot determination, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern ) Is determined.

Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, the random number value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the variation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to, The effect pattern to be executed along with the variable display of the special symbol is determined.

Then, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. , And effect control processing for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a "big hit" will occur. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "big hit" is reached, a big hit game state control process for performing a big hit game state is executed. In the jackpot gaming state, the above-mentioned various winning possibilities increase. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not occurred, the big hit game state control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" is not reached, or when the big hit game state control process is finished, a game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, a normal game state different from the big hit game state is managed.

As the game state at the time of normal operation, for example, in the above-described big hit determination, a game state determined to be a “big hit” with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as “normal game state”) or a probability determined to be a “big hit” A gaming state that increases more than the normal gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "high-probability gaming state"), or a gaming state in which a special symbol start winning is easily obtained as a result of an ordinary hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "time saving gaming state"). ) And the like. After that, again, the determination process of whether to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and thereafter, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins during the variable display of the special symbol, various data extracted at the time of winning the start (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for symbol determination, etc.) ) Is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this way, storing various data (for example, a big hit determination random number value) until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is called "holding", and the various data held is called starting storage.

That is, when the game ball wins during the variable display of the special symbol, the execution of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is suspended, and is suspended after the end of the variable display of the currently executed special symbol. The variable display of the special symbols being displayed is sequentially started. In the following, various types of data regarding special symbols that are being held are also referred to as “holding balls”.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start mouth prize and second start mouth prize) are provided, and maximum 4 for each special symbol start prize. Until the execution of variable display of special symbols can be suspended. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suspend the execution of the variable display of the special symbols, up to a total of 8 of the first special symbols and the second special symbols.

Note that, although not shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the reserved ball is won (whether or not a “big hit” is won) based on the information on the reserved ball described above, and further It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a prefetch effect function.

(2) If there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter, and the random number value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 20. Refer to the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 20, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not a random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and one condition that the random number value is stored is that the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. To determine.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination of whether or not the "normal hit" is performed is performed. After that, the variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Then, the result of the determined normal hit determination, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is referred to, the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. ..

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a "normal hit" is achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "normal hit", the normal hit game control process for playing the normal hit game is executed.

In the normal hit game control process, the possibility of the various prizes described above, particularly the possibility of the special symbol starting prize of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "normal hit" is not achieved, the normal hit game control process is not executed. After that, again, the determination process of whether to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, and thereafter, the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout of the game ball is performed according to conditions such as whether or not a "big hit" occurs in the special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not the "normal hit" occurs in the ordinary symbol game. The ease with which control processing is performed changes.

In the present embodiment, as a method for extracting various random number values, a soft random number method that generates a random number value within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine is provided with a random number generator in which random numbers are updated in a predetermined cycle, a random number value from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. A hard random number method for extracting the above may be adopted as the above-mentioned various random number value extraction method.

In the case of using the hard random number method, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit of the pachinko gaming machine 1, FIG. 22 is a hit type when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit (hereinafter referred to as "main symbol") FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of selection rates, and FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a variation time (variable display time) determination table of special symbols stored in the main ROM 102. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200. In the following description, terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 which are not shown in FIGS. 21 to 24 are used, but these terms are shown in FIG.

In describing the jackpot probability shown in FIG. 21, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

When the main CPU 101 detects a winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5), it extracts a big hit judging random number of the first special symbol from the big hit judging counter, and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the 1 special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), the big hit determination for the extracted big hit determination random numbers (hereinafter, referred to as "first special symbol big hit determination"). Incidentally, the extraction of the random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

Similarly, the main CPU 101, when detecting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), extracts a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter, and stores it in the main RAM 103. With reference to the second special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), the big hit determination about the extracted big hit determination random numbers (hereinafter, referred to as "big hit determination of the second special symbol") is performed. In addition, the extraction of the random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot gaming state is controlled.

When the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "miss". Further, when the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, like the big hit determination of the first special symbol, it is determined to be either “big hit” or “miss”. The jackpot random number determination table of the first special symbol and the jackpot random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, respectively, the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (=off)” or “1 (=on)”). ), the relationship between the range (width) of the random numbers for jackpot determination determined as "big hit" or "miss" and the corresponding determination value data ("big hit determination value data" and "miss determination value data") Is specified.

In the present embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the big hit determination random numbers are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the range of random numbers for jackpot determination. The range (width) of the random numbers for jackpot determination can be changed as appropriate.

The probability variation flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “high-probability gaming state”. When the gaming state is the "high-probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is the "low-probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when it is "non-time saving game state", the time saving flag is "0". In the time saving game state, the number of times saved is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the number of times saved is reduced by 1 each time the special symbol changes once.

In the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the probability of being judged as a normal hit in the normal hit determination (ordinary hit probability) is increased as compared with the non-time saving game state. Therefore, in the time saving game state, as compared with the non-time saving game state, the frequency of the normal electric auditors object 46 changing from the closed state to the open state, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is increased. However, in the time saving game state, instead of increasing the normal hit probability compared to the non-time saving game state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal hit lottery (shortening the variation time of the normal symbol), the normal electric role The frequency of the object 46 changing from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the ordinary electric auditors product 46 may be changed in the opening mode to facilitate winning the ordinary electric auditors product 46. Moreover, you may combine 2 aspects or 3 aspects among said 3 aspects.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are OFF, the normal gaming state, the probability variation flag ON and the time variation flag ON are the probability variation short time gaming state, and the probability variation flag is OFF and the time saving flag ON is the time saving game. It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 to one of the game states among the states.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the big hit determination random number of the first special symbol, the extracted big hit determination random number of the first special symbol is extracted. The numerical value is held as a starting memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, a big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the big hit determination random number of the second special symbol, the extracted big hit determination random of the second special symbol. The numerical value is retained as a starting memory until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

[3-1. Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value that is set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low and the gaming state is low (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is approximately 1/300 in setting 1, approximately 1/290 in setting 2, and approximately 3 in setting 3. The value is 1/280, the setting 4 is about 1/270, the setting 5 is about 260/, and the setting 6 is about 1/250. Further, when the high-probability game state in which the jackpot probability is relatively high (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is approximately 1/30 in setting 1, approximately 1/29 in setting 2, and setting 3 Is about 1/28, setting 4 is about 1/27, setting 5 is about 1/26, and setting 6 is about 1/25.

That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, since the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, the number of big hit determination value data of the first special symbol is set to the set value. Depending on the set value, the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value. For example, in the low probability game state in the first special symbol, the number of big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for the big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of jackpots is set to 234 in setting 3, the number is 243 in setting 4, the number is 252 in setting 5, and the number is 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value. Also, the number of jackpot determination value data in the high probability game state is 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, 26 in setting 6. Has become.

Further, also in the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value that is set. When the probability of jackpot is relatively low (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 in setting 1, 1/190 in setting 2, and 280 in setting 3 1, setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. When the high-probability game state is relatively high in probability of jackpot (probability change flag ON), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, and 28 in setting 3. 1/27, setting 4/27, setting 5/26, and setting 6/25.

That is, as for the jackpot probability of the second special symbol, the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value by changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability game state in the second special symbol, the number of big hit determination value data is 218 in the setting 1 and 226 in the setting 2 with respect to the range of random numbers for big hit determination (0 to 65535) which is a fixed value. The number of jackpots is set to 234 in setting 3, the number is 243 in setting 4, the number is 252 in setting 5, and the number is 262 in setting 6, so that the jackpot probability is changed according to the set value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot determination value data in the high-probability game state, 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, 26 in setting 6 It is an individual.

In addition, the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit determination of the second special symbol have the same big hit probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the setting values are the same, the big hit probability in the big hit judgment of the first special symbol and the big hit probability in the big hit judgment of the second special symbol are the same. For example, if setting 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low-probability gaming state (1/28 in the high-probability gaming state), and this jackpot probability is the second special symbol. It is the same as the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination (1/280 in the low-probability gaming state, 1/28 in the high-probability gaming state).

In the present embodiment, the setting value has six levels of setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be 6 levels, and can be arbitrarily set as long as it has a plurality of levels.

Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit probability is different when the set value is different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of set values may have a common big hit probability. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 The setting 6 may have a common jackpot probability (a third probability higher than the second probability).

Further, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and with respect to this range of the big hit determination random number which is a fixed value. By changing the number of big hit judgment value data according to the set value, the big hit probability is made different for each set value, but the method for making the big hit probability different for each set value is not limited to this. The number of data may be common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number may be changed according to the set value, so that the big hit probability may be changed according to the set value. For example, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, which is common to all the settings, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is 0 to 65535 in the setting 1 (the jackpot probability is about 1/300) and in the setting 2. Range 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), setting 3 is 0 to 61039 range (big hit probability is 1/280), setting 4 is range 0 to 58859 (big hit probability is 1/270) The setting 5 is a range of 0 to 56679 (the big hit probability is 1/260), the setting 6 is a range of 0 to 54499 (the big hit probability is 1/250), and the main CPU 101 judges the big hit in the range according to the set value. By generating a random number for use, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (range of the jackpot determination random number) having a larger number of digits than the numerator (number of jackpot determination value data). It is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value, as compared with a method in which the number of pieces of jackpot determination value data is changed according to the set value with the range fixed.

In the above, the number of big hit judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number as a total random number is changed according to the set value. Commonality is not always essential. For example, in setting 1, the number of big hit judgment value data is 218, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is in the range of 0 to 65535 (big hit probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2, big hit judgment value data 219, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in the range of 0 to 63509 (the big hit probability is about 1/290), and in the setting 3, the number of big hit determination value data 220 pieces and the big hit determination random number The range (width) is set to a range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of the jackpot determination value data is 221 and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is a range of 0 to 59669. (The big hit probability is about 1/270), in setting 5, the number of the big hit determination value data is 222, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in the range of 0 to 57719 (the big hit probability is about 1/260) In setting 6, the number of big hit judgment value data is 223, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is in the range of 0 to 55749 (big hit probability is about 1/250). Even when both the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is changed according to the set value, the method of changing the number of big hit judgment value data according to the set value while setting the range of the big hit judgment random number as a fixed value In comparison, it is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value.

When the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value, the main CPU 101 performs the setting check process (see FIG. 42) in steps S72 and S82 described later. In addition to or instead of determining whether or not the set value data is within the range of “0” to “5”, for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number is set as the set value. It may be possible to check whether or not the range is in accordance with the above, and/or whether or not the number of pieces of big hit determination value data is the number defined by the set value. Then, when it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as the total random number or/and the number of the big hit determination value data is outside the range corresponding to the set value) (step described later) In the case of NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722, which will be described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[3-2. Jackpot distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a big hit, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 22, the distribution of main symbols is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 22 are stored in the main ROM 102.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101, based on the extracted random number for symbol determination, the main symbol, the special figure 1-1 (sort probability 25.0%), special figure 1-2 (sorting probability 25.0%), special figure 1-3 (sorting probability 25.0%), and special figure 1-4 (sorting probability 25.0%) ) One of the above. Toku-zu 1-1 is a big hit with four rounds, a probability variation flag OFF, and 100 shortened times. Special figure 1-2, round number 4, probability variation flag ON, time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed (the time saving flag is set to OFF when the next big hit game state is started) It's a big hit. Special figure 1-3 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability variation flag OFF, and 100 times saved. Special figures 1-4 are big hits in which the number of rounds is 10, probability variation flag is ON, and time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 variably displays the first special symbol for a change time determined with reference to FIG. 23 described later, and then the main symbol determined above. Execute the control to stop with.

In the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability variation flag is ON as in special figures 1-2 and 1-4). It is a so-called "probability variation loop machine" in which the high-probability game state continues until the next big-hit game state is started after the big-hit game state ends. In such a probability variation loop machine, the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol in the high-probability game state is a big hit, and if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the big hit game state ends again and the next big hit game state starts again. The high probability game state continues until it is played. And the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the high-probability game state is a big hit, and if the predetermined condition is not satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag as in special figures 1-1 and 1-3). If it is a big hit that does not turn on), after the big hit game state ends, it is controlled to a low probability game state without being controlled to a high probability game state.

When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101, based on the extracted random number for symbol determination, the main symbol, special figure 2-1 (distribution probability 50.0%) or special figure 2-2 (sorting probability 50.0%). Toku-zu 2-1 is a big hit with 10 rounds, a probability variation flag OFF, and 100 times saved. The special figure 2-2 is a big hit in which time saving continues until the number of rounds 10, the probability variation flag ON, and the next big hit game state are executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 variably displays the second special symbol for a change time determined with reference to FIG. 23, which will be described later, and then the determined main symbol. Execute the control to stop with.

When the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the lost symbol and executes the control to stop the special symbol with the determined lost symbol.

Further, the number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the big hit game state. Also, if the probability variation flag is ON, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is controlled to a high-probability game state (a gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON), and if the probability variation flag is OFF, the jackpot gaming state. The game state after the end is controlled to a low-probability game state (a game state in which the probability variation flag is set to OFF). In the following, the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag OFF, the big hit of 100 times of shortening times (for example, the big hit of special figure 1-1) is called "4R normal big hit", the number of rounds 4, the probability variation flag ON, the next big hit game A big hit that continues to save time until it is executed (for example, the big hit in Toku-zu 1-2) is called a "4R probability variation big hit", and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variation flag is OFF, and a big hit of 100 times in shortening time (for example, 3, the special jackpot 2-1 jackpot) is called "10R normal jackpot", the number of rounds 10, probability variation flag ON, jackpot that continues to save time until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, bonus jackpot 1-4, The big hit of Toku-zu 2-2) is called "10R probability variation big hit".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined based on the extracted random number for symbol determination. It may be determined whether to set the time saving flag to ON or OFF according to the main symbol to be performed.

[3-3. Special symbol variation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, a flow until the variation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the variation time of the special symbol corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 will determine the variation time of the special symbol and the variation pattern of the special symbol at the same time. The variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) by the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the determined special symbol is configured to be different (that is, variation time and effect contents) depending on the set value. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 23 are stored in the main ROM 102. Further, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, and the variation time in the normal fluctuation may be shortened as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. 23. ..

As shown in FIG. 23, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol, and the second special based on the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol. Decide the variation time of the symbol.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol is determined by using a table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the variable time of the special symbol may be determined using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the variation time determination table of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol big hit determination, the game state, the random number range for reach determination, the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and the production selection It defines the relationship among the random number range for use, the variation pattern (variable display pattern), the variation pattern designation command, the variation time, and the effect contents. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the probability variation short time gaming state and short time gaming state are not distinguished. Further, for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the variation time of the special symbol, different random number ranges are set according to the set values.

The reach determination random number range is a random number provided for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss. The main CPU 101 extracts a random number for reach determination from the reach determination counter when the game ball wins the first start opening 420 and the second start opening 440 (for example, see FIG. 5), and the extracted reach determination. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 makes a big hit judgment using the big hit judgment random number value when starting the variable display of the special symbol, but when the result of this big hit judgment is a loss, it is stored in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not the reach effect is executed using the reach determination random number. In the present embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range can be appropriately changed.

For example, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the reach determination random number range for determining that the reach effect is executed is 0 in the setting 1.2. -25, the settings 3 and 4 are specified as 0 to 26, and the settings 5 and 6 are specified as 0 to 27. Further, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) is lost, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is set to 1. 2 is specified as 0-10, settings 3 and 4 are specified as 0-11, and settings 5 and 6 are specified as 0-12.

In this way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is lost, the reach effect is more likely to be executed in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2, and further, the setting 3・Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect differs depending on the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of the reach effect.

In the present embodiment, when determining whether or not the reach effect is executed, the reach determination random number range is common to setting 1 and setting 2, common to setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting. However, the present invention is not limited to this and may be different for all settings.

Further, the determination as to whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is the case where the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is loss, but when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is the big hit, the main CPU 101 Determines to execute the reach effect regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

The effect selection random number range is a random number provided for determining the variation time of the special symbol for each set value. The main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter when a game ball wins the first start opening 420 or the second start opening 440 (for example, see FIG. 5), and extracts the selected effect. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101, in accordance with the game state and the result of determining whether to execute the reach effect (only when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss), the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103. Use to determine the variation time of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be appropriately changed. When the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by using the effect selection random number stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined to execute the reach effect, It is decided as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal operation) is defined as 0 to 57 in setting 1 and 2, and is set to 0 to 58 in setting 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 59. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally super reach A), is set to 58 to 89 in the settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normal super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is not executed, is as follows. Is decided. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 10000 msec (normal variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in the settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 49 in Settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 5000 msec (normal variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2 and is set to 51 to 99 in the setting 3 and 4. It is defined as 50 to 99 in the settings 5 and 6.

In addition, the probability of the special symbol big hit judgment in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time shortening gaming state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is missing and the reach effect is executed. The variation time of the special symbol when determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach in time saving) is defined as 0 to 57 in setting 1 and 2 and 0 to 58 in setting 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 59. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super reach A for shortening of working hours) is defined as 58 to 89 in setting 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super reach B for time saving) is defined as 90 to 99 in common for the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the probability that the special symbol big hit judgment in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time shortening gaming state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is a loss and that the reach effect is not executed The variation time of the special symbol when determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 4000 msec (shortening variation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in the settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 50 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 49 in Settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortening variation B) is defined as 52 to 99 in the setting 1.2, and is defined as 51 to 99 in the setting 3.4. It is defined as 50 to 99 in the settings 5 and 6.

Since the main symbol is decided when the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, when the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol is lost, what is the determination of the variation time of the special symbol? not involved.

The variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big symbol determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a big hit is common to all the main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal operation) is defined as 0 to 1 in the settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in the settings 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 3. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normally super reach A), is set to 2 to 49 in setting 1 and 2, and to 3 to 49 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normal super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the probability variation short time gaming state (probability variation flag ON and time saving flag ON) or the normal time shortening game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag ON) is a big hit, It is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during saving time), is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. The settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 3. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super reach A in time saving) is defined as 2 to 49 in setting 1 and 2, and 3 to 49 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 45000 msec (super reach B for shortening of working hours) is defined as 50 to 99 for settings 1 to 6 in common.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as long as the game state, the result of the special symbol big hit determination, and the result of the decision whether to execute the reach effect are the same, the variation of the special symbol As for the time, the setting 3 and 4 are more likely to be set to a shorter variation time than the setting 1 and 2, and the setting 5 and 6 are more likely to be set to be a shorter variation time than the setting 3 and 4. Therefore, the higher the set value, the shorter the average variation time of the special symbol, the more the number of variations of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the lottery number). As a result, there is a high expectation that the number of times the big hit game state is executed when viewed in the unit time is high, and the probability that the big hit game state is executed in the unit time is also high. It becomes possible to execute an advantageous game.

In the present embodiment, when determining the variation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, common to setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting 6. Although it is common, the present invention is not limited to this and may be different for all setting values.

In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit judgment is a big hit is set to be common to all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol is determined according to the main symbol. It may be configured such that the fluctuation times of the above are different.

The fluctuation pattern is data representing the fluctuation time and the effect contents. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents the normal medium super reach B having a fluctuation time of 40,000 msec.

The fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing the fluctuation time and the effect content. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is “05H”, the fluctuation pattern designation command of “83H05H” is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol designating command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[3-4. Decorative design stop design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, an example of a stop symbol of a decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined by the selection rate shown in FIG. 22 will be described. .. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 24 are stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200.

When the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100) receives the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the decorative symbol is stopped based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command regardless of the set value. Determine the design. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designating command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special figure 1-2, the host control circuit 2100, all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol (for example, "7" symbol) ), the distribution probability of the mode is 0%, so that all the decorative patterns (three decorative patterns in the present embodiment) are the same even number pattern (distribution probability 30.0%), or all The decorative pattern is determined to be the same odd number pattern (sorting probability 70.0%). In the present embodiment, the specific symbol is the "7" symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the player can recognize that it is a jackpot with a high profit level, then another symbol (for example, the "V" symbol) is designated as the specific symbol. Is also good.

As described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 24 is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol with reference to FIG. 24 when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss, Designs other than the design shown in FIG. 24 are determined as the stop design of the decorative design. The design other than the design shown in FIG. 24 corresponds to, for example, a design in which at least one decorative design of all decorative designs is different from other decorative designs.

As described above, according to FIG. 24, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Whether or not the result is that the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is a jackpot controlled to a high probability gaming state, whether the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot gaming state is 10R Or it can vary.

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 22 is special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3 or special figure 2-1 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON), Regardless of the set value, all the decorative symbols always stop in the same even number pattern (hereinafter referred to as "first mode").

In addition, when the main symbol is special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), regardless of the setting value, the first mode, or all the decorative symbols are the same odd symbol (other than the special symbol "7" symbol) (An odd number pattern) (hereinafter referred to as "second mode").

In addition, when the main design is special figure 1-4 (10R probability variation big hit), regardless of the setting value, all the decorative designs are the same odd design, or all the decorative designs are the same specific design. It stops in the following manner (hereinafter referred to as "specific aspect").

Furthermore, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), it stops in the specific mode regardless of the set value. Special Figure 1-4 and Special Figure 2-2 are both 10R probability variation big hit, but Special Figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420, so it is a big hit in the normal game state. It is highly possible that you have won. Moreover, since the special figure 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, it is highly possible that the big hit is won in the high-probability game state or the time saving game state.

In this way, when stopped in a specific mode, the 10R certainty variation jackpot with the highest degree of profit for the player is settled, and when stopped in such a manner that all decorative symbols are the same odd number symbol, the certain variation jackpot (4R probability variation jackpot or 10R Definite variation jackpot) is confirmed. On the other hand, when it is stopped in the first mode, it is confirmed that the 10R certainty variation jackpot is not the largest profit degree for the player, but the possibility of the 4R certainty variation jackpot remains.

If the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, which jackpot is the jackpot may be notified to the player when all the decorative symbols are stopped, or a jackpot game. It may be notified during execution of the state, or may be notified when the jackpot gaming state ends. Further, although not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the high-probability gaming state is the high-probability gaming state even though the gaming state after the big-hit gaming state is a big jackpot controlled to the high-probability gaming state. You may make it control to what is called a "latent latency change state" which does not clearly show to the player that it is controlled to.

[4. Other examples of basic specifications for pachinko machines]

The basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment are as described above, but are not limited to the above specifications, and can be changed as appropriate. Hereinafter, an example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described. However, it goes without saying that the following description is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
[4-1. Variation of special symbol variation time]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a variation of the variation time of the special symbol (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol) will be described. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing another example of the variable time determination table for special symbols stored in the main ROM 102. Note that, as described above, the execution probability of the reach effect is changed according to the number of special symbols to be held, and the variation time in the normal fluctuation may be shortened as the number of special symbols to be held is increased. Is omitted.

Further, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation of the special symbol variation special symbol described with reference to FIG. 25, the number of lottery to count the number of times of variation of the special symbol (that is, the number of special symbol lottery) It is provided with counting means (not shown). This lottery number counting means, for example, is reset at the start of the big hit game state, and when the big hit game state ends, the counting of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 25, in another example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the determination of whether to execute the reach effect is made. It is performed according to both the set number and the number of times of variation of the special symbol counted from the time when the big hit game state ends.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time point (for example, the time point when the jackpot gaming state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect Is set to 0 to 25 in the settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 in the settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 in the settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the reach determination random number range in which it is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 to 10 in the setting 1.2. The settings 3 and 4 are defined as 0 to 5, and the settings 5 and 6 are defined as 0 to 1. That is, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a loss, the probability of executing the reach effect is twice as high in the settings 1 and 2 as in the settings 3 and 4, and in the settings 3 and 4 as compared with the settings 5 and 6. The execution probability of reach production is as high as 5 times (the probability of execution of reach production is as high as 10 in setting 1 and 2 as compared to setting 5 and 6).

In this way, when the number of changes in the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends becomes 1001 times or more, the number of times the special symbol changes from the time when the big hit game state ends to 0 to 1000 times Compared with, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

In addition, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the variation time of the special symbol is also a big hit game. The setting difference is significant between the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the state ends is 0 to 1000 times and the case where it is 1001 times or more.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 0 to 1000 times, the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal reach during normal reach) Is defined as 0 to 57 in the settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 in the settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random number range for effect selection, in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30,000 msec (normally super reach A), is set to 58 to 89 in the settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in the settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and is set to 60 to 89 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normal super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with the settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time point when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the variation time of the special symbol is set to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal operation). No. 4 to No. 4 and setting Nos. 5 and 6 are 0 to 99. Further, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normal super reach A) is defined as 0 to 89 in the settings 1 to 4 and not defined in the settings 5 and 6. .. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is set to 40,000 msec (normally super reach B) is defined in 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 4, and is defined in settings 5 and 6. Absent. Therefore, in a so-called large-hammered situation in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit game state ends is 1001 times or more, the reach effect to be executed suggests the set value to the player. It becomes possible.

In addition, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability change flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed, the time point when the big hit game state ends is the starting point. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the lower the probability of executing the reach effect. In addition, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that the reach effect will be executed in which the variation time of the special symbol is short.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the jackpot gaming state is 1001 times or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average variation time of the special symbol per unit, and the unit The number of fluctuations of the special symbol per time (that is, the number of lottery) is further increased. As a result, the expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game per unit time will be higher, and the probability that the big hit game will be executed within the unit time will be higher.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value that has been set from the execution frequency of the reach effect, but the big hit game state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from the end of is 1001 times or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect remarkably differs according to the set value, so when the so-called large summary is set, the set value set is inferred. There can be room for it. As a result, when a so-called large summarization occurs, the set value set for the player can be set without directly giving a loss to the hole (for example, without giving a game ball to the player). By giving a speculative opportunity, it becomes possible to give the player enjoyment. Moreover, the player thinks that it should be a reach effect if it should be, but in the present embodiment, the expectation is that the lower the execution frequency of the reach effect is, the higher the set value will be when the so-called large summary is reached. Since the player can hold the game, it is possible to reduce a decrease in willingness to continue the game even if the reach production frequency is low.

In the present embodiment, the starting point where the number of times the special symbols are changed is counted as the point when the jackpot gaming state ends, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, when a predetermined period elapses, the high probability gaming state becomes The starting point can be an arbitrary time point, such as when the high-probability game state ends in a so-called ST machine that ends, or when the time saving game state ends.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time becomes 1001 times or more, the reach production execution probability and the variation time of the special symbol remarkably differ depending on the set value, but not necessarily 1001. It does not have to be more than once. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as it is a feeling that the player feels uncomfortable.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific point of time becomes equal to or more than a specified number, the execution probability of the reach effect and the variation time of the special symbol remarkably differ according to the set value, but the set value It is not always limited to the execution probability of the reach effect or the variation time of the special symbol, which is significantly different depending on. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") between the time when it is determined that the result of the special symbol big hit lottery is a big hit and the actual big hit game state is controlled. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 is provided with a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "ending time") between the end of the big hit game state and the start of variable display of special symbols. The host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300) displays the opening effect on the display device 16 during the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the display device 16 during the ending time. In the opening performance, for example, an effect indicating that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, an effect that celebrates that the result of the special lottery was a big hit, a game technique in a big hit game state (for example, right hitting) Teaching effects are performed. In the ending effect, an effect indicating the amount of prize balls paid out in the big hit game state, an effect indicating the number of times the big hit game state is continued (number of consecutive games), and a high probability probability that the game state after the big hit game state ends Production that shows that the state is controlled, production that teaches the game technique in the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished (for example, returning to the left), production that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And so on.

Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value becomes higher, the time required for the jackpot gaming state becomes higher as the set value becomes higher. Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average of the number of times the special symbol fluctuates per unit time (that is, the number of times of lottery), and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the higher the set value is, the higher the expected payout value is (for example, the higher the set value is, the higher the jackpot probability is, etc.), a larger amount of prize balls are paid out in a shorter time than the low set value. Considering that there is a possibility that the set value will increase, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be set longer as the set value becomes higher. In this case, the higher the expected payout value is, the higher or higher the set value, the longer the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time become, or at least one of the ending times becomes longer. At the same time, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time.

It should be noted that the main CPU 101 wins the game ball into the starting opening (the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440) even when the opening time, the ending time and the big hit game state are controlled. Upon detection, various random numbers are extracted, and the setting check processing (see FIG. 42) in step S74 and step S82 described later is executed. When it is determined that the setting value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" in this setting check process (NO in step S721 described later), even if the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722, which will be described later), and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game.

[4-2. Modified example of stop design of jackpot distribution and decorative design]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG. 28, the first modified example and the second modified example of the jackpot distribution (selection rate of the main symbol) when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, and these second. The stop design of the decorative design in the first modification and the second modification will be described. In the first modified example and the second modified example, the selection rate of the main symbol differs depending on the set value. Note that FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a first modified example of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and FIG. 27 shows the result of the special symbol big hit determination when it is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol. 28 is a modification of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200, which is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[4-2-1. First Modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 28. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 26 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 28 are stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 of the sub-control circuit 200.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the first modified example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the main symbol according to the set value based on the extracted random number for symbol determination. With a probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 Decide on one of -8. However, in this first modification, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal big hit", the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 are "4R certainty variation big hits", the special figure 1 -5 and special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 and "10R probability variation big hit".

Specifically, the main CPU 101, with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4, the main symbol, the special symbol 1-1 (sorting probability 12.5%), the special diagram 1-2 (sorting probability 12.5). %), special figure 1-3 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-4 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-5 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-6 (sorting probability 12.5%), special chart 1-7 (sorting probability 12.5%), and special chart 1-8 (sorting probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbol, the special figure 1-1 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-3 (sorting Distribution probability 15.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 15.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 10.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 10.0) %), special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 15.0%), and special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbol, the special map 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-3 (distribution probability 20 0.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 20.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 5.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 5.0%), It is determined to be one of the special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 20.0%) and the special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the settings 5 and 6), the selection rate in the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than that in the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in special figures 1-6 and special figures 1-8 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio in special figure 1-8 (10.5 in setting 5 and 15.0% in setting 6) (15. 0% and 20.0% in setting 6 are higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Further, regarding special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate in special figure 2-4 (30% in setting 5) is higher than that in special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% with setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the host control circuit 2100, as shown in FIG. 28, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-5, special figure 1 -7, special figure 2-1, special figure 2-3 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON), regardless of the set value, the decoration that is always displayed on the display device 16, for example. The design is controlled so as to stop in the first mode.

On the other hand, when it is a special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50. Control to stop at 0%). Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selection rate 25.0%), or the second mode (selection). The rate is controlled to 75.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% for setting 5 and 5.0% for setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative design will stop in the second mode (a mode having a higher degree of expectation for the player than the first mode) will be high.

Similarly, when the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%), or the specific mode (selectivity) (50.0%) so that it is stopped. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the special ratio 1- 6 is lower than the selection ratio (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). The selectivity of 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative pattern is stopped in a specific mode (a mode that has the highest degree of expectation for the player) becomes high.

Further, similarly, when it is a special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0). %) to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is a special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio of the characteristics of FIG. 2-2 (20.0% for setting 5, 10.0% for setting 6) The selectivity of 4 (30.0% for setting 5, 40.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific manner becomes high.

In this way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, it is possible to realize that the stop mode of the decorative symbol may be different depending on the set value even if the big hit types are the same. Become. Especially when it is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the combination probability determined to be a particular big hit type (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) is the same. Also, compared to when the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4), with a high probability, it is possible to stop the decorative pattern in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player. Become.

[4-2-2. Second Modification]
Next, the second modified example will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 27 are stored in the main ROM 102.

In the first modified example, whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON is determined according to the main symbol that is determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. On the other hand, in the second modified example, whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON is not immediately determined depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol large hit determination is a big hit. Absent. More specifically, unlike the first modification, the second modification includes a positive variation attacker (not shown) inside the special winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, for example, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, when the entry of the game ball into the probability variation attacker is detected, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is controlled to the high probability game state, and the probability variation attacker is detected. When the big hit game state ends without the entry of the game ball being detected, the game state after the big hit game state ends is controlled to a low-probability game state. In this way, the pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to the high-probability game state based on the entry of the game ball into the probability variation attacker is a so-called "probability variation loop machine".

As shown in FIG. 27, in the second modified example, the easiness of entry of the game ball into the probability variation attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit. ing. For example, in the special figure 1-1, the big hit game state is controlled in a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker, and in the special figure 1-2, the big hit game state is easy in which the game ball enters the probability variation attacker. Controlled by. In the present embodiment, the short-time count is 100 times when it is a big hit in the "mode where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker", and the mode is "mode where the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker". When it is a big hit, time saving continues until the next big hit game is executed.

In the present embodiment, "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker" is almost unlikely to enter the probability variation attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state (almost 100%). Is controlled to a low-probability game state with a probability close to. In addition, "a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker" is a big hit game state as long as the game ball is fired toward the location of the probability variation attacker (eg, the special winning opening 540 (see, eg, FIG. 5)). This is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probability variation attacker while being controlled (controlled to a high probability game state with a probability close to 100%). Therefore, in this second modified example, the jackpot in the "mode in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the probability variation attacker" is referred to as "normal jackpot", and in the "mode in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the probability variation attacker". The big hit is called "probable variation big hit".

However, if it is "a mode in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker," it is controlled to a high-probability game state with a probability close to 100%, and if "a mode that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker". Instead of being controlled to a low-probability game state with a probability close to 100%, it is "difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker when it is a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker". The mode may be controlled to a high-probability game state with a relatively higher probability than the “mode”.

As a method of creating a mode in which it is difficult and easy for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker, for example, apart from the special winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5) having the probability variation attacker inside, the probability variation attacker is not provided. It is conceivable to provide another special winning opening (not shown). Then, a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability variation attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2 -4) is a big hit game state that opens the special winning opening 540, it is difficult to enter the game ball into the probability variation attacker (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1 -5, the special figure 1-7, the special figure 2-1, the special figure 2-3) When the special winning opening 540 is not opened and the other big winning openings are opened, the big hit game state is controlled, It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult and a mode in which the game ball does not easily enter the probability variation attacker. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above mode as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult and an easy mode for the game ball to enter the probability variation attacker.

Further, as described above, in the case where the special winning opening 540 having the probability variation attacker inside and the other special winning opening (not shown) not having the probability variation attacker are provided, the big winning opening in the jackpot gaming state. The mouth may have a setting difference. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, it is easy to select a jackpot gaming state in which the other big winning opening is opened than at the big winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, it is more likely than other big winning opening. As the jackpot gaming state in which the special winning opening 540 is opened is easy to select, the jackpot gaming state in which the special winning opening 540 is opened can be easily selected as the setting value becomes higher.

As shown in FIG. 27, in such a second modified example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to the set value based on the extracted random number for symbol determination. With a probability according to, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and It is decided to be one of Special Figures 1-8. However, in this second modified example, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal big hit", the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 are "4R probability variation big hit", and the special figure 1 -5 and special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 and "10R probability variation big hit".

Specifically, the main CPU 101, with the common probability in the settings 1 to 4, the main symbol, the special symbol 1-1 (sorting probability 12.5%), the special diagram 1-2 (sorting probability 12.5). %), special figure 1-3 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-4 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-5 (sorting probability 12.5%), special figure 1-6 (sorting probability 12.5%), special chart 1-7 (sorting probability 12.5%), and special chart 1-8 (sorting probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in the setting 5, the main symbol, the special figure 1-1 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (sorting probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-3 (sorting Distribution probability 15.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 15.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 10.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 10.0) %), special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 15.0%), and special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 15.0%). Further, in the setting 6, the main symbol, the special map 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), the special map 1-3 (distribution probability 20 0.0%), special chart 1-4 (sorting probability 20.0%), special chart 1-5 (sorting probability 5.0%), special chart 1-6 (sorting probability 5.0%), It is determined to be one of the special figure 1-7 (sorting probability 20.0%) and the special figure 1-8 (sorting probability 20.0%).

That is, in the special figures 1-2 and 1-4 (both 4R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high set value ( For example, in the settings 5 and 6), the selection rate in the special figure 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than that in the special figure 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, in special figures 1-6 and special figures 1-8 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio in special figure 1-8 (10.5 in setting 5 and 15.0% in setting 6) (15. 0% and 20.0% in setting 6 are higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

Further, regarding special figures 2-2 and 2-4 (both 10R probability variation big hits) in which the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value In (for example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate in special figure 2-4 (30% in setting 5) is higher than that in special figure 2-2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% with setting 6) is higher.

By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the host control circuit 2100, as shown in FIG. 28, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-5, special figure 1 -7, special figure 2-1, special figure 2-3 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit in which the probability variation flag is not set to ON), regardless of the set value, the decoration that is always displayed on the display device 16, for example. The design is controlled so as to stop in the first mode.

On the other hand, when it is a special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 50. Control to stop at 0%). Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100, regardless of the set value, the first mode (selection rate 25.0%), or the second mode (selection). The rate is controlled to 75.0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 is higher than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% for setting 5 and 5.0% for setting 6). (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same big hit type (both 4R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative design will stop in the second mode (a mode having a higher degree of expectation for the player than the first mode) will be high.

Similarly, when the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%), or the specific mode (selectivity) (50.0%) so that it is stopped. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), the special ratio 1- 6 is lower than the selection ratio (10.0% for the setting 5 and 5.0% for the setting 6). The selectivity of 8 (15.0% for setting 5, 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). Thus, the probability that the decorative pattern is stopped in a specific mode (a mode that has the highest degree of expectation for the player) becomes high.

Further, similarly, when it is a special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0). %) to stop at. Further, when the main symbol is a special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation big hit), the host control circuit 2100 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, settings 5 and 6), the selection ratio of the characteristics of FIG. 2-2 (20.0% for setting 5, 10.0% for setting 6) The selectivity of 4 (30.0% for setting 5, 40.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same big hit type (both 10R probability variation big hits), the high setting value is different from the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4). As a result, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific manner becomes high.

In this way, also in the second modified example, as in the first modified example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, even if the big hit types are the same, the decoration is performed according to the set value. It is feasible that the stop mode of the symbols can be different. Especially when it is a high setting value (for example, setting 5 and 6), when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the combination probability determined to be a particular big hit type (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) is the same. Also, compared to when the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4), with a high probability, it is possible to stop the decorative pattern in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player. Become.

In each of the above-described first modified example and second modified example, by changing the selection rate of the main symbol depending on the set value, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be changed according to the set value. doing. That is, the host control circuit 2100 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the set value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, according to the set value. The stop design of the decorative design can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop design of the decorative design may be different depending on the set value under the control of the host control circuit 2100.

According to the first modified example and the second modified example described above, it is possible to provide a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, to provide a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability variation inrush rate, and the shortened time inrush rate. It will be possible.

[5. Outline of drawing control method]
Here, an outline of the drawing control process executed by the display control circuit 2300 when the control signal of the drawing request is output from the host control circuit 2100 to the display control circuit 2300 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flow of image data (moving image data and still image data) during the drawing control process.

In the present embodiment, data (compressed data) of an image (moving image and/or still image) displayed on the liquid crystal screen of the display device 16 is stored in the CGROM 2060 in the CGROM substrate 2040. Then, when the control signal of the drawing request is input to the display control circuit 2300, the display control circuit 2300 first reads the image compressed data from the CGROM 2060 and decodes (decompresses) it. At this time, when the moving picture compressed data is read, the moving picture decoder 2340 in the display control circuit 2300 decodes the moving picture compressed data, and when the still picture compressed data is read, in the display control circuit 2300. The still image decoder 2350 decodes the still image compressed data.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 writes the decoding result (image expansion data) of the image data in a predetermined buffer designated as the texture source. In this embodiment, a movie buffer or texture buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM) or a sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 2370 is designated as the texture source. For example, when displaying one moving image, the expanded moving image data (decoding result) is written to the movie buffer in the SDRAM 2500. Further, for example, when displaying one still image, the decompressed still image data is written in the sprite buffer in the built-in VRAM 2370.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 specifies a rendering target for writing the rendering (drawing) result of the image data. As the rendering target, for example, a frame buffer provided in the SDRAM 2500 (external RAM) or a frame buffer provided in the built-in VRAM 2370 can be designated.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 operates the rendering engine 2410 to perform rendering processing on the decoding result of the image data written to the texture source, and writes the rendering result to the rendering target. It should be noted that in this process, the rendering process is performed according to the designation information (various information input from the 3D geometry engine 2400) such as the scaling and rotation of the moving image.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 displays the rendering result (display output data) written in the rendering target on the display screen of the display device 16.

In this embodiment, two frame buffers are prepared as rendering targets. When the rendering result is written from the rendering engine 2410 to the frame buffer, the frame buffer to which the rendering result is written is switched for each frame. For example, when a rendering result is written in one frame buffer in a predetermined frame, the rendering result is written in the other frame buffer in the next frame, and the rendering result is written in one frame buffer in the next frame. That is, in the present embodiment, the process of writing the rendering result in one frame buffer and the process of writing the rendering result in the other frame buffer are alternately switched for each frame.

Further, in the above-described rendering result writing process and display process flow, the rendering result written in one frame buffer in a predetermined frame is displayed on the display screen of the display device 16 in the next frame (one The frame buffer function can be switched from the drawing function to the display function). The rendering result written in the other frame buffer in the next frame is displayed in the display screen of the display device 16 in the next frame (the function of the other frame buffer is switched from the drawing function to the display function). That is, in the present embodiment, the rendering result display processing in one frame buffer and the rendering result display processing in the other frame buffer are alternately switched for each frame and executed.

[6. Overview of voice playback control method]
Next, the outline of the audio reproduction processing executed by the audio/LED control circuit 2200 when the sound request is output from the host control circuit 2100 to the audio/LED control circuit 2200 will be described with reference back to FIG.

In this embodiment, the audio data output to the speaker 24 is stored in the CGROM 2060. The audio data stored in the CGROM 2060 is phrase compressed data specified by a 13-bit long phrase number NUM (000H to 1FFFH), and is a sequence of background music for one song (BGM) or a set of a set of background music. Up to 8192 types (=213) of effect sounds (preliminary sounds) and the like are stored in association with the phrase numbers NUM. The phrase number NUM is specified by the set value (operation parameter) of the voice command transmitted from the host control circuit 2100 to the command register 2250 of the voice/LED control circuit 2200.

The voice command is used for Individual Write for transmitting a 1-byte length setting value to any one of the many voice control registers built in the voice/LED control circuit 2200, or a continuous series of N voice commands. It is used for Block Write to transmit N set values to the audio control register group.

In any case, the voice control register to be accessed is specified by a 1-byte register address, and the storage capacity of each voice control register is 1 byte. Further, in this embodiment, a large number of voice control registers are secured by dividing into seven register banks. That is, since the register bank is divided into seven sections, the total number of voice control registers is theoretically 7×256 at maximum.

In this embodiment, the specific register address is the voice control register for register bank setting in all the register banks. Therefore, in order to specify any one of the 7×256 voice control registers, the register control bank is written in the voice control register for bank setting by the preceding voice command, and then the voice control belonging to the register control bank is written. A register is specified by a register address having a 1-byte length.

By the way, in the operation of setting the set value to the voice control register, it is not always necessary to directly specify the register address of the voice control register to be set, and SAC data (Simple Access Code Data) stored in the CGROM 2060 or A sequence code can be specified to complete a series of setting operations for a group of voice control registers. In order to realize such an operation, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 includes four simple access controllers 2260a (simple access controllers) and 16 sequencers 2260b (Sequencer) shown in FIG. ..

SAC (Simple Access Code) data for operating the simple access controller 2260a will be described. SAC data includes a register address (1 byte) of a voice control register and a set value (1 byte) to the voice control register. It is a data group of a maximum of 512 sets (=1024 bytes) associated with each other, and means an aggregate terminated by a SAC end code (FFFFH) (see FIG. 12).

In the case of this embodiment, a maximum of 8192 kinds (=213) of such SAC data can be provided, and the host control circuit 2100 outputs the 13-bit length SAC number to the SAC control voice control register (see FIG. 12). ), the simple access controller 2260a can function. The simple access controller 2260a that has started the function sequentially reads a group of SAC data specified by the SAC number from the CGROM 2060, and sets the set value indicated by the SAC data in the voice control register indicated by the SAC data.

Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 only needs to write (register) the SAC number in the voice control register for SAC control, and does not need to individually specify the register address of the voice control register to perform a series of setting operations. You can give instructions. In the SAC control voice control register, a standby time (standby information as attached data) that defines the start timing of a series of setting operations can be set, and the SAC number to the SAC control voice control register can be set. It is possible to delay the setting start timing of the voice control register by the simple access controller 2260a from the writing timing of.

Subsequently, a sequence code (Sequence Code) for causing the sequencer 2260b to function will be described. Like the SAC data, the sequence code is also a plurality of sets of data in which the register address (1 byte) of the voice control register and the set value (1 byte) in the voice control register are associated (see FIG. 12). However, unlike the SAC data, the sequence code can define a plurality of operation steps (a plurality of sequence steps) that can be intermittently executed after a predetermined waiting time.

In addition, in the voice control register for controlling the sequencer (Sequencer), for each of the sequencers SQ0 to SQ15, a waiting time (waiting information) that defines the start timing of the setting operation, the presence/absence of the repeating operation, and the number of times of repeating (loop information) ) Can be included. Therefore, the sequence code specifies a series of sound effects that are executed over a predetermined time.

As shown in FIG. 12, the plurality of operation steps are separated by a step end code (FFFEH), and the end of the plurality of operation steps are terminated by a sequence end code (FFFFH). In the case of the present embodiment, a maximum of 8192 kinds (=213) of sequence codes can be provided, and the host control circuit 2100 provides the sequence code number of 13-bit length and the attached data defining the operation of the sequencer to the sequencer (Sequencer). By writing in the control voice control register, a sequence of setting operations can be instructed to the sequencer 2260b.

In the present embodiment, such SAC data and sequence codes are stored in advance in the CGROM 2060 only in the required sets, and the group of SAC data and the group of sequence codes are specified by the SAC number and the sequence code number. Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the voice command for Write defines not only the direct setting operation to the voice control register but also the indirect setting operation via the simple access controller 2260a and the sequencer 2260b. It is also included when doing.

In order to realize the above operation, the host control circuit 2100 and the voice/LED control circuit 2200 have a parallel signal line (data bus) capable of transmitting/receiving 1-byte data and an operation management of 2-bit length capable of transmitting operation management data. A data line (address bus), a 2-bit length control signal line capable of controlling read/write operations, and a chip select signal line for selecting the audio/LED control circuit 2200 are connected.

The parallel signal line is realized by the data bus of the host control circuit 2100, and the operation management data line is realized by the address bus of the host control circuit 2100. The audio/LED control circuit 2200 is provided with three port numbers PORT having the upper 6 bits in common and the lower 2 bits being 00, 01, and 10, and the host control circuit 2100 has these ports. When the I/OREAD command or the I/OWRITE command for the number PORT is executed, the chip select signal CS becomes the active level in any case.

Then, the data output to the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address bus when the I/OREAD instruction or the I/OWRITE instruction is executed becomes the operation management data A0 to A1 for the voice/LED control circuit 2200, and these 2 bits A0. Based on A1 to A1, it is specified whether the 1-byte data of the data bus at that time is a register address, or write data or read data.

That is, if the address data is [00], the data bus data at that timing is evaluated as a register address, while if the address data is [01], the data bus data at that timing is write data or read data. It becomes data. Note that when the I/OREAD instruction is executed, it is read data, and when the I/OWRITE instruction is executed, it is write data.

Therefore, in the operation of transmitting a voice command for writing a predetermined set value in a predetermined voice control register, an I/OWRITE command is issued while changing the lower 2 bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the voice/LED control circuit 2200. It is realized by executing continuously. Specifically, the lower 2 bits A0 to A1 of the address data are changed from [00] to [01], while the 1-byte data of the data bus is changed from [register address of voice control register] → [voice control register]. To write data to], a predetermined voice command transmission operation is realized.

When transmitting the SAC number (13 bits), the sequence code number (13 bits), and the control data (standby information, loop information, etc.) that accompanies this, the write data has a multi-byte length, When the register address of the register is continuous, the operation management data A0 to A1 of [01] is repeated in the order of [00]→[01]→[01]→[01], and the write data of a plurality of bytes is transmitted. ..

The voice command transmitted in this manner is subsequently executed in the voice/LED control circuit 2200 as long as there is no communication abnormality. However, if a communication error is recognized, such as when the data of a plurality of bytes does not match each other, the voice command is not activated. Then, the error flag of the voice control register is set, and this error flag (status information STS) is an I/OREAD instruction that shifts the operation management data A0 to A1 of the address bus from [01] to [10]. Can be received by executing.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the final cycle in which the operation management data A0 to A1 are transited from [00]→[01]→... [01]→[10], error information (abnormality) of a plurality of bit lengths is obtained. FFH) can be obtained. Then, by retransmitting the voice command that could not be properly transmitted in parallel, the voice effect can be appropriately advanced. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the unnaturalness in which the voice effect suddenly stops.

On the other hand, in the data read operation by the I/OREAD operation, the lower 2 bits A0 and A1 of the port number PORT of the voice/LED control circuit 2200 are transited, and the I/OWRITE instruction and the I/OREAD instruction are continuously executed. It will be realized. When the read data has a length of a plurality of bytes, the I/OREAD instructions are made continuous for the required number of bytes.

Specifically, first, as an I/OWRITE operation, for the port number PORT in which the lower two bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [00], [register address of voice control register for storing operation status ( 1 byte length)] is output. Next, if the I/OREAD instruction is executed for the port number PORT in which the lower two bits A0 to A1 of the address data are [01], the necessary data such as the operation status can be obtained from the predetermined voice control register. You can

The voice reproduced by the voice/LED control circuit 2200 having the above-described configuration is a digital audio signal of the voice/LED control circuit 2200 in the form of a 5-bit signal (SCLK, LRO, SD0, SD1, SD2). The signal is transmitted to the power amplifier 2620, class D amplified by the digital audio power amplifier 2620, and supplied to each speaker as an analog audio signal. Specifically, the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is supplied to the lower speaker for bass, and the amplified output (analog audio signal) of the digital audio power amplifier 2620 is supplied to the player. Four normal speakers (for example, see FIG. 13 (L0, R0, L1, R1)) and two deep bass (vibration) speakers (for example, see FIG. 13 (SUB0, SUB1).

[7. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 51. However, in the following description (description of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. However, these are shown in FIG.

[7-1. Power-on process]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. For example, when a hall-related person turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on process (step S10), a setting process related to a set value (step S20), and a game return process (step). And S30) are sequentially executed. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to a power failure or an OFF operation of the power switch 35, Processing at the time of power failure occurrence described later is performed.

[7-1-1. Power-on processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value in the stack pointer as shown in the figure (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), and then performs a sub-control reception acceptance wait process of waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 can accept a signal (step S13). Then, after that, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process for various devices with a built-in CPU (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 validates the switch related to the set value (step S15). The switch related to the set value is a switch used when performing the setting process of step S20, and includes, for example, a setting key 328 for starting and ending the setting process, a setting switch 332 for changing the set value, and the like. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 validates the switch related to the setting (step S15), then performs a process of reading each switch (step S16), and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 31), a game permission flag for permitting the execution of the game is managed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not the execution of the game is permitted, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. .. The game permission process (step S17) will be described below.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption status identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power failure status identification flag is a flag for identifying the status when the previous power failure occurred. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change processing described later, etc., it is highly possible that the power is cut off before the setting change processing is properly completed. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the execution of the game is allowed as it is. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power failure is identified. In the present embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON until the power failure occurs. On the other hand, when power failure occurs during the setting change process described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF until the power failure occurs. In addition, the power failure status identification flag is also set to OFF when power failure occurs during an abnormal state in steps S722 to S727 described below. It should be noted that the power-off state identification flag is OFF when the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power has not been turned on in the initial state or the power has not been turned on for a long time. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means a game during which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is OFF. (same as below).

In step S1710, the main CPU 101 moves to step S1720 if the power interruption status identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and moves the game permission flag if the power interruption status identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710). Is turned off (step S1750), and the process proceeds to step S1720.

In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. This check of the work area also includes a check of whether the set value data that has been set is within the specified range (in the present embodiment, within the range of “0” to “5”).

Note that the work area of the main RAM 103 holds a general work area in which data is cleared when a backup clear process described later is performed and a data that is not cleared in principle even if a backup clear process described below is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. In this specific work area, for example, performance display data, set set value data, and the like are stored. It is data indicating a set value. In the present embodiment, the set value data of “0” to “5” correspond to the set values “1” to “6” of 6 levels, respectively. That is, for example, if the set value set is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S1730, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, and if normal (YES in step S1730), the process proceeds to step S1740. If not normal, that is, abnormal (NO in step S1730). If so, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760) and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the setting value data is not within the specified range (in the range of “0” to “5” in this embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

In step S1740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S1740, if a power failure occurs during a normal game or during a setting confirmation process described later (YES in step S1710) and the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S1730), the game permission flag is ON. Is determined. On the other hand, when the power failure occurs during the setting change process or the abnormal state (NO in step S1710), and the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is OFF. Is determined. Then, when the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission processing is ended. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process proceeds to step S1770.

In this specification, the power interruptions that occur during normal games, the power interruptions that occur during the setting confirmation processing, and the power interruptions that occur during the setting change processing are referred to as normal power interruptions, and steps S722 to S727 to be described later. The power cut that occurs in is referred to as an abnormal power cut.

In step S1770, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (the power switch 35 is turned on) while the setting key 328 is turned on, that is, whether the setting key switch signal is turned on. If the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1780, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 has been performed, that is, whether the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). Then, the process proceeds to step S1790, and if the backup clear signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step S1810.

In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

In this way, the main CPU 101 sets the setting key switch signal ON (NO in step S1740) even if the game permission flag is OFF due to the situation at the time of the last power failure or the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. If YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed with the setting key 328 being turned on, the game permission flag is turned on even if the game permission flag is turned off. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not the backup clear process described later needs to be performed. When the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S1810, the main CPU 101 sets a notification so that an error code indicating that the execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. After performing the processing of step S1810, the main CPU 101 ends the game permission processing. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the hall-related person confirms the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF. Can be understood. In this embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is set only when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key 328 is ON. It can be set to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the power supply operation is temporarily stopped to stop the power supply, and the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the setting change process described below is executed. In the above description, the game permission process is terminated when the process of step S1810 is performed, but instead of this, after performing the process of step S1810, the process returns to step S1740 to turn on the game permission flag. 32 may be satisfied (until YES is determined in step S1780 in FIG. 32), the processes of steps S1740 to S1810 may be looped.

[7-1-2. Setting process]
FIG. 33(a) is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 30), and FIG. 33(b) is a flowchart showing another example of the setting process of step S20. The difference between FIG. 33(a) and FIG. 33(b) is that the processing when the game permission flag is OFF in step S21 (NO in step S21) is different, and the other processing (step) is performed. The processing of S22 to step S28) is common to both. The setting process will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 33A, the main CPU 101 first determines in step S21 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S22, and when the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process ( The setting process ends without performing any of step S26).

When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S23), the main CPU 101 performs the setting changing process (step S24), and the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S22). If the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), the setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is executed.

When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S27), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28), and the setting change process (step S28). The setting process is ended without executing either S24) or the setting confirmation process (step S26). When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process without executing the process of step S28 (setting change). The process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are not executed either.

That is, if the previous power failure was a normal power failure that occurred during the normal game or during the setting confirmation processing described later, and if the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal, then YES is determined in step S21. At this time, the main CPU 101 changes the setting (step S24) and confirms the setting (step S26) according to the operation status of the setting key 328 and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. Alternatively, the backup clear flag process (step S28) is executed. When the power is turned on without operating either the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the setting change process (step S24), the setting confirmation process (step S26), and the backup clear flag process (step S28). Without executing any of the above, the process returns to the game return process (step S30), and after the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed.

On the other hand, if the previous power failure was abnormal power failure, or if the power failure occurred during the setting change process even if the last power failure was normal power failure, NO is determined in step S21. .. At this time, the main CPU 101 performs the setting change processing (step S24) and the setting confirmation processing (step S26) regardless of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. The setting process is terminated without performing any of the backup clear flag ON (step S28). Therefore, if an electric power interruption occurs during the setting change process or the previous power interruption is an abnormal electric power interruption, the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). Is determined (that is, the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are both pressed while the setting key 328 is turned on and the setting is changed to a controlled state), and the set value is confirmed. Only, the setting change process (step S24) is executed and the process returns to the game return process of step S30. After the game return process (step S30) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, when neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated or only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26). ) And the backup clear flag process (step S28) are not executed and the process returns to the game return process (step S30). However, in this game return processing (step S30), abnormal time processing (see step S38 in FIG. 37 described later) is executed, the game cannot be executed, and the game is stopped.

As described above, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33A, the power is turned on when the power interruption occurs during the setting change process or the previous power interruption is abnormal power interruption. Irrespective of the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330, the setting change processing (step S24), the setting confirmation processing (step S26), and the backup clear flag ON (step S28) The setting process is completed without executing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in another example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33(b), when the power interruption occurs during the setting change process and/or the previous power interruption is abnormal. In this case, the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S24) regardless of the operating status of the setting key 328 and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. You may do it. If the power is cut during the setting change process or the previous power cut was abnormal, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on are displayed. Regardless of this, by forcibly executing the setting change process (step S24), when the power is turned on while forgetting to operate the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the annoyance that forces a disconnection.

Note that in the flowchart shown in FIG. 33A, if NO is determined in step S21, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. It's finished. Similarly, also in the flowchart shown in FIG. 33B, if NO is determined in step S21, setting is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. The changing process (step S24) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 or/and the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 is discriminated, and the setting processing is ended or the setting change processing (step S24) regardless of the discrimination result. May be executed.

[7-1-2-1. Setting change processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process. The setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 33) is a process for changing the set setting value, but the setting change process can be ended with the same setting value as the set setting value. .. Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag does not turn ON unless the power is cut off to temporarily stop the power supply and then the setting change process is executed.

First, in step S2410, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON, the game permission flag is set to ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 32). Therefore, the setting change process is executed.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 moves to step S2420 and executes a backup clear process. This backup clear processing will be described later.

After executing the backup clear processing of step S2420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S2430, stores the setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 in the register, and moves to step S2440. The backup clear process may be executed at any timing between the start and end of the setting change process.

In step S2440, the main CPU 101 performs output setting of the setting change security signal. The setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. The setting change security signal is output for a certain time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2450, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. On the performance display monitor 334, the set value data stored in the register is converted into the set value and displayed. For example, when the setting value data stored in the register is “3”, the performance display monitor 334 displays the setting value “4” corresponding to the setting value data “3”. However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value set therein correspond to each other, it is not always necessary to display a number on the performance display monitor. For example, the set value data “0” to “5” are associated with “A” to “F” respectively, and when the set value data stored in the register is “3”, the corresponding “D” is stored. May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In step 2450, the setting display data stored in the register is converted into the setting value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334. However, since the previous data is discarded, it is determined in advance. The displayed initial value (eg, “1”) may be displayed. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, "1") or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, "8") on the performance display monitor. You may control so that it may be displayed on 334. When displaying a value that is not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. You may

In step S2460, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the person related to the hall can confirm that the setting change process is being performed by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2470, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2510.

In step S2510, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting switch 332 is pressed, and if the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S251), the process proceeds to step S2520, and the setting value stored in the register. After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. On the other hand, if the setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S2510), the process returns to step S2440. That is, in the setting change process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2470), step S2510, step S2520, step S2440 to step S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step). The processing from S2440 to step S2470 is repeated).

It should be noted that when the setting switch 332 is pressed (YES is determined in step S2510), the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the updated setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 in the subsequent step S2450. ..

In addition, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is set to "0" to "5" each time the setting switch 332 is pressed. ”(When the setting value data is “5”, the setting switch 332 is pressed to return to “0”). As a result, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the set value data stored in the register may be cyclically reduced from “5” to “0”, or the cyclic increase and the circulation may be performed depending on the pressing mode of the setting switch 332. Both reduction and reduction may be performed.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2470 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the process proceeds to step S2480. After shifting to step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of steps S2510, S2520, and steps S2440 to S2470.

In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is executed, the set value is confirmed. That is, in the setting change process, the setting value is fixed based on that the operation for turning off the setting key switch signal is executed (YES is determined in step S2470), and the operation for turning off the setting key switch signal is performed. If the setting switch 332 is simply pressed without executing (step S2510, step S2520, step S2440 to step S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is simply updated. The setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

Even if the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470), even if the setting key 328 is returned again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected to be ON). However, the set value cannot be changed unless the power is turned off (the power switch 35 is turned off). At that time (when it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470) and then the setting key 328 is returned again), the main CPU 101 sets the settings stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal turns off.

By the way, when a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the backup when the power is turned on after that (when the power is restored) When the setting change process (see FIG. 34) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status of the pressing operation of the clear switch 330 (state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal) (see FIG. 33(b)) , The setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned ON (the setting key switch signal remains OFF). In this way, when the setting change processing (step S24) is executed without turning the setting key 328 ON, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF, so that the main CPU 101 sends the setting key in step S2470. Without immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then OFF. The process moves to S2480 (set value is confirmed). In this case, the main CPU 101 may determine YES in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal is ON and further detecting that the setting key switch signal is OFF. Alternatively, even if it is not detected that the setting key switch signal is turned ON, it is possible to determine YES in step S2480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal is turned from ON to OFF.

In addition, in the above, when power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was abnormal power failure, it is forcibly forced regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and backup clear signal at power failure recovery. Although it has been described that the setting change process is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the states of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal at the time of restoration from power failure. Also, regardless of the status of the setting key switch signal or backup clear signal when power is restored, power is restored in the setting change state when power is interrupted (that is, when the power is interrupted, that state is retained and When the power is restored, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of power restoration, the process of returning to the held state may be performed).

In step S2490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2500, sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 and changes the setting. The process ends.

It is to be noted that when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470, the command indicating that the setting key switch signal is turned off, that is, the command indicating that the setting change process has ended The initialization command will be transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

When the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 33) ends, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 30) ends, and the process returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 30).

In addition, when the game can be executed through the game return process described later after the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 33) is executed, in a certain period after the game is started, or the game is started. At a predetermined timing after the start of, information indicating that the setting change process may have been executed, information indicating that the setting change process may have changed to a higher setting value, Information indicating that the setting change process may have changed to a lower setting value, and the setting change process changed the setting value in multiple steps or more (for example, in two or more steps such as setting 6 to setting 4). Information relating to the setting change processing, such as information indicating that there is a possibility, may be displayed on the display device 16 or the like, for example. For example, the variation pattern of the effect or the decorative pattern performed on the display device 16 or the like can be made different between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or is changed to a higher set value by the setting change process. To be different when the setting value is changed to a low setting value, or to be different when the setting value is changed in multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed in multiple steps. Is also good.

The above-mentioned setting change security signal output period and the period during which the setting change code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end of the setting change process. Has become. However, these periods do not have to match exactly.

The above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF internally. A command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S24 is started, each time the setting switch is pressed in step S2510, and the process of step S2480 is executed. By doing so, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the like may be informed that the setting is being changed, that the setting value has been changed, and that the setting change has been completed.

[7-1-2-1-1. Backup clear processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clear process of step S2420 (see FIG. 34). This backup clear process is a process of clearing the information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in this backup clear processing, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

The main CPU 101 first determines in step S2421 whether the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), the process proceeds to step S2422. Move on to.

In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change processing, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear processing is being executed during the setting change processing where the previous power failure occurred. Therefore, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change processing, the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared together with the backup clear processing executed during the setting change processing where the previous power failure occurred, In this backup clear processing, you may only partially clear it.

In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set set value data is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. It If it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. It should be noted that when the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared, but in that case, the game permission is turned off unless the game permission flag is turned off and the setting change process (see, eg, FIG. 34) is performed. The flag may not be turned on.

In step S2423, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. After that, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF, and ends the backup clear process. The notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed) is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by a command, and the display control circuit 2300 (see FIG. 10) indicates that the backup clear processing has been executed. The image shown is displayed on the display device 16, for example.

When the backup clear process is executed along with the setting change process (see FIG. 34, for example), the main CPU 101 causes the performance display monitor 334 to display the setting value information in step S2450 of the setting change process. Set notification. Similarly, even when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the notification setting may be performed so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

[7-1-2-2. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process in step S26 (see FIG. 33) is a process for confirming the set setting value. The set value that has been set is stored in the main RAM 103.

First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the processing without executing the setting confirmation processing.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above. The setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

In step S2630, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating set set value data. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”, the performance display monitor 334 displays “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” as information indicating the set value.

In step S2640, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the hall-related person can confirm that the setting confirmation process is being performed by confirming the display on the error notification monitor 336.

In step S2650, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S2650), the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are looped (the processes of steps S2620 to S2650 are repeated). It will be.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S2650 that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650), the process proceeds to step S2660. Upon proceeding to step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends the processing of steps S2620 to S2650.

It should be noted that when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2650 (YES in step S2650), in step S37, which will be described later, the power interruption recovery command is the host control circuit 2100 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended. Will be sent to.

In step S2660, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2670, sets non-notification so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and the setting confirmation process. To finish.

When the setting confirmation process of step S26 (see FIG. 33) is completed, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 30) is completed, and the process returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 30).

[7-1-3. Game return processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the game return processing. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 30), a process of returning to a state where the game can be executed is performed on the assumption that the game permission flag is ON. The game return processing will be described below.

First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormal time process of step S38. This abnormal time process will be described later.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32 and performs a process of validating all the switches.

In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup clear signal is OFF. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S34.

In step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption status identification flag is ON. If the situation identification flag at the time of power failure is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during normal game (playing in which neither the setting change processing nor the setting confirmation processing is performed) or the setting confirmation processing, and is set. It is set to OFF when power interruption occurs during the change process. Therefore, the process of step S35 is performed when the last power failure occurred during the normal game or the setting confirmation process.

In step S35, the main CPU 101 initializes a work area that requires an initial value when power is restored.

Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of restoration of the power interruption is the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting indicating that it is the high-probability gaming state.

Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for restoration from power failure (power restoration command) to the sub control circuit 200. This command also includes setting value information about the set setting value. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 30), and a series of power-on processes ends. As a result, the game can be executed. The above-mentioned power failure recovery command functions as a command indicating that the power failure is being recovered, or a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S33 that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to backup clear processing in step S39. This backup clear process is similar to the backup clear process of step S2420 shown in FIG. 34 (backup clear process shown in FIG. 35), and therefore its explanation is omitted.

When the backup clear processing of step S39 is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to step S40 and initializes the work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) for RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 30), and a series of power-on processes ends. As a result, the game can be executed. The above initialization command is used as a command indicating that the setting change processing has been completed (the backup clear processing is also being executed) or a command indicating that the backup clear processing without the setting change processing has been executed. Function.

In addition, the above-mentioned setting confirmation security signal output period and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end of the setting confirmation process. Has become. However, these periods do not have to match exactly.

[7-1-3-1. Abnormal processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the abnormal state process. As described above, the abnormal time process of step S38 (see FIG. 37) is executed when the game permission flag is determined to be OFF (NO in step S31) in the process of step S31 (see FIG. 37). Processing.

First, in step S381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, that the game cannot be executed, to the sub control circuit 200. When the host control circuit 2100 receives the abnormal command, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal on the display device 16 under the control of the host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300). Becomes

The main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to send the abnormal command. For example, the host control circuit 2100 has a backup failure when it cannot receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. May be determined.

In step S382, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323 described above.

In step S383, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that the execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thereby, the hall-related person can understand that the game is not in a state where the game can be executed (the game permission flag is OFF) by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that turns on when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the process proceeds to step S385, and the power failure occurrence process is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops steps S382 to S384 (the processes of steps S382 to S384 are repeated).

[7-1-3-1-1. Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether or not the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage has dropped to the predetermined level, the main CPU 101 performs processing when a power failure occurs.

The main CPU 101 first makes an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S3851). Then, the checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the main RAM 103 before the power failure is properly retained when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to hold various game data stored in the main RAM 103 even if the power supply is stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power failure status identification flag in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101 discriminates the status during power failure if the power failure occurs during a normal game (a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or the setting confirmation process. The flag is set to ON, and if it occurs during the setting change process, it is set to OFF.

After finishing the processes of steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 moves to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), and enters an infinite loop in preparation for stopping the power supply.

In this way, when the game permission flag is OFF, as described above, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the power is cut off to temporarily stop the power supply and the setting change process described later is executed. Has become.

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a power failure or the like for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure") and the process at the time of power failure occurs, it is possible to recover from the infinite loop It may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset unless the watchdog timer is updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is normally performed, but is not updated when the power-off occurrence processing is started. As a result, the power failure occurrence process is started due to the instantaneous power failure, and even if the infinite loop of FIG. 39 is entered, the reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the main CPU 101 is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

A rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103). In this case, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to constantly supply power to back up the data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by constant power supply. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is shut off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the saved data into the processing area, so that the load required for these processings can be reduced.

[7-1-4. Power-on process flow seen from operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, but the flow of the power-on process viewed from the person performing the operation (for example, a person related to the hall) will be briefly described.

[7-1-4-1. Flow of setting change processing]
First, the setting changing process, that is, the flow for changing the set setting value will be described. In order to change the set value that has been set, it is first necessary to perform a power-off operation (power switch 35 OFF operation). Then, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, and only the operation related to the setting of all the switches (for example, the operation of the setting key 328, the operation of the setting switch 332) is enabled, and the setting is changed. The processing is started, and the setting can be changed.

When the setting change process is started, a setting change code indicating that the setting change process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the extinguished state to the information indicating the set setting value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

In the setting change processing, backup clear processing, that is, initialization processing of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, notification of clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, initial setting of the work area of the main RAM 103, commands for RWM initialization When (transmission) is executed, a sound indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is output from the speaker 24. As will be described later, the display that the backup clear process has been executed is not displayed, but instead of or in addition to the audio output from the speaker 24, the display area of the display device 16 that the backup clear process has been executed is displayed. You may make it display on.

In the setting change process, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is cyclically increased. That is, the information indicating the set value is incremented by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the set value is "1" to "5", but is set when the set value is "6". When is pressed, it returns to "1" and is displayed.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state is terminated and the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting change code to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all the switches is validated.

As described above, during the setting change process, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328, the operation of the setting switch 332) of all the switches is enabled, and the other switches are all disabled. .. When the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated.

[7-1-4-2. Flow of setting confirmation processing]
Next, the setting confirmation process, that is, the flow for confirming the set setting value will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process executed on condition that the game permission flag is internally turned on, and is not executed internally when the game permission flag is turned off.

In order to confirm the set value that has been set, on condition that the game permission flag is internally turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on while the power is not turned on, and the backup clear switch 330 is turned on. The power switch 35 is turned on without a pressing operation.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, only the operation of the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, the setting confirmation process is started, and the set setting can be confirmed. Becomes

When the setting confirmation process is started, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is being performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the extinguished state to the information indicating the set setting value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the set value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

If the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting confirmation processing, the setting confirmation state ends, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display monitor 334 displays the performance display (base value). Is displayed and all switch operations are enabled.

As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 of all the switches is enabled, and the other switches are all disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. When the setting key 328 is turned off, all the switches are activated. As described above, the setting confirmation process may be a process that can be executed during the normal game regardless of the operation of the power switch 35.

[7-1-4-3. Flow in abnormal process]
As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF internally, the setting change process can be executed but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, an operation for executing the setting change process (the setting key 328 is turned ON and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed while the power is not turned on). In addition, when the operation for executing the setting confirmation process is performed without performing the (ON operation of the power switch 35), the backup process (details described later) without the setting change process is performed, or simply. When only the operation of turning on the power is performed, the abnormal time process is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of the abnormal time process will be described.

After turning on the power switch 35, the operation of all the switches is invalidated, and only the operation related to the setting of all the switches (for example, the operation of the setting key 328, the operation of the setting switch 332) is enabled (internal). When abnormal, processing is started). The reason that the operation related to the setting is validated is that the game permission flag can be turned on by executing the setting change process.

When the abnormal time process is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. This allows the operator to confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating an error.

Further, when the abnormal time process is started, the operation related to the setting is also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal time process is started, any operation will not react, and unless the above-mentioned setting change process is performed after the power switch 35 is turned off, the pachinko game can be executed. Machine 1 cannot be restored. It should be noted that the operation of all the switches being invalid means a situation in which each device controlled by the sub control circuit 200 cannot be stopped at all, and each device controlled by some sub control circuits 200 (for example, The LEDs 25) also include those in a controllable state.

[7-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S52).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process of outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information relating to the game processed in the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700. It

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for restoring the saved values of the registers (step S57). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[7-2-1. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a starting mouth winning detection process (step S61). The starting mouth winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc. is set at the time of winning the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the special winning opening passing detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set at the time of winning the special winning opening 540.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sphere passage detector passage detection process (step S64). In the ball passage detector passage detection processing, based on the fact that the passage detection of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is detected by the ball passage detector (not shown), the lottery result of the ordinary symbol game ( Random number). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[7-2-1-1. Starting mouth winning detection processing]
FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the starting mouth winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The starting mouth winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (step S71). When the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first start opening switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S81.

In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later.

In step S73, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number for the first special symbol and a random number for symbol determination, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the first starting winning a prize.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of held first start winning awards (the number of held first special symbols) is less than 4 (step S74). When the number of reservations is less than 4 (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S75. When the number of holding is four (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420, and proceeds to the processing of step S80.

In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of retained first start winning awards.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition (starting condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. Perform (step S76). Thereby, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random numbers is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the first special symbol, the jackpot random number determination table for the first special symbol, the symbol determination table and the jackpot type determination By referring to the table, the symbol designating command, the hit selection symbol command, etc. relating to the main symbol (the first special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S78). The fluctuation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described starting mouth winning detection process. In addition, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25), and selects a variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the reach determination random number value, and the effect selection random number value. , Perform the process of determining.

Note that, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 25, since the variation pattern stores the variation display time of the decorative pattern in association with each other, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process described above. The pattern designation command is information that can substantially represent the fluctuation time.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved first winning opening winning numbers (step S79). The command for increasing the reserved number of the first starting winning a prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and to the sub-control circuit 200 together with the command indicating the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S78 and the like. Is sent.

In step S80, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a reserved number overflow command for the first starting opening winning a prize, and then proceeds to step S81. The reserved number overflow command of the first starting opening winning a prize is a command indicating that the first starting opening winning has been made when the reserved number of the first special symbols is the upper limit (for example, 4), and to the sub control circuit 200. Is sent.

As is apparent from FIG. 42, the reason why the first start opening winning number reserve command overflow command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is that the setting value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process of step S72 described later. Is a prerequisite.

In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S82. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting port switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the starting port winning detection process.

In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process. This setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as step S72.

In step S83, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number for the second special symbol and a random number for symbol determination, and performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start winning combination.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained second winning opening winning numbers (the number of retained second special symbols) is less than four (step S84). When the number of reservations is less than 4 (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S85. When the number of holding is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, and ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of held second start opening winning a prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition (starting condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. Perform (step S86). As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the starting condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). Also in the second special stop symbol determination process, similar to the first special stop symbol determination process, based on the extracted jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol, the second special symbol For the jackpot random number determination table, the symbol determination table and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designating command, the jackpot selection symbol command, etc. relating to the main symbol (the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S88). This variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described starting mouth winning detection process, as in step S78, and the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). Then, based on the result of the big hit determination, the process of selecting the variation pattern is performed based on the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved second winning opening winning numbers (step S89). The command for increasing the reserved number of the second starting winning a prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and to the sub-control circuit 200 together with the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Is sent. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the starting mouth winning detection processing.

When the game ball winning in the first starting opening 420 and the game ball winning in the second starting opening 440 are simultaneously detected, which one of the setting check processing in step S72 and the setting checking processing in step S82 is performed? Only one of them may be performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S81), it is assumed that the number of the second starting port winnings held is four (NO in step S84). Also, the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 and does not start the second starting opening winning number hold command overflow command to the sub control circuit 200 to start. The oral winning detection process has been completed. This is because it is in the non-time saving game state that the set value suggesting effect described later can be effectively performed.

[7-2-1-1-1. Setting check process]
FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting check processing by the main CPU 101, and this setting check processing is the same processing in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 42 for both). The setting check process is a process of checking whether or not the set setting value is normal. In this setting check process, for example, the same process as the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 32) may be performed, but in the present embodiment, the set value set is The focus is on checking for normality.

As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 first checks in step S721 whether the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a prescribed range). As described above, in the present embodiment, since “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the setting value data corresponding to the setting values “1” to “6”, here, the setting value data is “ It is determined whether or not it is within the range of "0" to "5". When the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S721), the setting check process is ended. When the set value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. When determining that the special symbol is being variably displayed (YES in step S723), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S724, and when determining that the special symbol is not being variably displayed (NO in step S723), proceeds to step S725.

In step S724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the special symbol that is being variably displayed. That is, even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (both see FIG. 42) with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25), The variable display of the special symbol is continued and the special symbol is not stopped and displayed. And after that, it moves to step S726.

For example, when a game ball is won in the starting openings 420 and 440 while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the main CPU 101, the step is performed during the variable display of the special symbol (before the variable display of the special symbol is finished). The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be executed. When determining that the main CPU 101 is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S721), even if the special symbols are being displayed in variation, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbols in the variation display is not displayed. Even), the game permission flag is turned off, and the abnormal time process is executed. In this case, the game cannot be executed unless the power is turned off once and the setting change process is executed. Therefore, the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol that is being displayed is cleared in the backup clear process, including the pending data. The Rukoto.

In step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the game ball from being launched. That is, the payout/launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) is controlled so that electric power is not supplied to the firing solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player holds the firing handle 32 and turns the handle 32 in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not shot and the player cannot play the game.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the game ball from being launched in step S726, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process at abnormal time of step S727.

In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended when the special symbol is not in the variable display, or even if the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and waiting for the start of the next variable display, the variable display of the special symbol starts. Not done. After finishing the process of step S725, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S726.

In the abnormal time process of step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same process as the abnormal time process of step S38 (see FIG. 37). That is, the processing of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 38 is performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the power failure occurrence processing of step S385, that is, the figure The processing of steps S3851 to S3854 shown in 39 is performed.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420 and at the time of winning the game ball to the second starting opening 440, and the main RAM 103 is checked. If the stored set value data is not normal, the execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even when the game is being executed, it becomes impossible to continue the game when the set value data is not normal, unless the power is turned off and then turned on again to perform the setting change process. Unable to play the game. Thereby, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously played when the setting is not normal.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the set value data is not appropriate in step S721, even if the variable display of the special symbol is not started yet and is held, the power is once turned off and then turned on again. Since the game cannot be executed unless it is thrown in and the setting change process is performed, all the various data (for example, a big hit determination random number) stored in the main RAM 103 for holding are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the held various data are based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 or the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, all Cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent processing from being performed on the basis of setting values that are not normal for the various types of pending data, and it is possible to improve security.

Further, as described above, the setting check process is the same in step S72 and step S82 (both of which are shown in FIG. 42). Therefore, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 (NO in step S721), the main CPU 101 in step S724. , Prohibits the stop of the second special symbol in the variable display when the special symbol in the variable display is not only the first special symbol but also the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball has won the second starting opening 440 (NO in step S721), in step S724, The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol in the variable display, not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the second special symbol but also in the first special symbol.

Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 (NO in step S721), in step S725. The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 (NO in step S721), in step S725, The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of turning on the power (see step S1730 of FIG. 32) and at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440. Not limited, for example, during setting confirmation processing (see step S24 in FIG. 33), during setting change processing (see step S26 in FIG. 33), during backup clear processing (see FIG. 35), variable display of special symbols starts When, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, when the passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9) detects passage, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped, etc., the setting check process is triggered by a predetermined timing. You may do it. It should be noted that the above-mentioned predetermined timings are listed as examples. Further, the setting check process may be performed not only with a specific timing as a trigger, but also with a plurality of timings (for example, all or some of the above timings) as a trigger. Even in such a case, for example, it is possible to prevent the game from being continuously played when the setting is not normal.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process, it is impossible to immediately turn off the game permission flag to proceed with the game regardless of whether it is in the big hit game state or not. Although it is made possible, the timing is not limited to this, and the timing of determining that the set value data is not normal in the setting check processing and the timing of making the execution of the game impossible may be shifted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may be caused by the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has won in the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440. However, since it is not preferable that various determination processes (eg, big hit determination process) be performed in a state where the set value data is not normal, various determination processes are not performed, and after the variable display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined time, It is preferable to stop the special pattern by losing.

Although not shown in FIG. 43, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable that the stop of the normal symbol is also prohibited if the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. .. Further, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

[7-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process as shown in the figure (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described power-on process and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial value random number updating processing (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101, in accordance with the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in step S93 and step S94, the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display section 74) and the normal symbol display section 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. Thereby, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74) and normal symbol display portion 71, and the special symbol display portion (first special symbol). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform a variable display and a stop display for the special symbol or the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command relating to game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores it in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage/game state data generation process (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage/game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability variation flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage/game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[7-3-1. Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values ("00" to "08") written in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control status flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing a process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 45, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the value of the read control state flag, whether or not to execute each process of steps S102 to S110 described below. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of steps S102 to S110. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S102 to S110. Before reaching the predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing the respective processes. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S102). In this process, the main CPU 101, when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, checks the number of pending displays of the variable display of the special symbol, and if the pending number is not “0” (When there is a reserved ball), the result of the jackpot determination obtained in the starting mouth winning detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the like are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets it to the variation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variable display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting mouth winning detection process has elapsed, the special symbol variation time management process described below is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the number of held balls is “0” (when there is no held ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying a demo screen. This special symbol storage check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variation time management process (step S103). In this process, the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value indicating the special symbol variation time management process (“01”), when the variable display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the control state flag, the special symbol described later. A value (“02”) indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the post-determination waiting time is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S103 has elapsed, the special symbol display time management process described below is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines the big hit when the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process and the post-determination waiting time set in the process of step S103 has elapsed. Determine whether the result is a "big hit". When the jackpot determination result is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S105), which will be described later, in the control state flag to set the big hit start interval. Set the corresponding time in the latency timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the big hit start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S110) described later. That is, in this case, the special symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is the value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has passed, In order to open the winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. In addition, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a later-described special winning opening opening process (step S106) in the control state flag, and the opening upper limit time of the special winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) to the special winning opening time timer. That is, this processing is set to execute the after-mentioned special winning opening opening processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process of opening the special winning opening, the condition that the special winning opening winning counter is a predetermined number or more, and the opening It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets, in the control state flag, a value (“05”) indicating a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107) described later, and sets a special winning opening residual ball monitoring time in a waiting time timer. To do. That is, by this process, after the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time set in step S107 has elapsed, it is set to execute the special winning opening residual ball monitoring process described later. Immediately before the end of the processing for opening the special winning opening, an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107). In this process, when the control state flag has a value (“05”) indicating the special winning opening residual ball monitoring processing, and the special winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, the main winning opening counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum number of times of opening the special winning opening (that is, the final round) is satisfied. When determining that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management processing in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the inter-round interval in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the inter-round interval elapses, the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S107 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the big hit end interval (big hit end interval). Time) to the wait timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit ending interval set in this process has elapsed, the big hit ending interval process described below is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening times, the main CPU 101 performs the special winning opening pre-opening waiting time management processing (step S108). In this processing, the main CPU 101 opens the special winning opening when the control state flag is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time before opening processing for special winning opening and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed. The value of the frequency counter is stored and updated so as to be incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the special winning opening opening process in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this processing, the processing during the opening of the special winning opening (step S106) is set to be executed again. In addition, immediately before the completion of the waiting time management process before the special winning opening reopening, a special winning opening opening display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

In addition, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening opening number counter is equal to or larger than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit ending interval process (step S109). In this process, the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process, and when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed, a value indicating the special symbol game end process (“ 08") in the control status flag. That is, by this processing, the special symbol game ending processing described later is set to be executed after the processing of step S109. In addition, when the above-mentioned main symbol is any of the special figure 1-2, the special figure 1-8, and the special figure 2-2, the main CPU 101 performs control for shifting the game state to the high-probability game state. , If the above-mentioned main symbol is any of special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, and special figure 2-1, the control to make the game state a low probability game state (probability variation flag OFF) To do.

Next, the main CPU 101, if the jackpot gaming state is over, or if the result of the jackpot determination is "miss", performs a special symbol game ending process (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is the value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of reserved pieces (starting storage information) by “1”. To do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the variable display of the next special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S110, the special symbol storage check process (step S102) described above is set to be executed. When this special symbol game ending process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the jackpot gaming state and the jackpot determination result is “miss”, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to “00”, “01”, “02”, and “08”. Set in order. Thereby, the main CPU 101, the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104) and the special symbol game end process (step S110). Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

Moreover, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “00”, “01”, “02”, “03” when the game state is not the big hit game state and the result of the big hit determination is “big hit”. To do. Thereby, the main CPU 101, the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104) and the big hit start interval management process (step S105). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the big hit game state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, and “06” when the control to shift to the big hit game state is executed. Accordingly, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special winning opening opening processing (step S106), the special winning opening remaining ball monitoring processing (step S107), and the special winning opening re-opening waiting time management processing (step S108) in this order. It executes at a predetermined timing to execute the big hit game state.

When the termination condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special winning opening opening process (step S106), the special winning hole remaining ball monitoring process (step S107), the big hit ending interval process (step S109), and the special symbol game ending process (step S110). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order to end the jackpot gaming state.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process of step S94 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 44 (see FIG. 51 described later) also branches the process flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from the small module to the parent module is possible with a call instruction when the processing is branched depending on the status. As a result, the capacity of the program can be reduced in the present embodiment as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[7-3-1-1. Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads the control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not “00” (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is “00” (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of retained second start winnings (variable display of the second special symbol) (second startup memory number) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of held second starting mouth prizes is "0" (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and the number of held second starting mouth winnings is not "0". If determined (NO in step S113), the process proceeds to step S121.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first starting winnings (variable display of the first special symbol) (first starting memory number) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of held first starting mouth prizes is not "0" (NO in step S114), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S115 and determines that the number of held first starting mouth prizes is "0". If determined (YES in step S114), the process proceeds to step S120.

In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first stored memory number corresponding to the number of reserved first startup opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol that is being variably displayed or is being held. In the first special symbol starting storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the variable display is stored as the starting memory information. Then, in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the four first special symbols that are held. Data (information) is stored as start memory information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area is, for example, a big hit determination random number value extracted at the time of winning the first start opening 420, a random number value for symbol determination, data indicating a determined variation pattern, etc. Is included.

Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the first starting opening winning a prize. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S117.

In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 101 is extracted at the time of winning the starting mouth, and the jackpot determination random number value previously set in the first special symbol starting storage area (0) or the second special symbol starting storage area (0). Based on the jackpot determination table (not shown) corresponding to the type of winning start opening, the determination value data is acquired. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a “big hit” or a “miss” (big hit determination) based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets a variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the variation pattern determination process of step S78 or step S88 (see FIG. 42) in the waiting time timer. .. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

Further, in step S120, the main CPU 101 performs demo display processing for displaying a demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 sends a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

In addition, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second starting memory number corresponding to the reserved number of the second starting port winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (0) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, Whether or not there is a starting memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol that is being variably displayed or is being held is determined. In the second special symbol starting storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable display is stored as the starting memory information. Then, in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol held for four times. Data (information) is stored as start memory information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area is, for example, a big hit determination random number value extracted at the time of winning the second starting opening 440, a random number value for symbol determination, data indicating a determined variation pattern, etc. Is included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol memory transfer process based on the second starting opening winning (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol starting storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol starting storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S117, executes the processing of steps S118 and S119, and then ends the special symbol storage check processing.

[7-3-2. Special symbol display time management processing]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (fluctuation display start waiting time) set by the waiting time timer after the fluctuation display is confirmed has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is “big hit” (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not the “big hit” (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S140.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the hour/hour counter, the hour/hour flag, and the probability variation flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S136.

In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). As a result, the jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 22, FIG. 26 or FIG. 27) and refers to the special symbol (type of symbol designating command) round number upper limit value (big winning opening number upper limit value) ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not the remaining round number is displayed in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving count subtraction process. The time reduction processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (step S141). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[7-3-2-1. Time reduction processing]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the time saving number subtraction processing by the main CPU 101. The time reduction processing is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management processing described above or the big hit ending interval processing described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S151). The hour/hour count counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set hour/hour count reaches 0. When the value of the hour/hour counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the hour/hour subtraction process. Note that, although the details will be described later, the number of times set as the time saving counter is 100 times or 10,000 times in the present embodiment.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the hour/hour counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the hour/hour counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the hour/hour subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as the time saving flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving count subtraction process.

[7-3-3. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the big hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The big hit end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“07”) indicating the big hit ending interval processing (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit ending interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit ending interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by an LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). The number-of-rounds distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether or not the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. Flag. When the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol big hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is “big hit” (YES in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S167. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not the “big hit” (NO in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S174.

In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a probability variation big hit (step S168). When it is a probability variation big hit (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S169. When it is not the probability variation big hit (NO in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability variation flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a prescribed number of hour-shortening times in the hour-hour reduction counter (step S172). In the present embodiment, the jackpot type determination table (FIG. 22, FIG. 26, or FIG. 27) is referred to, and the jackpot of 100 times of shortening times (for example, Toku-zu 1-1, Toku-ho 1-3, Toku-zu 2-1. Etc.), the time saving counter is set to 100 times, and the time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed (eg, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2). Etc.), the time reduction counter is set to 10,000 times. However, the time saving counter that is set when the jackpot continues to save time until the next jackpot gaming state is executed is not limited to 10,000 times, and even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall. The number of times is not realistic. In this way, by setting the number of times that can not realistically occur even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall in the hour saving counter, the time saving is substantially continued until the next big hit game state is executed. Will be done. Furthermore, when it is a big hit of 100 times of short-time reduction, counter processing is performed (100 times is set to the number of times of short-time reduction), and flag processing is performed when it is a big hit in which time reduction continues until the next big-hit gaming state is executed. (The time saving game state is continued as long as the time saving flag is ON).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern table setting process (step S173). The fluctuation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the big hit flag, that is, processing for setting the big hit flag that is set ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF.

In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction processing (step S175). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

[7-3-3-1. Fluctuation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The fluctuation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the power-on process or the big hit end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is on (step S181). When the power is turned on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S182. If the power is not being turned on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). Table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern when both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are ON in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25) (both big hit and loss). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S183). When the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S184. When the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. Table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern in the case where the time saving flag is OFF (both big hit and loss) in the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25). When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 ends the fluctuation pattern table setting processing. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is ON (both big hit and loss) in the variable time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 23 (or FIG. 25).

[7-4. Ordinary symbol control processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. Normally, the symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values ("00" to "04") written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 51 indicate a normal symbol control state flag, and this normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. Is stored in a predetermined storage area in the. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines, based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag, whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and makes it possible to execute any one of the processes of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching the predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 40) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol storage check process (step S192). In this process, the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control status flag is a value ("00") indicating the normal symbol storage check process, checks the variable number of the regular symbols held in the variable display, and the number held is "0". If not, processing such as big hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating a normal symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193), which will be described later, to the normal symbol control state flag, and the variation time determined in this process. Set the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the variation time of the determined normal symbol elapses, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 normally performs a symbol variation time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol variation time monitoring process (“01”), and when the variation time of the normal symbol has elapsed, the normal symbol control state flag will be described later. Normally, the value (“02”) indicating the symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the wait time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the wait time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, after the set waiting time after confirmation elapses, the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S193 has elapsed, a big hit. It is determined whether or not the determination result is "big hit". Then, when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric auditors product release setting process, and the normal symbol control state flag indicates a later-described normal electric auditors product release process (step S195) ( "03") is set. That is, this processing is set to execute the later-described normal electric auditors product opening processing. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not “big hit”, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game ending process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, the normal symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when it is determined in step S194 that the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric auditors product opening process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("03") indicating the normal electric auditors product opening process, the main CPU 101 says that a predetermined number of prizes have been won during the opening of the normal electric auditors product 460. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric auditors product 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electricity supplier opening time timer is “0”) is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (see, for example, FIG. 5) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game ending process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, by this process, the normal symbol game ending process described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out normal symbol game end processing (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 101, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process, decreases the data indicating the number of reserved symbols of the variable display of the normal symbol by “1”. To update the memory. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the variable display of the next normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the normal symbol storage check process (step S192) described above is set to be executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 normally ends the symbol control process.

[8. Sub control main processing]
On the other hand, the sub control circuit 200 (host control circuit 2100) including the sub CPU processor executes the sub control main process. This sub-control main processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub control main, and this processing is started when the power is turned on. 61, 72, 73, 74 and 98, which will be described later, are all flowcharts showing an example of the sub-control main processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 when the power is turned on. However, FIG. 52 is one of the representative examples.
Processing.

As shown in FIG. 52, the host control circuit 2100 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, and backup restoration initialization (step S201). ).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). A reset time (for example, 2000 ms) is set for the watchdog timer at the time of activation, and the power interruption process is executed when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes an operation unit input process (step S203).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes effect mode determination processing (step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process of determining the effect mode displayed on the display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

The effect mode determined in the effect mode determination process (step S205) includes a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value that has been set. This setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to the first example and the second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) has been performed beyond the holding upper limit. For example, the host control circuit 2100 counts the first starting winning opening overflow point, and when the reserved number overflow command of the first starting winning opening is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the first starting winning opening overflow point is set. Add one. Then, when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect in the effect mode determination process. In the non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag such as the normal game state is OFF, it is not easy to win the game ball into the first starting opening 420, and therefore, if the first starting winning opening overflow occurs, the player's discouragement cannot be measured. .. Therefore, by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow occurs in the non-time saving game state, it is possible to suppress the discouragement of the player without directly giving a loss to the hole. It will be possible. Further, some of the players suspend the firing of the game ball when the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 is the upper limit. In this respect, the game can be promoted by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning of the game ball of the first starting opening 420 exceeds the holding upper limit.

In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point, but the setting suggesting effect is not necessarily limited to this. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the reserved number overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the frequency of executing the setting suggestion effect is high, for example, it is preferable that the setting suggestion effect is difficult to infer the setting only once. For example, it is difficult to infer the setting only with information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, but it is possible to infer the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is possible to do so.

In addition, as described above, the reason why the first start winning combination hold number overflow command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is that it is determined that the set value data is normal in the setting check process of step S72. is there. Therefore, when the setting value data is not determined to be normal in the setting check process, even if the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit. The host control circuit 2100 does not add to the first start winning opening overflow point. Therefore, in a situation where the first starting winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, a predetermined point) when the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) is performed over the holding upper limit. When 50 points are 49 points), when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the holding upper limit, the setting check process of step S72 (FIG. 42) If it is determined not to be normal in (1), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the host control circuit 2100, and the game cannot be advanced. Becomes

In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 (for example, see FIG. 5) exceeds the hold upper limit. (See FIG. 42), setting that the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 exceeds the holding upper limit, provided that the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 440 exceeds the holding upper limit. You may make it suggestive production.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball wins a specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the host control circuit 2100 sets a specific winning opening among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (all of which are shown in FIG. 5, for example). , Randomly determined by, for example, a lottery. Then, while the reach effect is being executed, when the winning command of the game ball to the specific winning opening determined above is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed. For example, among players, there is a player who interrupts the firing of a game ball when a reach effect with a long variation time is executed. Therefore, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the reach effect, it is possible to prompt the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect. .. In addition, in the reach production, it may be immediately understood that the degree of expectation is low when the reach production is started. In such a case, for the player, the variable display is not started next until the reach effect is finished, which may reduce the interest. In this regard, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of the winning of the game ball to the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest. Moreover, if the game machine administrator can set the set value, the player may be suspicious that the set value of the pachinko machine on which he/she is playing is low, but this second According to the example, it is possible to reduce such a fear and suppress a decrease in interest.

In the case where the specific winning opening is randomly determined by, for example, a lottery among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (all of which are shown in FIG. 5, for example), It is preferable to keep it secret without disclosing which is the specific winning port. As a result, the player has an interesting point in which of the winning openings should be aimed.

In the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning openings are the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (all of which are shown in FIG. 5, for example). Among them, for example, it is determined randomly by lottery, but it is not always necessary to randomly determine the specific winning opening, and a fixed winning opening may be used as the specific winning opening.

Further, in both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the host control circuit 2100 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect, but the main CPU 101 may make the decision. ..

In addition, when the game ball is won in the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, if the specific winning opening is the starting opening, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 (refer to FIG. 42) is performed. Be seen. The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined that the setting check process is normal (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), not only the setting suggestion effect is not performed, but also the special symbol that is being variably displayed is prohibited from being stopped by the process of step S734. To do. Further, also with respect to the host control circuit 2100, even when the variation effect of the decorative symbol accompanied by the reach effect is being performed, the variable effect of the decorative symbol is continued. However, the host control circuit 2100 may stop the output of the sound effect by the voice/LED control circuit 2200, or may reduce the output volume.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control circuit 2300 executes drawing control processing (step S207). In this processing, the display control circuit 2300 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the display device 16 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 executes a voice control process (step S208). In this process, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output a voice based on the message (production designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 executes a control process for the light emitting mode of the LED 25 (step S209). In this process, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 performs light emission control for turning on or blinking the LED 25 based on the message (production designation information) transmitted from the host control circuit 2100.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes an accessory control process (step S210). In the accessory control process, the accessory that constitutes the accessory group 1000 or the operating member that constitutes the accessory is operated based on the effect designation information via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700. This process is for performing drive control of the staging drive motor, and will be described in detail later. In such a sub-control main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[8-1. Command analysis processing]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing by the host control circuit 2100. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub control main process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub-work RAM 2100a after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) (step S241).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed in order to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data has no error or missing.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the host control circuit 2100 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the host control circuit 2100 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the production including the production pattern may be selected by lottery, and only the type of production (presence or absence of dialogue notice, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) is selected as the production pattern. The effect contents (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process which is separately made into a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub lottery process, and then effect contents executed based on the effect pattern are selected as effect information by effect mode determination processing described later. ing.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the execution of the game, the setting check process is performed in step S72 and step S82 (see FIG. 42), and in this setting check process, the set value data is "0" to "5". 43 is not within the range (NO in step S721 of FIG. 43), the processes of steps S722 to S726 are executed, and then the abnormal condition process of step S727 is executed. However, for example, if the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is not likely to be executed. In addition, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting value data is "0" when the setting check process is not executed in step S72 or step S82 or the setting value may have been changed illegally. It is assumed that the value is within the range of "5" (for example, if YES is determined in step S721), the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting determination processing for determining the suitability of the setting value information. .. This setting determination process will be described below without being shown.

First, the main CPU 101, a specific timing (for example, at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420/second starting opening 440, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, the variable display of the special symbol is started. Command) indicating the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103. Then, the host control circuit 2100 having received this command determines the suitability of the setting value information (hereinafter referred to as “current setting value”) indicated by the command received this time. This suitability determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as “previous set value”) indicated by the previously received command matches the present set value.

Then, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the set value is normal if the previous set value and the present set value match, and the set value is abnormal if the previous set value and the present set value do not match. Is determined.

Further, when the received set value information is abnormal, the host control circuit 2100 executes a set value abnormal process. In the abnormal-time execution processing, for example, an image notifying that the setting value is abnormal is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, or instead of or in addition to this, notifying that the setting value is abnormal. This is a process of outputting a sound to be performed.

The above-mentioned determination of suitability of the set value information is not limited to the determination of whether or not the previous set value and the present set value are the same. For example, all the set value information received three or more times are the same. It may be determined whether or not there is a match between some of the set value information received multiple times (for example, the set value indicated by the command received two times before and the set value information this time). It may be determined whether or not there is. However, when the host control circuit 2100 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S24 in FIG. 33) has been executed, the current setting value is set to the sub-work RAM 2100a. However, it is not determined whether or not the past set value including the previous set value and the present set value match.

Further, the above-described setting determination processing (determination of suitability of setting value information) is preferably performed not only during execution of a game but also when power is turned on after power is cut off unless setting change processing is performed. .. The setting determination process executed when the power is turned on after the power is cut off will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

The setting determination process executed by the host control circuit 2100 described above may be executed in the command analysis process (step S204), or may be executed after exiting the command analysis process subroutine.

[8-2. Command transmission processing]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing by the host control circuit 2100. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub control main process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the sub-work RAM 2100a. To do. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a direct table registration process (step S252). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of setting a direct table corresponding to the message and the effect information stored in the direct buffer in a predetermined area of the sub-work RAM 2100a based on the message and the effect information. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 executes a message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process ends, the host control circuit 2100 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[8-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the message setting process by the host control circuit 2100. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 sets devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of setting the presence/absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, presence/absence of system operation, stage information, each performance information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process ends, the host control circuit 2100 ends the message setting process.

[8-2-2. Direct table registration process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the direct table registration processing by the host control circuit 2100. The direct table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100 performs processing for registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of registering, as a slave table, the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer (step S274). When this process ends, the host control circuit 2100 ends the direct table registration process.

[8-2-3. Message transmission processing]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the message transmission processing by the host control circuit 2100. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the host control circuit 2100, if the message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the “destination device” set in the message. Processing for transmitting a message to the client (step S281).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary direct table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process ends, the host control circuit 2100 ends the message transmission process.

[9. Extensibility of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the big hit probability, the reach probability, the variation time of the special symbol, the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability variation plunge rate, the time saving) according to the set value that is set. Although the inrush rate) is changed, it is not always necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one of them may be changed or a plurality of them may be changed according to the set value.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal symbol display portion 71, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a mode of "normal hit"), the normal electric auditors product 46 is predetermined. The state changes from the closed state to the open state during the period. Therefore, the player may be informed of the timing at which the normal electric auditors object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state or the timing from the open state to the closed state (that is, the timing of launching the game ball). In this case, the frequency of notifying the firing timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the notification frequency of the firing timing).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the backup clear processing (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clear process is always performed even when the setting change process (step S24) is executed. Therefore, when the backup clear process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is surely written. Is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which the data is cleared is defined by the backup clear process performed when the setting change process is executed and the backup clear process performed without executing the setting change process. You may make it different. For example, after the jackpot gaming state has ended, until a predetermined number of games have been executed (until a special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined number of times), a high-probability game state is set, and after the execution of a predetermined number of games has ended, a low probability is achieved. In a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to the stochastic gaming state (a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine), when it is controlled to a high-probability gaming state (before execution of a predetermined number of games ends), setting change processing The probability variation flag is set to OFF when the backup clear processing is performed without accompanying, and the ON setting of the probability variation flag is continued when the backup clear processing is performed along with the execution of the setting change processing (remaining high probability game state). The memory of the number of games is retained). Further, when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, when the same setting value as the previous time is set, the probability variation flag ON setting is continued, and when the setting value different from the previous time is set. The probability variation flag may be set to OFF.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each round game in the big hit game state, the big winning opening 540 is in an open state when the number of game balls winning the big winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls. When either of the conditions when the time reaches 30 sec is satisfied, the closed state is established. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit game state, the condition that the special winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions in which the special winning opening 540 is changed from an open state to a closed state are prepared (for example, a plurality of different expected values of the number of game balls that can win a game ball in the special winning opening 540 in one round are different). A condition may be prepared) and such a condition may be changed according to the set value so that a condition having a higher expected value as the higher set value may be easily selected. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value so that the opening time of the special winning opening 540 tends to be longer as the setting value becomes higher. To be In addition, by changing the count of the game balls in which the special winning opening 540 is changed from the open state to the closed state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more the number of game balls to the special winning opening 540 tends to increase. It is also possible to

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in the mode of normal hit, the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. By setting the time for which the accessory 46 is in the open state (opening time) to be different according to the set value, the higher the set value, the longer the opening time of the normal electric accessory 46 may be likely to be.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is a big hit that the probability variation flag is ON as in special figures 1-2 and 1-4, the next big hit game is executed after the big hit game state ends. The high-probability game state continues until it is done, but is not necessarily limited to this, at a specific timing (for example, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended. When the variable display of the special symbol is started), the transfer lottery of whether or not to shift from the high-probability gaming state to the low-probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, by changing the transition probability from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state according to the set value, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of continuation of the high-probability game state (from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state). Lowering the transition probability). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed at the time of winning the game ball to the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440. When it is determined that the process is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the transfer lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability variation flag is also OFF). Set).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the variation time of the special symbol, and the selection rate of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability variation plunge rate, the shorter hour plunge rate) are changed according to the set value that is set. Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above has been described, the provision of the setting difference is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the configuration may be partially changed. Hereinafter, another extended example in which a part of the configuration is changed will be described. It should be noted that configurations that are not particularly referred to in the description of other extended examples below are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment, but hereinafter, except for step numbers, for example, respective members such as the main CPU are designated by reference numerals. I haven't.

[9-1. Expansion example 1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 1 is a high-probability game until the next big-hit gaming state is started after the big-hit gaming state ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the result of the special symbol big-hit determination is a big hit. A so-called “probability variation loop machine” in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this extended example 1, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the big hit game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop count"), and when the loop count reaches this upper limit, the big hit game state ends. After that, the game state is controlled to a low-probability game state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as “limiter number”) can be changed according to the set value (such a game machine has a “limiter”). Also called "machine"). This will be described with reference to FIG. 58 is a table showing an example of the selection ratio of the limiter count in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 for each set value.

The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the extended example 1 has a loop number check means for checking the number of loops when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a big hit, and a limiter number for performing a limiter number lottery when the number of loops is 0. The lottery means, the loop number counting means for incrementing the loop number when the loop number is within the specified range (in the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and the loop number is a specified value (the limiter upper limit is 5 in this example). Then, the game state control means for controlling the game state after the big hit game state is finished to a low probability state, and the loop number resetting means for resetting the loop number when the loop number is a prescribed value are provided. The limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing when the big hit determination result is a big hit, at the start of the big hit game state, during the big hit game state, and at the end of the big hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the setting 1, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 25%, 2 times with a probability of 30%, and 3 times with a probability of 25%, for example. There is a 15% chance of being decided 4 times and a 5% chance of being decided 5 times. In setting 2, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 25%, 2 times with a probability of 25%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 20%. And 5 times with 5% probability. In setting 3, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 15%, 2 times with a probability of 25%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 20%. And is decided 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 15%, 2 times with a probability of 20%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 25%. And is decided 5 times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 5%, 2 times with a probability of 20%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 25%. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 25%. In setting 6, the number of limiters is determined to be 1 time with a probability of 5%, 2 times with a probability of 10%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a probability of 30%. It is decided to be 5 times with a probability of 25%. That is, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of expectation that a larger limiter count will be determined.

In this way, by changing the degree of expectation for the number of limiters according to the set value so that the higher the set value, the larger the jackpot gaming state and the higher-probability gaming state can be repeated more, one chance ( It is possible to change the prize ball amount given to the player in accordance with the set value in the opportunity until the low probability game state is controlled when the player wins once. Moreover, although the expected value for the number of limiters is changed according to the set value, since the number of limiters is determined by lottery, it is possible to prevent the player from guessing the set value due to the number of limiters. Has become.

In the extended example 1, the number of limiters is determined by lottery according to the installation value, but the lottery is not always necessary. For example, there is a concern that the player may guess the set value, but the setting The number of times of limiter may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as 3 times for 1.2, 4 times for setting 3 and 4 and 5 times for setting 5 and 6.

The number of limiters may be set separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be set for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, if the above limiter number is separately defined for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first limiter number for the first special symbol Is determined and is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit judgment of the second special symbol during the loop is controlled, the second limiter number for the second special symbol is not incremented without incrementing the loop number for the first special symbol. To decide. In this case, the loop may be ended (controlled to a low probability game state) when either the first limiter number or the second limiter number reaches the limiter number, or the first limiter number and the second limiter number. The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number.

Further, for example, when the number of the limiter is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Is determined when the number of big hits is a big hit, during the loop, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination, the loop Increment the number of times. When the loop count reaches the limiter count, the loop is ended.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described extended example 1 is a so-called probability variation loop machine, but it is not necessarily a probability variation loop machine, and for example, the above technical idea is applied to a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine. You can also do it. The "ST machine" means to control the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends to a high-probability gaming state without fail or based on a predetermined lottery result, and set the high-probability gaming state to a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number"). It is a pachinko game machine that continues until variable display of special symbols is performed, and ends the high-probability game state and controls to a low-probability game state when the variable display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times. Even with such an "ST machine", the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be changed according to the set value. In other words, the higher the set value, the larger the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state can be repeated, so that there is one chance (the opportunity until the low-probability gaming state is controlled when the jackpot is won once. ), it is possible to make the prize ball amount given to the player different according to the set value.

In the so-called “ST machine”, the “ST number” can be set to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but the ST number can be set to be different depending on the set value. .. For example, the main CPU of the “ST machine” can determine the number of STs by lottery, and make the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 6 times in setting 5. By setting the number of times to 75, the expected value of the number of STs can be increased as the set value becomes higher. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. In addition, when the number of STs is set to be different depending on the set value, it is preferable that the number of time saving is common to all the set values. For example, when the ST count or the expected value of the ST count is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 75 times in setting 6. It is conceivable that the number of time saving is common to all settings, for example, 60 times. Then, the sub CPU performs, on the display device 16, for example, an effect that allows the user to know that the high probability game state is maintained until the ST number reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games), and when the ST number reaches the certain number of games, Regardless of whether or not it is in the high-probability game state, it is preferable to perform an effect that is difficult to grasp in the high-probability game state, for example, on the liquid crystal display device. This makes it possible to change the ST number and the expected value of the ST number according to the set value while preventing the player from detecting the set value.

Further, also in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1, the setting check processing (step S72, step S82) is performed, for example, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening and the second starting opening. Then, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even in a loop (that is, when the jackpot gaming state and the high-probability gaming state are repeatedly executed), The number of loops does not reach the limiter number, and the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S2420) by executing the setting change process (step S24) (the probability variation flag is also set to OFF).

[9-2. Extended example 2-1]
The pachinko game machine of the expansion example 2 has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is defined by a role object, for example, as a flow-down area of the game ball, and normally it is difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, makes a small hit determination. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the determination of the small hit is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

In addition, in this extended example 2, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening, and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, for example, in the probability variation short time gaming state such as the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is lost, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it may not be performed even if the small hit is determined.

In addition, the main CPU, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a small hit, activates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. From the small hitting game execution means which executes the small hitting game which makes the opening mode from, and the fact that the game ball wins in the specific territory which becomes the opening mode by the execution of the small hitting game, through the payout/firing control circuit A payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as prize balls is provided.

In addition, in this extended example 2, the number of time saving is set to, for example, 5 times, and the specific opening is provided in the specific region. Then, for example, when the game ball wins in the starting opening as a normal hit in the time saving game state of 5 times, when a small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece operates and the specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific opening, the main CPU executes the big hit game. Further, when the normal winning does not occur in the time saving game state of 5 times, the main CPU ends the time saving game state and controls to the non-time saving game state. In the time saving game state, the game is played by hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, and in the non-time saving game state, by hitting the game ball toward the left side area of the game area by left hitting. A game is played.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 2, at least the second special symbol game is mainly performed by making the small hit probability in the second special symbol game different according to the set value, for example, a time saving game state. In the above, it is possible to vary the opening frequency of the specific area and thus the payout according to the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 for setting 1, 1/8 for setting 2, 1/7 for setting 3, 1/6 for setting 4, 1/5 for setting 5, and 6 for setting. And make it 1/4. In this case, as long as the variation time of the normal symbol is longer, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric auditors is, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value is, the higher the frequency of winning the game balls in the specific area becomes, and it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

In this extended example 2, the probability variation flag may be set to ON in the time saving game state, but it is not always necessary to set the probability variation flag to ON.

Further, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the main CPU, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case. .. When the main CPU determines that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S721), it turns off the game permission flag even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, Execute abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is the small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off, and the abnormal time process is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbols in the variable display is the small hit.

[9-3. Extended example 2-2]
The pachinko game machine of the expansion example 2-2 is provided with a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening, and the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening. Based on the jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "second special lottery").

Further, the main CPU, in the first special lottery and the second special lottery, the first game state (for example, probability change flag) in which the lottery of the first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “first special lottery”) is mainly performed. And the normal game state in which both the time saving flag is set to OFF), and the second game state (for example, the probability variation flag is ON) in which the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed. And an advantage game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF) and a game state control means capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a big hit is won with a specific symbol in the first gaming state, after the big hit game is finished, it is controlled to the second gaming state.

In addition, a general-purpose gate is provided on the right side of the game area, and when a game ball passes through the normal gate, normal lottery is performed. When the result of the normal lottery is a specific result (for example, normal win), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, electric tulip), thereby facilitating the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening. To be done. Therefore, when the game ball is fired toward the right side region of the game region and the game is performed, the second starting opening is compared with the case where the game ball is fired toward the left side region of the game region and the game is performed. The winning frequency of the game ball to is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the predetermined jackpot is a plurality of rounds. It is provided with a first big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game that is released over a number.

Further, the main CPU, in the second special lottery, performs a big hit determination of the second special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to the set value, when the result of this big hit determination is a big hit, a predetermined big winning opening A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, the main CPU, in the second special lottery, when the result of the big hit judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, it makes a win determination of a small hit, when the result of the win determination of this small hit is a small hit It also has a small hit game executing means for executing a small hit game.

The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, and 1/270 in setting 4. The setting 5 is 1/260, and the setting 6 is 1/250. Further, the jackpot probability in the second game state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, and 27 in setting 4. No. 1, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the main CPU executes a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds, and a result of the second special lottery. When it is a big hit, it has a second big hit game executing means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over a plurality of rounds. Even if the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit and the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, Good or different big prize holes.

Further, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to the settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. Further, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 in the setting 1, 1/8 in the setting 2, and 1/7 in the setting 3, regardless of whether the probability variation flag is ON or OFF. The setting 4 is 1/6, and the setting 5 is 1/6. As described above, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is higher than the small hit probability in the first special lottery, regardless of the set value, although it varies depending on the set value.

Further, the main CPU has a small hit game executing means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same big winning opening as the big winning opening that is opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit. When a game ball wins the special winning opening, the payout/launch control circuit operates the payout device and controls so that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning opening is smaller than that in the big hit game, so that the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

Further, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0. That is, the main CPU makes a small hit determination with a small hit probability of 0 when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

The big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, the main CPU, based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening, based on the winning display of the game ball to the second starting opening, and the first special symbol fluctuation display control means for displaying the variation of the first special symbol. The second special symbol variable display control means for performing variable display of the second special symbol. The first special symbol variation display control means, after the first special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the first special symbol is stopped so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. Further, the second special symbol variation display control means, after the second special symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined time, the second special symbol is stopped so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed.

The variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, when the game ball is won in the second starting port while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port, the first special symbol is being variably displayed. Even if the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port, when the game ball wins at the first starting port while the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed, even if the second special symbol is being variable displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Moreover, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same when the probability variation flag is ON and when it is OFF, but the second special symbol. The average time of the variation time of the second special symbol executed by the variation display control means is significantly different when the probability variation flag is ON and when it is OFF. For example, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol is 10 seconds in the first game state, 10 seconds in the second game state, while the average time of the variation time of the second special symbol is 1000 seconds in the first game state, It is set to 1 sec in the second game state. Special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. Is when the variable display of special symbols has stopped. Therefore, in the first gaming state, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening, although the second special lottery has already been performed, it takes a considerable time until the result of the second special lottery is displayed. Becomes

In this way, in the first gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is shot toward the right side region of the game region and the game ball is won in the second starting opening, the second special symbol It will take some time before the variable display of is stopped. Moreover, since the second special symbol is variably displayed in any one of a plurality of patterns having different variation times, the second special symbol is temporarily stopped in a mode indicating a small hit (it may be a small hit. Even if the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. Therefore, it is difficult to carry out so-called aiming, in which a game ball is won in the special winning opening with the aim of determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. Furthermore, in the first game state, when a game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game area, for example, a warning sound is output from the speaker under the control of the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, a game is played by shooting a game ball toward, for example, the left side region of the game region. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, by passing the game ball through the universal figure gate, it is easy to win the game ball into the second starting opening through the ordinary lottery, and the variation time of the second special symbol is also increased. It is as short as 1 sec, and in the second special lottery, even if it is any set value, it wins a small hit with a probability higher than 1/10, so a game in which a game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game area Done.

The average time (for example, 1000 sec) of the variation time of the second special symbol in the first game state is, for example, 50 times or more of the average time (for example, 10 sec) of the variation time of the first special symbol in the first game state. However, it is preferably at least 10 times or more.

In addition, the sub CPU, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), the decorative symbol variable display control means for controlling the variable display of the decorative symbol to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, for example. Equipped with. However, the decorative symbol variable display control means does not perform the variable display of the decorative symbol in synchronization with the second special symbol in a conspicuous manner in the first gaming state, even if the game ball wins the second starting opening. The variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol when the game ball wins the 1 start opening is performed in a conspicuous manner.

To elaborate on the example of the above “conspicuous aspect”, the liquid crystal display device has, for example, in the approximate center of the display area, a left symbol (first symbol), a middle symbol (second symbol) and a right symbol (third symbol). It is possible to display the result of the special lottery by variably displaying. Further, in a small area, for example, one corner of the four corners of the display area, a fourth symbol (for example, ◯ or Δ) that can be variably displayed (for example, blinking) in synchronization with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol Such a shape) can be displayed. The proportion of the first symbol to the third symbol occupying the display area is extremely large compared to the proportion of the fourth symbol occupying the display area, so the player's gaze is to the first symbol to the third symbol rather than the fourth symbol. It will turn. Then, for example, the sub CPU, in the first gaming state, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening, does not variably display the first to third symbols but variably displays only the fourth symbol, while When the game ball wins the 1 start opening, the first to third symbols are variably displayed and the fourth symbol is also variably displayed. In this way, in the first game state, even if the game ball is won in the second starting port, the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not performed in a conspicuous manner, and the game ball is in the first starting port. It is possible to realize that the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol when the player wins is performed in a conspicuous manner.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 2-2 described above, in the first gaming state, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed even if the gaming ball wins the second starting opening, but the second gaming state. Then, not only the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening is facilitated, but also the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second gaming state, when a game ball is won in the second starting opening, the probability of the result of the second special lottery being a small hit (one ninth to one fourth depending on the setting) is a big hit. Since it is higher than the probability (1/3 to 1/25 depending on the setting), the big winning opening by the small hit game is performed with a high frequency, without setting the time saving flag (that is, the normal lottery). It is possible to increase the chances of paying out game balls as a prize without increasing the execution frequency of. Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit varies depending on the set setting, even if the big hit game is not executed, the payout is given according to the set value set. Can be different.

Further, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the main CPU, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is also executed in this case. .. Therefore, the main CPU also performs the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 even when the game ball is won in the first starting opening during the variable display of the second special symbol in the second game state, for example. When the main CPU determines that the setting check processing is not normal (NO in step S721), it turns off the game permission flag and executes the abnormal time processing. That is, in the second gaming state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol that is being variably displayed is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU causes the small hit to occur. Without executing the small hit game based on the hit, the game permission flag is turned off and the abnormal time process is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variation in the second game state is a small hit, it also includes information indicating that it is the second game state and information indicating that it is a small hit. Unless the various data are cleared in the backup clear process, the game permission flag will not be set to ON.

[9-4. Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for controlling the jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is defined by a role object, for example, as a flow-down area of the game ball, and normally it is difficult (or impossible) for the game ball to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU makes a big hit determination of a special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to a set value, and when the result of this big hit determination is a loss, makes a small hit determination. Then, the small hit game is executed when the result of the determination of the small hit is a small hit. That is, the big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, but the small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

Further, in this extended example 3, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening, and the second Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the first special symbol game is mainly performed. On the other hand, for example, in the probability variation short time gaming state such as the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is lost, the small hit is won with a predetermined probability. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it may not be performed even if the small hit is determined.

Further, the main CPU, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a small hit, activates a predetermined movable piece, and the inside of the specific area. The small hitting game execution means which executes the small hitting game which allows the entry of the game ball to is provided. When the game ball enters the inside of the specific area by the operation of the predetermined movable piece in this way, and the game ball entering the inside of the specific area is detected (entered) in the specific mouth, the main The CPU controls the big hit game state. That is, the main CPU, when the result of the big hit determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is a big hit, the first big hit game in which a round game for opening the big winning opening is performed over a plurality of rounds. Based on the first big hit game control means for controlling the state, and the game ball entering the specific opening when the small hit game is executed, a round game for activating the predetermined movable piece over a plurality of rounds. The second big hit game control means for controlling the second big hit game state is provided.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 3, the ease of winning the game ball to the starting opening (for example, the execution frequency of the small hit game and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric auditors) is set as a set value. It is different according to. Also in this extended example 3, the main CPU is the result of the normal symbol determination based on the detection of the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player makes a right hit, is a normal hit. At times, the ordinary electric accessory is controlled from the closed state to the open state. When the ordinary electric accessory is opened, it is easy to win the game ball to the starting opening. As a method of changing the execution frequency of the small hit game according to the set value, for example, the probability of the normal hit in the normal symbol determination is changed according to the set value, or the variation time of the normal symbol is changed according to the set value. It can be realized by making it happen.

As a method of varying the ease of winning the game ball to the starting opening according to the set value, a method of varying the probability of normal hit in the normal symbol determination according to the set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of a normal hit is 1/60 in setting 1, 1/50 in setting 2, 1/40 in setting 3, 1/30 in setting 4, 1/20 in setting 5, and 6/setting 6. And reduce it to 1/10. In this case, as long as the variation time of the normal symbol is longer, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric auditors is, the higher the setting value of the ordinary electric accessory is, the more difficult it is for the game ball to win the starting opening. It becomes easier for the game ball to win the starting opening. As a result, the higher the set value, the more frequently the small hit game is executed, which in turn promotes the opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the payout speed according to the set value.

In addition, also in this extended example 3, when the game ball wins the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed by the in-CPU 101, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is performed. Executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned off even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, Execute abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is the small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small hit game based on the small hit. Without doing so, the game permission flag is turned off, and abnormal time processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag will not be set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbols in the variable display is the small hit.

[9-5. Expansion example 4]
Even if the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the pachinko game machine of the expansion example 4 is not immediately controlled to the big hit game state, but the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit. The condition device operates based on the condition device, and the accessory continuous operation device operates based on the fact that the game ball has passed (or entered) a predetermined area on the assumption that the condition device has operated. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the role object continuous operation right gate, and FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the role object continuous operation left gate.

As shown in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, the pachinko gaming machine of the expanded example 4 is provided with a character continuously operating left gate 1100 and a character continuously operating right gate 1110 in the game area. In addition, the distribution device 1120 that can distribute the game ball flowing down the game area to one of the left side continuous operation left gate 1100 and the right side continuous operation gate 1110 is a role continuous operation gate 1100, It is arranged above 1110.

The accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 are respectively provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (both not shown) capable of detecting passage of a game ball. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are normally disabled for detection of passage of the game ball, and are enabled based on activation of the condition device. In addition, the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the condition device having been activated, and then the game ball is operated to either one of the continuous character left operation gate 1100 and the continuous right object gate 1110. It is invalidated based on the detection of passing.

When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls the 8R big hit game state in which a round game of, for example, 8 rounds is executed. Further, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110, the main CPU executes a 2 round round game in which a 2R big hit game state (selection rate 50%) and 16 rounds. Which of the 16R big hit game states (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is decided by a lottery, and the big hit game state decided by the lottery is controlled.

In addition, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the role object continuous operation left gate 1100, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the role object continuous operation right gate 1110, a big hit The expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the game state is the same.

In addition, the game ball that has passed through the role continuously operating left gate 1100 or the role continuously operating right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead, is discharged from the pachinko gaming machine through the outlet. It may be configured as follows.

The distribution device 1120 distributes the game ball, which has reached above the distribution device 1120, to one of the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 by a regular operation. In the first posture in which the sorting device 1120 is tilted to the left, the game ball easily passes through the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 (see FIG. 59), and in the second posture in which the sorting device 1120 is tilted to the right, the game ball plays a role. It is easy to pass through the left gate 1100 for continuous operation of objects (see FIG. 60).

In the extended example 4, the ease of passing a game ball is different between the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, the operation of the distribution device 1120 is an operation of repeating the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds in the setting 1, and the first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1.3 in the setting 2. Second setting, a setting 3 repeats a first posture of 0.9 seconds and a second posture 1.1 seconds, and a setting 4 repeats a first posture of 1.1 seconds and a second posture 0.9 seconds. Operation, setting 5 is an operation of repeating the first attitude of 1.3 seconds and second attitude of 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 is an operation of repeating the first attitude of 1.5 seconds and the second attitude of 0.5 second. Thus, it is possible to change the mode of the big hit game state according to the set value.

In this extended example 4, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the character continuously operating left gate 1100, the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the character continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the big-hit game state is the same as when the game is played. That is, although the aspect of the big hit game state can be changed according to the set value, there is no difference in the prize ball amount paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the left gate sensor Is detected in the jackpot gaming state, when the passage of the game ball to the role continuously operating left gate 1100 is detected and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the role continuously operating right gate 1110. The expected value of the prize ball amount may be different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, whichever of the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 70%) and the 16R big hit game state (selection rate 30%) When the right gate sensor detects passing of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110, it is determined by the lottery performed at the above selection rate, and the 2R big hit game state (selection rate 30%) Which of the 16R big hit game state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed may be determined by a lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, it is possible to make a difference in the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the big hit game state according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the larger the amount of game balls that are expected to be paid out as prize balls. It is possible to increase the possibility that

Further, in this extended example 4, when the game ball passes through either of the two gates (role continuous operation left gate 1100, role continuous operation right gate 1110) under the condition that the condition device operates, the role continuous operation The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. However, even if the condition device operates based on the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol made based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the game ball has both of the above two gates. A game ball may win the starting opening before passing. In this case, in a situation where the condition ball has been activated but the game ball has not yet passed through either of the above two gates, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening (for example, 42 (see step S72 of FIG. 42) is executed, and it may be determined that the setting check process is not normal (for example, NO in step S721 of FIG. 43). In this case, even if the condition device operates, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722, which will be described later), and cannot proceed with the game.

In addition, in this extended example 4, two gates under which the condition device is operating below the sorting device 1120, and when the passage of the game ball is detected, the accessory continuous operation device is activated (continuous operation of the accessory device). Although the left gate 1100 and the role product continuous operation right gate 1110) are provided, it is not always necessary to provide the lower part of the sorting device 1120 at the role product continuous operation gate, for example, a starting opening and a general winning opening. Is also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 1120, by a regular operation, the game ball that has reached above the distribution device 1120, the starting opening that is the big hit determination trigger of the special symbol, and the general winning that does not become the big hit determination trigger. Divide into either mouth or mouth. Then, the operation of the sorting apparatus 1120 is, for example, the operation of repeating the first posture 0.5 seconds and the second posture 1.5 seconds in the setting 1, and the first posture 0.7 seconds and the second posture 1 in the setting 2. 3 seconds, a setting 3 repeats a first posture of 0.9 seconds and a second posture 1.1 seconds, and a setting 4 repeats a first posture of 1.1 seconds and a second posture of 0.9 seconds. And the setting 5 repeats the first posture of 1.3 seconds and the second posture 0.7 seconds, and the setting 6 repeats the first posture of 1.5 seconds and the second posture of 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to change the winning rate to the starting opening according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to change the winning rate to the starting opening according to the set value, no matter what the set value is, it is possible for the player to shoot the game ball. It will be possible to have the fun of aiming for a prize at the starting opening.

[9-6. Expansion example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 does not change the data related to the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the set value, but allows the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine to be changed according to the set value. .. In addition, in the extended example 5, the setting value can be set to any one of the five levels of setting 1 to setting 5, but the setting value does not necessarily have to be five levels, and may be a plurality of levels. It can be set arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the set value is set to the setting 1, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/99, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 5 rounds. Control the big hit game state. That is, when the setting value is set to the setting 1, the jackpot probability is less than 1/100, which is relatively high, but the prize ball amount paid out in one jackpot gaming state is relatively small. It becomes possible to execute a game with a game property.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 2, the main CPU makes a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. Then, in this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished to the high-probability gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state is finished and becomes the low-probability gaming state after a lapse of a predetermined period. Control. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, it becomes possible to execute a game having a game property called a so-called ST machine.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 3, the main CPU makes a big hit judgment of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. And in this gaming machine, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the big hit game is set. After the state is finished, the game state is controlled to a high probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a so-called probability variation loop machine.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 4, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. And in this gaming machine, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set to ON by using, for example, a symbol random number, and when the probability variation flag is set to ON, the big hit game is set. After the state is finished, the game state is controlled to a high probability game state until the next big hit game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set for the number of times that the big hit game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned “loop number”), and when the loop number reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the big hit game state. The gaming state is controlled to a low probability gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine. In the above-mentioned game property, if the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state has ended is the high-probability gaming state, the high-probability gaming state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a so-called ST machine in which the high-probability gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is finished is finished when a predetermined period elapses and is controlled to the low-probability gaming state.

Further, when the setting value is set to the setting 5, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, 12 rounds (for example, a winning ball). It controls to a big hit game state of about 1500 pieces. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 2, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot gaming state is about 1500. Can be executed. And in this gaming machine, the main CPU always sets the probability variation flag ON when the jackpot gaming state ends, or with a certain probability, and when the probability variation flag is set ON, sets the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. , Control to high probability game state. Further, in the high-probability game state, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when making a special symbol big hit determination, and when determining that the game state is transitioned in the game state transition lottery, sets the probability variation flag to OFF. , Control for shifting from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state is executed. That is, when the set value is set to the setting 5, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game property in which a transition lottery to a low probability game state is performed in the high probability game state.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5, the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine can be changed according to the set value, instead of the specifications such as the jackpot probability. It becomes possible to execute the game by one unit.

In the above, in setting 1, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called amu-digi game characteristic, in setting 2 it is possible to execute a game with a so-called ST machine game characteristic, and in setting 3, it is so-called. It is possible to execute a game with a game property called a probability variation loop machine, with a setting 4 it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine, and in the setting 5, a low probability in a high probability game state. Although it is possible to execute the game with the game property in which the transition lottery to the stochastic game state is performed, it is not essential to be able to execute all of these game properties according to the set value. However, it is preferable to be able to switch and execute the game property called a so-called ST machine and the game property called a so-called probability variation loop machine according to the set value. Both the so-called ST machine game characteristics and the so-called probability variation loop machine game characteristics are common in that they may be controlled to a high-probability game state after the jackpot game state ends, but the high-probability game state is It greatly differs depending on whether it continues until the next big hit game state or ends midway. In this way, by allowing two game characteristics that are similar at first glance but are substantially different to be executed by being switched, it is possible to allow the manager of the game machine, etc., to use the pachinko machine differently. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game.

[9-7. Other extended examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and a privilege is awarded based on the result of the game. That is, the main control circuit 100 itself is not limited to a form in which a game medium is shot or thrown in by a physical player's action to play a game, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to allow a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and managing the game medium.

When the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100 manages, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface with a medium handling device, and provides a necessary game medium for lending a game medium (that is, for a player to insert a game medium). Operation) or a combination relating to the payout of a game medium (a winning combination is achieved), a payout operation of a game medium (that is, a game medium is paid out to a player, and a necessary game medium is obtained. It is sufficient to be able to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium used for a game. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media to be held on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the retained game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media available to the player for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media to an external game medium handling device, and the game is managed. In addition to the case where a person directly operates, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the game machine handling device and an external game media handling device. In this case, it is desirable that the player has the capability of not transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded game media, except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal, various lending operation means, various operation means such as return operation means, and a game medium handling device-side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all are not shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted valuable value from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, thereby playing the game. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player brings the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like in order to exchange the prize, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is changed. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is ejected, but cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again later.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown) to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. Good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that is only known to the player may be set, or the player may be recorded by the image pickup means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko game machine is described, but a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, or an enclosed game machine also has a game medium management device. It may be provided so that the game medium of the player is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of components inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from directly contacting the game medium, improve the gaming environment, reduce noise, and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity via the game medium or the game medium insertion port or payout port. That is, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed game machine configured so that the game media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and data relating to the consumption of the game media, the increase/decrease of the game media associated with the rent, and the payout of the game media are transmitted to the communication cable. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected via an optical signal via a game medium management device, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of balls held. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above in the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are circulated in a series of paths in the game machine.

Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine in the enclosed game machine, the upper plate and the lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball are not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball does not actually exist at the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts a game after he or she has acquired a ball from a game medium management device. Here, to obtain a possessed ball means that the player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, the game balls are shot from the launching device, the balls that are held are consumed, and the number of balls that are held is reduced. Further, when the game balls pass through the respective winning openings or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls to be held is increased by paying out according to the conditions set according to the winning openings. Further, the number of balls held also increases by lending from the game medium management device. It should be noted that "consumption, lending and payout of game media" means that the possession ball is consumed, lended and paid out. Further, “increasing or decreasing the number of game media” indicates that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending and payout. Further, "data regarding consumption of game media, increase/decrease in game media associated with lending/paying" is data relating to a decrease in the number of balls held due to a game ball being shot and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of the game ball through each winning opening. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each of the winning openings, the payout number of the game ball due to that is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is launched, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data relating to the number of balls to the game medium management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located above the gaming machine, and accepts a request for converting a game value managed by the game medium management device into a ball (ball lending) or counting (returning) the ball. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the gaming media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted possessed balls can be used for prize exchange or the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

Further, the enclosed game machine has a backup power source. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before being turned off can be retained. Further, the backup power supply may be used to continuously detect the door frame opening by the door opening sensor, for example. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data transmitted and received is the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, at the transmission source, by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with, It can be confirmed that it is sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission source has a modulator that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulator is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the destination receives the signal modulated by the modulator. A demodulation unit that demodulates may be included.

As a result, even if a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission destination, when receiving the transmission signal from the transmission source, sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

With this, by comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, not only is it confirmed that the regular signal was transmitted and received, but also that the regular signal was transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress fraud.

[10. Processing executed by host control circuit]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by various control circuits in the sub-board 2020 of the sub-control circuit 200 (for example, see FIG. 10) will be described. The sub control circuit 200 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100 (see, for example, FIG. 10) and performs various processes based on these various commands.

In the following, first, the processes related to various devices will be described, and then the processes related to the hall menu task will be described. It should be noted that both the processing related to the hall menu task and the processing related to various devices and the like are processing executed by the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, a CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100) and the like. Each will be described using different flowcharts.

[10-1. Processing related to various devices]
Processing relating to various devices will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 99. Note that FIG. 61, FIG. 72, FIG. 73, FIG. 74, and FIG. 98, including FIG. 52 described above, are all examples of sub-control main processing (overall flow) executed when power is turned on. It is a flowchart shown. Although all of these are processes executed by the host control circuit 2100 (more specifically, the CPU processor included in the host control circuit 2100), the processes are appropriately omitted depending on various situations for convenience of description. For example, while FIG. 52 and FIG. 61 show the accessory control process (steps S210 and S1213), illustration of the accessory control process is omitted in FIGS. 72, 73, 74 and 98. Also, in FIGS. 61, 72, 73, 74, and 98, even if the same processing is performed, different reference numerals are given for convenience of description. For example, the initialization process will be described as an example. Various initialization processes of FIG. 61 (step S1201), initialization processes of FIG. 72 (step S1381), initialization processes of FIG. 73 (step S1391), and initialization of FIG. 74. The characterizing process (step S401) is substantially the same initialization process. To describe the character controlling process as an example, the character controlling process (step S210) of FIG. 52 and the character controlling process of FIG. Step S1213) is substantially the same process.

As shown in FIG. 61, the host control circuit 2100 performs various initialization processes (step S1201). In this processing, the host control circuit 2100 performs various initialization processing such as hardware initialization processing, device initialization processing, various application initialization processing, backup data restoration initialization processing, and RTC acquisition processing. To do. When the game data is erased by clearing the RAM, a random number initialization process is also performed. Further, the host control circuit 2100 clears the counter of the watchdog timer each time each initialization process ends. It should be noted that at the time of startup, the reset time of the watchdog timer is set, and if the service pulse is not written thereafter (time-out), the power interruption process is performed. The timing of clearing the watchdog timer is at the start of each process in the main loop in the sub-control main process, at the start of each initialization process, and at the time of transition to the power interruption process.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 enters the main loop and performs RTC acquisition processing based on the RTC time, that is, processing for acquiring the current time (step S1202).

The host control circuit 2100 performs random number initialization processing in step S1203. This random number initialization processing will be described later.

The host control circuit 2100 acquires the control code of the accessory in step S1204, and performs a synchronization process between the accessory and the solenoid (step S1205). These processes will be described later in "Product solenoid control process".

The host control circuit 2100 performs sub-device input processing in step S1206. In this process, the host control circuit 2100 obtains the operation content information acquisition process based on the input state of the operation means or the like (processing for determining whether or not the player has operated the operation means such as the button). And so on. This sub-device input processing (step S1206) includes brightness adjustment of LEDs and the like by an operation of a player or the like.

The host control circuit 2100 performs various request control processes in step S1207. In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs various request control processes such as a sound request control process, an LED request control process, an accessory request control process, and an accessory control process. The sound request, the LED request, the accessory request, and the like are stored in the buffer and output to each device after the bank flip in step S1214 described below. This makes it possible to achieve synchronization with drawing. The bank flip is a process of switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function.

Incidentally, the accessory control process is performed not only in the various request control processes (S1207) but also in the step S1213 after the drawing control process (step S1212) in FIG. 61. What is performed in step S1213 after step S1212) is not essential. Considering that the character request stored in the buffer in the animation constructing process (step S1210) or the animation updating process (step S1211) one frame before is output in the accessory process, the animation constructing process (step S1210) Is preferably performed before. However, when outputting the accessory request stored in the buffer in the same frame as the frame stored in the buffer, the accessory control processing is performed in step S1213 after the drawing control processing (step S1212). Is also good.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 enters a packet reception loop in the main loop and performs main-sub command control processing (step S1208). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a command data reading process (command receiving process) when command data is received from the main CPU 101 and a command data storing process (received data storing process) in the sub-work RAM 2100a.

The host control circuit 2100 performs a game data backup process in step S1209. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the first data (magic code, program version and SUM value) and the second data (both are magic codes which are information set in the hole menu) as game data used for RAM clear determination. And SUM value). Then, in the game data backup process, the first data is stored in the game data and then backed up in the SRAM 2100b (see FIG. 10). Also, the game data is backed up (mirrored) to another area of the SRAM 2100b. After the power is turned on, the game data is restored from the data backed up in the SRAM 2100b. At this time, the first data is used to check whether the backed up data is damaged. If the backed up data is damaged, it is checked whether or not the second data is damaged. At this time, the data stored in all the SRAMs 2100b such as hole menu information is also initialized.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation construction processing (step S1210). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 performs a command analysis/state setting/lottery process, receives them, and generates an animation request required for effect control using the display device 16. Various requests (drawing request, sound request, LED request, and accessory request) for operating various effect devices are generated corresponding to effect control (display) on the display device 16 executed based on the above.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the processes of steps S1208 to S1210 until the number of received commands is executed, and after executing the number of received commands, the loop for packet reception is exited. Thereafter, the host control circuit 2100 goes through the animation update process (step S1211), the drawing control process (step S1212), the accessory control process (step S1213), and the bank flip/bank flip end completion wait (step S1214), and then the main loop. Each process is repeated.

The host control circuit 2100 repeatedly executes the above-described example processing (main loop processing) of steps S1202 to S1214 in a predetermined FPS cycle. The FPS cycle is set to, for example, about 16.7 msec (60 FPS) or about 33.3 msec (30 FPS). The predetermined FPS cycle is time adjusted in step S1214.

The following are timer interrupt processing, sub-device input processing, backlight control processing, backlight and various LED brightness adjustment, RTC acquisition processing, composition playback control, sound amplifier control processing, sound request control processing (for the same channel The sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed), the LED brightness adjustment processing, the accessory solenoid control processing, the data loading processing, and the sub-random number processing will be described in this order. Note that the order of description of each of the above-mentioned processes is different from the order of processing for convenience of description.

[10-2. Timer interrupt processing]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 performs interrupt processing at a cycle of 1 msec. The interrupt process will be described in each process described later, but here, an example of a typical interrupt process will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit (sub control circuit). It should be noted that, in the timer interrupt process briefly described with reference to FIG. 62 and the timer interrupt process described later (see FIGS. 69 and 71), the same process is denoted by a different symbol for convenience of description. For example, in the case of character motor control, the character motor control of FIG. 62 (step S1251), the character motor control of FIG. 69 (step S1352), and the character motor control of FIG. 71 (step S1371). Indicates substantially the same process but different reference numerals.

With reference to FIG. 62, in the timer interrupt process, the host control circuit 2100 first performs accessory motor control (step S1251). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs input state determination processing based on the input information of the sub device (step S1252). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs control processing such as a backlight of a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 based on the brightness value (step S1253). Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs sound amplifier check processing (step S1254).

[10-3. Sub device input processing]
In the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 creates the sub-device input determination information in the main process every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the sub-device detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec, and this is created. The sub device is controlled based on the sub device input discrimination information.

When the host control circuit 2100 detects the input state of the sub device with a timer interrupt every 1 msec, the host control circuit 2100 uses the sub device input information and the sub device input information as the sub device input determination information created in the main process based on the detection result. Input ON edge information, sub device input ON edge information (with a repeat function), and sub device input OFF edge information are created.

The sub-device input process shown in FIG. 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 66. The subdevice is controlled by the host control circuit 2100 based on input (for example, operation) information such as a push button. 63 is a diagram showing an example for explaining the sub-device input determination information to be created, (a) a diagram showing an input state of a sub-device detected by a timer interrupt, (b) a main process The sub-device input ON-edge information (with a repeat function) created by the main processing, (c) the sub-device input ON-edge information created by the main processing, FIG. 4D is a diagram showing sub-device OFF edge information created in (d) main processing. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub device input processing. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing. FIG. 66 shows an example of the sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, and is a flowchart continued from FIG.

The sub device input information created in the main process is created in accordance with the sub device input state detected by the timer interrupt (see FIG. 63(a)), as shown in FIG. 63(b). That is, if the subdevice input state detected by the timer interrupt is ON, 1 is set. When the sub device input state detected by the timer interrupt is OFF, 0 is set.

As shown in FIG. 63(c), when the sub device input ON edge information is detected that the sub device input state detected by the timer interrupt is changed from OFF to ON, only one frame is set to 1 in the main process. Is set.

The sub-device input ON-edge information (with a repeat function) is information used for control when debugging or when the operation button is long-pressed, for example, and is detected by a timer interrupt as shown in FIG. 63(d). When it is detected that the input state of the sub device is changed from OFF to ON, 1 is set for one frame in the main process. If the ON state of the input state of the sub device continues thereafter, for example, 1 is set to 1 frame after 10 frames have elapsed in the main process as the fixed time until the key repeat starts, and thereafter, in the main process, for example. 1 is set for every 4 frames. In this way, the reason why the first frame is made as long as 10 frames is to make it possible to determine whether or not the sub device has been pressed for a long time, and it is determined that the sub device is not pressed for a long time if the first frame is short. You can

As shown in FIG. 63(e), when the sub device input OFF edge information is detected from the ON to OFF state of the sub device input state detected by the timer interrupt, only 1 frame is set to 1 in the main process. Is set.

In the present embodiment, assuming that there are a plurality of sub devices, the host control circuit 2100 manages the sub device input determination information in bit units. For example, bit0 is a main button, bit1 is a left button, bit2 is a right button, and sub-device input determination information for a maximum of, for example, 32 devices can be managed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, a sub device input process (for example, see step S1206 in FIG. 61) will be described. In this sub-device input processing, as sub-device input discrimination information, for example, sub-device input information, sub-device input ON edge information, sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function), and sub-device input OFF edge information, for example, 4 This is a process of creating type information.

The host control circuit 2100 first creates input information of the current subdevice based on the current input state of the subdevice (step S1301). Specifically, 1 is set when the sub device is in the ON state, and 0 is set when the sub device is in the OFF state.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 updates the sub-device input information in accordance with the current sub-device input information, that is, the sub-device input information created in step S1301 (step S1302).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous sub device input information is 0 and the current sub device input information is 1 (step S1303). If the previous sub device input information is 0 and the current sub device input information is 1 (YES in step S1303), the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub device input ON edge information to 1 (step S1304), The procedure moves to S1306. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is 0 and the current subdevice input information is not 1 (that is, the previous subdevice input information is 1 or/and the current subdevice input information is 0), the host The control circuit 2100 sets the sub device input ON edge information to 0 (step S1305), and proceeds to step S1306.

In step S1306, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is 0. If the previous sub device input information is 1 and the current sub device input information is 0 (YES in step S1306), the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub device input OFF edge information to 1 (step S1307), and the step It moves to S1309. On the other hand, if the previous subdevice input information is 1 and the current subdevice input information is not 0 (that is, the previous subdevice input information is 0 or/and the current subdevice input information is 1), the host The control circuit 2100 sets the sub device input OFF edge information to 0 (step S1308), and proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1309, the host control circuit 2100 performs sub-device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing. Details of this sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described later.

When the sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing in step S1309 is completed, the host control circuit 2100 sets the input information of the current sub device to the previous sub device input information (step S1310), and the sub device input The process ends.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66, the sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the sub device input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the previous sub device input information is 0 (step S1321). .. If the previous sub device input information is 0 (YES in step S1321), the process advances to step S1322.

In step S1322, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the current sub device input information is 1. If the current sub device input information is 1 (YES in step S1322), that is, if the previous sub device input information is 0 and the current sub device input information is 1, the process proceeds to step S1323. On the other hand, if the current sub device input information is not 1 (NO in step S1322), that is, if the previous sub device input information is 0 and the current sub device input information is 0, the sub device input is turned ON. The edge information (with repeat function) processing ends.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub device input ON edge information (with the repeat function) to 1 (step S1323), sets 10 frames as the elapsed frame (step S1324), and sets the sub device input ON edge information. (With repeat function) End processing.

If the previous sub device input information is 1 in step S1321 (NO in step S1321), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1325 in FIG.

66, the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1325 whether or not the current sub device input information is 1. If the current sub device input information is 1 (YES in step S1325), that is, if the previous sub device input information is 1 and the current sub device input information is 1, subtract 1 from the elapsed frame. (Step S1326) and the process moves to step S1327.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1327 whether the elapsed frame is 0 or not. If the elapsed frame is 0 (YES in step S1327), the subdevice input ON edge information (with repeat function) is set to 1 (step S1328), and the elapsed frame is set to 4 (step S1329). The input ON edge information (with repeat function) processing ends.

In step S1325, if the current sub device input information is not 1 (NO in step S1325), that is, if the previous sub device input information is 1 and the current sub device input information is 0, host control is performed. The circuit 2100 sets the elapsed frame to 0 (step S1330), and proceeds to step S1331.

In step S1331, the host control circuit 2100 sets the sub device input ON edge information (with the repeat function) to 0, and ends the sub device input ON edge information (with the repeat function) processing.

In this way, the host control circuit 2100 creates the above-mentioned four types of sub-device input determination information in the main processing every 33.3 msec based on the input state of the sub-device detected by the timer interrupt every 1 msec. By controlling the sub-device based on these four types of sub-device input discrimination information, it is possible to easily control the continuous hitting effect of the sub-device, the control of the long-press effect, the control at the time setting, and the control of other operations. It becomes possible.

[10-4. Backlight control processing]
Next, a backlight control process (for example, a backlight control process for controlling a backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example for conceptually explaining the backlight control process. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the backlight control process.

The backlight control process of the present embodiment uses the SPI asynchronous data write (SPI+DMA) function to continuously and continuously from a serial output terminal of a serial peripheral interface (hereinafter referred to as “SPI”), for example. A signal equivalent to pulse width modulation (hereinafter referred to as “PWM”) is output so that the duty (luminance) can be changed. As a result, it becomes possible to perform backlight control without going through a driver for backlight control.

In the present embodiment, for example, the SPI clock frequency is 100 kHz, the SPI 1 clock is 0.01 msec, the time required to transmit 16 bits of SPI (1 bit of luminance data is 16 bits) is 0.16 msec, and the host control circuit 2100 has a fixed time. The interrupt is 1 msec, and the number of brightness data transmitted from the SPI between the regular interrupts of the host control circuit 2100 is 100 bits. Therefore, the number of brightness data transmitted between the regular interrupts of the host control circuit 2100 is 6.25 (100/16) (see FIG. 67). Therefore, for example, the number of regular interrupts executed before replenishing 32 pieces of luminance data in a FIFO (First In First Out) data area in which 64 pieces of 16-bit luminance data can be set (stored) is 5 to 6 times. it is conceivable that. The number of times depends on the time of the regular interruption of the host control circuit 2100.

For example, when the brightness data set (stored) in the data area of the FIFO (First In First Out) capable of setting (storing) 64 pieces of 16-bit brightness data is less than 32, the callback function is called, so the FIFO data The area is not always filled. Therefore, if the process of setting (storing) the luminance data in the data area of the FIFO does not come around in the other processing in the main processing executed at the cycle of 33.3 msec, the data area of the FIFO becomes empty. There is a possibility that it becomes (the backlight becomes dark).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the power is turned on, first, 64 pieces of luminance data of 1 data are first set to fill the data area of the FIFO, and then 32 pieces of luminance data are set in the data area of the FIFO. When it falls below, the callback function is called, 32 data is set in the callback function, and the data area of the FIFO is prevented from becoming empty.

As shown in FIG. 68, in the backlight control processing, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the processing is at the time of initialization (step S1341). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the process is the process at the time of initial setting (that is, one process of step 201 of FIG. 61) (YES in step S1341), 64 pieces of brightness data of brightness 0 are stored in the data area of the FIFO. It sets (step S1342) and moves to step S1343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the process is not the initial setting process (that is, the process of step S1253 of FIG. 62) (NO in step S1341), the process of step S1342 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1343.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1343 whether the brightness value has been changed. When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the brightness value has been changed (YES in step S1343), the host control circuit 2100 changes the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO (step S1344), and proceeds to step S1345. On the other hand, if it is determined that the brightness value has not been changed (NO in step S1343), the process of step S1344 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1345.

In step S1345, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32, and the number of brightness data set in the FIFO data area is 32. If the number is less than the number (YES in step S1345), 32 pieces of luminance data are set, that is, supplemented in the data area of the FIFO (step S1346), and the backlight control process is ended. On the other hand, if the number of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is more than 32 (NO in step S1345), the host control circuit 2100 ends the backlight process.

In this way, by processing the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO so as not to become empty, it is possible to continuously and continuously output a signal corresponding to PWM from the serial data output terminal of the SPI. It is possible to perform backlight control without going through a light control driver.

Note that the processes of steps S1343 to S1346 of the backlight control process of this embodiment can be replaced as follows. That is, after setting 64 pieces of luminance 0 data (see step S1342), it is determined whether or not the number of pieces of luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO is less than 32 pieces. After that, it is determined whether or not the brightness value has been changed, and when it is determined that the brightness value has been changed, 32 pieces of brightness data corresponding to the setting are set in the data area of the FIFO, and when it is determined that the brightness value has not changed, the last time 32 pieces of the same luminance data as in the above are set in the data area of the FIFO. In this way, the brightness data may be set in the data area of the FIFO and the backlight control process may be ended.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below 32 (half the number of data that can be set in the FIFO), 32 brightness data are supplemented. Is not limited to this, and the number of luminance data to be supplemented is not limited to this, and when the luminance data set in the data area of the FIFO falls below a predetermined number, the predetermined number of luminance data may be supplemented. Further, the luminance data to be replenished in the FIFO data area does not have to be the above-mentioned predetermined number. For example, when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area falls below the first number, The brightness data may be supplemented. However, from the viewpoint that the luminance data set in the FIFO data area does not become too frequent and the luminance data set in the FIFO data area does not become empty, the above predetermined number or the first The number is preferably about half the number of luminance data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO, but is not limited to this as described above. It should be noted that the above “about half” may be a range in which the frequency of setting the brightness data in the data area of the FIFO does not become too high and the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO does not become empty. There are various determination methods such as less than half or less than half depending on the consumption speed of the brightness data set in the data area of. For example, since up to 64 pieces of 16-bit luminance data can be set in the FIFO data area in the present embodiment, when the luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 1 to 64 pieces, one or more new pieces of luminance data are newly set. The brightness data may be set, but from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (the brightness data set in the FIFO data area becomes 0), the FIFO data When there are two or more pieces of brightness data set in the area, it is preferable to newly set one or more pieces of brightness data. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

[10-4-1. Modified example of backlight control processing]
Next, a modified example of the backlight control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing according to a modification of the backlight control processing. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the backlight control process.

In the modified example of the backlight control process, when it is possible that the timer interrupt process of 1 msec takes time, whether or not a predetermined time or more has elapsed since the data was set in the FIFO data area in the backlight control process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed and data is set in the data area of the FIFO.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 69, the host control circuit 2100 first performs a backlight control process (step S1351). Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the backlight control process of step S1351 will be described with reference to FIG. 70 before the processes of step S1352 and subsequent steps are described.

As shown in FIG. 70, in the backlight control process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the process is at the time of initial setting (step S1361). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the process is the process at the time of initial setting (that is, one process of step 201 in FIG. 61) (YES in step S1361), 64 pieces of brightness data of brightness 0 are stored in the data area of the FIFO. After setting (step S1362), the process proceeds to step S1366. On the other hand, when it is determined that the process is not the initial setting process (that is, the process of step S1351) (NO in step S1361), the process proceeds to step S1363.

In step S1363, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than 32, and the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is 32. If the number is less than the number (YES in step S1363), 32 pieces of luminance data are set or supplemented in the data area of the FIFO (step S1364), and the process proceeds to step S1365. On the other hand, if the number of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is more than 32 (NO in step S1363), the process proceeds to step S1366. As mentioned above, the 32 data items are half the number of data items that can be set in the FIFO.

In step S1365, the host control circuit 2100 resets the elapsed time (step S1365) and starts measuring the elapsed time (step S1366). When the elapsed time measurement is started in step S1366, the host control circuit 2100 ends the backlight control process.

Returning to FIG. 69, the host control circuit 2100 performs accessory motor control after ending the backlight control process of step S1351 (step S1352).

In this modified example, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process that may require a long time, such as a character motor control, and then determines whether or not the elapsed time at which the time counting is started in step S1366 has exceeded a predetermined time. It is determined (step S1353). If the predetermined time or more has passed (YES in step S1353), 32 pieces of brightness data are set in the data area of the FIFO (step S1354). On the other hand, if the predetermined time or more has not elapsed (NO in step S1353), it is not necessary to replenish the brightness data in the FIFO data area, and the process moves to step S1357.

As described above, it takes 0.16 msec to transmit 16-bit data (1 bit of luminance data is 16 bits) by SPI. Therefore, it is thought that 5.12 msec is required to transmit 32 luminance data. To be Therefore, in this modification, in step S1353, it is determined whether or not 5.12 msec or more has elapsed as the predetermined time.

After performing the process of step S1354, the host control circuit 2100 resets the elapsed time (step S1355) and restarts the counting of the elapsed time (step S1356). Then, when the elapsed time measurement is started in step S1356, the host control circuit 2100 performs an input state determination process (step S1357) and ends the timer interrupt process.

In this way, when the luminance data is set in the FIFO data area, timing is started, and after the processing that may take time, the luminance data is replenished if the above-mentioned clocking time has exceeded the predetermined time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the brightness data in the data area of the FIFO from becoming empty.

In this modification, an example in which the processing of steps S1353 to S1357 is performed after the accessory motor control (step S1352) has been described, but this is merely an example. That is, from the viewpoint of preventing the brightness data set in the data area of the FIFO from becoming empty, if the processing of steps S1353 to S1357 is performed after the processing that may take a long time. Of course, such processing is not limited to a specific processing.

[10-5. Brightness adjustment of backlight and various LEDs]
Next, variations in the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs will be described. Various LEDs correspond to a board side LED (for example, an LED arranged in the game board unit 17), a frame side LED, and the like, and in this specification, a lamp group 25 including LEDs (for example, see FIG. 9) is the same. Hits. Further, in this specification, as variations of the brightness adjustment of the backlight and various LEDs, three variations of the first to third examples will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 74, respectively. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing showing backlight control processing. FIG. 72 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining the first example of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 73 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining the second example of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. FIG. 74 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining the third example of the process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs. However, in FIGS. 72 to 74, only the processes necessary for the description are shown, and the other processes are omitted. Note that, also in the first to third embodiments described below, as described above, the host control circuit 2100 sets the brightness data set in the FIFO data area to the data area of the FIFO when it becomes about half. Replenish the brightness data.

The timing of replenishing the brightness data in the FIFO data area is not limited to the time when the brightness data set in the FIFO data area becomes about half. In the FIFO data area in the present embodiment, for example, up to 64 pieces of 16-bit luminance data can be set. Therefore, when there are 1 to 64 pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area, one or more new pieces of luminance data are newly set. It is sufficient to set the brightness data. However, from the viewpoint of preventing the backlight from becoming dark (brightness data set in the FIFO data area becomes 0), the brightness data set in the FIFO data area is 2 It is preferable to newly set one or more pieces of luminance data when the number of pieces is more than one. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

(First embodiment)
For example, when the brightness of the backlight (for example, the backlight of a liquid crystal display or the like) is adjusted by an operation of a player or the like, the brightness of the backlight is changed. At this time, control of the board side LED and the frame side LED May affect the. In this case, in the present embodiment, the backlight brightness setting and the brightness setting of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are set in common, and the backlight, the board-side LED, and the frame-side LED are set according to the settings. The control is performed. Thereby, even if the update timing of the backlight control is different from the update timing of the control of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, the processing can be facilitated.

In the timer interrupt process of FIG. 71, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order.

As shown in FIG. 72, the host control circuit 2100 performs initialization processing (step S1381) and then moves to the main loop and performs LED request control processing (step S1382). The LED request made in step S1382 is created in the animation constructing process one frame before (step S1386 described later).

After performing the process of step S1382, the host control circuit 2100 performs the above-described sub-device (button) input determination information generation process (step S1383) based on the input state of the sub-device, and proceeds to step S1384.

In step S1384, the host control circuit 2100 determines the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub device (for example, the player or the like operates the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16). To set. The brightness of the backlight is set to three levels, for example, strong, medium and weak.

When the process of step S1384 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to a packet reception loop, and first sets the brightness values of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED according to the effect mode and the brightness value setting to be executed. (Step S1385). The brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is also set to three levels, for example, strong/medium/weak, like the backlight.

Here, by setting the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED and the brightness of the backlight in common, the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED can be suppressed while suppressing an increase in control load. Both the setting and the setting of the brightness of the backlight can be changed by the operation of the player or the like. For example, the host control circuit 2100 changes the luminance value of the backlight based on the player or the like operating the luminance setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 (step S1384), and The brightness values of the board side LED and the frame side LED are also changed (step S1385). At this time, the stage of the brightness value of the backlight and the stage of the brightness value of the board side LED and the frame side LED are common. For example, if the brightness value of the backlight is medium, the brightness values of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are also intermediate. As shown in FIG. 72, since the brightness update timing of the backlight is different from the brightness update timing of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED, after the backlight brightness is updated, the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are updated. The brightness of is updated. However, the brightness update timing of the backlight may be controlled to be the same as the brightness update timing of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED.

Note that the brightness of the backlight, the brightness of the board-side LED, and the brightness of the frame-side LED are changed based on the operation of the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 by the player or the like. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED may be changed, for example, based on the operation of the push button for performance. In this case, it is necessary to judge whether or not it is a period in which it functions as a push button for effect (push button effective period). Therefore, the brightness of the board side LED and the frame side LED is adjusted in the main flow. It is necessary to control the backlight according to the brightness of the LED.

The host control circuit 2100 performs an animation construction process in step S1386. In the animation building process of step S1386, an LED request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process (see step S1382) of the next frame.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processing of steps S1385 and S1386 according to the received packet.

After exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation update processing (step S1387), and then waits for bank flip/bank flip end (step S1388).

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processing of steps S1382 to S1388 in the main loop at a cycle of 33.3 msec.

(Second embodiment)
For example, when a brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, it may affect the control of the board-side LEDs and the frame-side LEDs as described above. In the present embodiment, in such a case, for example, when a brightness adjusting operation is performed by a player or the like, the brightness value of the backlight is immediately changed, but the control of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is a special symbol. This is executed after the end of fluctuation or between bank flips.

As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order in the timer interrupt process of FIG. To do.

As shown in FIG. 73, the host control circuit 2100 performs initialization processing (step S1391) and then moves to the main loop and performs LED request control processing (step S1392). The LED request made in step S1392 is created in the animation constructing process one frame before (step S1395 described later).

When the host control circuit 2100 performs the process of step S1392, the above-described sub-device (button) input determination information generation process (step S1393) is performed based on the input state of the sub-device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like). ) Is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1394.

In step S1394, the host control circuit 2100 sets the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set to three levels, for example, strong, medium and weak.

When the processing of step S1394 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 moves to a packet reception loop and performs animation construction processing (step S1395). In the animation building process of step S1395, an LED request is created. The created LED request is waited in the buffer and then output in the LED request control process of the next frame (see step S1392).

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processing of step S1395 according to the received packet.

Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation update processing (step S1396), then waits for bank flip/bank flip end (step S1397), and proceeds to step S1398.

In step S1398, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the variation of the effect identification displayed on the liquid crystal display device as the display device 16 has ended, that is, whether the effect identification symbol change time has elapsed. (Step S1398). If the variation of the effect identification symbol has ended (YES in step S1398), the host control circuit 2100 changes the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED according to the set value at that time (step S1399). On the other hand, if the variation of the special symbol has not ended (NO in step S1398), the processes of steps S1392 to S1399 in the main loop of the 33.3 msec cycle are repeated. Note that the process of step S1399 may be performed during the bank flip of step S1397 instead of or in addition to when the change of the special symbol ends.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 determines the brightness of the backlight, which directly affects the eyes of the player, based on the input state of the sub device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player). Although it is controlled so that it is changed immediately, the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is changed after the brightness of the backlight is changed and after the fluctuation of the production identification symbol is completed. To control. Further, when a player or the like performs a brightness adjusting operation while the production identification pattern is changing, the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED needs to be changed by the LED request control process, but the backlight is required. Can be changed immediately. Therefore, based on the input state of the sub device, the brightness of the backlight is controlled to be changed immediately, but the brightness of the panel side LED and the frame side LED is changed by the LED request control processing, so that the control load is changed. Can be minimized. In other words, it is possible to change the brightness of the backlight and the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED while minimizing the control load, for example, by performing only one brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like.

When the brightness of the backlight is changed based on the input state of the sub device (for example, the brightness adjustment operation by the player or the like), the host control circuit 2100 stores the brightness data related to the changed brightness in the FIFO. Set in the data area.

(Third embodiment)
For example, when a brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, it may affect the control of the board-side LEDs and the frame-side LEDs as described above. In the present embodiment, in such a case, for example, when a brightness adjustment operation is performed by a player or the like, the brightness value of the backlight is changed, and the effects of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are limitedly performed. It was done like this. Limitedly performing means, for example, limiting the number of LEDs that emit light in the effects of the board-side LEDs and the frame-side LEDs, and limiting the number of effects performed by the board-side LEDs and the frame-side LEDs. .. Limiting the number of effects corresponds to, for example, originally performing effects 1 to 5, but only effects 1 to 3 and omitting effects 4 and 5 and not performing them. As a result, the effects of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED are limited without directly changing the brightness value, so that the intensity of light received by the player from the board-side LED and the frame-side LED is suppressed. Become. Further, even if the update timing of the backlight control is different from the update timing of the control of the board side LED and the frame side LED, the processing can be facilitated.

As described above, the host control circuit 2100 performs the accessory motor control (step S1371), the input state determination process (step S1372), and the backlight control process (step S1373) in this order in the timer interrupt process of FIG. To do.

As shown in FIG. 74, the host control circuit 2100 performs initialization processing (step S1401) and then moves to the main loop and performs LED request control processing (step S1402). The LED request made in step S1402 is created in the animation constructing process one frame before (step S1407 described later).

After performing the process of step S1402, the host control circuit 2100 performs the above-described sub-device (button) input determination information generation process (step S1403) based on the input state of the sub-device, and proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the host control circuit 2100 sets the brightness of the backlight based on the input state of the sub device (for example, the brightness adjusting operation by the player or the like). The brightness of the backlight is set to three levels, for example, strong, medium and weak.

When the process of step S1404 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the brightness setting has been changed (step S1405). If there is a change in the brightness setting (YES in step S1405), the host control circuit 2100 limits the brightness of the board-side LED and the frame-side LED according to the setting at that time (step S1406), and moves to the packet reception loop. On the other hand, if the brightness value setting has not been changed (NO in step S1405), the host control circuit 2100 moves to the packet reception loop without performing the process of step S1406.

Upon moving to the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation construction processing (step S1407). In the animation building process of step S1407, an LED request is created. The created LED request is output in the LED request control process (see step S1402) of the next frame after waiting in the buffer.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processing of step S1407 according to the received packet.

Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation update processing (step S1408), and then waits for bank flip/bank flip end (step S1409).

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processing of steps S1402 to S1409 in the main loop having a cycle of 33.3 msec.

Regarding the above-described backlight and brightness adjustment of various LEDs (first to third examples), the backlight control process of the present embodiment uses the SPI asynchronous data write (SPI+DMA) function as described above. For example, a signal corresponding to PWM is continuously and continuously output from the serial output terminal of SPI. On the other hand, regarding the panel side LED and the frame side LED, the LEDs are controlled based on the LED request created one frame before the main loop, for example, as shown in step S1382 of FIG. Therefore, even if the brightness of the backlight and various LEDs is adjusted, the timing of changing the brightness of the backlight and the timing of changing the brightness of the panel-side LED and the frame-side LED are different.

[10-6. RTC acquisition processing]
Next, the RTC acquisition process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the RTC acquisition process is performed both in various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) and in the main loop (see step S1201 in FIG. 61). Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of the RTC acquisition process.

For example, when it is not possible to communicate with the RTC or when an abnormality occurs in the RTC itself, or when an accurate time cannot be acquired due to the RTC abnormality, the time is not updated and remains the previous time. Therefore, when an RTC effect (for example, an effect related to Christmas at Christmas time) is executed based on the RTC time, if the RTC abnormality occurs, there is a possibility that the RTC effect cannot be executed. Furthermore, when the RTC or more occurs, the RTC time is not updated, so that the RTC effect may be still executed, or the RTC effect may be executed at an unexpected time.

Therefore, in the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, when the RTC is abnormal, that is, when the previous RTC time is different from the current RTC time, the RTC effect is executed based on the current time. Note that the RTC is provided with a secondary battery, so that the time can be managed even when the host control circuit 2100 is powered off. Further, the host control circuit 2100 acquires the time from the RTC and manages the error occurrence time and the like.

As shown in FIG. 75, in the RTC acquisition process, the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the RTC time (step S1412), and then moves to step S1413.

The host control circuit 2100 updates the previous time in step S1413. In updating the previous time, the current time updated in step S1416 described below is updated as the previous time. After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the RTC is abnormal (step S1414). If the RTC is abnormal (YES in step S1414), the current time is maintained (step S1415), and the process proceeds to step S1417. On the other hand, if the RTC is not abnormal (NO in step S1414), the current time is updated (step S1416), and the process proceeds to step S1417.

In the RTC acquisition process of the present embodiment, it is determined whether the RTC is abnormal after updating the previous time (step S1413) (step S1414), but instead, update the previous time. It may be determined whether the RTC is abnormal or not before, and if the RTC is not abnormal, the previous time may be updated so that the current time is not maintained.

In step S1417, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current time is the designated time (for example, the time when the RTC effect is executed). If the current time is the designated time (YES in step S1417), the process proceeds to step S1418. If the current time is not the designated time (NO in step S1417), the process proceeds to step S1420.

In step S1418, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the previous time and the current time do not match. If the RTC is abnormal, the previous time and the current time do not match (YES in step S1418). If the previous time and the current time do not match (YES in step S1418), the RTC effect execution flag is set to 1 (step S1419). That is, if the RTC is abnormal, the RTC effect is executed when the current time reaches the designated time. Then, when the processing of step S1419 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 ends the RTC acquisition processing. On the other hand, if the previous time and the current time do not match (NO in step S1418), the process advances to step S1420.

The host control circuit 2100 sets the RTC effect execution flag to 0 in step S1420. After performing the process of step S1420, the host control circuit 2100 ends the RTC acquisition process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the RTC is abnormal, by executing the RTC effect when the current time becomes the designated time, it is possible to avoid the situation where the RTC effect is not executed. ..

[10-7. Composition playback control]
Next, composition reproduction control will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

The composition is, for example, scene data in which material data for forming an image (movie) displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16 is combined, and is generally composed of a plurality of layers. Layers include animations, vector graphics, still images, lights, and more.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of animation control main processing executed by the display control circuit 2300. This animation control main processing is executed based on the input of the control signal of the drawing request output in the animation construction processing (see step S1211 of FIG. 61) executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIG. 76, the display control circuit 2300 first clears the composition reproduction information (step S1431). Then, the display control circuit 2300 executes composition reproduction control processing (step S1432). This composition reproduction control processing will be described later. After that, the display control circuit 2300 executes the highest-level direct drawing function (step S1433), and ends the animation control main process.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the composition reproduction control process executed by the display control circuit 2300. As shown in FIG. 77, the display control circuit 2300 first determines whether or not the determined priority number is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the priority number (step S1441). If the determined priority number is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the priority number (YES in step S1441), the process proceeds to step S1442. The number of priorities is the number of layers of the composition that are simultaneously reproduced, and the upper limit of the number of priorities is predetermined based on the composition to be reproduced. Therefore, as long as the processing by the host control circuit 2100 is normal, the determined priority number does not exceed the upper limit of the priority number. Therefore, when the determined priority number exceeds the upper limit of the priority number (NO in step S1441), the display control circuit 2300 ends the composition reproduction control process.

In step S1442, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the determined number of displays is less than (or less than) the number of usable displays, that is, the determined number of displays is usable (for example, mounted) on the system. It is determined whether it is less than (or less than) the number (step S1442). If the determined number of displays is less than (or less than) the number of usable displays (YES in step S1442), the process moves to step S1443.

In step S1443, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the used display number is 0, that is, whether or not there is a usable display number. If the used display number is not 0 (YES in step S1443), that is, if there is a usable display number, the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1444. On the other hand, if the used display number is 0 (NO in step S1443), that is, if there is no usable display number, the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1459.

By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with two frame buffers as a frame buffer in which the composition is registered. These two frame buffers are used by switching the function of one frame buffer from the drawing function to the display function and switching the function of the other frame buffer from the display function to the drawing function by bank flip. Hereinafter, in this specification, a frame buffer having a display function is simply referred to as a “frame buffer”, and a frame buffer having a drawing function is referred to as a “drawing result output destination buffer”.

In step S1444, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the composition is registered in the drawing result output destination buffer. In the determination processing of step S1444, it is determined whether or not all the compositions are registered (that is, whether or not there is any unregistered composition). If all compositions are registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (YES in step S1444), the display control circuit 2300 sets a drawing target (step S1445). Setting a drawing target is a process of setting a display to which drawing is performed. If the composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (NO in step S1444), that is, if there is an unregistered composition, the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1450.

In step S1446, the display control circuit 2300 sets the drawing result output destination buffer to the frame buffer. That is, the processing in step S1446 is processing for switching the drawing result output destination buffer to the frame buffer by the bank flip. At this time, the composition registered in the drawing result output destination buffer switched from the frame buffer is cleared. After that, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not there is a pause flag in the composition registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip in step S1446 (step S1447). The pause flag is a flag of the debug function for temporarily suspending the image. When this pause flag is present (YES in step S1447), the display control circuit 2300 causes the display output circuit to switch from the frame buffer by the bank flip in step S1446. Then, the composition reproduction information is registered (step S1448) and the composition is reproduced (step S1449). On the other hand, if there is no pause flag (NO in step S1447), the process moves to step S1459. The reproduction information of the composition includes, for example, the size of the frame buffer, the size of the composition, the coordinates of the four vertices of the image to be reproduced, the composition registration information, the loop composition to be reproduced, the composition length, and the start frame setting. , Loop playback flag, etc. Moreover, the registration of the reproduction information of the composition is to collect the reproduction information of the composition, and the reproduction of the composition is to register the reproduction information of the collected composition. When the composition reproduction information is registered, the previous reproduction information is cleared.

In step S1450, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or more than the upper limit (that is, whether the number of reproduced frames exceeds the number of frames of the composition). To determine. If the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is not more than the upper limit (NO in step S1450), the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1457 and registers the composition reproduction information in the drawing result output destination buffer (step S1457). The composition is reproduced with S1457) (step S1458).

When the display control circuit 2300 determines in step S1450 that the number of frames reproduced in the drawing result output destination buffer is equal to or more than the upper limit (YES in step S1450), the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1451.

In step S1451, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is loop reproduction. If the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is loop reproduction (YES in step S1451), the display control circuit 2300 performs reproduction from the beginning during loop reproduction (step S1452), and then proceeds to step S1457. .. If the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is not loop reproduction (NO in step S1451), the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1453.

In step S1453, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display. If the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is frame continuous display (YES in step S1453), the display control circuit 2300 reproduces the last frame during frame continuous display (step S1454), and then step S1457. Move on to. If the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is not frame continuous display (NO in step S1453), the display control circuit 2300 moves to step S1455.

In step S1455, the display control circuit 2300 determines whether or not the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is shot reproduction. If the reproduction mode is shot reproduction (YES in step S1455), the display control circuit 2300 clears the composition during shot reproduction (step S1456), and then proceeds to step S1459. If the composition reproduction mode registered in the frame buffer is not shot reproduction (NO in step S1455), the display control circuit 2300 proceeds to step S1457.

Note that, in principle, the composition reproduction information registration in step S1457 is a process performed when the composition is not registered in the drawing result output destination buffer (when NO is determined in step S1444). However, as described above, the display control circuit 2300 performs the frame flip in the step S1446 even when the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer in the bank flip in the step S1446 has a pause flag (YES in step S1447). The composition reproduction information is registered in the drawing output destination buffer switched from the buffer (step S1448), and the composition is reproduced (step S1449). In this way, when the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer by the bank flip in step S1446 has a pause flag (YES in step S1447), the composition reproduction information is immediately registered in the drawing output destination buffer ( Since the composition is reproduced at the same time as step S1448) (step S1449), rapid processing can be performed.

The display control circuit 2300 adds 1 to the determined number of displays in step S1459, and returns to step S1442.

When it is determined in step S1442 that the determined number of displays exceeds the upper limit of the number of usable displays (NO in step S1442), the display control circuit 2300 executes the direct drawing function if there is data to be directly drawn. (Step S1460). After that, the display control circuit 2300 adds 1 to the determined priority number (step S1461) and returns to step S1441.

As described above, in the composition reproduction control of the present embodiment, as a general rule, reproduction information of a new composition is not registered when the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer. However, the composition is not registered only when the specific condition is satisfied (when YES is determined in step S1447, that is, when the composition registered in the drawing output destination buffer has a pause flag). It becomes possible to perform the process (composition reproduction information registration). In other words, while the composition is registered in the drawing output destination buffer, it is possible to register the composition again at an arbitrary timing, so it depends on the content of the (new) registered composition. It is possible to overwrite effects, skip effects, and stop effects.

Further, the process of step S1441 (process for determining whether the determined number of priorities is less than (or less than or equal to) the upper limit of the number of priorities (whether the determined number of displays is less than (or less than) the number of usable displays) Therefore, by returning to the processing from step S1459 to step S1442, the priority number determined in step S1441 can be displayed on a plurality of displays. It can be shared, and the processing load can be reduced.

[10-8. Sound amplifier check processing]
Next, the sound amplifier check process shown in FIG. 62 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. In this sound amplifier check process, it is determined whether or not the digital audio power amplifier 2620 (hereinafter, referred to as “sound amplifier”) is in an abnormal state (for example, overcurrent abnormality, high temperature abnormality, DC detection abnormality in which the audio signal does not change, etc.). Also, the setting information of the sound amplifier is confirmed. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the sound amplifier check processing. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal amplifier check processing. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing an example of the deep bass amplifier check processing.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes, as sound amplifiers, a normal amplifier that amplifies normal audio data and a heavy bass amplifier that amplifies heavy bass audio data.

As shown in FIG. 78, the host control circuit 2100 performs a normal amplifier check process (step S1471) and a heavy bass amplifier check process (step S1472).

As shown in FIG. 79, in the normal amplifier check process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting is performed from the binary file (step S1481). If there is a binary file at the time of initialization, settings will be made from the binary file. The initialization process is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a problem is found in the amplifier check and the settings are reset. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting is performed from the binary file, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a storage area different from the read setting such as a binary file may be used.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been performed from the binary file (YES in step S1481), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the register serving as a reference of the register value to be checked is normal (step S1482), and thereafter. , And proceeds to step S1483. In the determination processing of step S1482, since the register value is checked in the order of address, it is determined whether or not there is a register value to start the check, and whether or not the value is normal.

The host control circuit 2100, in step S1483, sorts the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM in the register with the received data (step S1484) and determines whether the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S1485). The host control circuit 2100 completes the normal amplifier check process after performing the determination process of step S1485.

On the other hand, if the setting is not performed from the binary file in step S1481 (NO in step S1481), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of comparing the default value and the set value (step S1486), and the normal amplifier check process. To finish. When the normal amplifier check processing is completed, the host control circuit 2100 performs heavy bass amplifier check processing.

As shown in FIG. 80, in the deep bass amplifier check process, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting is performed from the binary file (step S1491).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been performed from the binary file (YES in step S1491), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of determining whether or not the register to be checked is normal (step S1492), and then proceeds to step S1493. ..

In step S1493, the host control circuit 2100 clears the registers 0x17-0x25 with an appropriate value (binary file information) in consideration of the case where the value cannot be read due to a hardware failure.

In step S1494, the host control circuit 2100 sorts the received data from the binary file. After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM in the register with the received data (step S1495) and updates the RAM address (step S1496). When the host control circuit 2100 performs the update processing in step S1496, the bass control amplifier check processing ends.

On the other hand, if the setting is not made from the binary file in step S1491 (NO in step S1491), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of comparing the default value and the set value (step S1497) to check the deep bass amplifier. The process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 performs the sound amplifier check process in the interrupt process of 1 msec. By the way, such a sound amplifier check process can be performed in the main loop. However, when the sound amplifier check process is performed in the main loop, if the sound amplifier check process takes time, other processes may be overwhelmed. Therefore, by performing the sound amplifier check processing in the interrupt processing as in the present embodiment, it becomes possible to perform the sound amplifier check processing without overwhelming other processing in the main loop.

In the sound amplifier check process shown in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 62), for example, as shown in FIG. 81, in the interrupt process of 1 msec, the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (collective) check process (step S1497). ) May be performed. The normal amplifier/heavy bass amplifier (collective) check processing (step S1497) is a processing in which the normal amplifier check processing (see FIG. 79) and the heavy bass amplifier check processing (see FIG. 80) are collectively performed.

However, if the sound amplifier check process is performed in the interrupt process of 1 msec, there is a possibility that the entire sound amplifier check process cannot be executed. Therefore, a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable form of the sound amplifier check process. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of a more preferable mode of the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier check processing. FIG. 84 shows an example of a more preferable form of the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier check processing, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 83.

In a more preferred embodiment of the sound amplifier check processing, as shown in FIG. 82, the host control circuit 2100 performs normal amplifier/low bass amplifier (division) check processing (step S1498). The details of this normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing will be described later, but each check processing of the normal amplifier and each of the deep bass amplifier check processing is divided into a range that can be performed in the interrupt processing of 1 msec. The check process is performed in the frame, and the subsequent process is performed in the next and subsequent frames. In other words, of all the check processing of the normal amplifier and all the check processing of the heavy bass amplifier, only a part of the check processing is performed in the one-time interrupt processing, but all the checks are performed over the plurality of interrupt processing. It is the one. By doing so, in the interrupt processing, it is possible to execute all the checking processing of the normal amplifier and the checking processing of the deep bass amplifier without being completed in the middle.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the normal amplifier/low bass amplifier (division) check processing, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether or not the setting is performed from the binary file (step S1501).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting is performed from the binary file (YES in step S1501), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the check status is 0 (step S1502). If the check status is 0 (YES in step S1502), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the register value checked by the normal amplifier is normal (step S1503). After performing the process of step S1503, the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 1 (step S1504), and ends the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check process. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1502 that the check status is not 0 (NO in step S1502), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1505. Note that the process of step S1503 may be performed by further dividing each register to determine whether each register value of the plurality of registers is normal.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1505 whether or not the check status is 1. If the check status is 1 (YES in step S1505), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of rearranging the received data from the binary file (step S1506). After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the value of the RAM of the register of the normal amplifier with the received data (step S1507), and determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S1508). ). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is executed (YES in step S1508), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 2 (step S1509), and the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division ) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has not been executed (NO in step S1508), the host control circuit 2100 does not update the check status, and the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing is performed. To finish. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 1, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 1 again in the subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1505 that the check status is not 1 (NO in step S1505), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1510. In the process of step S1508, the process of comparing the RAM value of each register of the plurality of registers with the received data may be performed by further dividing it for each register.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1510 whether the check status is 2. If the check status is 2 (YES in step S1510), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the value of the normal amplifier is normal (step S1511). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has been executed (step S1512). If the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier is executed (YES in step S1512), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 3 (step S1513), and the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division ) End the check process. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the normal amplifier has not been executed (NO in step S1512), the host control circuit 2100 does not update the check status, and the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing is performed. To finish. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 2, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 2 again in the subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1510 that the check status is not 2 (NO in step S1510), the process advances to step S1514 (see FIG. 84).

Referring to FIG. 84, the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1514 whether the check status is 3. If the check status is 3 (YES in step S1514), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the register value checked by the heavy bass amplifier is normal (step S1515). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing corresponding to the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier has been executed (step S1516). If the processing for the number of divisions of the heavy bass amplifier is executed (YES in step S1516), the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 4 (step S1517), and the normal amplifier/heavy bass amplifier ( (Division) check processing ends. On the other hand, if the processing for the number of divisions of the heavy bass amplifier is not executed (NO in step S1516), the host control circuit 2100 checks the normal amplifier/heavy bass amplifier (division) without updating the check status. The process ends. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 3, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 3 again in the subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1514 that the check status is not 3 (NO in step S1514), the process advances to step S1518.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1518 whether the check status is 4. If the check status is 4 (YES in step S1518), the host control circuit 2100 clears the register value of the deep bass amplifier with an appropriate value (step S1519). After that, the host control circuit 2100 sets the check status to 5 (step S1520), and ends the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1518 that the check status is not 4 (NO in step S1518), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1521.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1521 whether the check status is 5. If the check status is 5 (YES in step S1521), the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of rearranging the received data from the binary file (step S1522). After that, the host control circuit 2100 compares the RAM value of the register of the deep bass amplifier with the received data (step S1523), and updates the RAM address (step S1524). After that, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing corresponding to the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier has been executed (step S1525). If the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is executed (YES in step S1525), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the RAM address update is completed (step S1526), and the check status is set. It is set to 0 (step S1527), and the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing is ended. When the processing for the number of divisions of the deep bass amplifier is not executed in step S1525 (NO in step S1525), and when it is determined that the RAM address update is not completed in step S1526 (NO in step S1526). The host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier/low bass amplifier (division) check processing without updating the check status. That is, since the check status is not updated and is maintained at 5, the host control circuit 2100 performs the process when the check status is 5 again in the subsequent frames. If the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1521 that the check status is not 5 (NO in step S1521), the host control circuit 2100 ends the normal amplifier/deep bass amplifier (division) check processing.

As described above, in a more preferable embodiment of the sound amplifier check processing, each check processing of the normal amplifier and each check processing of the heavy bass amplifier are divided and can be performed within the interrupt processing of 1 msec (that is, within one frame). The check processing is performed within the range, and the subsequent processing is performed in the next and subsequent frames. As described above, a part of the check processing of the normal amplifier and the check processing of the heavy bass amplifier is performed over a plurality of frames within one frame. Therefore, all the check processing of each amplifier can be performed over a plurality of frames. It will be possible.

Note that when the check status is 4, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been executed (for example, if the check status is 3, the processing of step S1516 corresponds). Absent. This is because the process of step S1519 performed when the check status is 4 can be performed in a short time so as not to affect the interrupt process of 1 msec. In other words, the process performed when the check status is 4 (step S1519) is the process performed when the check status is 0 (step S1503), and the process performed when the check status is 1 (step S1506). And step S1507), processing performed when the check status is 2 (step S1511), processing performed when the check status is 3 (step S1515), processing performed when the check status is 5 (step S1511). This is because the time required for processing is shorter than that of S1522 to S1524) and does not affect the interrupt processing of 1 msec. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the processing for the number of divisions has been executed, in consideration of the time required for the processing (whether the interrupt processing of 1 msec is affected or not). I have decided whether or not. However, even if the processing does not affect the interrupt processing for 1 msec (for example, the processing in step S1519 performed when the check status is 4), whether or not the processing for the number of divisions is executed is determined. You may make it determine.

Note that in each of the processes of step S1503, step S1511, and step S1515, it may be possible to determine whether or not each register value of the plurality of registers is normal by further dividing each register. In this case, the progress of the further divided determination may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the large classification processing shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 and the check status related to the small classification processing (second check status) obtained by further dividing the large classification processing. With, the progress of processing can be managed. Similarly, in each of the processes of steps S1506 to S507 and steps S1522 to S523, the process of comparing the RAM value of each register of the plurality of registers with the received data is further divided for each register. May be. In this case, the progress of the further divided processing may be managed by the second check status. That is, the check status (first check status) related to the large classification processing shown in FIGS. 83 and 84 and the check status related to the small classification processing (second check status) obtained by further dividing the large classification processing. With, the progress of processing can be managed. For example, even when an electric power interruption occurs in the middle of the small classification process or the determination, the progress status of the small classification process or the determination is checked by the first check status and the second check status after the power is restored. You may control so that each process and each determination may be restarted.

The check status can be set to 0 when the power is turned on, and when the power is cut off during the process, starting from the check status at the previous power cut after the power is restored. Of course, if power is cut off, power is turned on, or backup clear (ram clear) processing is performed, the check status is set to 0 after the power is restored, and all processing and determination are performed again ( Alternatively, as one of the initialization processes, all the processes or the determination or a part of the processes or the determination may be performed again).

[10-9. Sound request control processing (when there are multiple sound requests for the same channel)]
Next, regarding the sound request control processing shown in FIG. 61, the sound request control processing when there are a plurality of sound requests (also referred to as SAC requests) for the same channel will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of a sound request control process when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same playback channel in the same frame of the main loop performed at a cycle of 33.3 msec, for example, a mute command of 2 msec between SAC requests. Is registered with. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game sound output based on the SAC request from being overlaid on another game sound, and it is possible to output the game sound with high accuracy. However, in this case, although there is an advantage that the game sound is not overwritten, there is a possibility that the processing takes time. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC numbers are designated (registered) in the same virtual track in the same frame of the main loop, the SAC of the first arrival arrives with a gap from the SAC request of the first arrival. There are provided a case of making a request and a case of making a later-arriving SAC request without an interval between the first-arriving SAC number. The details will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the sound request control process (when there are a plurality of sound requests for the same channel), the host control circuit 2100 first confirms the SAC number and the reproduction channel (step S1541), Then, it moves to step S1542.

In step S1542, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same reproduction channel. For example, since the SAC numbers are different between the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction, there are cases where a plurality of SAC numbers are designated for the same reproduction channel without an interval. If there are a plurality of SAC requests for the same playback channel (YES in step S1542), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1543. On the other hand, if there are no SAC requests for the same reproduction channel (NO in step S1542), the sound request control process ends. In this embodiment, since one virtual track corresponds to one reproduction channel, the determination process of step S1542 is synonymous with the determination of whether or not there is a SAC request for the same virtual track. Is. That is, the “track” is an interface for decoding and reproducing the “phrase”, and the “reproduction channel” is a concept for reproducing the “phrase”. That is, when a "playback channel" is specified and a "phrase" is requested to be played back, the phrase is assigned to the corresponding "track" and played. The "virtual track" is an "interface for controlling phrase reproduction". Note that there are 128 virtual tracks and they can be automatically assigned to 32 phrase playback channels, but since this function is not used in this embodiment, "virtual track"="playback channel".

In step S1543, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not it is the chain reproduction of the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction. If it is the chain reproduction of the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction (YES in step S1543), the host control circuit 2100 executes the SAC request of the LOOP reproduction one frame later (33.3 msec later) (step S1544), and controls the sound request. The process ends. In the case of chain playback of SHOT playback and LOOP playback, the SAC request of LOOP playback is delayed by one frame to prevent the sound of SHOT playback from being overwritten and prevent the sound of SHOT playback from becoming difficult to hear. It becomes possible. On the other hand, if it is not the chain reproduction of the SHOT reproduction and the LOOP reproduction (NO in step S1543), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1545.

In step S1545, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the mute command between SACs is mute setting for all reproduction channels. For example, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol ends, the mute command is uniformly set between the SACs for all the reproduction channels. Then, when the mute command between SACs is mute setting for all reproduction channels (YES in step S1545), the host control circuit 2100 causes the SAC data corresponding to the first-arrival SAC request so that mute is executed. On the other hand, without overwriting the mute command, the SAC data corresponding to the late arrival SAC request is set (step S1546), and the sound request control process is ended. On the other hand, when the mute command between SACs is not the mute setting for all the reproduction channels (NO in step S1545), the mute command for each reproduction channel corresponds to the later-arriving SAC request so that a quick process is performed. The SAC data is overwritten and set (step S1547), and the sound request control process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of SAC requests are made to the same reproduction channel in the same frame of the main loop, when the plurality of SAC requests are chain reproduction of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction, , The SAC number of the LOOP reproduction is delayed by one frame (for example, 33.3 msec) so that the sound of the LOOP reproduction is not received with respect to the SHOT reproduction. The SHOT reproduction is, for example, a one-time reproduction of a phrase, and the LOOP reproduction is, for example, a LOOP reproduction (a plurality of reproductions) of a phrase and the like.

Also, when the mute command between SACs is the mute setting for all playback channels, the mute command does not overwrite the SAC data of the last arrival so that the mute command does not overwrite the SAC data corresponding to the SAC number. sign up. Thereby, for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, it is possible to secure a time until the variable display of the next special symbol is started. Further, when the mute command between SACs is not the mute setting for all reproduction channels, the mute command for each reproduction channel is overwritten with the SAC data corresponding to the SAC request that arrives later so that mute is not executed. In this way, by executing or not executing the muffling depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the swiftness of the processing (the swiftness due to the muffling being overwritten) while making the most of the game sound effect of the muffling. ing.

[10-10. Sound request control processing (when volume adjustment is performed)]
Next, regarding the sound request control process shown in FIG. 61, variations of the sound request control process when volume adjustment is performed will be described. In this specification, as variations of the sound request control process when volume adjustment is performed, five variations of the first to fifth examples will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90, respectively. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the first example of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a second embodiment of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the third embodiment of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the fourth embodiment of the sound request control processing when the volume adjustment is performed. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the fifth example of the sound request control process when the volume adjustment is performed.

(First embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 86, in the first embodiment of the sound request control process (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the audio data designated by the SAC number ( Step S1551). Then, it moves to step S1552. The SAC number is registered in each channel by the host control circuit 2100.

In step S1552, the host control circuit 2100 specifies the output destination speaker based on the audio data specified by the SAC number, and proceeds to step S1553. In the first embodiment, the audio data designated by the SAC number incorporates information about which speaker is to be output. The speaker is, for example, a shared speaker that is used for general purposes (used to output a normal sound that is a sound other than a specific sound) and a dedicated speaker that is used to output a specific sound (error sound, warning sound, etc.) And a speaker (for example, a speaker for heavy bass). The host control circuit 2100 sets which of the plurality of speakers is to be the dedicated speaker in various initialization processes (for example, various initialization processes of FIG. 61 (step S1201)).

In step S1553, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S1553), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1554), and the process proceeds to step S1556. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by a hardware switch (NO in step S1553), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1555), and the process proceeds to step S1556.

In step S1556, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13) during debugging, and then proceeds to step S1557.

In step S1557, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the volume control of the specific sound is performed. The specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound. In addition, the voice data instructed by the SAC number includes information that the output destination of the normal sound is the shared speaker, and that the output destination of the specific sound is the dedicated speaker. There is.

If it is determined in step S1558 that the volume control is not for the specific sound (NO in step S1557), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1558). ), and proceeds to step S1560. In the volume control of step S1558, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1557 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S1557), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel ( Then, the process proceeds to step S1559) and step S1560. In the volume control of step S1559, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a control for outputting a constant volume without being influenced by the volume adjustment (that is, even if a volume changing operation is performed, the operation is performed). Before and after is performed, a control for outputting a constant volume is performed.

In step S1560, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume setting for the number of channels has been performed in step S1560 (YES in step S1560), the volume control incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number is performed (step S1561), and the sound request control process ends. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1560 (NO in step S1560), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1557 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed (determined as YES in step S1560). Until that is done), the processes of steps S1557 to S1560 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 86, considering that the SAC number is designated for each channel, if volume control for the number of channels is performed in the process of step S1561 as well. good.

(Second embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 87, in the second embodiment of the sound request control process (when the volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the audio data designated by the SAC number ( Step S1571). Then, it moves to step S1572. The SAC number is registered in each channel by the host control circuit 2100.

In the second embodiment, for example, a shared channel that is used for general purposes (used to output a normal sound that is a sound other than a specific sound) and a specific sound (error sound, warning sound, etc.) There is a dedicated channel used for output. The host control circuit 2100 uses the dedicated channels (CH31, CH32) used to output a specific sound among the plurality of channels (1 to 32CH) and the shared channel (CH1) used for sounds other than the specific sound. To CH30) in various initialization processes (for example, see various initialization processes (step S1201) in FIG. 61).

In step S1572, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1572), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1573), and the process proceeds to step S1575. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1572), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1574), and the process proceeds to step S1575.

In step S1576, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13) during debugging, and then proceeds to step S1576.

In step S1576, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control is for the specific sound. Also in the second embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be influenced by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

If it is determined in step S1576 that the volume control is not for the specific sound (NO in step S1576), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1577). ), and proceeds to step S1578. In the volume control of step S1577, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1576 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S1576), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel ( (Step S1579) and the process proceeds to step S1582. In the volume control of step S1579, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment has been performed, a control for outputting a constant volume without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if a volume changing operation is performed, the operation is performed). Before and after is performed, a control for outputting a constant volume is performed.

In step S1578, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the reproduction is a reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If reproduction is performed on a reproduction channel (eg, CH31, CH32) that is not affected by volume adjustment (YES in step S1578), a certain volume is designated (step S1580). If reproduction is performed on a reproduction channel (for example, CH1 to CH30) subjected to volume adjustment (NO in step S1578), the volume corresponding to the user volume is set (step S1581). When the process of step S1580 ends or the process of step S1581 ends, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1582.

In step S1582, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume setting for the number of channels has been made in step S1632 (YES in step S1582), the volume control incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number is performed (step S1583), and the sound request control process ends. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1582 (NO in step S1582), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1576 and the volume control for the number of channels is performed (determined as YES in step S1582). Until it is performed), the processes of steps S1576 to S1582 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 87, volume control for the number of channels may be performed in the process of step S1583.

(Third embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 88, in the third embodiment of the sound request control processing (when the volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input processing of the audio data designated by the SAC number ( Step S1591). Then, it moves to step S1592.

In step S1592, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1592), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1593), and the process proceeds to step S1595. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1592), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1594), and the process proceeds to step S1595.

In step S1595, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13) during debugging, and then proceeds to step S1596.

In step S1596, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control is for the specific sound. Also in the third embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be influenced by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

When it is determined in step S1596 that the volume control is not for the specific sound (NO in step S1596), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1597). ), and proceeds to step S1599. In the volume control of step S1597, control for changing the volume according to the volume adjustment is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1596 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S1596), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel ( (Step S1598), the process proceeds to step S1599. In the volume control in step S1598, control is performed so that a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment regardless of whether the volume adjustment is performed (that is, even if a volume changing operation is performed, the operation is performed. Before and after is performed, a control for outputting a constant volume is performed.

In step S1599, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data currently in the reproduction channel (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the data in the reproduction channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1599), a constant volume is designated for the reproduction channel next time (step S1600). If the data in the reproduction channel is data to be volume-adjusted (NO in step S1599), next time, the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the reproduction channel (step S1601). When the process of step S1600 ends or the process of step S1601 ends, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1602.

In step S1602, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume setting for the number of channels has been performed in step S1602 (YES in step S1602), the volume control incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number is performed (step S1603), and the sound request control process ends. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1602 (NO in step S1602), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1599 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed (determined as YES in step S1602). Until that is done), the processes of steps S1599 to S1602 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 88, volume control for the number of channels may be performed also in the process of step S1603.

In the third embodiment, in step S1599, it is determined whether or not the data currently being reproduced (data being reproduced) is data that is not affected by the volume adjustment, and the result of the determination in step S1599 is If YES, a certain volume is set for the next playback channel (step S1600). If the determination result of step S1599 is NO, the volume for the next playback channel is set according to the volume adjustment. Instead, a modified example described below may be used. That is, in this modified example, as the processing of the step subsequent to step S1597 and step S1598, the audio data set this time and the audio data already being reproduced on the reproduction channel in which the audio data is set are subjected to volume adjustment. After performing processing to confirm whether the data is not affected, processing to determine whether the volume adjustment setting for the current audio data and the volume adjustment setting for the previous audio data are the same. I do. When the volume adjustment setting for the current audio data is the same as the volume adjustment setting for the previous audio data, processing is performed to determine whether the data is not affected by the volume adjustment. If the volume adjustment settings for the audio data this time are not the same as the volume adjustment settings for the previous audio data, the volume adjustments for the audio data set this time are not affected by the volume adjustments. The process moves to the process of determining whether or not it is data. The process moves to the process of determining whether the data is not affected by the volume adjustment. Then, if the data is not affected by the volume adjustment, a process for setting a certain volume to the playback channel is performed, and if the data is affected by the volume adjustment, the volume is adjusted to the playback channel. Perform the process to set the volume. After that, as in step S1602, the process may be performed to determine whether or not the number of channels has been set. In this modification, the processing different from the third embodiment is only the above-described processing, and the other processing is the processing of the third embodiment (the processing of steps S1592 to S1598 shown in FIG. 88, the processing of step S1602, And the processing of step S1603).

(Fourth embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 89, in the fourth embodiment of the sound request control process (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether the SAC number is the SAC number affected by the volume adjustment. It is confirmed (step S1611). Then, it moves to step S1612.

In step S1612, the host control circuit 2100 updates the flag indicating whether or not the SAC number is affected by the volume adjustment, and inputs the audio data designated by the SAC number (step S1613). Specifically, if the SAC number is affected by volume adjustment, the flag is set to ON (if the SAC number is not affected by volume adjustment, the flag is OFF).

In step S1614, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (YES in step S1614), the volume control is performed by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1617. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1614), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1616), and the process proceeds to step S1617.

In step S1617, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13) at the time of debugging, and then proceeds to step S1618.

In step S1618, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the fourth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be influenced by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

If it is determined in step S1618 that the volume control is not for the specific sound (NO in step S1618), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1619). ), and proceeds to step S1620. In the volume control of step S1619, control is performed to change the volume according to the volume adjustment.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1618 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S1618), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel ( Then, the process proceeds to step S1622) and step S1624. In the volume control in step S1622, control is performed so that a constant volume is output without being affected by the volume adjustment regardless of whether the volume adjustment is performed (that is, even if the volume changing operation is performed, the operation is performed. Before and after is performed, a control for outputting a constant volume is performed.

In step S1620, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, it is determined whether or not the flag is set to ON in step S1612. If the reproduction is performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1620), a certain volume is designated for the reproduction channel (step S1621), and the process proceeds to step S1624. If the reproduction is not performed on the reproduction channel that is not affected by the volume adjustment (NO in step S1620), the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the reproduction channel (step S1623), and the process proceeds to step S1624.

In step S1624, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If the volume setting for the number of channels is performed in step S1624 (YES in step S1624), the volume control incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number is performed (step S1625), and the sound request control process ends. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1624 (NO in step S1624), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1618 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed (determined as YES in step S1624). Until this is done), the processes of steps S1618 to S1624 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 89, volume control for the number of channels may be performed in the process of step S1625.

(Fifth embodiment)
As shown in FIG. 90, in the fifth embodiment of the sound request control process (when volume adjustment is performed), the host control circuit 2100 first performs the input process of the audio data designated by the SAC number ( Step S1631). Then, it moves to step S1632.

The host control circuit 2100 confirms whether or not the audio data is audio data whose volume is adjusted for each channel (step S1633). Specifically, if the audio data specified by the SAC number is the audio data affected by the volume adjustment, the flag is set to ON (the audio data specified by the SAC number is not affected by the volume adjustment. If it is audio data, the flag is OFF).

In step S1633, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the volume control is performed by a hardware switch. If the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (YES in step S1633), the volume is controlled by the hardware switch (see reference numeral 2810 in FIG. 13) (step S1634), and the process proceeds to step S1636. On the other hand, if the volume is not controlled by the hardware switch (NO in step S1633), user volume control (see reference numeral 2820 in FIG. 13) is performed (step S1635), and the process proceeds to step S1636.

In step S1636, the host control circuit 2100 performs debug volume control (see reference numeral 2830 in FIG. 13) during debugging, and then proceeds to step S1637.

In step S1637, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the volume control of the specific sound is performed. Also in the fifth embodiment, the specific sound corresponds to a sound that is not desired to be affected by the volume adjustment, such as an error sound.

If it is determined in step S1637 that the volume control is not for the specific sound (NO in step S1637), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (see reference numeral 2840 in FIG. 13) for the normal sound set in the channel (step S1638). ), and proceeds to step S1639. In the volume control of step S1638, control for changing the volume according to the volume adjustment is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1637 that the volume control is for the specific sound (YES in step S1637), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume control (reference numeral 2850 in FIG. 13) for the specific sound set in the channel ( Then, the process proceeds to step S1640) and step S1643. In the volume control of step S1640, regardless of whether or not the volume adjustment is performed, a control for outputting a constant volume without being affected by the volume adjustment (that is, even if the volume changing operation is performed, the operation is performed. A constant volume is output before and after the operation) is performed.

In step S1639, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment. That is, it is determined in step S1632 whether the flag is set to ON. If the channel is not affected by the volume adjustment (YES in step S1639), a certain volume is set to the reproduction channel (step S1641). If the channel is affected by the volume adjustment (NO in step S1639), the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is set in the reproduction channel (step S1642). When the process of step S1641 ends or the process of step S1642 ends, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1643.

In step S1643, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the volume control for the number of channels (32 channels of 1CH to 32CH in this embodiment) has been performed.

If volume setting for the number of channels has been performed in step S1643 (YES in step S1643), volume control incorporated in the audio data designated by the SAC number is performed (step S1644), and the sound request control process ends. To do.

If the volume control for the number of channels is not performed in step S1643 (NO in step S1643), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1637 until the volume control for the number of channels is performed (determined as YES in step S1643). Until it is performed), the processes of steps S1637 to S1643 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 90, volume control for the number of channels may be performed in the process of step S1644.

According to the sound request control processing when the above-described volume adjustment is performed (first to fifth embodiments), when the volume adjustment is performed, the volume corresponding to the volume adjustment is output for the normal sound. On the other hand, for a serious specific sound such as an error sound, it is possible to easily perform voice control such that a certain volume is output from the speaker even if the volume is adjusted.

[10-11. LED brightness adjustment processing]
Next, the brightness adjustment of the LED will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 91. FIG. 91 is an attenuation table showing an example of the brightness attenuation values of the respective colors (red, green, blue) according to the light emission intensities of the strong, medium, and weak LEDs. This attenuation table is stored in the sub-main ROM 2050 (see, for example, FIG. 10).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured so that the brightness of the LED can be adjusted in three stages by an operation of a player or the like, for example. Specifically, when a brightness adjustment operation is performed on the brightness setting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 performs the attenuation table switching process shown in FIG. 91. For example, when an operation of changing from strong to medium among the three levels of brightness is performed, the host control circuit 2100 performs a process of switching the reference table from strong to medium in the attenuation table of FIG. 91.

The LED whose brightness can be adjusted by an operation of a player or the like may be, for example, an LED provided on the glass door 13 (see, for example, FIG. 2), or a backlight of a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16, for example. May be It should be noted that the brightness adjustment of the LED is not limited to three steps, and may be configured to be adjustable in more steps, for example.

The output value of the LED is represented by the following equation (1).
LED output value=luminance value based on LED data×(100−luminance attenuation value)/100 (1)
The output value of the LED of the above formula (1) can be set for each reproduction channel of the LED. The parameter changed by the player's operation is the brightness attenuation value. For example, when the brightness attenuation value is 0, the brightness is strongest, and when the brightness attenuation value is 100, the brightness is weakest and the light is turned off. The calculation of the output value of the LED is performed inside the sequencer 2260b (see FIG. 11).

In addition, the LED data table defining the LED data and the reproduction pattern is created by using a tool such as ActiveLED (UE) and LEDMaker (UE) to create a BLD file (LED animation), and information is added to the created BLD file. While being created, it is created by converting with the LED list (Excel macro) (UE).

By the way, in the case of the three primary color full-color LEDs, if the luminance attenuation values of red, green, and blue are made to be the same, the white balance may be lost, and for example, what is white may become yellow. For example, when the brightness of the LED is reduced, it is necessary to maximize the brightness attenuation value of blue among red, green, and blue, and it is preferable to minimize the brightness attenuation value of red.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if the brightness of the LED is changed by the operation of the player or the like, for example, by setting the brightness attenuation value for each of 1024 ports, white It is designed to maintain balance as much as possible.

Specifically, when the brightness of the LED is adjusted to one of high, medium, and low by an operation of the player or the like, the sound/LED control circuit 2200 refers to the attenuation table of FIG. The brightness of the LED is controlled based on the brightness attenuation value set for each of green and blue. Since the attenuation table is prepared for each of 1024 ports (for each LED), the attenuation value can be set for each port.

For example, when the brightness of the LED is set to be high by the operation of the player or the like, the sequencer 2260b of the sound/LED control circuit 2200 causes the red brightness attenuation value 0, the green brightness attenuation value 5 and the blue brightness attenuation value 25. Is substituted into the above equation (1) to calculate the output value of the LED. Similarly, the sequencer 2260b of the sound/LED control circuit 2200, when the brightness of the LED is set to the middle by the operation of the player or the like, the red brightness attenuation value 50, the green brightness attenuation value 53 and the blue brightness attenuation value 53. When 63 is substituted into the above equation (1) and the brightness of the LED is set to be weak by the operation of the player or the like, the brightness attenuation value of red 80, the brightness attenuation value of green 81 and the brightness attenuation value of blue 85 are set. The output value of the LED is calculated by substituting it in the above equation (1). Then, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 controls the light emission of the LED based on the output value of the LED calculated in this way.

In this way, the sound/LED control circuit 2200 calculates the output value of the LED based on the brightness attenuation value set corresponding to each of red, green, and blue, and based on the calculated output value of the LED. By controlling the light emission of the LED, it is possible to maintain the white balance as much as possible even if the brightness of the LED is changed by the operation of the player or the like.

[10-12. Accessory solenoid control processing]
Next, the accessory solenoid control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 61, 62 and 92. FIG. 92 is a block diagram showing an example of a connection state of the LED port, the LED and the solenoid.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the movement of movable bodies (features) provided in the game area is diversified, and control of the movable bodies is complicated accordingly. Therefore, for simple movements among a wide variety of movements of the movable body, control of the movable body is suppressed by operating a member constituting the accessory with a solenoid or providing a locking mechanism in the accessory. I am trying to When the motor driver that operates the accessory receives the request for the motor operation (request for accessory), the motor driver sequentially outputs the content of the motor operation data. The output of the motor driver and the determination of the end of the motor operation are performed by a timer interruption process of 1 msec as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt processing, output determination and end determination (that is, start and end determination) of the accessory motor are performed, and synchronous control of the plurality of motors is also performed.

Further, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, is based on a command from the host control circuit 2100, and LED on the frame side connected to each LED port and The LEDs on the board surface (for example, the LEDs arranged in the game board unit 17 and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) are controlled to emit light through the LED driver. Among the LED ports (Port0 to Port23) controlled by the LED driver, the solenoid is connected to Port6 and the LEDs are connected to other Ports.

The voice/LED control circuit 2200 receives a command from the host control circuit 2100 and causes the LEDs connected to the respective ports of the frame-side LED and the board-side LED to emit light through the LED driver. By connecting a solenoid to the port 6, the solenoid can also be operated via the LED driver. As a result, even if the number of solenoids increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, it is possible to suppress the control load for operating the accessory while maintaining the variety of the movement of the accessory. ..

By the way, as shown in FIG. 92, when the operation of the solenoid is executed via the LED driver, it is necessary to synchronously control the motor for operating the accessory and the operation of the solenoid. The operation of the accessory is performed by interrupt processing of 1 msec including synchronous control of a plurality of motors.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if a control code is added to the accessory sequence table and it is desired to synchronously control the solenoid and a plurality of motors that operate the accessory, a value greater than 0 is set to the control code. I'm trying to set it. Then, the host control circuit 2100 acquires the control code of the accessory being reproduced by the accessory device in the main loop processing (see step S1204 in FIG. 61), and the acquired control code has a value greater than 0. In this case, the control of the LED port (for example, Port 6 to which the solenoid is connected) corresponding to the control code is executed (see step S1205 in FIG. 61). This makes it possible to execute synchronous control between the solenoid and a plurality of motors that operate the accessory.

The control of the LED port corresponding to the control code is executed in the main loop so that the normal LED control executed in the interrupt process of 1 msec is not affected.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the solenoid is connected to a part of the LED ports (Port0 to Port23), the above-described LED brightness adjustment is performed by an operation of the player or the like. Then, the voltage to the solenoid is also reset, but since the solenoid operation is only ON/OFF, it is considered that the influence on the solenoid is small. Further, when the synchronization effect for synchronizing the light emission of the LED and the operation of the solenoid is executed, it is possible to easily execute the synchronization effect.

[10-13. Data loading process]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a data loading process is performed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) executed when the power is turned on. Further, the data loading process may be performed during the game. These data loading processes include data transfer from the ROM to the RAM or the buffer (for example, data transfer from the sub-main ROM 2050 to the SRAM 2100b, data transfer from the CGROM 2060 to the internal VRAM 2370 (for example, see FIG. 10)), that is, , A process of loading the data stored in the ROM into the RAM or the buffer (data loading process).

In the above data loading process, if the amount of data to be transferred is large, it takes time to load the data, and there is a risk that the watchdog will be reset and the data loading process will end. When the watchdog is reset, it is difficult to determine whether the reset is caused simply because the amount of data is large and it takes time or when an error occurs during data loading. Further, when the data loading process is completed, the host control circuit 2100 cannot determine whether the loading is completed or the loading is unsuccessful, and keeps waiting for the completion of the loading. There is a risk of becoming.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, if the time required for the data loading process exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, an error occurs, the data loading process is terminated, and the data is reloaded. The data load process will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of a data load process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 93, the host control circuit 2100 first sets the upper limit of the transfer time (step S1651). The transfer time is the time required to load data from ROM to RAM. The upper limit of the transfer time varies depending on the amount of data to be transferred, but in this embodiment, it is determined by the following equation (2).
Upper limit of transfer time = (transfer data amount per unit time) x (transfer time guide + α)...Equation (2)
The transfer data amount per unit time and the transfer time reference of the above equation (2) may be set in advance based on the transferred data amount, or based on the transferred data amount, for example, the host control circuit 2100. You may make it calculate by. It should be noted that α is a time for allowing a margin for data loading.

Upon the processing in step S1651 ending, the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1652 and starts loading data from the ROM to the RAM.

After starting the data loading (step S1652), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data loading is completed (step S1653). If data loading has not been completed (NO in step S1653), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S1654. On the other hand, if the data loading has been completed (YES in step S1653), the host control circuit 2100 ends the data loading process.

In step S1654, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the data transfer time has exceeded the upper limit value. If the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (YES in step S1654), the watchdog timer is cleared at regular intervals (step S1655). On the other hand, if the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (NO in step S1654), the host control circuit 2100 determines that an error has occurred and executes error processing. The error process executed here is a process of resetting the load data by the watchdog reset without performing the clearing process of the watchdog timer (step S1656) and reloading. After that, the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S1654. That is, when the data transfer time exceeds the upper limit value (NO in step S1654), the data is reloaded as an error process.

As described above, when performing the data loading process, the host control circuit 2100 keeps performing the clearing process of the watchdog timer at regular intervals while waiting for the completion of the loading so that the watchdog reset is not performed during the normal loading. I have to. However, when the data load process exceeds a predetermined upper limit value, the host control circuit 2100 resets and reloads the load data. As a result, even if the data loading process takes time, the data is automatically restored by reloading.

[10-14. Sub random number processing]
Next, sub random number processing executed in the main loop by the host control circuit 2100 will be described.

The sub-random number process includes a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) when the power is turned on, a random number periodic update process executed periodically, A random number acquisition process that is executed when a random number is used is included. The sub-random number process is, unlike the lottery for the special symbol by the main CPU 101 (for example, refer to FIG. 9) related to the payout, a process for a random number that does not affect the payout, for example, is used for determining a production mode. However, the sub-random number process described below may be applied to the random number process executed by the main CPU 101. These sub-random number processes described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 97. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of the random number periodic update processing. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of (a) random number 1 acquisition processing, (b) a flowchart showing an example of random number 2 acquisition processing, (c) a flowchart showing an example of random number 3 acquisition processing, (d) random number 4 acquisition processing It is a flowchart which shows an example. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, four random numbers are used (random number 1 to random number 4), and the initialization processing for these four random numbers is performed by clearing the game data RAM as shown in FIG. It is executed at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 94, in the random number initialization process, the host control circuit 2100 first acquires the RTC time (minutes/seconds) (step S1671), and then enters a loop for the number of random numbers.

In the loop for the number of random numbers, the host control circuit 2100 first creates a random number SEED (step S1672). Creation of the random number SEED in the random number initialization process is executed based on the following expression (3).
SEED (random number 1 to 4)=(RTC time (second)+(RTC time (minute)×60)+random number (random number 1 to 4))×initial prime number...Equation (3)

After creating the random number SEED in step S1672, the host control circuit 2100 backs up the random number, that is, stores the random number SEED created in step S1672 in the SRAM 2100b (see, for example, FIG. 10) (step S1673). The random number SEED backed up here is the random number SEED created this time, but the information backed up to the previous time may be deleted or may be stored continuously.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the processes of step S1672 and step S1673 for the number of random numbers (four random numbers 1 to 4 in this embodiment), it exits the loop for the number of random numbers and ends the random number initialization process.

Thus, in the random number initialization process, the RTC time minutes and seconds are used. Therefore, the random number SEED at the time of initialization involves the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds.

Next, the random number periodic update processing will be described with reference to FIG. The random number periodic update process is a process of regularly updating the random numbers 1 to 4 even if none of the random numbers 1 to 4 is used in the bank flip end waiting shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 95, in the random number periodic update process, the host control circuit 2100 acquires the random number 1 acquisition process (step S1681), the random number 2 acquisition process (step S1682), the random number 3 acquisition process (step S1683), and the random number 4 acquisition. The processing (step S1684) is performed in this order. The random number periodic update process is always executed while waiting for the completion of bank flip. Even if the bank flip end wait does not occur due to any processing failure in the main loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs the random number periodic update processing once in one frame.

As shown in FIG. 96A, in the random number 1 acquisition process, the random number 1 is updated (step S1685), that is, the random number 1 is acquired and then the random number 1 is updated. After that, the random number 1 is backed up, that is, the obtained random number 1 is stored in the SRAM 2100b (see, for example, FIG. 10) (step S1686). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96B, in the random number 2 acquisition processing, random number 2 is updated (step S1689) and random number 2 is backed up (step S1688). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96(c), the random number 3 acquisition processing updates the random number 3 (step S1689) and backs up the random number 3 (step S1690). Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96(d), the random number 4 acquisition process updates the random number 4 (step S1691) and backs up the random number 4 (step S1692). The random numbers backed up in step S1686, step S1688, step S1690 and step S1692 are the random numbers acquired this time, but the information backed up up to the previous time may be deleted or may be stored continuously. ..

Note that any of the random numbers 1 to 4 is obtained from the random numbers generated within the range of 0 to 32767, but the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used, the host control circuit 2100 first performs a random number 3 acquisition process (step S1693). The random number 3 acquisition process is a process of acquiring the random number to be used for determining the random number to be used among the random numbers 1, 2, and 4. After executing the random number 3 acquisition processing of step S1693, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1694.

In step S1694, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the number of remainders (hereinafter, simply referred to as “remainder number”) when the random number acquired in the random number 3 acquisition process of step S1693 is divided by 4 is 0 or 1. Determine whether. If the remainder is 0 or 1 (YES in step S1694), random number 1 acquisition processing is performed (step S1695). On the other hand, if the remainder number is neither 0 nor 1 (NO in step S1694), the process proceeds to step S1696.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1696 whether or not the number of remainders is two. If the number of remainders is 2 (YES in step S1696), random number 2 acquisition processing is performed (step S1697). On the other hand, if the remaining number is not 2 (NO in step S1696), the process advances to step S1698.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1698 whether the number of remainders is three. If the number of remainders is 3 (YES in step S1698), random number 4 acquisition processing is performed (step S1699). On the other hand, if the number of remainders is not 3 (NO in step S1698), this means that there is no remaining number of 0 to 3, so the processing is repeated from step S1693.

The random number 1 acquisition process (step S1695), the random number 2 acquisition process (step S1697), the random number 3 acquisition process (step S1693), and the random number 4 acquisition process (step S1699) are all as shown in FIG. 96. ..

Thus, in the random number acquisition process executed when a random number is used, the random number selected from random number 1, random number 2, and random number 4 is updated, but the random number that is not selected is updated. Not done

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the random number initialization process is performed when the power is turned on, and the random number acquisition process is performed on the selected random number when the random number is used, and the bank flip end wait or the bank flip end is performed. Random number periodical update processing is performed even when waiting does not occur.

The calculation formula when updating the random number is as shown in the following formula (4).
Update value this time = (update value of last time x prime number of each random number) +1 ... Expression (4)
Here, the return value of the random number acquisition processing is a value of 0 to 32767 that is right-shifted back from 32 bits to 16 bits. That is, the current update value calculated based on the above equation (4) is represented by 32 bits, and the current update value of 32 bits is right-shifted back from 32 bits to 16 bits. Then, the 16th bit is masked, and the value indicated by 1 to 15 bits (one of 0 to 32767) is determined as the updated value this time.

By performing the sub-random number process described above, it is possible to randomize the acquired random numbers, and it is possible to prevent the acquired random numbers from being biased. Particularly, since the random number SEED at the time of initialization involves the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds, it is possible to change the initial value each time.

[10-14-1. Modified example of sub-random number processing]
Although the sub-random number process in the present embodiment has been described above, the sub-random number process (variation example) described below may be performed instead of or in combination with the above-described sub-random number process. Further, the sub-random number process (variation example) described below may be applied to the random number process executed by the main CPU 101. A modified example of this sub-random number processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. Note that FIG. 98 is a sub-control main process (overall flow) executed by the host control circuit 2100 for explaining a modified example of the sub-random number process. However, in FIG. 98, only the processing necessary for the description is shown, and other processing is omitted. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the reception interrupt processing executed by the host control circuit 2100.

The host control circuit 2100 first performs a random number initialization process executed as one of various initialization processes (see step S1201 in FIG. 61) (step S1701). In this random number initialization process, for example, a random number seed of a power of 2 (power number) and a current random number seed number are prepared, and a predetermined initial value is set in the stack pointer.

When the random number initialization processing of step S1701 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 enters the main loop, performs sub device input processing (step S1702), and then performs various request control processing (step S1703). In the various request control processing (step S1703), the data is output to various devices based on the request created in step S1705, which will be described later, one frame before.

When the input processing of the sub device (step S1702) and the various request control processing (step S1703) are performed, the host control circuit 2100 performs a random number table creation processing (step S1704). In the random number table creation process of step S1704, a new random number table is created by updating the random numbers registered in the random number table having a power of 2 size at the drawing timing. To obtain the random numbers registered in the random number table, for example, a random number seed that is determined based on the current random number seed number among the random number seeds that are powers of two is used. For example, when 2 ³ (8) random number seeds a to h are prepared, and the current random number seed number is 4, the random number seed d is used.

In step S1704, the host control circuit 2100 can create a random number table having a size of, for example, ²⁵ (32), and 32 random numbers are registered in this random number table. When the random number is registered in the random number table, the host control circuit 2100 updates the value of the random number seed. The random number seed is updated by multiplying the previous update value by the prime number and then adding 1 as in the case of the above-described expression (4). It should be noted that the size of the random number table may be any power of 2 (pieces) in this modification, and ²⁵ (32) is adopted, but any size of power of 2 (pieces) may be adopted. good.

As shown in FIG. 99, the random number seed used to create the random number table in step S1704 is, for example, the value of the CPU counter by the CPU processor of the host control circuit 2100 when the serial command is received (step S1801). It is updated by using (step S1802). In the random number seed update process of step S1802, the random number seed number used for creating the random number table is updated by incrementing the random number seed number and using the incremented random number seed number as the current random number seed number.

Returning to FIG. 98, when the random number table creation processing in step S1704 is performed, the host control circuit 2100 enters a packet reception loop.

In the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation construction processing (step S1705) for creating a request for animation for moving image production, and performs random number acquisition processing when random numbers are used (step S1706). The request created in step S1705 is output in the next frame after waiting in the buffer.

In the random number acquisition process of step S1706, the host control circuit 2100 acquires a random number from the random number table created in step S1704. The random number acquired here is used for a lottery (for example, a lottery for determining an animation for a movie effect) related to an effect executed by the host control circuit 2100. When the host control circuit 2100 acquires a random number from the random number table in step S1706, it updates (increments) the reference position of the random number table. The reference position of the random number table is only performed when the random number is acquired from the random number table, and is not used in the random number table creation process in step S1704.

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processing of steps S1705 and S1706 for packet reception. The host control circuit 2100 exits the packet reception loop after performing the processes of steps S1705 and S1706 for the packet reception.

Upon exiting the packet reception loop, the host control circuit 2100 performs animation update processing (step S1707), and then waits for bank flip/bank flip end (step S1708).

The host control circuit 2100 repeats the processing of steps S1702 to S1708 in the main loop having a cycle of 33.3 msec.

According to the modification of the sub-random number process described above, even if there are multiple random number acquisition opportunities in the packet reception loop, only the random number is acquired by changing the reference position using the same random number table that has already been created. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load of the host control circuit 2100 while giving randomness to the acquired random numbers.

[10-15. Other extended examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and a privilege is awarded based on the result of the game. That is, the main control circuit 100 itself is not limited to a form in which a game medium is shot or thrown in by a physical player's action to play a game, and the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. The game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed to allow a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and managing the game medium.

When the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit 100 manages, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is an external game (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface with a medium handling device, and provides a necessary game medium for lending a game medium (that is, for a player to insert a game medium). Operation) or a combination relating to the payout of a game medium (a winning combination is achieved), a payout operation of a game medium (that is, a game medium is paid out to a player, and a necessary game medium is obtained. It is sufficient to be able to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium used for a game. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media to be held on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the retained game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media available to the player for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media to an external game medium handling device, and the game is managed. In addition to the case where a person directly operates, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the game machine handling device and an external game media handling device. In this case, it is desirable that the player has the capability of not transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded game media, except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal, various lending operation means, various operation means such as return operation means, and a game medium handling device-side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all are not shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted valuable value from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, thereby playing the game. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player brings the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like in order to exchange the prize, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is changed. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is ejected, but cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again later.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value can be executed by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown) to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. Good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that is only known to the player may be set, or the player may be recorded by the image pickup means provided in the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachinko game machine is described, but a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, or an enclosed game machine also has a game medium management device. It may be provided so that the game medium of the player is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of components inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from directly contacting the game medium, improve the gaming environment, reduce noise, and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity via the game medium or the game medium insertion port or payout port. That is, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed game machine configured so that the game media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and data relating to the consumption of the game media, the increase/decrease of the game media associated with the rent, and the payout of the game media are transmitted to the communication cable. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected via an optical signal via a game medium management device, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of balls held. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above in the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are circulated in a series of paths in the game machine.

Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine in the enclosed game machine, the upper plate and the lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball are not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball does not actually exist at the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts a game after he or she has acquired a ball from a game medium management device. Here, to obtain a possessed ball means that the player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, the game balls are shot from the launching device, the balls that are held are consumed, and the number of balls that are held is reduced. Further, when the game balls pass through the respective winning openings or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls to be held is increased by paying out according to the conditions set according to the winning openings. Further, the number of balls held also increases by lending from the game medium management device. It should be noted that "consumption, lending and payout of game media" means that the possession ball is consumed, lended and paid out. Further, “increasing or decreasing the number of game media” indicates that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending and payout. Further, "data regarding consumption of game media, increase/decrease in game media associated with lending/paying" is data relating to a decrease in the number of balls held due to a game ball being shot and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of the game ball through each winning opening. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each of the winning openings, the payout number of the game ball due to that is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is launched, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data relating to the number of balls to the game medium management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located above the gaming machine, and accepts a request for converting a game value managed by the game medium management device into a ball (ball lending) or counting (returning) the ball. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held. Here, the "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the gaming media management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted possessed balls can be used for prize exchange or the like at a game hall where a game system is installed.

Further, the enclosed game machine has a backup power source. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before being turned off can be retained. Further, the backup power supply may be used to continuously detect the door frame opening by the door opening sensor, for example. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data transmitted and received is the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, at the transmission source, by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with, It can be confirmed that it is sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission source has a modulator that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulator is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the destination receives the signal modulated by the modulator. A demodulation unit that demodulates may be included.

As a result, even if a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission destination, when receiving the transmission signal from the transmission source, sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

With this, by comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, not only is it confirmed that the regular signal was transmitted and received, but also that the regular signal was transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress fraud.

[10-16. Processes related to the movement of the characters in the character group]
A process related to the operation of the accessory in the accessory group 1000 (the accessory (including the operating member configuring the accessory) included in the accessory group 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 107. The accessory used herein is a movable accessory that can be operated by driving various power sources such as a motor and a solenoid, and does not include a decorative accessory that does not move. The accessory is driven based on a control signal and data (for example, excitation data described later) output from the host control circuit 2100, but the excitation data includes the number of steps (for example, when the power source is a stepping motor). The data is not limited to specific data as long as the data has a unit representing the magnitude of power such as excitation time.

The processes related to the operation of the role objects in the role group 1000 are roughly the role product initial operation process performed by the host control circuit 2100 when the power is turned on and the sub control main process (or sub control main) by the host control circuit 2100. There is an accessory control process performed in each request control process). In the following, the accessory initial operation process and the accessory control process will be sequentially described.

[10-16-1. Accessory initial operation processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 100, the accessory initial operation process performed as one of various initialization processes (for example, see step S1201 in FIG. 61) by the host control circuit 2100 will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory initial operation process executed by the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment.

First, the host control circuit 2100 sets the number of operations of the motor used to operate the accessory, that is, the initial position recovery counter to "0" (step S1901).

After the processing of step S1901, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the accessory of the accessory group 1000 is in the initial position (step S1902). In the process of step S1902, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not the accessory is present at the initial position (specifically, whether or not the accessory detection sensor group 1002 is at the initial position. The determination is made based on the detection state of the accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is the determination target.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902), whether or not the number of operations is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, that is, the value of the initial position recovery counter is “10”. It is determined whether or not the above (step S1904).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the number of operations is less than the specified number (for example, 10 times) (NO in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 performs the initial position moving operation (step S1906). The initial position moving operation is an operation of driving the motor to move the accessory to the initial position.

After the processing of step S1906, the host control circuit 2100 adds "1" to the number of motor operations, that is, the value of the initial position recovery counter (step S1907), and proceeds to step S1902. Accordingly, as long as it is determined that the accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902) until the number of motor operations reaches the specified number (for example, 10 times), the host control circuit 2100 causes the host control circuit 2100 to perform steps S1902, S1904, and step S1904. The initial position movement processing of S1906 and step S1907 will be repeated.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S1904 that the number of operations is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (YES in step S1904), it ends the initial position movement process and sets the shift to the error motor operation stop state. Processing is performed (step S1905). When the error motor operation stop state is entered, the operations of all the winning objects are stopped, and the host control circuit 2100 terminates the accessory initial operation process and returns the process to the sub-control main process (see FIG. 61, for example).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1902 that the accessory is in the initial position (YES in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S1901 and determines whether the accessory is in the initial position for the next accessory. It is determined (step S1902). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that all the motors for operating the accessory used are in the initial positions (YES in step S1902), the host control circuit 2100 performs a power-on process (step S1903) to perform the accessory initial operation process. Is terminated, and the process is returned to the sub-control main process (see FIG. 61, for example).

The power-on process of step S1903 is a process of moving the accessory to the maximum movable range and then moving it to the initial position in order to confirm the operation of the accessory. In the power-on process of step S1903, the movement of the accessory to the maximum movable range and then the operation of moving the accessory to the initial position may be performed for all the accessory at the same time, or for one or more accessory in order. You may

In the power-on process of step S1903 described above, that is, in the process of moving the accessory to the initial movable position after moving it to the maximum range of motion, it is only necessary to be able to confirm the operation of the accessory. If there is a driving accessory (for example, an accessory that moves from the initial position to the first stage and then moves from the first stage to the second stage), the operation of the accessory is confirmed by the first stage from the initial position. The control may be performed so as to execute the first operation confirmation of moving to the first stage and the second operation confirmation of moving from the initial position to the first stage and then to the second stage.

In addition, for example, a first accessory that is driven stepwise (for example, a first accessory that moves from the initial position to the first step and then from the first step to the second step) and from the initial position When there is a second accessory that is driven to a predetermined position, the first accessory is confirmed to move from the initial position to the first stage as the operation confirmation of the accessory, and then the first accessory is confirmed. The second action check that the second accessory moves from the initial position to the predetermined position is performed, and then the second action check that the first accessory moves from the first stage to the second stage is performed. May be. In this case, by performing the third operation confirmation between the first operation confirmation and the second operation confirmation, it is possible to efficiently perform the operation confirmation of the plurality of accessory parts.

As described above, in the accessory product initial operation process, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the accessory product is in the initial position when the power is turned on (specifically, of the accessory product detection sensor group 1002. , When the power is turned on when all the accessory are in the initial position, which is detected by the accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is the determination target of whether the accessory is in the initial position or not (step S1902). Processing (step S1903) is performed. Then, if there is an accessory that is not in the initial position (NO in step S1902), the initial position moving process (step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, step S1907) is repeated a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times). Even if the initial position moving process (step S1902, step S1904, step S1906, step S1907) is performed a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times) and there is no accessory at the initial position (YES in step S1904), the host control circuit 2100 returns an error. The process of setting the shift to the motor operation stopped state is performed (step S1905). With this, when the power is turned on, it is confirmed whether or not the motor for operating the accessory operates normally, and the process of moving the accessory to the initial position when the accessory is not in the initial position. You can Moreover, if the accessory does not happen to be in the initial position due to a minor trouble (error), while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state, if the accessory cannot continue returning to the initial position, By shifting to the motor error operation stop state, it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors.

[10-16-2. Accessory control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the accessory control process performed in step S210 in the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52) will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of the accessory control process executed by the host control circuit 2100 in the present embodiment.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the current operation status is a command reception standby operation capable of receiving a command from the main control circuit 100 (that is, whether or not the command reception standby flag is ON). Yes (step S1911).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the current operation status is not in the standby operation for receiving the command from the main control circuit 100 (that is, the command reception standby flag is OFF) (NO in step S1911), the accessory control The process is ended, and the process is transferred to the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the current operation state is the standby operation for receiving the command from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1911), whether or not the command related to the performance is received from the main control circuit 100. Is determined (step S1912). In addition, the command regarding the effect to be judged in this process is, for example, a variation start command of a special symbol, a variation stop command of a special symbol, a demo command, a variation confirmation command, and a hit command related to a big hit, and these commands are host When received by the control circuit 2100, each accessory in the accessory group 1000 is driven.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that it has not received the command related to the effect from the main control circuit 100 (NO in step S1912), it ends the accessory control process and performs the process on the sub control circuit main process (see FIG. 52). Move to.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the command related to the effect has been received from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912), the host control circuit 2100 performs the effect command reception time process (step S1913). In this effect command reception time process, as shown in FIG. 102, which will be described later, in response to a command related to the effect received from the main control circuit 100, a variation start command reception time accessory process (step S19133), an initial position restoration accessory product. Each processing of operation processing (step S19134), demo command reception accessory processing (step S19136), fluctuation confirmation command reception accessory processing (step S19138), and hit system command reception accessory processing (step S19139) is performed. Be seen. Details of each of these processes will be described later.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example is described in which each processing of step S19133, step S19136, step S19138, and step S19139 is performed in the accessory control processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and commands related to effects are performed. When receiving the, each of these processes may be performed as an interrupt process, or each of these processes may be performed immediately after the command analysis process (see step S204 of FIG. 52) described above.

After executing the effect command reception process (step S1913), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the acceptance permission of the accessory request has been set (step S1914).

If the host control circuit 2100 determines that the acceptance permission for the accessory request has not been set (NO in step S1914), the accessory control processing ends, and the processing proceeds to the sub-control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined that the acceptance permission of the accessory request is set (YES in step S1914), the host control circuit 2100 obtains the accessory request stored in the accessory request buffer in the animation building process of FIG. Processing is performed (step S1915).

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the process of step S1915, the host control circuit 2100 starts generating a request for effect control in order to synchronize the effect operation by each accessory in the accessory group 1000 with the effect operation by the display device 16. After the lapse of two frames, the acquisition processing of the accessory request described above is executed.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 transmits the excitation data to the motor driver via the I2C controller 2610 based on the acquired accessory request (step S1916), and then sets the command reception standby flag to ON (step S1917). ). Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 2610 (step S1918). In this processing, the host control circuit 2100 may determine whether a communication error between the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 or an error of the I2C controller 2610 is detected (acquired or input).

When determining that the communication error signal has been received from the I2C controller 2610 (YES in step S1918), the host control circuit 2100 sets a communication controller error (step S1921). After the processing of step S1921, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control processing, and moves the processing to the sub control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the communication error signal is not received from the I2C controller 261 (NO in step S1918), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the address of each motor driver can be accessed (step S1919).

When determining that the address of each motor driver cannot be accessed (NO in step S1919), the host control circuit 2100 sets a connection error (step S1922). After the processing of step S1922, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control processing and moves the processing to the sub control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the address of each motor driver can be accessed (YES in step S1919), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the operation of each accessory (each motor) has ended normally (step S1920).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the operation of each accessory (each motor) has ended normally (YES in step S1920), it ends the accessory control processing, and the processing is the sub-control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52). ). On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation of each accessory (each motor) is not normally completed (NO in step S1920), the host control circuit 2100 sets a data error (step S1923). After the processing of step S1923, the host control circuit 2100 ends the accessory control processing and moves the processing to the sub control circuit main processing (see FIG. 52).

[10-16-3. Processing when receiving production commands]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, description will be made of the effect-type command reception process performed in step S1913 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101). FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of a process at the time of receiving a production system command. This processing is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the effect-type command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, in step S 19131, the host control circuit 2100 sets the command reception standby flag to OFF. Then, the host control circuit 2100 executes each process in accordance with the effect system command received in step S1912. Specifically, when the command received in step S1912 is a fluctuation start command (YES in step S19132), a fluctuation start command reception accessory process (step S19133) is executed. After that, the host control circuit 2100 executes the initial position recovery auditors operation process (step S19134), and ends the effect command reception process.

If the command received in step S1912 is a demo command (NO in step S19132 and YES in step S19135), demo product reception time accessory processing (step S19136) is executed, and production system command reception is performed. The process ends.

If the command received in step S1912 is a fluctuation confirmation command (NO in step S19132 and step S19135, and YES in step S19137), the fluctuation start command reception accessory processing (step S19138) is executed. Then, the process at the time of receiving the production system command is ended.

Furthermore, if the command received in step S1912 is neither a fluctuation confirmation command, a demo command, nor a fluctuation confirmation command (NO in any of step S19132, step S19135, and step S19137), it is determined that a hit system command has been received. The winning system command reception processing (step S19139) is executed, and the effect system command reception processing is ended. If the command received in step S1912 is neither a fluctuation confirmation command, a demo command, nor a fluctuation confirmation command, instead of determining that a hit command has been received, the command received in step S1912 is a hit command. It is also possible to execute the winning command processing upon receipt of the hit system command (step S19139) based on the determination that it is.

The variation start command reception accessory processing (step S19133), the initial position restoration bonus operation operation processing (step S19134), the demo command reception accessory processing (step S19136), the variation start command reception accessory processing (step S19138). ) And each processing of the winning command processing upon reception of the winning command (step S19139) will be described below.

[10-16-4. Processing of Accessory When Receiving Variation Start Command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a special symbol variation start command reception bonus product process performed in step S19133 of the production system command reception process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing an example of a bonus product process when a special symbol variation start command is received. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 on the basis of receiving the variation start command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the winning objects (including the operating members that form the winning objects) in the winning group 1000 are in the initial positions (step S19141). In the process of step S19141, the host control circuit 2100 makes a determination based on the detection state of the accessory detection sensor group 1002 that detects the presence of each accessory at the initial position.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that all the accessory are in the initial positions (YES in step S19141), the host control circuit 2100 sets acceptance permission for the accessory request (step S19142). When the acceptance permission of the accessory request is set, the control state of each accessory of the accessory group 1000 shifts from the command reception standby state to the accessory request acceptance permitted state.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 sets the initial position recovery counter to "0" (step S19143). After the processing of step S19143, the host control circuit 2100 ends the variation start command reception accessory processing.

On the other hand, in step S19141, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is an accessory that is not in the initial position, that is, one or more accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S19141), the initial position recovery counter indicates “ The process of adding "1" is executed (step S19144).

After executing the processing of step S19144, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the initial position recovery counter is the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) or more (step S19145).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the initial position recovery counter is equal to or greater than the specified number (YES in step S19145), the host control circuit 2100 performs a shift setting process to the error motor operation stop state (step S19146). When the error motor operation stop state is entered, the operations of all the winning objects are stopped. After the processing of step S19146, the host control circuit 2100 ends the variation start command reception accessory processing.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the initial position recovery counter is not equal to or greater than the specified number of times (NO in step S19145), the host control circuit 2100 sets the initial position recovery operation state (step S19147). In the initial position recovery operation state, an initial position recovery operation process described below is executed.

Thus, in the variation start command reception accessory processing, the host control circuit 2100, when receiving the variation start command of the special symbol, the accessory detection sensor group 1002 detects whether all the accessories are in the initial position. (Step S19141) If there is an accessory that is not in the initial position, acceptance of the accessory request is prohibited (prohibited), and a setting for shifting to the initial position recovery operation state is made (step S19147). Then, in step S19141, when the number of the variation start command reception accessory processing in which it is determined that one or more accessory is not in the initial position reaches the specified number (for example, 10 times) continuously, the host control circuit 2100 Motor error The operation is set to stop. In other words, even if there is an accessory that is not in the initial position at the start of the variation of the special symbol, the variation start of the special symbol in the situation that there is an accessory that is not in the initial position is continuously specified times (for example, 10 times) Until that time, the setting for shifting to the initial position recovery operation state is performed, and after reaching the specified number of times, the setting for shifting to the error motor operation stop state is performed. Therefore, if there is an accessory that happened to be unable to return to the initial position due to a minor trouble (error), the accessory that cannot return to the initial position can be avoided while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state. If it continues, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors by shifting to the motor error operation stop state.

[10-16-5. Initial position recovery accessory operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 104, the initial position recovery auditors operation process performed in step S19134 in the process for receiving a production system command (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the initial position recovery auditor operation process. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the fact that the transition to the initial position recovery operation state is set in step S19147 of the variation start command reception accessory process (see FIG. 103).

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not it is in the initial position recovery operation state, that is, whether or not the transition setting to the initial position recovery operation state is performed in step S19147 of the accessory processing when the fluctuation start command is received (see FIG. 103). It is determined whether or not (step S19151).

If it is not in the initial position recovery operation state (NO in step S19151), the host control circuit 2100 ends the initial position recovery accessory operation process.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that it is in the initial position recovery operation state (YES in step S19151), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the accessory is at the initial position (specifically, accessory detection sensor group 1002). Among them, it is detected by the accessory detection sensor provided corresponding to the accessory that is the determination target of whether the accessory is in the initial position, and it is determined whether the accessory is in the initial position (step S19152).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is not in the initial position (YES in step S1952), the host control circuit 2100 executes the initial position moving operation process (step S19153). The initial position movement operation process is a process of driving the motor to return the accessory to the initial position.

The processes of steps S19152 and S19153 are performed by the number of motors that drive the accessory.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the accessory is in the initial position (NO in step S19152), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the next accessory is in the initial position without performing the process of step S19153. The process moves to (step S19152).

The host control circuit 2100 completes the initial position recovery auditors operation processing after performing the processing of step S1952 and/or step S19153 for the number of motors that drive the auditors.

[10-16-6. Processing of accessory when receiving demo command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 105, a demo command reception bonus object process performed in step S19136 in the production system command reception process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing an example of processing of a winning combination when a demo command is received. This processing is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the demo command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there is a motor error, that is, whether or not an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (step S19161). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 may generate various errors (communication controller error, connection error, data error) set in the processes after step S1918 in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101), for example. It is determined whether or not there is.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is no motor error, that is, an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is not detected (the motor is normal) (YES in step S19161), the accessory excitation is performed. An opening process is performed (step S19162). In this process, the host control circuit 2100 stops outputting the excitation data to all the motor drivers.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the winning objects are in the initial positions (step S19163).

When it is determined that all the accessory is in the initial position (YES in step S19163), the host control circuit 2100 sets acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19164). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S19163), the host control circuit 2100 ends the demo command-accepting accessory processing.

On the other hand, in step S19161, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is a motor error, that is, an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (NO in step S19161), the accessory request is not accepted. The permission is set (step S19165).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 stops all the motors (step S19166), performs the motor driver reset process (step S19167) after the process of step S19166, and ends the demo command reception accessory process.

In this way, in the processing of a demo command reception character object, the host control circuit 2100 performs an error check (step S19161) of the motor driver for driving the character object, and if an error is detected, a character object request is issued. Is prohibited (step S19165) and the motor driver reset process (step S19167) is performed. If no error is detected, after performing release processing (step S19162) for releasing all excitation of the accessory, the accessory detection sensor group 1002 determines whether all the accessory are in the initial position. If it is detected (step S19163) and all the winning objects are in the initial position, the acceptance of the winning object request is permitted.

[10-16-7. Processing of a role when receiving a fluctuation confirmation command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 106, a special symbol variation confirmation command reception bonus object process performed in step S19138 of the production system command reception process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of a bonus product process when a special symbol variation confirmation command is received. This process is executed by the host control circuit 2100 on the basis of receiving the special symbol variation confirmation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not there is a motor error, that is, whether or not an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (step S19171). In this process, the host control circuit 2100, for example, similarly to step S19161 (see FIG. 105), various errors (communication controller error, etc.) set in the process of step S1918 and later in the accessory control process (see FIG. 101), for example. Determine whether a connection error, data error, etc. has occurred.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is no motor error, that is, an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is not detected (the motor is normal) (YES in step S19171), the continuous error count is set. The continuous error counter shown is set to "0" (step S19172).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the winning objects are in the initial positions (step S19173).

When it is determined that all the accessory is in the initial position (YES in step S19173), the host control circuit 2100 sets acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19174). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S19173), the host control circuit 2100 ends the variation determining command reception accessory processing.

On the other hand, in step S19171, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is a motor error, that is, an error due to a malfunction of the motor for driving the accessory is detected (NO in step S19171), control for stopping all motors is performed. Is executed (step S19175).

After the processing of step S19175, the host control circuit 2100 performs motor driver reset processing (step S19176) and adds 1 to the number of consecutive errors, that is, adds "1" to the value of the consecutive error counter (step S19177).

After the processing of step S19177, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the value of the continuous error counter is equal to or greater than a specified number (for example, 10 times) (step S19178).

When the value of the continuous error counter is equal to or greater than the specified number (for example, 10 times) (YES in step S19178), the host control circuit 2100 performs a shift setting process to the error motor operation stop state (step S19179). When the error motor operation stop state is entered, the operations of all the winning objects are stopped. After the processing of step S19179, the host control circuit 2100 ends the variation confirmation command reception accessory processing.

On the other hand, when the value of the continuous error counter is less than the specified number of times (for example, 10 times) (NO in step S19178), the host control circuit 2100 performs shift setting processing to the accessory request reception non-permission state (step S19180). ..

The number of continuous errors, that is, the value of the continuous error counter, indicates the number of times the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation confirmation command, which is determined to have a motor error (NO in step S19171), is continuously performed.

In this way, in the accessory processing at the time of receiving the fluctuation confirmation command, the host control circuit 2100 checks the error of the motor driver for driving the accessory (step S19171), and if an error is detected, the motor driver is detected. Reset processing is performed (step S19176), and acceptance of the accessory request is prohibited (step S19180). Then, when the number of fluctuation confirmation command reception accessory processing that is determined to have a motor error (NO in step S19161) continuously reaches the specified number (for example, 10 times), the host control circuit 2100 causes the error motor operation stop state. The shift setting process to (1) is performed (step S19179), and the operations of all the winning combinations are stopped. Further, when it is determined that there is no motor error (YES in step S19171), the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the winning objects are in the initial position by the role object detection sensor group 1002 (step S19173), and all the winning objects are detected. When the accessory is in the initial position, the acceptance of the accessory request is permitted (step S19174). Therefore, if it happens that a motor error occurs due to a minor problem (error), it will be stopped without accepting the request for accessory requests and the motor error will continue while avoiding the transition to the motor error operation stop state. In such a case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error by shifting to a motor error operation stop state.

The initial position restoration operation shift setting in step S19147 (see FIG. 103) described above corresponds to the first restoration process of the invention of the present application, and the motor driver reset process of step S19176 (see FIG. 106) is the second of the invention of the present application. It corresponds to the restoration process. However, the first recovery process may be various operations other than the initial position recovery operation transition setting, such as a motor recovery operation, a recovery operation for moving the accessory from the standby position to the drive position, and the like. Similarly, in the second restoration processing, in addition to the motor driver reset processing, the processing in the sub-control circuit 200 is re-executed, the parameter is set again for the operation of the motor, and the same as the first restoration processing. Various processes such as control may be performed.

Further, the processing of step S19144 described above corresponds to the first counting means of the present invention, and the processing of step S19177 described above corresponds to the second counting means of the present invention. Strictly speaking, neither the first counting means nor the second counting means counts the number of games. However, the first restoration process described above can be performed each time the fluctuation start command is received, and the second restoration process described above can be performed each time the fluctuation confirmation command is received. Therefore, the first counting means and the second counting means do not strictly count the number of games as described above, but substantially count the number of games (variation number). it can.

Further, the above-mentioned first counting means does not have to be the number of continuous games (the number of fluctuations) as long as the initial position recovery counter is reset only when the power is turned off. It is possible to express it as "the number of times the game has been played, in which there was no accessory in the initial position before being cut off. Further, in the case where the initial position recovery counter is reset, for example, when the accessory is present at the initial position, the number of times that the accessory does not exist at the initial position fluctuates continuously and the first counting means In some cases, the counted number may have the same value. Further, since the above-mentioned second counting means is the number of times the motor error is continuously generated, it may be substantially the same as the number of games (variation number) in which the motor error is continuously generated. , Power is cut off from the start of fluctuation of the special symbol until the end of fluctuation, after that, when the power is restored, the count value by the first counting means and the count value by the second counting means are reset during the fluctuation of the special symbol. To be done. Therefore, in such a case, when the sub-control circuit 200 receives the fluctuation confirmation command indicating the fluctuation end of the special symbol, the count value by the first counting means is changed to 0, and the count value by the second counting means is changed to 1. Therefore, there may be a difference between the count value of the first counting unit and the count value of the second counting unit. Considered in this way, the count value counted by the first counting means and the second counting means can be expressed as the number of games, and the first counting means is the number of games in which special symbols are changed. It is the same, and it can also be said that the second counting means is the same as the number at which the variation of the special symbol ends. However, the count value by the first counting means and the count value by the second counting means are not reset by simply turning the power on and off, and for example, a reset button (not shown) provided on the main control board 30. ) Or the operation means (setting key 328 or setting switch 332) related to the setting, and the power supply operation (power-on operation or power-off operation) while operating other operation means, setting confirmation processing and/or setting It may be reset only when a change process is performed.

Regarding the number of games (number of fluctuations), it may be defined that one game (one symbol fluctuation) was performed at the start of variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). , It may be defined that the game is played once at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (when the result of the special lottery is derived), or after the variable display of the special symbol is started, The entire process until the variable display ends may be defined as one game.

[10-16-8. Processing of winning objects when receiving a hit command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 107, the hit system command reception accessory processing performed in step S19139 of the production system command reception process (see FIG. 102) will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing an example of a winning combination process upon receipt of a hit command. This processing is executed by the host control circuit 2100 based on the reception of the hit command transmitted from the main control circuit 100. The hit system command corresponds to, for example, a big hit game state transition command (big hit game start command), a round game start command, a round game inter-command (eg interval time, etc.), a big hit game state end command, and the like.

First, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not all the winning objects are in the initial positions (step S19181).

When it is determined that all the accessory is in the initial position (YES in step S19181), the host control circuit 2100 sets acceptance permission of the accessory request (step S19182). On the other hand, when it is determined that one or more accessory is not in the initial position (NO in step S19181), the host control circuit 2100 ends the bonus command reception accessory processing.

As described above, in the winning character command reception accessory processing, the host control circuit 2100 detects whether or not all the accessories are in the initial position by the accessory detection sensor group 1002 (step S19181), and all the accessories are detected. If it is in the initial position, acceptance of the accessory request is permitted (step S19182), and if it is determined that one or more accessory is not in the initial position, the winning system is accepted without permitting the accessory request. When the command is received, the accessory processing is ended.

It is to be noted that, through the overall processing relating to the operation of the accessory in the accessory group, it is determined whether or not the number of operations in step S1904 (see FIG. 100) is equal to or more than a prescribed number (for example, 10 times), step S19145 (FIG. It is determined whether the initial position recovery counter (see 103) is a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times) or more, and the value of the continuous error counter in step S1968 (see FIG. 105) is a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times) or more. In the determination of whether or not the specified number of times is the same number (10 times), it goes without saying that the specified number of times may be different in each process.

In the accessory initial operation process (see FIG. 101 ), the variation start command reception accessory process (see FIG. 103), and the fluctuation confirmation command reception accessory process (see FIG. 106 ), if the error continues, the motor Although it has been described that the occurrence of a serious error can be suppressed by shifting to the error operation stop state, the following errors can be exemplified as the occurrence of the serious error.

For example, a predetermined accessory (including an actuating member that constitutes the accessory) is provided so as to be operable from a specific position (for example, an initial position) toward a prescribed position (for example, a maximum movable range). The predetermined accessory is operated by, for example, a motor. Then, when the predetermined accessory is present at a specific position, the predetermined accessory is locked by a lock member (for example, a solenoid). In a normal state (for example, when not energized), the lock member is located at a lock position that locks a predetermined accessory, and when it is normally operated to a lock release position to unlock the predetermined accessory. The energization of the lock member is performed, for example, by the host control circuit 2100 via the I2C controller 2610 and the motor controller 2700 (see FIG. 10 for both). Then, the host control circuit 2100 energizes the lock member when the predetermined accessory operates from the specific position toward the specified position, and the predetermined accessory operates from the specific position toward the specified position. After starting, the energization of the lock member is terminated. That is, the lock member is in the lock position when the predetermined accessory moves toward the specified position and then returns to the specific position, and is locked when the predetermined accessory is pushed into the specific position. .. In such a configuration, if a motor error (for example, an error that a motor drive command to the motor driver cannot be transmitted due to a communication error) occurs, the motor cannot be driven. On the other hand, although the lock member is energized, the predetermined accessory does not start its operation toward the specified position. Therefore, the energized state of the lock member continues (the lock member continues to stay in the unlocked position), and the lock member may be disconnected due to overcurrent. Therefore, if such an error occurs, the error motor operation stop is not set until the error reaches the specified number of times, but if such an error continues to occur for the specified number of times, the error motor operation stops. By setting to shift to, the motor error operation stop state is not moved only by the occurrence of a minor error, and when the error occurs continuously for the specified number of times, the motor error operation stop state is moved by It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error such as disconnection of the lock member due to overcurrent.

Further, in the present embodiment, when a performance command is received from the main control circuit 100 (YES in step S1912), performance command reception processing (step S1913) is executed according to the received performance command, and then, Although the process (step S1914) of determining whether or not the handing-off request for the accessory request is set is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the command reception standby operation is being performed between step S1913 and step S1914. It is also possible to execute a process for determining whether or not (hereinafter, this process is referred to as a "command reception standby operation determination process not shown"). The treatment method in this case may be any of the following first to third treatment methods.

The first processing method is control to shift from the status during the command reception standby operation to any one of the accessory request acceptance permission, the error motor operation stop, the initial position recovery operation, and the accessory request acceptance non-permission. This is the processing method by the host control circuit 2100 in this case, and the processing is executed in the following procedure.
(A) It is determined whether or not the command reception standby operation is being performed (corresponding to the processing of step S1911).
(B) When the command reception standby operation is being performed (corresponding to YES in step S1911), it is determined whether or not any one of a fluctuation start command, a demo command, a fluctuation confirmation command, and a hit command is received. To do.
(C) When a performance command is received from the main control circuit 100 (corresponding to YES in step S1912), a variation start command reception accessory processing, a demo command reception accessory processing, and variation determination are performed according to the received command. Executes character processing when receiving commands or character processing when receiving a hit command, and from the status of waiting for command reception, character request acceptance is permitted, error motor operation is stopped, initial position recovery operation and role request acceptance is not permitted. After shifting to one of these statuses, a command reception standby operation determination process (not shown) is executed. In addition, as a result of performing the initial position recovery auditors operation process, when all the auditors are recovered to the initial positions, they are controlled during the command reception standby operation.
(D) When it is determined in the command reception standby operation determination process (not shown) that the command reception standby operation is being performed, another command is executed by executing the processing of step S1912 in a state in which all the winning objects are in the initial positions. It may be judged whether it is received or the next fluctuation start command is received. If it is based on the fluctuation start command currently received, during one fluctuation (by one fluctuation start command), for example, The process of step S1912 may be executed 10 times.
(E) If it is determined to be NO in the processing of step S1914 (processing for determining whether or not the handing request transmission/reception permission is set) executed after the command reception standby operation determination processing (not shown), the error motor If the operation is stopped, the motor is stopped until the power is turned off. Note that if the accessory reception is not allowed, the accessory is not activated, but when a variation start command etc. is received, it is determined whether all the accessories are in the initial position, and the accessory request reception You may make it control to a permission state.

The second processing method is a command reception standby operation in a state where no performance-related commands (fluctuation start command, demo command, variation confirmation command, hit command) are received as commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, the processing is executed according to the following procedure.
(A) It is determined whether or not the command reception standby operation is being performed (corresponding to the processing of step S1911).
(B) When the command reception standby operation is being performed (corresponding to YES in step S1911), it is determined whether or not any one of a fluctuation start command, a demo command, a fluctuation confirmation command, and a hit command is received. To do.
(C) When a performance command is received from the main control circuit 100 (corresponding to YES in step S1912), the status in standby for command reception shifts to the status in non-standby for command reception.
(D) In accordance with the received production-type command, a variation start command reception accessory processing, a demo command reception accessory processing, a variation confirmation command reception accessory processing or a hit system command reception accessory processing is executed.
(E) When neither the variation start command reception character processing, the demo command reception character processing, the fluctuation confirmation command reception character processing, nor the hit system command reception character processing is executed, command reception Return to the waiting status. If at least one of the processing of the variation start command reception effect processing, the demo command reception reception processing, the fluctuation confirmation command reception reception processing, and the hit command reception reception processing Since the status is changed to a status other than the reception standby status, NO is determined in the command reception standby operation determination processing (not shown).

The third processing method is premised on receiving a plurality of types of commands as effect-related commands, and, for example, in accordance with the type of the received command, variable start command reception accessory processing, demo command reception accessory processing, This is a processing method for looping the character processing when the fluctuation confirmation command is received and the character processing when the hit system command is received. The command reception standby operation is canceled when the fluctuation start command reception effect processing, demo command reception effect processing, variation confirmation command reception effect processing, and hit command reception effect processing are looped. If so, the above-mentioned loop processing may be performed when YES is determined in the command reception standby operation determination processing (not shown).

[10-17. Hole menu task processing]
Next, the processing relating to the hole menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. The hole menu task is a task that controls the hole menu. The hall menu task is performed by the host control circuit 2100 in a predetermined cycle, in this embodiment, every 33 msec.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the hall menu task executed by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 108, the host control circuit 2100 first determines whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (step S301). Specifically, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when the power is turned on is received.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is being performed, that is, the setting operation command is received (YES in step S301), the host control circuit 2100 executes the hole menu display process of step S302. The hole menu display process (step S302) is a process of displaying a hole menu screen described later in the display area of the display device 16 by the display control circuit 2300. Although the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 even when the process of step S312 described later is executed, the hole menu screen displayed in step S302 and the hole menu screen displayed in step S312 are displayed. There are some differences from the screen, which will be described later.

An image (screen) displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example when the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed. 110 and 111 are diagrams showing an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 109 to 111, when the hole menu display process (step S302) is executed, the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. As shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the hole menu screen includes a hole menu item display area 1610 on the left side of the screen, an operation explanation area 1620 in the lower left and right center of the screen, and a preview arranged substantially in the center of the screen. A display area 1630.

In the hole menu item display area 1610, each item of the hole menu is displayed. For convenience, FIGS. 109 to 111 only show time setting, prize ball information, setting history/setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting as hole menu items. In addition to the above, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation check, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal check, and volume adjustment setting may be displayed. However, since step S302 is processing during setting change processing or setting confirmation processing, it is not possible to finish the display of the hall menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item for ending the hall menu among the items for the hall menu.

In the operation explanation area 1620, images corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the up, down, left, and right select buttons 664a to 664d are displayed. The hole menu screen is displayed so that the activated operation buttons and the inactivated operation buttons of the operation button group 66 can be distinguished from each other. For example, in FIGS. 109 to 111, the activated operation buttons are displayed in white (the main button 662 and the up/down select buttons 664a and 664b are activated), and the inactivated operation buttons are shown. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are invalidated).

The operator can select any one of the items in the plurality of hole menus by operating the activated select buttons (up/down select buttons 664a and 664b). In FIGS. 109 and 110, the hole menu item surrounded by the solid line is the selected hole menu item. For example, FIG. 109 shows that “time setting” surrounded by a solid line is selected. Further, in FIG. 111, it is shown that the “setting change/confirmation history” surrounded by the solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item. However, it is not necessarily limited to the highlight display as long as the operator can easily understand the selected item. The screen in which the item for time setting is selected (see FIGS. 109 and 110) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

In the preview display area 1630, a preview screen for the selected item among the items of the plurality of hole menus is displayed. For example, when the "time setting" item is selected, the time setting screen is previewed (see FIGS. 109 and 110), and when the "setting change/confirmation history" item is selected, the setting is performed. A preview of the change/confirmation history screen is displayed (see FIG. 111). However, it is preferable that the setting value is not displayed on the preview screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. Note that the operation cannot be performed within the preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is being previewed, it is not possible to set the time on the time setting screen being previewed, and the time setting displayed as the hall menu item has been selected and determined. An operation for setting the time can be performed on the time setting screen displayed by.

Further, the host control circuit 2100, in the display area of the display device 16, in combination with the hall menu screen, for example, in the minimum area in the lower right, so as not to disturb the operation on the hall menu screen, "setting is being changed" or "setting The confirmation message is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 controls the voice/LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10) to output a voice such as “setting is being changed” or “setting is being confirmed” from the speaker 24. Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 (for example, see FIG. 1) in white via the voice/LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10). In this way, the operator is allowed to know whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed without hindering the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 108, the host control circuit 2100 executes hole menu processing in step S303. Details of the hole menu process (step S303) will be described later.

After executing the hole menu process (step S303), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting change process or the setting confirmation process has ended, that is, a command (initialization command) indicating that the setting change process has ended, or It is determined whether or not a command (power interruption recovery command) indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended is received from the main CPU 101 (step S304). If neither the initialization command nor the power failure recovery command has been received (NO in step S304), the host control circuit 2100 continues to execute the hole menu process of step S303.

When transmitting the initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits the changed set value information to the host control circuit 2100 at the same timing as the command.

The changed setting value information does not necessarily have to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at different timing as long as it can be associated with the setting change processing.

Further, the main CPU 101 does not need to send the set value information to the host control circuit 2100 when the power cut recovery command is sent, since the set value has not been changed, but the host control circuit 2100 also sends the set value information. It may be transmitted to.

In step S304, the host control circuit 2100 stores the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, that is, when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S304), the host control circuit 2100 stores the sub-work RAM 2100a. It is determined whether or not the number of histories is a predetermined number N or more (step S305). This is to record the history while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately deciding whether to overwrite the data or write the data in the empty area according to the number of the history stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a. This is to prevent a situation in which recording cannot be performed when desired. The predetermined number N can be set as appropriate according to the capacity that can be stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a, but is set to 500 in this embodiment, for example.

If the history number of history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is equal to or more than the predetermined number N (YES in step S305), the process proceeds to step S306, and history information overwrite processing (step S306) is executed. In the history information overwrite processing in step S306, the history stored first in the history stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a (oldest history information) is sequentially overwritten. It should be noted that the above history information also includes history information of the error motor operation stopped state, history information of the initial position recovery operation shift setting, and history information of non-acceptance of accessory requests. The history information of the error motor operation stop state is the date and time information set to shift to the error motor operation stop state (step S19146 of FIG. 103, step S19179 of FIG. 106) and the error motor operation stop state is released (FIGS. 108 and 114). It is the date and time information and the like which has been subjected to step S311). The history information of the initial position restoration operation shift setting is date and time information of the initial position movement operation (step S1906 in FIG. 100) and the initial position restoration operation shift setting (step S19147 in FIG. 103). The history information indicating that the accessory request is not permitted is date and time information when the accessory request is not permitted (step S19165 in FIG. 105, step S19180 in FIG. 106). However, strictly speaking, the release of the error motor operation stopped state is performed in step S311 described later. However, since the process of step S311 is always performed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed, the date and time when the error motor operation stopped state is released is the date and time when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. Should be overwritten.

Further, in the above, the history information of the error motor operation stop state, the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting, and the history information of the non-permission of the accessory request are stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a in step S306 or step S307. However, when “error information history” is selected in the hole menu process of step S302 (YES in step S3008 of FIG. 115), the error information history screen (see FIG. 116) displayed on the display device 16 is reflected. From a point of view, between step S301 and step S302, the history information of the error motor operation stop state, the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting, and the history information of the non-permission of the accessory request are stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a. It is preferable to perform the treatment.

In addition, as described above, by making it possible to browse the history information of the initial position recovery operation transition setting and the history information of non-acceptance of accessory requests, although a serious error such as an error motor operation stop has not been reached, It is possible for the gaming machine manager to grasp in advance the possibility of a serious error such as an error motor operation stop, and it is possible to appropriately manage the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the history information overwrite processing of step S306, the history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is eventually updated by overwriting the history information already stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a with new history information. Although it is erased, it is not limited to this. For example, when new history information is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received, if there is a possibility that the predetermined upper limit is exceeded, at least the history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is The history information may be stored after a part of the information is erased. Further, even if the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is not received, if there is a possibility that the upper limit may be exceeded if more history information is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a, the setting history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a may be stored. You may make it erase|eliminate at least one part.

If the number of history records stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is less than the predetermined number N (NO in step S305), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S307 and records history information in the free area of the sub-work RAM 2100a. The recording process (step S307) is executed. Note that the history information recorded in step S307 also includes history information regarding the error motor operation stop state.

In this specification, the history information overwrite processing of step S306 and the history information recording processing of step S307 may be collectively referred to as history recording processing.

The history information is time information counted by the RTC 209 when the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed, or the setting confirmation). Information indicating that the process has been executed), and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, the information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed, and the setting value information after the setting change transmitted from the main CPU 101. Information associated with and is the history information. When the power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command is received, the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed, and the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 are associated with each other. The attached information is history information. When the power failure recovery command is received, it is not essential to include the current setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the history information, but it is transmitted from the main CPU 101 in order to execute the setting determination processing described above. It is preferable that the history information includes the current setting value information. Further, the browsing history is also included in the history information, and if the setting change/confirmation history is browsed in the hole menu processing (step S303), the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S306. Alternatively, in step S307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in the empty area of the sub-work RAM 2100a.

In a normal state, when the power is turned on, some command (for example, a power failure recovery command, a setting operation command, etc.) will be immediately transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the host control circuit 2100 is activated. However, when the command from the main CPU 101 is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) from the activation, the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is an abnormality and sets the sub-control circuit 200 side to a game stopped state. Each mode of display output, voice output, and LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Further, it is preferable that the time information, which is one of the history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a, is not only information on the date and time but also information up to hour and minute or information up to hour, minute and second.

After executing the processing of step S306 or step S307, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S308.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S308 whether the setting has been changed, that is, whether the initialization command has been received in step S304 (step S308). When the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting change start command, the power interruption recovery command is not received in step S304, and the setting operation command received in step S301 is the setting confirmation start command. Does not receive the initialization command in step S304. Further, in the process of step S308, since it is sufficient for the host control circuit 2100 to be able to determine that the setting has been changed, instead of determining whether or not the command received in step S304 is an initialization command, for example, after the change. It may be possible to determine that the setting change processing has been performed by receiving the setting value information.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting has been changed (YES in step S308), the host control circuit 2100 performs the setting change initialization process (step S309), and proceeds to step S310.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S310 whether the error motor operation is stopped (step S310). That is, if the processes of step S1905 (see FIG. 100), step S19146 (see FIG. 103), and step S19179 (see FIG. 106) are performed, it is determined that the error motor operation is stopped.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the error motor operation is stopped (YES in step S310), the host control circuit 2100 cancels the error motor operation stopped state (step S311). When the error motor operation stop state is released, the operations of all the winning objects become possible.

On the other hand, if the error motor operation is not stopped (NO in step S310), it is determined whether or not the accessory request is not permitted (step S322). If the accessory request is not allowed (YES in step S322). ), release of the accessory request disapproval, reset of the initial position recovery counter, reset of the number of consecutive errors (step S323), and the process proceeds to step S312. If the accessory request is not permitted (NO in step S322), the process of step S322 is not performed and the process proceeds to step S312.

The release of the error motor operation stop state (step S311) is executed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the setting It may be canceled when the change processing is performed, and may not be canceled when the setting confirmation processing is performed.

Further, as described above, when the setting change processing is performed, the backup clear processing is also performed, but the release of the error motor operation stop state (step S311) is executed when the setting change processing is performed, while the setting is performed. It is preferable not to be executed when the backup clear processing without the change processing (for example, the backup clear processing executed when the NO determination is made in step S22 of FIG. 33) is executed. Since the production using the role object group is an important element for enhancing the interest of the game, if the game is played on a gaming machine in which the role object does not operate normally, it cannot be denied that the interest is lowered. Therefore, the important decision such as whether to operate the game machine in which the accessory cannot be operated should be made by the authorized hall officials, and the unauthorized motor operation cannot be canceled by the unauthorized person. I have to. However, it is convenient when a serious error such as an error motor operation stop state has not been reached, such as when the accessory request is not permitted, the initial position recovery counter is reset, or the number of consecutive errors is reset (step S323). From the viewpoint of, it is preferable to be executed not only when the setting change process is performed, but also when the backup clear process without the setting change process is performed.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the hole menu redisplay processing in step S312. At this time, unlike the hole menu screen (the hole menu screen displayed in step S302) displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the hole menu screen that is re-displayed ends the setting change process and the game is played. This is a screen that is displayed in an executable state (or during the game return processing of step S30). For example, as shown in FIG. 112, one of the items in the hole menu displays the item for ending the hole menu. To be done. Note that FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the hole menu redisplay processing in step S312 is executed.

That is, on the hall menu screen (the hall menu screen displayed in step S302) displayed during the setting change or the setting confirmation, the display of the hall menu screen cannot be terminated by the intention of the operator, but the setting change process The hole menu screen (the hole menu screen displayed in step S312) that is re-displayed after is finished is configured so that the display of the hall menu screen can be ended by the intention of the operator. The hole menu screen displayed in step S302 (see FIG. 110, for example) and the hole menu screen displayed in step S312 (see FIG. 112) can be operated by selecting and determining any of the items. Such a functional aspect (for example, a functional aspect of being able to browse the setting change/confirmation history screen) is common.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S308 that the setting has been changed (YES in step S308), the host control circuit 2100 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 in the hole menu redisplay processing in step S312. Then, in order not to hinder the operation on the hall menu screen, for example, a character such as "the setting has been changed" is displayed in the extremely small area at the lower right. Similarly, when the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen) is displayed, for example, in the minimum area at the bottom right of the screen, “Change settings Is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 controls the voice/LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10) so that the speaker 24 outputs a voice such as “The setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized”. To do. This allows the operator to know that the settings have been changed (also the backup clear processing has been executed) without disturbing the operation on the hole menu screen or the selected hole menu item screen. Becomes Further, the host control circuit 2100 executes control to turn on all LEDs 25 (see FIG. 1, for example) in red via the voice/LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting confirmation is performed in step S308 (NO in step S308), that is, when the command received in step S304 is the power interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing, the host control circuit 2100 determines that The game screen returning process of step S317 is executed without executing the processes of steps S309 to S316. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process is completed, the hole menu redisplay process (step S312) is not executed. Also, no character indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Furthermore, the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed is not output. However, the host control circuit 2100 executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red through the voice/LED control circuit 2200 (see, FIG. 10).

By the way, both when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S312 is executed, the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, but the process of step S302 is executed. While the game cannot be executed when the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed, the game can be executed when the processing of step S312 is executed. However, as described above, the mode of character display in the display area of the display device 16 between when the process of step S302 is executed and when the process of step S312 is executed (not displayed when the setting confirmation is completed). The mode of sound output from the speaker 24 and the mode of light emission of the LED 25 are greatly different. Therefore, even if the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, the hole menu item It is possible to easily grasp by appearance whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state capable of executing a game or in an impossible state without interfering with an operation for selecting or an operation for updating a page. It is possible.

After executing the process of step S312, the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S313 and executes the hall menu process. The hole menu process of step S313 is basically the same process as step S303, but the process at the time of YES in step S3072 of FIG. 118 described later is different, and this will be described later.

In step S314, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not "end hole menu" is selected on the redisplayed hole menu screen. When it is determined that "end hole menu" is selected (YES in step S314), the host control circuit 2100 performs a game screen return display process (step S317). In the game screen return display process, the host control circuit 2100 operates the display area of the display device 16 to display an image for production to be displayed when playing a game, and to operate the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the firing handle 32) for a predetermined period. Displays the initial image that is displayed if there is not. Then, the host control circuit 2100 executes the game screen returning process of step S317, and then proceeds to step S318.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S314 that "Hole menu end" is not selected (NO in step S314), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed ( Step S315). Although not shown in FIG. 108, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed (YES in step S304), the hall menu redisplay process (step S312) is executed, the hall menu process (step S313). In step S315, the time counting is started based on the operator performing some operation such as when any one of the hall menu items is selected in step S315. This is a process of determining whether or not, and if the operator does not perform any operation for a predetermined time or more, the host control circuit 2100 determines YES in step S315.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed without any operation (YES in step S315), the display of the redisplayed hall menu screen is ended, and the game screen return display in step S317. Execute the process.

If the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not elapsed without any operation (NO in step S315), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not a command for generating an effect control object has been received (step). S316). The command for generating the effect control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed. For example, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation confirmation (variation stop) command, a jackpot game execution start command, a jackpot game. Is a command indicating the number of rounds in a big hit game, a round interval command in a big hit game, a big hit game end command, an initialization command, a power failure recovery command, and the like. When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S316 that one of the commands for generating these effect control objects has been received, the host control circuit 2100 ends the display of the redisplayed hole menu screen, and the game screen of step S317. Executes return display processing. As a result, a game screen according to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and for example, an image unrelated to the game is displayed although the game by the main CPU 101 is proceeding. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being played. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S316), the process returns to step S313.

After executing the game screen return display processing (step S317), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S318 and executes the hall menu display prohibition processing. The hole menu display prohibition process is a process of prohibiting the hole menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the display device 16. That is, when the hole menu display inhibition process (step S318) is executed, the hole menu screen is not displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned on again, and the power is turned off to execute the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. Unless this is done, the hall menu display process (step S302) cannot be executed.

As described above, the hole menu screen is, in principle, a screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. However, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, for example, the operator himself does not select the item “end hole menu” on the hall menu screen (NO in step S314). Under certain conditions such that the operation time does not elapse a predetermined time (NO in step S315) and the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S316), the processes of steps S313 to S316 are repeatedly executed. Then, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed. Therefore, if the operator performs some operation on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen), the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item will be displayed. It will continue to be displayed without ending. As a result, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, it is possible to give the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "end hole menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item ends and the game is played. Since the screen restoration process (step S317) is executed, an unauthorized person (for example, a hall clerk or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) can easily browse confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history. Therefore, it is possible to ensure security.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S316 that the command for generating the effect control object is received, the game screen restoration process (step S317) and the hole menu display prohibition process (step S318) are performed. The game screen is not limited to this, but is based on the reception of a specific command that can be received when the execution of the game is started, for example, the command indicating that the firing handle 32 has been operated is received. You may make it perform a return process (step S317) and a hole menu display prohibition process (step S318).

Here, with reference to FIG. 113, a notification mode when an error occurs, including the backup clear process without the setting change process, will be described. FIG. 113 is an example of a screen in which the content of the error is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, (a) a screen indicating that the backup clear process without the setting change process has been executed, and (b) a start opening abnormality Screen showing that a winning error has occurred and backup clear processing has been performed without setting change processing. (c) Both backup clear processing without setting change processing has been performed and start mouth abnormal winning error FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a screen after a notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that the backup clear process has been executed has elapsed in the state where the occurrence of the error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 113, when a plurality of errors occur, the host control circuit 2100 displays all of the error contents that have occurred in the display area of the display device 16 and also controls the audio/LED control in the order of the error with the highest priority. Sound is output from the speaker 24 via the circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10), and emission control of the LED 25 is executed via the voice/LED control circuit 2200 (see FIG. 10).

When the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed and no other error occurs, the host control circuit 2100 displays the display area of the display device 16 as shown in FIG. 113(a). In addition to controlling the characters such as "RAM has been cleared" to be displayed therein, the voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is controlled to be output from the speaker 24, and further, the voice/LED control circuit 2200 A control is performed to turn on all LEDs 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red via (see FIG. 10). The character "RAM has been cleared" is displayed using a larger area than the above-described minimum area (see Fig. 112) in which the character "Setting has been changed" is displayed.

That is, in the present embodiment, the backup clear process is always executed when the setting change process is performed (see FIG. 34), and in the hole menu redisplay process of step S312 executed after the setting change process ends, as described above, Although the characters such as “The setting has been changed” are displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed and “The setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized. Only the sound such as “ta” is output from the speaker 24. On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the host control circuit 2100 uses an area larger than the above-mentioned minimum area (see FIG. 112) in the display area of the display device 16. Then, a character such as "RAM cleared" is displayed and a voice such as "RAM cleared" is controlled to be output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 113(a)). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process is to change the setting value (not the backup clear process), whereas the main purpose of the backup clear process is the backup clear process without the setting change process. Is considered to be. Therefore, when the backup clear process accompanied by the setting change process is executed, the fact that the backup clear process has been executed is conservatively reported in a manner that does not hinder the operation of the hole menu screen to be displayed again. On the other hand, when the backup clear process without the setting change process is executed, the fact that the backup clear process is executed is notified in a more prominent manner than when the backup clear process with the setting change process is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the backup clear processing from being illegally executed.

After the backup clear process is executed, if another error, for example, the starting mouth abnormal winning a prize error has occurred, it is determined that the starting mouth abnormal winning a prize error has occurred, as shown in FIG. 113B, for example. Both that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed as characters in the display area of the display device 16. At this time, since the backup clear processing is executed has a higher priority than the start mouth abnormal winning error, a character indicating that the backup clear processing has been executed is displayed in a higher order regardless of the order of occurrence. .. In addition, the speaker 24 outputs a voice notifying that the backup clear process having the higher priority has been executed, and the LED 25 emits light in a mode indicating that the backup clear process has been executed.

Further, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) about the execution of the backup clear process is executed in a state where both the backup clear process is executed and the starting mouth abnormal winning error is occurring, the backup clear process is executed. The character indicating that the execution has been performed is deleted from the display area of the display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the character indicating the start mouth abnormal winning error is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. In addition, the sound output from the speaker 24 changes from a sound notifying that the backup clear processing has been executed to a sound notifying that the start mouth abnormal winning error has occurred, and the light emission mode of the LED 25 also clears the backup. The mode indicating that the processing has been executed is changed to the mode indicating that the starting opening abnormal winning a prize error has occurred. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the error that has occurred.

In the above description, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is being performed, that is, the setting operation command is received (YES in step S301), the hall menu display process (step S302) is executed. However, it is preferable to execute the backup clear process without the setting change process. In the backup clear processing without the setting change processing, when the power is not turned on and both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 are performed without turning ON the setting key 328. It is executed (see FIG. 33). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command to the host control circuit 2100. Therefore, the host control circuit 2100 that receives the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command is accompanied by the setting change process. It is possible to determine that the backup clear process that does not exist is executed, and the hole menu display process (step S302) and the hole menu process (step S303) can be executed.

[10-17-1. Another example of hole menu task]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 31). (See step S1730 in FIG. 32) For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (in the range of “0” to “5” in this embodiment), it is determined that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal ( (NO in step S1730), the game permission flag is turned off (see step S1760), and the game cannot be executed. However, for example, when the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, the work area check process (step S1720) of the RAM 103 is not likely to be executed. In addition, when an invalid signal is input and the set value set is changed, the set value data may be in the range of “0” to “5”. Therefore, similarly to the above-described setting determination processing executed during the execution of the game, the setting value is set when the work area check processing is not executed in step S1720 or the setting value may have been changed illegally. Assuming that the data is in the range of “0” to “5” (for example, if YES is determined in step S1730), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting value information is appropriate (step S20). The processing of S319 and step S320) may be executed. The hole menu task in this case is shown in FIG. FIG. 114 is another example of the hall menu task executed by the host control circuit 2100, and is a flowchart when the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting judgment processing for judging the suitability of the set value information. Another example of the hole menu task will be described below. However, description of the process common to FIG. 108 is omitted, and only the setting determination process will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 uses the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current set value used for the progress of the game, even when transmitting the power failure return command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed. It is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

On the other hand, the host control circuit 2100, which has received the power failure recovery command, determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), and proceeds to step S319. In step S319, the host control circuit 2100 executes a set value check process. This set value check process (step S319) is performed by setting the current set value information (the set value information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a transmitted from the main CPU 101 before power interruption) and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101. This is a process of confirming (the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after power interruption). When it is determined in step S308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S308), the processes of steps S309 to S316 are not executed.

After confirming the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the setting value check processing (step S319), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting value is proper, that is, whether the setting value is proper or not. Is determined (step S320). At this time, if the current setting value information and the setting value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined to be appropriate (YES in step S320), and the process proceeds to step S317. The processing after step S317 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined to be unsuitable (NO in step S320), the process proceeds to step S321, and the host control circuit 2100 sets the set value. Execute abnormal processing.

The above-mentioned abnormal setting value process is a process of displaying an image informing the display area of the display device 16 that the setting value is abnormal. In addition, in this set value abnormal process (step S321), instead of or in addition to the process of displaying an image notifying that the set value is abnormal, a sound notifying that the set value is abnormal is output. You may make it perform a process.

In this way, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is the power interruption return command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing, the host control circuit 2100 executes the setting determination processing (the processing of step S319 and step S320), When it is determined that the set value is not appropriate (NO in step S320), the set value abnormality process (step S321) is executed, thereby making it possible to notify the gaming machine administrator that the set value is not appropriate.

Although the above-described setting determination processing (the processing of step S319 and step S320) is executed when the setting confirmation processing ends, neither the setting change processing nor the setting confirmation processing is executed, and the setting change processing is executed. When the backup process without the power supply (the power is not turned on and the setting key 328 is not turned on and the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on), or the power is simply turned on. It is preferable to execute even when only is input. Unless the setting change process is executed, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the setting value information received before the power failure matches the setting value information received after the power failure. This is because it is possible to determine the suitability of.

[10-18. Hall menu processing]
Next, the hole menu processing (step S303) in the hole menu task (see FIGS. 108 and 114) will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing an example of the hall menu process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

First, the host control circuit 2100 selects a hall menu item for which various information/settings are confirmed or various settings are changed based on the operation of the select button 664 or/and the main button 662 by the operator. Hole menu selection processing is performed (step S3001). In the hall menu selection processing of FIG. 115, the hall menu items are time setting, prize ball information, setting history/setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, The case of the accessory operation check, the liquid crystal brightness setting, and the volume adjustment setting will be described, but the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “time setting” (step S3002). When it is determined in step S3002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (YES in step S3002), the host control circuit 2100 performs time setting processing (step S3003). In this time setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S3002), it is determined whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "prize ball information". It is determined (step S3004). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hole menu is “prize ball information” (YES in step S3004), it performs prize ball information processing (step S3005). In this prize ball information processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the prize ball information. The prize ball information is, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, difference information between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls fired, and the number of prize balls per day paid out in the past few days. Information, difference information (every day) between the number of prize balls paid out and the number of prize balls fired in the past several days, and the like.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not "prize ball information" (NO in step S3004), whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "setting change/confirmation history". It is determined (step S3006). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hole menu is “setting change/confirmation history” (YES in step S3006), the host control circuit 2100 performs setting change/confirmation history processing (step S3007). In this setting change/confirmation history process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the setting. It is possible to check the confirmation history, change history, and browsing history.

Further, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 has been operated and the “setting change/confirmation history” has been selected, the host control circuit 2100 displays in the display area of the display device 16. A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119 described later) is displayed, and the operator can change the setting (setting value) change history, the setting (setting value) confirmation history, the browsing history, and the confirmed setting (setting value). ) And the changed setting (setting value) can be confirmed. Details of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “setting change/confirmation history” (NO in step S3006), whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “error information history” or not. It is determined (step S3008). When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the selected hole menu is “error information history” (YES in step S3008), it performs error information history processing (step S3009). In this error information history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 116) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm or change the error information history. And

The error history displayed in the error information history process is, for example, information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as an error history when the host control circuit 2100 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the host control circuit 2100 may determine that the backup is defective, when the abnormal command is received from the main CPU 101, or the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. It may be a time when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the power supply to (see 9) is started.

As shown in FIG. 116, an error information history table is arranged in the approximate center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column in which an error code is displayed, an occurrence date/time column in which the date/time when the error code is recorded, and a release date/time column in which the date/time when the error is released are displayed. For example, “MOTOR ERR” is shown in the error content of No. 2 on the error information history screen of FIG. 116. It shows date and time information when the process (see FIG. 106) is performed. Although not shown in FIG. 116, the date and time information (strictly speaking, the date and time information controlled to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state) when the release process (step S311) of the error motor operation stop state is performed is the release date and time. Column. Further, the operation method on the error information history screen is displayed at the lower left of the error information history screen. For example, it is shown that a cursor (not shown) can be moved up, down, left, and right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and it can be determined by operating the main button 662. It shows that you can do it.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “error information history” (NO in step S3008), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “monitor history”. Yes (step S3010). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is “monitoring history” (YES in step S3010), the host control circuit 2100 performs monitoring history processing (step S3011). In this monitoring history processing, the host control circuit 2100 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the monitoring history.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “monitor history” (NO in step S3010), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “warning display setting”. Yes (step S3012). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "warning display setting" (YES in step S3012), the host control circuit 2100 performs warning display setting processing (step S3013). In this warning display setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the warning display setting.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “warning display setting” (NO in step S3012), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “notification setting”. Yes (step S3014). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "notification setting" (YES in step S3014), the host control circuit 2100 performs notification setting processing (step S3015). In this notification setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the notification setting.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not “notification setting” (NO in step S3014), it determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “power saving mode”. Yes (step S3016). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is the "power saving mode" (YES in step S3016), the host control circuit 2100 performs the power saving mode process (step S3017). In this power saving mode process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the setting of the power saving mode. To do.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not the “power saving mode” (NO in step S3016), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “maintenance”. (Step S3018). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is “maintenance” (YES in step S3018), the host control circuit 2100 performs maintenance processing (step S3019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not “maintenance” (NO in step S3018), it determines whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “confirm action”. Yes (step S3020). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "confirm accessory operation confirmation" (YES in step S3020), the host control circuit 2100 performs accessory operation confirmation processing (step S3021). In this accessory operation confirmation process, the host control circuit 2100 displays an accessory operation confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the operation of the accessory. ..

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hall menu selected in step S3001 is not “accessory operation confirmation” (NO in step S3020), whether the hall menu selected in step S3001 is “liquid crystal brightness setting” or not. Is determined (step S3022). When it is determined that the selected hole menu is "liquid crystal brightness setting" (YES in step S3022), the host control circuit 2100 performs liquid crystal brightness setting processing (step S3023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the brightness setting of the display device 16. And

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the hole menu selected in step S3001 is not “liquid crystal brightness setting” (NO in step S3022), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S3001 is “volume adjustment setting”. It is determined (step S3024). When it is determined that the selected hall menu is "volume adjustment setting" (YES in step S3024), the host control circuit 2100 performs volume adjustment setting processing (step S3025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 24. It is possible.

After the processing of step S3003, step S3005, step S3007, step S3009, step S3011, step S3013, step S3015, step S3017, step S3019, step S3021, step S3023, step S3025 and the hole menu selected in step S3001 is "volume adjustment. If the host control circuit 2100 determines that it is not “setting” (NO in step S3024), the host control circuit 2100 ends the hole menu process and returns the process to step S304 of the hole menu task (see FIG. 108).

[10-19. Aspects of various devices when changing or confirming settings]
The modes of the various devices (the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) at the time of changing the settings and confirming the settings have been described above, but are collectively described below for easy understanding. To do.

First, at the time of changing the setting, it will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before power-on, the power switch 35 is off. At this time, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power, but even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the display device 16 and the speaker 24 are turned on unless the power is turned on. , The LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned on while the setting key 328 is turned on, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). .. The host control circuit 2100 determines that it is controlled to the setting change state (the setting change state is started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When it is controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the host control circuit 2100 causes the display control circuit 2300 to display the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 and says "setting is being changed". Display characters. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a voice "setting is being changed" from the speaker 24 by the voice/LED control circuit 2200, and all the LEDs 25 are turned on in white by the voice/LED control circuit 2200. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting change security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. Further, the main CPU 101 executes a backup clear process in which the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. It should be noted that the set value set on the performance display monitor 334 is displayed by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the set value is updated. However, at this stage, the set value has not been finalized. The updated setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In addition, in the display area of the display device 16, a hall menu screen is displayed and the characters "settings are being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, the sound "the setting is being changed" is continuously output from the speaker 24, and the LED 25 is continuously lit in white. In the present embodiment, even if the set value is updated, it is stored in the register and not stored in the main RAM 103 until it is confirmed. However, even if the set value is not confirmed, the updated set value is not updated. It may be stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the setting value is updated by operating another operation means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). You may do it.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and sends an initialization command. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting change state has ended based on the reception of the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting change state ends, the game can be executed. However, even if the setting change state ends, unless the execution of the game is started (for example, unless a command for generating the effect control object is received), the host control circuit 2100 displays at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). The control circuit 2300 displays the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen) in the display area of the display device 16 and displays a message such as “setting changed”. It is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. However, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 outputs a sound from the speaker 24 such as "The setting has been changed. RAM has been initialized." by the sound/LED control circuit 2200 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). At the same time, the sound/LED control circuit 2200 turns on all the LEDs 25 in red. The display in the display area of the display device 16, the output from the speaker 24, and the full lighting of the LED 25 in red are continued as long as some operation is performed on the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item, It ends when the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period or when the execution of the game is started. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101. By the way, in the above, it is not displayed that the backup clear process has been executed, but the host control circuit 2100 displays "RAM has been cleared" in addition to "Setting changed". May be described together.

In this way, even if the setting change state is completed, the character display such as "Setting changed", voice output such as "Setting changed. RAM is initialized." By turning on the light for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to prevent fraud such as browsing of the setting change/confirmation history screen from being performed by an unauthorized third party. Become. In addition, since at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between the setting change state and the setting change state being ended, it is possible to easily grasp by appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

The above is the mode of the various devices (the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) and the like when the setting is changed.

Next, the time of confirming the settings will be described in the order in which various operations are executed. In the power-off state before power-on, the power switch 35 is off. At this time, the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power, but even if the setting key 328 is turned on, the display device 16 and the speaker 24 are turned on unless the power is turned on. , The LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned on while the setting key 328 is turned on (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned on), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and sets the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command). To send. The host control circuit 2100 determines that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state (the setting confirmation state has started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101. When controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the host control circuit 2100 causes the display control circuit 2300 to display the hall menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 and "setting confirmation". Is displayed. At the same time, the host control circuit 2100 causes the voice/LED control circuit 2200 to output a voice such as “setting confirmation” from the speaker 24, and causes the voice/LED control circuit 2200 to turn on all the LEDs 25 in white. Further, the main CPU 101 transmits a setting confirmation security signal to the hall computer 700 via the external terminal board 323. It should be noted that the set value set on the performance display monitor 334 is displayed by the main CPU 101.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 ends the setting confirmation state and transmits the power interruption recovery command. The host control circuit 2100 determines that the setting confirmation state has ended based on the reception of the power failure recovery command transmitted from the main CPU 101. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game can be executed. In addition, the host control circuit 2100 executes the game screen restoration display process (step S318) based on the reception of the power failure restoration command transmitted from the main CPU 101. At this time, the host control circuit 2100 does not display the character indicating that the setting confirmation is completed, and does not output the voice indicating that the setting confirmation is completed. However, the host control circuit 2100 fully lights the LEDs 25 in red for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), and when the execution of the game is started, the LEDs 25 are completely lighted in red. The base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101.

In this way, even if the setting confirmation state ends, by performing all red lighting of the LED 25 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), for example, a fraud such as viewing a setting change/confirmation history screen is authorized. It is possible to suppress the operation performed by a third party who does not have. Further, at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between during the setting change state and when the setting change state ends, so that it is possible to easily grasp by appearance whether or not the game can be executed.

As described above, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that there is an error without receiving any command from the main CPU 101 even after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the activation, it is determined that the game is stopped. To do. When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the game is stopped, the display control circuit 2300 and the voice/LED control circuit 2200 display and voice output "Please determine the set value", and the voice/LED control circuit 2200. Causes the LED 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) to blink all in white. This state is again controlled by the main CPU 101 to the setting change state, and continues until the host control circuit 2100 receives the initialization command based on the end of the setting change state.

The above is the mode of various devices (the display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) and the like at the time of confirming the settings.

[10-20. Setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change/confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hole menu process (see step S303 in FIG. 108) will be described. In the setting change/confirmation history process, the setting change history of the setting value, the confirmation history of the setting value, and the browsing history of the setting change and confirmation are displayed in the display area of the display device 16 as the setting change/confirmation history information (described later). It is displayed as a generic name of "setting change history information" and "setting confirmation history information". In the following, before explaining the setting change/confirmation history processing, setting change, setting confirmation and browsing will be described first.

In the present embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328 and pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. As described above, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 when the setting change process is started. Then, for example, by depressing the setting switch 332, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased within the range of "1" to "6", and when the setting value reaches a desired setting value, the setting key switch signal is output. When it is operated so as to be turned off, one set value provided for the progress of the game is determined from among the plurality of set values, and the setting change process ends.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, as described above, the main CPU 101 executes the setting changing process, and thereafter, the initialization command indicating that the setting changing process is completed, and the changed setting value information, It is transmitted to the host control circuit 2100.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 receives the initialization command indicating that the setting change processing has ended, the operation type information (information indicating that the setting change processing has been executed) and the set value indicating the setting value after the setting change. The information and the date and time data currently measured by the RTC 209, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received are stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the “No. 3” and “No. 4” columns in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. To do.

Further, in the present embodiment, when confirming the setting value, as described above, the main CPU 101 needs to execute the setting confirmation processing. This setting confirmation processing is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. As described above, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 when the setting confirmation process is started. Then, when the setting key switch signal is operated to be turned off, the setting confirmation process ends. It should be noted that the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is turned on again after the setting key switch signal is turned off. As I did.

Further, in order to display the history of the setting confirmation, as described above, the main CPU 101 executes the setting confirmation processing, and then, the host control circuit 2100 transmits the power interruption recovery command as a command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is completed. Send to. At this time, although the set value is not changed, the set value information is also transferred from the main CPU 101 to the host control circuit 2100 in order to execute the above-described setting determination process (the processes of step S319 and step S320, see FIG. 114). It is preferably sent.

On the other hand, when the host control circuit 2100 receives the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has ended, the operation control information (information indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been executed) and the RTC 209 are currently clocking. The date/time data, that is, the date/time data when the power failure recovery command is received is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the column of “No. 1” in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 119 described later. In addition, as shown in the column of "No. 1" in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. May also be displayed together.

The sub-work RAM 2100a according to this embodiment constitutes a storage holding storage area capable of storing and holding the written information even in the non-energized state. Therefore, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operator or when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the storage of, for example, the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is retained. ..

In the present embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed while the “setting change/confirmation history” is highlighted on the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 110 and 111), and the sub-work RAM 2100a is pressed. It means that a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 119 described later) showing the setting change/confirmation history information stored in is displayed.

In order to display the browsing history (browsing history), the host control circuit 2100 executes the following processing. That is, during the setting change process or the setting confirmation process (YES in step S301), the host control circuit 2100 displays the hole menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 (step S301). Then, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and decided in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the host control circuit 2100 highlights "setting change/confirmation history" (Fig. 111). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the host control circuit 2100 reads the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a, and the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 119 described later). ) Is displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and operation type information (information indicating that browsing has been performed) indicating that browsing has been performed and date and time data currently clocked by the RTC 209, that is, browsing has been performed. The time data (when the main button 662 is pressed) is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a in association with the date and time data. This is the process when the browsing history is recorded in the history recording process (steps S306 and S307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in the sub-work RAM 2100a when the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 regardless of whether the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing is being performed. When the browsing history is stored in the subwork RAM 2100a, the host control circuit 2100 integrates the browsing history with the already stored setting change/confirmation history information and stores it in the subwork RAM 2100a. The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the “No. 2” and “No. 5” columns on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG.

Here, the history recording processing in steps S306 and S307 can be summarized as follows. First, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and decided in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process. The host control circuit 2100 performs both the setting change history and the browsing history. Further, in the hall menu process (step S303), "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is the power interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. At this time, the host control circuit 2100 performs both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. If the “setting change/confirmation history” is not selected and decided in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006) and the command received in step S304 is the initialization command, the host control circuit 2100 Does not perform the browsing history of the setting change history and the browsing history, but only the setting change history. Further, when the “setting change/confirmation history” is not selected and decided in the hall menu process (step S303) (NO in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is the power interruption recovery command, the host control circuit The 2100 does not perform the browsing history among the setting confirmation history and the browsing history, but only performs the setting confirmation history. Therefore, in the history recording process of steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is the initialization command or the power failure recovery command, in the hall menu process (step S303), “setting change/confirmation” is performed. When "History" is selected and determined (YES in step S3006), browsing recording is performed.

Note that the hall menu display processing (step S302) and the hall menu processing (step S302) are performed when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above, other than during the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing. When step S303) is executed, the above-mentioned browsing record is performed, which also serves as fraudulent monitoring of a game shop clerk. That is, in order to perform the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, a dedicated key (a key which is notched only in the corresponding portion of the setting key 328 and which is managed by the gaming machine administrator) is required. For example, a general store clerk who does not have a backup can not be browsed, but a backup clear process that does not involve setting change processing can be browsed by a general game store clerk who does not have a dedicated key or an unauthorized player performing a backup process. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, even when the backup clear process without the setting change process is performed, the browsing record is performed by the host control circuit 2100, so that the security camera corresponding to the time (the security camera usually installed in the store) is displayed. It is possible to identify the person who browsed by collating with the video of (camera) or the like.

In the history recording process of steps S306 and S307, regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process or an interruption recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. As described above, when the “setting change/confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), the browsing record is performed, but it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the “setting change/confirmation history” is selected and decided in the hall menu processing (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is the power interruption recovery command, the host control circuit 2100 Performs both the confirmation history and the browsing history of the setting, but the “setting change/confirmation history” is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (YES in step S3006), and the command received in step S304 is When the command is the initialization command, only the setting change history of the setting change history and the browsing history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, the number of times the browsing history is recorded can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the browsing history from unnecessarily increasing and making it difficult to detect fraud. Explaining this, when a fraud involving a setting change is made, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud with a change history of the settings that is not remembered by the gaming machine administrator, but With regard to the accompanying fraud, it is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only with the setting confirmation history. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it is browsed, and when the setting is confirmed (at least the setting value information is browsed), the browsing history is displayed. It was recorded. This is because it is considered that a person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the setting rather than browsing after changing the setting. That is, in the same time period, there is a low possibility of fraud if there is no browsing history but only the setting confirmation history, but it is considered that there is a possibility of fraud if the number of history of both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history is large. .. It should be noted that regardless of whether the command received in step S304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command, if "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S303) (step S303). (YES in step S3006), the setting confirmation process is executed when the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are recorded and the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. When the operation type information indicates that the browsing history is displayed, the browsing history may be displayed. When the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been executed, the browsing history may not be displayed.

In addition, the history recording processing of steps S306 and S307 is browsed a plurality of times between the start of the hole menu display processing of step S302 and the execution of the game screen return display processing of step S317. Even so, the browsing record is executed only once in step S306 or step S307, which is executed when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed. For example, if “setting change/confirmation history” is selected and determined on the hall menu screen (see, eg, FIG. 111) (YES in step S3046), the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, eg, FIG. 119) is displayed. However, when "Return" is selected on this setting change/confirmation history screen to make a decision, the screen returns to the hole menu screen again. Then, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined on this hole menu screen, the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, even if the setting change/confirmation history screen is browsed multiple times during the steps S302 to S317, the browsing record is once.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the number of times of the browsing record performed between steps S302 to S317 to one is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes the setting, confirms the setting, or browses for the purpose of fraud may intentionally increase the number of browsing records and increase the number of histories, and perform an action that makes it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an action is performed, even if the setting change, the setting confirmation, or the browsing is performed a plurality of times during step S301 to step S314, these histories are recorded only once, and the power is supplied. It is possible to prevent the history from being unnecessarily increased by turning off and turning off the history so that the history is not recorded.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hall menu redisplay processing (step S312) is executed after the setting change processing, and the hall menu redisplay processing is not executed after the setting confirmation processing. Although the screen restoration process (step S317) is executed, for example, even after the setting key 328 is turned off and the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, if the setting key 328 is turned on again, the hall menu is displayed. If the specifications are such that the screen is displayed, the hall menu screen can be displayed again after returning to the game screen. In this case, each time the user selects and confirms “setting change/confirmation history” on the hall menu screen displayed again, or repeatedly executes the ON/OFF operation of the setting key 328, he/she browses, but in such a case Even if there is, it is preferable to keep the browsing record once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has operation means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, and a backup clear switch 330. ing. Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664, and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. Regarding the power switch 35, the volume switch 108, the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, and the backup clear switch 330. Is an operation unit that cannot be operated by a player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a game machine manager.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fact that the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119, for example) capable of confirming the setting value is displayed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting change in which the setting value is not displayed is stored. The display of the confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 124 described later) may be stored as the browsing history.

117, 118, and 119 to 123, the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100 and the display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed. The description will be made in comparison with the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area.

Note that FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 118 is an example of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 117. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen (a screen at the time of shifting to the setting change/confirmation history screen) of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which the page can be updated on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing an example when “clear” is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared on the setting change/confirmation history screen.

When “setting change/confirmation history” is selected in the hole menu processing (see FIG. 115) (YES in step S3006 of FIG. 115), the host control circuit 2100 performs setting change/confirmation history screen display processing (step S3051). ). At this time, the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On the initial screen of this setting change/confirmation history screen, "Return" is highlighted.

The setting change/confirmation history screen (see, eg, FIG. 119) displayed in the display area of the display device 16 includes a setting change/confirmation history display area 1640, an operation explanation area 1650, a first selection area 1660a, and a first selection area 1660a. 2 selection area 1660b. FIG. 119 shows an example in which “Page” is displayed in the first selection area 1660a and “Clear” and “Return” are displayed in the second selection area 1660b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 119, in the setting change/confirmation history display area 1640, time information, operation type information, and setting value information are associated and displayed in a list. The date and time column displays the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, and the browsing was performed. The operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) is displayed in the operation type column. In the setting value column, the setting value after the change is displayed when the setting is changed, and the setting value at that time is displayed when the setting is confirmed. In the operation type column, “change” is simply displayed when the setting is changed, and “confirm” is simply displayed when the setting is confirmed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, time information and operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. .. Further, when the operation type is setting change, the set value after the setting is displayed, and when the operation type is confirmation, the set value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type.

After executing the setting change/confirmation history screen display procedure (step S3051), the host control circuit 2100 executes the timekeeping process (step S3052). This time counting process is a process for starting the time counting of a timer built in the host control circuit 2100. Here, the timer starts counting (the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen in the display area of the display device 16 after the setting change/confirmation history screen display process (step S3051) is executed (see FIG. 119). This is because the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after () is displayed).

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3053 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 has not been operated (NO in step S3053), the flow advances to step S3071 to be described later, and it is determined whether "return" has been determined on the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change/confirmation history screen. In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, “return” is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, “return” is determined. To be done.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3053), the selected item is highlighted (step S3054). For example, if the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 119) of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which “Return” is highlighted, the highlighted display moves from “Return” to “Page” ( See FIG. 120).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3054) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3055). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3052 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. Clearing the time counting of the timer and restarting the time counting does not require any processing within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3054). This is for displaying the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) when not performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3056 whether or not “Page” has been determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “Page” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 displays It is determined that “Page” has been decided.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that “Page” has been determined (YES in step S3056), the host control circuit 2100 executes page update screen display processing (step S3057). When the page update screen display process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 121) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On the page update screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, an image simulating the left/right select buttons 664c and 664d, and “next page” and “previous page” are displayed on the left and right of the “Page” description. Thus, the operator understands that when the left select button 664c is operated, the setting change/confirmation history screen is updated to the previous page, and when the right select button 664d is operated, the setting change/confirmation history screen is updated to the next page. can do. If the left select button 664c is operated when the first page of the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, the last page is displayed, and if the right select button 664d is operated when the last page is displayed, the first page is displayed. Circular display such that eyes are displayed can improve convenience.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be "Page" (NO in step S3056), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S3065 described below and determines whether or not it is determined to be "clear" on the setting change/confirmation history screen. ..

After executing the page update screen display process (step S3057), the host control circuit 2100 executes the time counting process (step S3058). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3055 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again after the page update screen display process (step S3057) is executed (after the page update screen in the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 121) is displayed. ), so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds).

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3059 whether a page update operation has been performed. If the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3059), the process advances to step S3062 described below.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that a page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3059), the host control circuit 2100 executes page update processing (step S3060). When the left/right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 121) in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 performs the page update process. The setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 is updated and displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page. The setting change/confirmation history screen when the setting change/confirmation history screen on the next page or the previous page is updated is not shown.

In the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100 operates the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on the page update screen (see FIG. 121) in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Although the page update process is performed, the operation for performing the page update process is not limited to this. For example, by operating the up/down select buttons 664a and 664b, it is possible to select any of “No. 1” to “No. 5” in the setting change/confirmation history screen, and the down select button 664b is operated. In addition, the page update process may be performed when it is determined that the line is the last line. The same applies to the page update process in the modification of the setting change/confirmation history process described later.

After executing the page update process (step S3060), the host control circuit 2100 executes the clock process (step S3061). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3058 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again after the page update process (step S3060) is executed (after the setting change/confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed), and the predetermined time ( This is because the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within 30 seconds.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the time counting process of step S3061, and then returns to step S3059 to determine whether or not a page update operation has been performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3062 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3062), the process moves to step S3072 described later. In this case, the process shifts to step S3072 instead of step S3071 because "return" is highlighted (selected) like the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen on the page update screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. Because it does not exist.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3062), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 121), the highlight display moves from “Page” to “clear” (see FIG. 122).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3063) and then executes the time counting process (step S3064). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3061 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. To clear the timer timing and start timing again, no processing was performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen was highlighted. This is because the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 110) is displayed at this time.

The host control circuit 2100 executes the time counting process of step S3064, then moves to step S3065, and determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear”. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “clear” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 It is determined that “clear” has been decided.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3065), the host control circuit 2100 executes a setting change/confirmation history data clear process (step S3066). This setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a. When the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 1640 in the display area of the display device 16 are erased (see FIG. 123). When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process of step S3065 is executed, the item "return" is highlighted.

In the setting change/confirmation history data clear process (step S3066), all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a are erased, but not all of them are deleted. The data is not limited to being erased, and only a part of the data may be erased. As a mode of erasing a part of the data, for example, No. 1 in FIG. 1-No. 5, time (date and time) information corresponding to a specific No., operation type information and setting value information are deleted, a setting change/confirmation history screen is deleted for each page, a plurality of operation types (setting change) , Setting confirmation, browsing) of deleting the date and time (time) information, the operation type information, and the set value information corresponding to a specific operation type, among the time (date and time) information, the operation type information, and the set value information A mode in which only specific information (for example, setting value information) is erased can be considered.

Further, it is preferable that the setting change/confirmation history data clear process (step S3066) is executed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition. For example, in the state where “clear” is selected (highlighted state) on the setting change/confirmation history screen, for example, the input of the password may be a condition for enabling the depression of the main button 662. In this case, when the operator presses the main button 662 without inputting the password, a screen requesting the password is displayed, and the setting change/confirmation history data clear process is executed only when the correct password is input. You can Thereby, it is possible to prevent the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history from being accidentally cleared. Further, for example, a person who has performed setting change processing or browsing for the purpose of fraud may erase the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history in order to hide his/her own fraud. Therefore, for example, by allowing only a specific person, such as a person who knows the password, to perform the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing, it is possible to suppress the setting change processing and browsing for the purpose of fraud. It will be possible.

After executing the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S3066), the host control circuit 2100 executes the clocking process (step S3067). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3064 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again after the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S3066) is executed (each history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 1640 is This is because the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all the data has been erased.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3068 whether the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S3068), the process moves to step S3072 described later. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3071 instead of step S3072 because "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared unless the select button 664 is operated. .. Therefore, if the specification is such that "return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen where each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S3072.

When determining that the select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S3068), the host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3069).

The host control circuit 2100 highlights the selected item (step S3069) and then executes the timekeeping process (step S3070). This time counting process is a process of clearing the time counting of the timer started in step S3067 and starting the time counting of the timer built in the host control circuit 2100 again. The time counting of the timer is cleared and the time counting is started again because no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S3069). This is for displaying the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) when it is not performed.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not “return” is determined in step S3071. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “Return” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, the host control circuit 2100 It is determined that “return” has been decided.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that “return” is determined (YES in step S3071), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3073), and the setting change/confirmation history process ends. This hole menu screen display process is a process of displaying the initial screen (see FIG. 110) of the hole menu screen in the display area of the display device 16 instead of the setting change/confirmation history screen.

If it is not determined to be “return” in step S3071 (NO in step S3071), the host control circuit 2100 determines whether a predetermined time has passed (step S3072).

When the host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the host control circuit 2100 moves to step S3073, ends the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and returns to the hall. The initial screen (see FIG. 110) of the menu screen is displayed. That is, even if the operator does not select and decide the "return" item, if the no-operation period continues for a predetermined period of time, the setting change/confirmation history screen will end and the hall menu screen initial screen will be displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the host control circuit 2100 returns to step S3053 and continues the processing from step S3053.

As described above, in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed on the display device 16 during the setting change or the setting confirmation, when the predetermined time elapses without any operation, the setting change/confirmation history screen is terminated. , The hall menu screen is displayed. However, on the hall menu screen, the host control circuit 2100 does not close the hall menu screen as long as the settings are being changed or the settings are being confirmed, even if there is no operation, and the host control circuit 2100 controls the hall menu screen to continue to be displayed. To do. In this case, the item for ending the hall menu is not displayed on the hall menu screen.

When it is determined in step S3072 that the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step S3072), the process of moving to step S3073 is the hole menu process of the above-described step S303 (see FIGS. 108 and 114) (that is, during setting change or This is a process during setting confirmation), and a different process is executed (not shown) in the hole menu process of step S313 (see FIG. 108 and FIG. 114) (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed). Specifically, in the setting change/confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hole menu process of step S313, when a predetermined time has elapsed without any operation (the predetermined time has elapsed in step S3072 of the hole menu process of step S313 (step S3072). (YES) in), the host control circuit 2100 proceeds to step S317 (see FIG. 108 and FIG. 114), finishes displaying the setting change/confirmation history screen, and returns to the game screen display process (step S317). And the hall menu display prohibition process (step S318) is executed. That is, in the setting change/confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, only the hall menu screen is displayed (the setting change/confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that has been redisplayed after the setting change process has been completed, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, the setting change/confirmation history screen is browsed again. Can't do it.

Also, regarding the processing that returns to step S3053 when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S3072 (NO in step S3072), the hole menu processing (that is, the setting in step S303 (see FIGS. 108 and 114)) described above is performed. This is the process in the process of changing or confirming the setting), and a different process is executed (not shown) in the hole menu process of step S313 (see FIG. 108 and FIG. 114) (that is, after the setting change or the setting confirmation is completed). Specifically, in the setting change/confirmation history process (step S3007) in the hole menu process of step S313, even if the non-operation period has not reached the predetermined period (NO in step S3072), for example, an effect control object is generated. Based on the satisfaction of a predetermined termination condition such as when it is determined that a command has been received, a game screen restoration process (step S317) and a hole menu display prohibition process (step S318) are executed. That is, in the setting change/confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation time continues for a predetermined time, only the hall menu screen is returned (the setting change/confirmation history screen can be browsed again). However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that has been redisplayed after the setting change process has been completed, the setting change/confirmation history will be displayed again even if the no-operation time has not reached the specified time. You will not be able to browse the screen. In other words, in the setting change/confirmation history screen that is displayed via the hall menu screen that is redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the no-operation period does not continue for a predetermined period, and Unless the above condition is satisfied, the processes of steps S3053 to S3072 are repeatedly executed.

As described above, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator may view the confidential information such as the history of the setting change and the setting confirmation while waiting for a predetermined time ( For example, if there is no operation for 30 seconds, the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen ends and the game screen restoration process (step S317) and the hall menu prohibition process (step S318) are executed, so that the person who does not have the authority (For example, a hall staff member or a player who is not a game machine administrator) cannot easily view confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history, and security can be ensured.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, in the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119, regardless of the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, browsing), time information, operation type information, and set values A list screen is displayed showing all of the information. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 119) displaying the time information and the setting value information when the setting is changed, and the time information and the setting value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. The second information (for example, No. 3 and No. 4 in FIG. 119) and the third information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 119) in which the time information and the set value information when viewed are displayed. 2, No. 5) are displayed in a list. However, the operator (for example, game machine administrator) may want to narrow down the target to specific operation type information and display it. Therefore, a screen displaying a list of time information, operation type information, and setting value information (for example, see FIG. 119), the above-mentioned first information, the above-mentioned second information, and the above-mentioned third information. It is preferable that the narrowing-down screen narrowed down to only specific information among them can be selectively displayed in the display area of the display device 16 according to the intention of the operator. This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is useful not only for fraud detection but also for information such as how many days the business has been carried out with the set value, so that it is highly convenient in business. The narrowing-down screen may be displayed by narrowing down the target to the specific operation type information, and thus information irrelevant to the operation type (for example, current time information) may be displayed.

[10-21. Another example of display screen displayed in setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the setting change/confirmation history processing will be described with reference to FIGS. However, since the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100 is the same as that in FIGS. 117 and 118, in this other example, the screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 will be described. A description of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100 will be omitted.

FIG. 124 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen. FIG. 125 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example when “display setting” is selected. FIG. 126 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when the setting value is newly added and displayed. FIG. 127 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16, and is a diagram showing an example when “Page” is selected. FIG. 128 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 and is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen capable of performing page update.

For example, as shown in FIG. 124, the setting change/confirmation history screen has a setting change/confirmation history display area 1670, an operation explanation area 1680, a first selection area 1690a, and a second selection area 1690b.

In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 124, the setting change/confirmation history display area 1670 displays time information and operation type information but does not display setting value information. That is, the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 124 is a screen in which only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed. Note that the date and time when the time information is displayed shows the date and time when the setting was changed, the setting was confirmed, and the browsing was performed, and the operation type column where the operation type information was displayed shows the operation type (setting change, Confirmation and browsing) is displayed.

Further, in the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, “setting display” is displayed in the second selection area 1690b in addition to “clear” and “return”. In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history, “Return” is selected and displayed (highlighted). Also in this other example, by operating the select button 664, the highlighted item can be selected.

When the select button 664 is operated to select “setting display”, “setting display” is highlighted (see FIG. 125). Then, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 is pressed with the “setting display” selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the set value information is displayed. Is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, the setting change/confirmation history screen (list screen) in which time information, operation type information, and set value information are displayed in a list (Fig. 126). Thus, in this other example, although the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, by selecting “setting display” and deciding, it is possible to correlate with the date and time and the operation type. The set values will be newly displayed in a list. When a setting change/confirmation history screen displaying time information, operation type information, and setting value information is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. "Back" is highlighted.

On the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 126) on which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed, select page by operating the select button 664, and “Page” is highlighted. (See FIG. 127). Then, when the host control circuit 2100 detects that the main button 662 is pressed while “Page” is selected (highlighted), the host control circuit 2100 executes page update processing. When this page update process is executed, a page update screen (see FIG. 128) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On this page update screen, the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d can be operated to update to the next page or the previous page.

Further, when “Page” is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen (see FIG. 124) of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed, Also, the page control process is executed by the host control circuit 2100. However, when this page update process is executed, the page update screen in the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the set value information is not displayed although the time information and the operation type information are displayed in the display area of the display device 16 is displayed. Is displayed. In this page update screen, by operating the left/right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the setting value is not displayed. However, the page update process may not be executed on the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed.

Note that, in this other example, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information are displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 124, and the time information and the operation type information are displayed as shown in FIG. 126, for example. Although it is possible to selectively display a screen displaying a list of the setting value information and the setting value information, the screen of FIG. 124 displays one or two of time information, operation type information, and setting value information. It may be a screen that displays only information.

In addition, the setting change/confirmation history screen in which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list can be viewed only by a person who satisfies a specific condition (for example, a person who inputs a proper password). However, this will be described later.

FIG. 129 is a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation procedure until it is performed. As shown in FIG. 129, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the first procedure for browsing the setting change/confirmation history information, the hall menu when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change processing can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction by turning the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (returned to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation that is performed regardless of whether the setting changing process or the setting confirmation process is executed, but the setting operation is not limited to this. The operation may be performed when at least one of the change processing and the setting confirmation processing is executed. The same applies to any of the modifications described later.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111), and thereby the “setting change/confirmation history” is displayed. ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 111) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As the third procedure, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main button 662 is displayed with the “setting change/confirmation history” highlighted in the hall menu screen (see FIG. 111) displayed in the second procedure. When pressed, the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. On this setting change/confirmation history screen, date/time data, operation types (corresponding operation types of setting change, confirmation, and browsing) and set values are associated with each other.

Therefore, a person who is able to use and operate the setting key 328 (a person who has the authority) can change the setting of the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) displayed through the above first to third steps. By viewing the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance the history of each change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, the confirmation of the setting change, the history of the setting change and the browsing of the confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The authorized person means a person who is authorized to change the setting, confirm the setting change, and the like, and is a store manager of the hall. Hereinafter, the “authorized person” may be referred to as a “management authority person”.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that composes the gaming machine according to the present invention controls the display device 16 that displays various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs the control and the host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16 are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms a set value (for example, the settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332 which is a setting unit for enabling the above, and a data transmitting unit for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100, and the display control unit includes a receiving unit for receiving various data from the data transmitting unit, The main CPU 101 includes a sub-work RAM 2100a that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain written information even when the power is off, and an RTC 209 that keeps time and date. And the set value are transmitted to the host control circuit 2100, and when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or confirms the setting in the sub-work RAM 2100a and the set value. And a setting display function for storing date/time data from the RTC 209 as setting change/confirmation history information and displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and date/time data stored in the sub-work RAM 203 on the display device 16. When the main button 662 is operated while the confirmation and the date and time data are displayed, the setting value stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date/time data from the RTC 209 are stored as the setting change/confirmation history information in the sub-work RAM 2100a, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date/time data are displayed in the main When the button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the sub work RAM 2100a can be displayed. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" in the hole menu is selected, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it is possible to judge whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Like

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may also be configured to acquire the date and time data when the set value is received from the RTC 209 and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person specifies the date and time when the setting value was changed. Therefore, when a fraud such as changing the setting value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the date and time at which the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC 209 and the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for confirming the setting value and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is confirmed. When a fraud such as checking the value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, Browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, since the setting change/confirmation history information, the setting change/confirmation history information in which the setting value and the date/time data are associated with each other can be stored and displayed, each history regarding the setting value can be stored. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention is a display device 16 that displays various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit that controls the game. The main CPU 101 and a host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16, are provided, and the control unit sets the setting values (for example, the settings 1 to 6) that can be changed or confirmed. The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a unit and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the host control circuit 2100, and the display control unit is a non-energized state with a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit. The main CPU 101 is provided with a sub-work RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding written information and an RTC 209 for timing the date and time, and the main CPU 101 sends a setting change or setting confirmation and setting value to the host control circuit 2100 by the data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or the setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 to the sub-work RAM 2100a. The display device 16 has a setting display function of storing the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a on the display device 16 as the confirmation history information and displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a. When it is displayed, the date and time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Further, the pachi-slot according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time data in which the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed on the display device 16 from the RTC 209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history in association with each other. May be

With this configuration, since the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, it is possible to specify the date and time when the information regarding the setting value was browsed, and it is possible to prevent fraud such as changing the setting value. It is possible to identify the fraud if it has been done.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to store and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation/history information and the date and time data are associated with each other, an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can determine whether or not it has been performed, and can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

[10-22. Maintenance process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 to 132, a maintenance process (step S3019) executed by the host control circuit 2100 and a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the maintenance process is executed. Will be explained while comparing. Note that FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the maintenance process executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. 131 is a diagram illustrating an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. FIG. 132 is an example of the maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

In the maintenance process, the host control circuit 2100 displays a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in the display area of the display device 16. In this maintenance process, for example, a device (for example, various sensors, various operating substances, etc.) connected to the host control circuit 2100, such as a production button switch 621 and a production accessory such as the accessory group 1000, is the target of the maintenance processing. Then, the operator can confirm whether or not these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 131 and 132, the host control circuit 2100 displays an operation state display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) in the approximate center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132). .. This operation status display table includes, for example, a name string in which names of 28 various devices are displayed and a number string in which serial numbers (1-28) given to the various devices displayed in the name strings are displayed. And an operating state string indicating operating states of various devices. The "OFF" display in the operation state column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is an input from various devices, the display of the operating state column is changed from the "OFF" display to the "ON" display. For example, when the production button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is displayed, the host control circuit 2100 changes the display of the operation state column of the production button 1 from “OFF” display to “ON” display. The "ON" display is displayed in red. The above “input from each device” is based on detection of an input port or the like by the host control circuit 2100. In addition, each of the effect characters has at least a normal object position detection sensor group 1002 (see FIG. 9) that detects that the effect object exists, and when the sensor that detects the normal position is ON. The display is turned off, and the display is turned on when the accessory detection sensor group 1002 for detecting the normal position is off, that is, when the effect character moves.

The host control circuit 2100 also displays the operation method on the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time, it is displayed that the initial screen (see FIG. 110) of the hole menu screen is returned (redisplayed), Further below that, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 132, the images corresponding to all the select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 130), the host control circuit 2100 first acquires sub device input information (step S3081). The sub-device input information is the detection result of the operating states of the various devices with serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operating state display table shown in FIG. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether the above-mentioned various devices are in an ON state where there is an input or an OFF state where there is no input.

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs a sub input state information editing process of reading the sub input state information in the acquired sub device input information (step S3082).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 performs maintenance screen display processing for displaying the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 131 and 132) in the display area of the display device 16 based on the sub input state information read in step S3082 (step). S3083). In this process, the maintenance screen is displayed and the display is updated (for example, "OFF" display is changed to "ON" display).

Next, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously operated (step S3084). When it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are operated simultaneously (YES in step S3084), the host control circuit 2100 ends the maintenance process and the hall menu process (see FIG. 115), The processing is returned to step S304 of the hole menu task (see FIG. 108).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are not simultaneously operated (NO in step S3084), the host control circuit 2100 returns the process to step S3081.

By the way, recent pachinko game machines and pachislot machines may have a plurality of functions in one device. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, this is a case where the effect button 62 has a function as an operation button and a function as an effect button. The function of the effect button corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding upward based on the lottery result of the special symbol. When the "production button 1" with the serial number 21 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 executes maintenance for the operation function of the production button 62. Further, when the "effect button 2" with the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and determined, the host control circuit 2100 causes the effect button 62 to move upward so as to perform maintenance for the effect function. If the result of the maintenance operation is normal, the host control circuit 2100 executes the maintenance screen display process (step S3083) and executes the maintenance screen display process (changes from “OFF” display to “ON” display). ). As for the effect button 62 protruding upward due to the selection and determination of “effect button 2”, for example, when normal determination is made, the select button 664 is operated to select another serial number item shown in FIG. 132. In this case, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are simultaneously pressed to end the maintenance mode, the host control circuit 2100 returns to the normal state (the state before protruding upward). Controlled.

Further, in recent pachinko gaming machines and pachi-slots, there are some which are provided with a plurality of effect character objects having different driving means. In such a game machine, a plurality of effect character objects having different driving means are simultaneously operated. The maintenance may be performed, the maintenance may be performed by activating each of the plurality of directing actors having different driving means at different timings, or may be independently activated to perform the maintenance. For example, in a gaming machine in which the driving means includes the different effect parts 1 to 3, the host control circuit 2100 determines that the “effect part 1+2” with the serial number 14 shown in FIG. 132 is selected. The performance effect product 1 and the performance effect product 2 are simultaneously operated to perform maintenance. Further, for example, when the “production effect product 1→2” with the serial number 17 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and decided, the host control circuit 2100 first operates the effect operation product 1 and then operates the effect operation product 2. And perform maintenance. Furthermore, for example, when the "production effect product 1" with the serial number 11 shown in FIG. 132 is selected and decided, the host control circuit 2100 operates the effect product 1 alone to execute maintenance. Note that, for example, when the production 1 and the production 3 operate at the same time and interfere with each other and become inoperable, for example, the “production effect product 1+3” with the serial number 15 in FIG. 132 cannot be selected or cannot be determined even if selected. (Operation of the main button 662 is not validated). In FIG. 132, “Production accessory 1+3” with serial number 15 is shaded as an item that cannot be selected. However, for example, when the production 1 and the production 3 operate at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but when they are operated at different timings (for example, first, the production accessory 1 is activated, and then If it does not interfere with the production effector 3), it is preferable that the "production effector 1→3" of the serial number 18 shown in FIG. As described above, it is possible to operate a plurality of stage effects in a plurality, to operate at different timings, or to operate independently. By disabling the operation, it becomes possible to improve the maintainability while avoiding the occurrence of trouble.

Although not shown in FIG. 132, a gaming ball or medal payout sensor, a payout security ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a CR card return button, a pachi-slot settlement button, and an enclosure are included. In a pachinko gaming machine that enables a game by circulating the game ball, it is preferable that the launch detection sensor of the game ball and the like be also subject to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the host control circuit 2100 have been described as the target of the maintenance process, but the invention is not limited to this, and the main CPU 101 is connected. The device (for example, the power switch 35, the first starting port switch 421, the second starting port switch 441, etc.) may be the target of the maintenance process. In addition, in the CR machine, a pseudo-play is made between the ball lending machine and the pachinko gaming machine (in the case of the CR pachislot, between the ball lending machine and the pachislot) based on the operation of the lending button or the return button of the CR card. Signal communication may be performed, the normal state of this signal communication may be detected, and if normal, the maintenance screen display process may be executed (“OFF” display is changed to “ON” display).

[10-23. Mobile device cooperation function]
Next, the portable terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example with reference to FIGS. 133 to 135.

The mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a function of cooperating the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal cooperation function of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to record detailed information about the game played by the player, and customize functions that do not affect the gaming result of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by satisfying predetermined conditions. You can

As the predetermined condition, for example, the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol may be determined to be a small hit without the operation of the condition device, or a specific effect may be executed. Further, as customization of the function that does not affect the game result of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, the music output during the big hit game or the high probability game state is changed to a special song, or the display device 16 is used. And changing the costume of the character displayed in.

When using the mobile terminal cooperation function, first, a guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. When the main button 662 is pressed, for example, in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in the display area of the display device 16 is not performed, the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The initial image of the guide includes the characters "UniMemo (registered trademark)", the character "Please select your favorite menu", and the guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 133, the items of the guide menu include “start uni-memo”, “big hit symbol/round number”, “model site”, and “return to game”. In the initial image of the guide, "Begin uni-memo" is highlighted. Then, among the plurality of guide menu items, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the up/down select buttons 664a and 664b. When the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is selected. In FIG. 133, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid-lined frame, and the highlighted item “start uni-memo” is surrounded by a thicker solid-lined frame.

When "start uni-memo" is selected from the guide menu, a uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. When "big hit symbol/round number" is selected, the big hit symbol/round number is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (not shown). Then, when the "model site" is selected, the model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (not shown).

When "Return to game" is selected, the display of the guide initial image displayed in the display area of the display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). Then, in the display area of the display device 16, an effect image displayed when playing a game, the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period, or the first start opening 420 or the second start opening 440. Also, a demo image displayed when no prize is won for a predetermined period is displayed. In addition, even when a predetermined time has elapsed without selecting any of the items in the guide menu, the display area of the display device 16 displays an effect image to be displayed when playing a game and the demo image described above. To be done.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example when a uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. In the uni-memo initial image, the characters "uni-memo", "let's customize your favorite character", and the uni-memo menu are displayed. Items of the uni-memo menu include “password input”, “record”, “record and end”, “member registration”, “return to game”, and “return”. In the initial image of UniMemo, "Enter Password" is highlighted. Then, among the plurality of items of the uni-memo menu, the highlighted item can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d. When the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is selected. In FIG. 134, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid line frame, and the highlighted “password input” is surrounded by a thicker solid line frame.

Then, when "INPUT PASSWORD" is selected and determined, a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16 (see FIG. 135).

FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating an example when the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The password display image includes the characters "Please enter password" and the password input menu.

In the password input menu, a plurality of items of the password input menu are displayed. The items on the password input menu are "OK", "Delete", numbers "0" to "9", alphabets "A" to "F", "return to game", and "return". including. In the password display image, the highlighted item among “0” to “9” and “A” to “F” can be selected by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and when the main button 662 is operated. , The highlighted number or alphabet is determined. The determined number or alphabet is displayed on the password display image. When “OK” is selected in the password input menu and the password is determined, the plurality of characters displayed in the password display image are determined as the password to be input. Then, when "Delete" is selected in the password input menu, the last input character is deleted one by one from the password display image.

When "return to game" is selected in the password input menu, the display area of the display device 16 displays an effect image displayed when playing a game, the firing handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period, or the first Demonstration images that are displayed when a prize has not been won for a predetermined period are displayed on both the starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440. When “Return” in the password input menu is selected, a uni-memo initial image is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

[10-24. Modification of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described below.
[10-24-1. Modification 1 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
First, a modified example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141.

The setting change/confirmation history process in the first modification is substantially the same as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, except that the setting change/confirmation history process has an authentication function for browsing the set value. .. In the following, differences from the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 will be described in detail. In the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It has been described that the clocking process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 117) is performed in order to display. Also in this modification 1, when the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The hall menu screen may be displayed on the screen, but in the following description, the description of the timing process will be omitted.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing Modification Example 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. In this setting change/confirmation history process, "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) from the hole menu screen (see FIGS. 110 and 111) being displayed in step S3006 of FIG. The process is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed.

When the setting change/confirmation history process is started, the host control circuit 2100 performs an authentication process for authenticating the administrator authority (step S3100). This authentication processing will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the first modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

As shown in FIG. 137, in the authentication processing, the host control circuit 2100 first sets a password in the display area of the display device 16 in which the hole menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, for example. The password request screen for request is further displayed (step S3101). FIG. 138 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. FIG. 139 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100.

In the first modification, when the setting change/confirmation history process is started (“setting change/confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen, the main button 662 is pressed. ), for example, as shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the setting change/confirmation history starts, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). Is displayed and the password request screen may be displayed while this setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, or the password request screen may be displayed without displaying either the hole menu or the setting change/confirmation history screen. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is input, the host control circuit 2100 executes password input processing (step S3102), and proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not the input password is correct, and if the input password is correct (YES in step S3103), the authentication process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the input password is not correct (NO in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 executes authentication NG display processing (step S3104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, for example, the screen shown in FIG. 140 is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. Here, FIG. 140 is an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the first modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100 when the entered password is inappropriate. FIG.

When the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication process of step S3100 and determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is correct (YES in step S3103), it determines authentication OK (YES in step S3110). , And proceeds to step S3120. On the other hand, when it is determined that the password is not correct (NO in step S3103), the host control circuit 2100 determines that the authentication is not OK (NO in step S3110), and the setting change/confirmation history process ends.

When the main button 662 is pressed after the password is input on the password request screen, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether the input password is appropriate. If the entered password is inappropriate or if the main button 662 is pressed without entering the password, the above-described authentication NG process of step S3103 is executed. Then, only when the correct password is input and the main button 662 is pressed, the setting change/confirmation history screen displaying the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information is displayed. You can As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information of the set values from being browsed for the purpose of fraud.

The host control circuit 2100 performs a setting change/confirmation history screen display process in step S3120. At this time, in the display area of the display device 16, a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 119) in which date and time data, an operation type, and a set value are shown in association with each other is displayed.

After the setting change/confirmation history screen display processing in step S3120, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether a page update operation has been performed (step S3130). If it is determined that the page update operation is performed (YES in step S3130), the page update process is executed (step S3140), and then the process proceeds to step S3130. On the other hand, if the page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S3130), the process advances to step S3150.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3150 whether "clear" is determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “clear” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 122) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” is determined.

If the host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3150), it executes the setting change/confirmation history data clear process (step S3180), and proceeds to step S3180. The above-mentioned setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a. When the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing is executed, all history data displayed in the display area of the display device 16 is erased (see, for example, FIG. 123). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “clear” (NO in step S3150), the process proceeds to step S3170.

The host control circuit 2100 determines in step S3170 whether “return” is determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “return” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, eg, FIG. 119) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The host control circuit 2100 determines that “return” is determined.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that “return” is determined (YES in step S3170), it executes the hall menu screen display process (step S3180) and ends the setting change/confirmation history process. On the other hand, if "return" is not determined (NO in step S3170), the process proceeds to step S3130, and the process of transition to step S3130 is continued.

FIG. 141 is a hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. It is a flow figure showing an example of an operation procedure until a confirmation history screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 141, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a first procedure for browsing the setting change/confirmation history information, the hall menu when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed. Display the screen. As described above, the setting change processing can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction by turning the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (returned to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111), and thereby the “setting change/confirmation history” is displayed. ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 111) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of a password (see FIGS. 138 and 139) and determines the adequacy of the input password.

As a fourth procedure, if the password entered in the third procedure is correct, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the value information, more specifically, date/time data and operation type (setting change, confirmation, browsing). A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 126) in which the corresponding operation type) and the setting value are associated is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

Therefore, a person who is able to use and operate the setting key 328 (a person who has the authority) can change the setting on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 119) displayed through the first to fourth steps. By viewing the confirmation history, it becomes possible to check at a glance the history of each change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, the confirmation of the setting change, the history of the setting change and the browsing of the confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. .. The authorized person means a person who is authorized to change the setting, confirm the setting change, and the like, and is a store manager of the hall. Hereinafter, the “authorized person” may be referred to as a “management authority person”.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that composes the gaming machine according to the present invention controls the display device 16 that displays various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and the control related to the game. The main CPU 101 that is a control unit that performs the control and the host control circuit 2100 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16 are provided, and the control unit changes or confirms a set value (for example, the settings 1 to 6). A setting switch 332 which is a setting unit for enabling the above, and a data transmitting unit for transmitting various data to the host control circuit 2100, and the display control unit includes a receiving unit for receiving various data from the data transmitting unit, The main CPU 101 includes a sub-work RAM 2100a that functions as a backup memory that can store and retain written information even when the power is off, and an RTC 209 that keeps time and date. And the set value are transmitted to the host control circuit 2100, and when the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or confirms the setting in the sub-work RAM 2100a and the set value. And a setting display function for storing date/time data from the RTC 209 as setting change/confirmation history information and displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and date/time data stored in the sub-work RAM 203 on the display device 16. When the main button 662 is operated while the confirmation and the date and time data are displayed, the setting value stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed.

With this configuration, the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date/time data from the RTC 209 are stored as the setting change/confirmation history information in the sub-work RAM 2100a, so that the setting change or setting confirmation and the date/time data are displayed in the main When the button 662 is operated, the set value stored in the sub work RAM 2100a can be displayed. Therefore, when "Setting change/confirmation history" in the hole menu is selected, each history related to the setting value can be confirmed, and it is possible to judge whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed. Like

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment may also be configured to acquire the date and time data when the set value is received from the RTC 209 and store the set value, the date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information indicating the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person specifies the date and time when the setting value was changed. Therefore, when a fraud such as changing the setting value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the date and time at which the information indicating that the set value has been confirmed is received from the RTC 209 and the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other. Good.

With this configuration, the date and time data for confirming the setting value and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that the authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is confirmed. When a fraud such as checking the value is performed, the fraud can be identified.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, Browsing history can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, since the setting change/confirmation history information, the setting change/confirmation history information in which the setting value and the date/time data are associated with each other can be stored and displayed, each history regarding the setting value can be stored. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be confirmed and can determine whether or not an unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention is a display device 16 that displays various images, operation units such as a main button 662 and a select button 664, and a control unit that controls the game. The main CPU 101 and a host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit that controls the display of the display device 16, are provided, and the control unit sets the setting values (for example, the settings 1 to 6) that can be changed or confirmed. The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 that is a unit and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the host control circuit 2100, and the display control unit is a non-energized state with a receiving unit that receives various data from the data transmission unit. The main CPU 101 is provided with a sub-work RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding written information and an RTC 209 for timing the date and time, and the main CPU 101 sends a setting change or setting confirmation and setting value to the host control circuit 2100 by the data transmission means. When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or the setting confirmation, the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or the setting confirmation, the setting value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 to the sub-work RAM 2100a. The display device 16 has a setting display function of storing the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a on the display device 16 as the confirmation history information and displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a. When it is displayed, the date and time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Further, the pachi-slot according to the present embodiment acquires the date and time data in which the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed on the display device 16 from the RTC 209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history in association with each other. May be

With this configuration, since the date and time data and the information indicating the browsing history are stored in association with each other, it is possible to specify the date and time when the information regarding the setting value was browsed, and it is possible to prevent fraud such as changing the setting value. It is possible to identify the fraud if it has been done.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is displayed when the setting change or setting confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed. The date and time data may be stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history and the browsing history may be displayed on the display device 16.

With this configuration, when the setting change or confirmation of the setting change/confirmation history information, the set value, and the date/time data are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, The browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. Therefore, in the state where "Setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the Hall menu where the setting value is not displayed, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed in addition to the setting change/confirmation, setting value and date/time data display. Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the browsing history of the setting change or the setting confirmation has been browsed for fraudulent purposes such as goto.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, since it is possible to store and display the browsing history information in which the browsing history of browsing the setting change confirmation/history information and the date and time data are associated with each other, an unnatural operation regarding the setting value can be performed. It is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 which can determine whether or not it has been performed, and can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

[10-24-2. Modification 2 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, a modified example 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146.

The setting change/confirmation history process according to the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process is basically the same as that of the modification 1 except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from the first modification will be described in detail.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modified example 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing is provided with, for example, a slide switch as a volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and has a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, a volume “high”. It is configured to perform switching operation to any of the three volume positions corresponding to "," "medium", and "small", and to perform switching operation to a plurality of volume positions in a predetermined operation order, and the switching operation order is preset. When the order matches, the user is authenticated as a user having the administrator authority. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by rotating the jog dial and pressing the jog dial to determine the volume.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history processing has an authentication processing function of performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the change order of the volume position. In the second modification, for example, a control program to which the authentication processing function is added is stored in the voice/LED control circuit 2200, and the host control circuit 2100 executes the authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 142 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the volume switch 108 that generates a volume password applied to the authentication process (see FIG. 143) in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. is there. The volume switch 108 is arranged, for example, in the circuit board of the sub control circuit 200, and is capable of performing a slide operation for setting an initial setting value. For example, the volume switch 108 is set to any one of the three volume positions 603a, 603b, 603c (hereinafter, may be referred to as volume positions 1, 2, 3) corresponding to the volume "low", "medium", and "high". The switching operation is performed, and the switching operation is sequentially performed to the plurality of volume positions 1, 2, 3 in a predetermined operation order. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, it can be set by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of “large”→“medium”→“small”→“medium”. That is, the host control circuit 2100 constitutes a position detection unit that detects the volume positions 1, 2, and 3 of the volume switch 108.

On the other hand, when setting a user having administrator authority (administrator authority), a predetermined authentication operation via a plurality of volume positions in a different order from the initial setting of the volume switch 108 according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure. The pattern is operated, and the plurality of volume positions and the operation order are stored in the memory. Then, when the administrator authority is required to view the change history of the set values, the volume switch 108 is operated in a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable the view of the change history of the set values.

As the authentication operation pattern, for example, an operation pattern indicating a position change from volume position 2 (volume “medium”) to volume position 1 (volume “small”) in FIG. 142, or volume position 2 to volume position 3 ( An operation pattern or the like indicating a position change to the volume “loud”) can be held in advance.

As a result, the host control circuit 2100 recognizes the operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and determines whether the operation pattern matches the preset authentication operation pattern or not. It is possible to determine whether or not the person.

As described above, in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting the volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. Like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330, the volume switch 108 in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the firing handle 32, and the like are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the authentication process in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. In this authentication processing, “setting change/confirmation history” is selected from the hole menu (see FIG. 110) displayed in step S3006 of FIG. 115 (YES in step S3006), and “setting change/confirmation” is displayed on the hall menu screen. It is started by pressing the main button 662 while "History" is highlighted (see FIG. 111).

When this authentication process is started, the host control circuit 2100 displays a volume password request display process for displaying a screen prompting the user to input a volume password in the display area of the display device 16 in which the hole menu screen is displayed (step S3201). To execute.

FIG. 144 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed in the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. FIG. FIG. 145 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the display device 16 in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, in the volume password request display process of step S3201 of FIG. 143, the host control circuit 2100 displays, for example, “* operate the volume switch to input the password in the display area of the display device 16. A message such as "The setting value will be displayed after the password is entered." is displayed together with the setting change/confirmation history information.

In the second modification, when the setting change/confirmation history processing is started (“setting change/confirmation history” is selected (highlighted) on the hole menu screen, the main button 662 is pressed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hole menu screen is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the setting change/confirmation history starts, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed (the setting value is not displayed). May be displayed, and the volume password request screen may be displayed with this setting change/confirmation history screen being displayed, or the volume password may be displayed without displaying either the hole menu or the setting change/confirmation history screen. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the host control circuit 2100 continuously executes an operation pattern acquisition process for monitoring the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern (step S3202).

When the volume position information is input during the input monitoring of the volume position information, the host control circuit 2100 extracts an operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and sets a preset authentication operation pattern. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct operation is performed depending on whether or not the two match (step S3203). Here, if it is determined that the correct operation is performed (YES in step S3203), the host control circuit 2100 executes the processing of step S3120 and subsequent steps in FIG. 136.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S3203), the host control circuit 2100 displays an authentication NG display process that displays that authentication is NG in the display area of the display device 16. Is performed (step S3204). As a result, the host control circuit 2100 ends the authentication process and moves to the process of step S3110 in FIG. 136. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "Volume password is wrong. Please try again from the beginning" is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

Although FIG. 142 shows an example in which the volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the operation switch may be at least three or more arbitrary ones. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the host control circuit 2100 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, and position information (volume position information acquired by this position detection function is acquired, and the order and sub-work acquired). The setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a may be displayed on condition that the predetermined operation order stored in the RAM 2100a matches.

FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change confirmation procedure of the setting change/confirmation history information in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the host control circuit 2100. As shown in FIG. 146, in the second modification of the setting change/confirmation history process, as the first procedure of confirming the setting value of the setting change/confirmation history information, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change processing can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction by turning the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (returned to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 selects the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111), and thereby the “setting change/confirmation history” is displayed. ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 111) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1 requests the input of a volume password (see FIGS. 144 and 145), fetches the input volume password, and judges the propriety of the fetched volume password. The suitability of the volume password is determined by comparing the imported volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password), and when both are matched and authentication OK is obtained, it is determined that the volume password is correct. to decide.

As the fourth procedure, if the volume password entered in the third procedure is appropriate, the pachinko gaming machine 1 sets the set value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, and browsing). A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, refer to FIG. 126) in which the corresponding operation type) and the setting value are associated is displayed in the display area of the display device 16.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention has the display device 16 that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are at least the operation unit that receives the operation of the player, It is provided with a non-game operation section that is not operated by a player, a main CPU 101 that is a control section that controls the game, and a host control circuit 2100 that is a display control section that controls the display of the display device 16. The control unit includes a setting switch 332 that allows a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6) to be changed or confirmed, and a data transmission unit that transmits various data to the display control unit. The main CPU 101 includes a receiving unit for receiving various data from the data transmitting unit, a sub-work RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for timing the date and time. The transmitting unit transmits the setting change or setting confirmation and the setting value to the host control circuit 2100, and the host control circuit 2100 stores the data in the sub-work RAM 2100a when the data received by the data receiving unit is the setting change or the setting confirmation. A setting display function is provided for storing setting change or setting confirmation, setting values and date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change/confirmation history information, and displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a on the display device 16. The setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed on condition that the non-gaming operation section is operated in a predetermined order.

With this configuration, it is possible to display the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a on condition that the non-gaming operation section is operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, since only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation sequence can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information, it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value is performed. In addition, it becomes possible to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Further, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment stores the displayed date and time data in the sub-work RAM 2100a as a browsing history, and the display device 16 The browsing history may be displayed on the screen.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as the browsing history and the browsing history can be displayed on the display device 16. .. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the non-gaming operation unit may be configured as an operation switch for adjusting the volume, for example, a volume switch 108.

With this configuration, since it is possible to authenticate in the operation order known only to the authorized person, it is possible to reduce the cost without adding an operation switch for identifying the authorized person. It should be noted that this operation sequence is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is delivered to the hall, and only authorized ones use it for setting change and setting confirmation.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation switch is a switch capable of taking at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the host control circuit 2100 sets each volume position of the operation switch. A position detection function that can be detected is further provided, and the setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and the order of the acquired volume position information matches the predetermined operation order stored in advance. Under the condition, the configuration change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a may be displayed.

With this configuration, the operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and the person having the authority is informed of the operation order in advance to identify the person having the authority. Without adding an operation switch, it is possible to authenticate in an operation order known only to authorized persons.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, only the authorized person can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information, so that it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value is performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of determining whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment authenticates the setting change/confirmation history information by operating the volume switch 108 so that only the person who has the authority regarding the setting value in the hall can display it. Although the configuration has been described, when the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the modification 3 of the setting change/confirmation history processing described below, from the input unit of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be configured to perform authentication using a password that is input.

[10-24-3. Modification 3 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, a modified example 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 154.

FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game system 210 according to Modification 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the host control circuit 2100. This gaming system 210 is configured to include a pachinko gaming machine 1A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and a server device 240 arranged on a network 230. As will be described later, in the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and the server device 240 cooperate with each other to perform an authentication process related to setting change/confirmation of confirmation history information.

In the gaming system 210, the pachinko gaming machine 1A has a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change/confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. It has a function of displaying the code in the display area of the display device 16A (see FIG. 150). The setting change/confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is, for example, information content displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119, and includes a setting value. The sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine 1A constitutes a generating means for generating a two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control unit 221, a display operation unit 222, a camera unit (not shown), and the like. The display/operation unit 222 has functions of a display unit and an operation unit, and is configured by a touch panel or the like. The camera unit is a functional unit that reads (images) the two-dimensional code 161a and the like (see FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. The display/operation unit 222 and the camera unit respectively configure an operation display unit and an image pickup unit in the present invention.

The control unit 221 includes a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, and the like, and the CPU controls various operations according to a control program stored in the storage device or the RAM, for example. To do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 221 analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL, and the password input screen for inputting the password to the operation display unit 222 (see a later-described diagram). 153)), an authentication result acquisition unit that transmits the input password input on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240. When the acquired authentication result is correct, the history information display control unit displays the setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 in a manner including the set value. The extraction unit, the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by the CPU that operates according to a dedicated application preinstalled in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the constituent elements of the control unit 221 according to the present embodiment, are respectively the extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, and the authentication result in the present invention. An acquisition unit and a history information display control unit are configured.

The server device 240 is realized by a computer, has a function of managing a dedicated site for the authentication service identified by the URL, receives an input password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 that accesses the URL, and sets a preset password. It is provided with an authentication service function or the like that determines whether or not the password is correct by comparing with the above, and notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The server device 240 constitutes an authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change/confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine 1A that constitutes the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. This setting change/confirmation history process is performed by selecting “setting change/setting change” from a plurality of items in the hole menu displayed on the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 109) displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A. This is started on condition that the main button 662 is pressed in a state where "confirmation history" is selected and determined and "setting change/confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111).

In the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). It has been described that the clocking process (see step S3052 and the like in FIG. 117) is performed in order to display. Also in this modified example 3, when the timing process is performed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118, and no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the above, the description of the time counting process is omitted in the description of the third modification.

When the setting change/confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change/confirmation history information from the work RAM, and the two-dimensional code including the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. A two-dimensional code generation process for generating 161a (see FIG. 150) is performed (step S3301). Next, the host control circuit 2100 displays the setting change/confirmation history information read in step S3301 and the generated two-dimensional code 161a in the display area of the display device 16A in the mode shown in FIG. 150, for example. Is executed (step S3302).

After the execution of the two-dimensional code display process in step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 can accept a data clear request, a cursor move (page break) request, and a process return request based on the operations of the main button 662 and the select button 664. Move to the ready state. The main button 662 is a button for making a process return request. The select button 664 is a button for making a cursor movement (page break) request. Also, by operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be instructed.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the host control circuit 2100 performs the processing of steps S3303 to S3305. Note that in FIG. 148, the processes of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in FIG. 117 are omitted, but in order to perform these processes, the process of FIG. 117 is performed between steps S3302 and S3303. The process of steps S3056 to S3064 shown in is added.

In FIG. 148, after the two-dimensional code display processing of step S3302, the host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not it is determined to be “clear” in step S3303. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “clear” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, eg, FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16, The host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” is determined.

If the host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3303), it executes the setting change/confirmation history data clear process (step S3304), and proceeds to step S3306. The above-mentioned setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process of erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a. When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area of the display area of the display device 16 are erased (see FIG. 123). On the other hand, if it is not determined to be “clear” (NO in step S3303), the process advances to step S3305.

The host control circuit 2100 determines whether or not “return” is determined in step S3305. When the operator presses the main button 662 with “return” selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 150) displayed in the display area of the display device 16. The host control circuit 2100 determines that “return” is determined.

When the host control circuit 2100 determines that “return” is determined (YES in step S3305), the hall menu screen display process is executed (step S3306), and the setting change/confirmation history process ends. On the other hand, if "return" is not determined (NO in step S3305), the process advances to step S3303 to continue the processes of step S3303 and thereafter.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the host control circuit 2100 determines that “clear” is determined (YES in step S3303), the setting change/confirmation history displayed together with the two-dimensional code 161a (see FIG. 150) is displayed. The information may be cleared. In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the two-dimensional code 161a, but since the authentication result has not been acquired, the setting change/confirmation history information can be cleared regardless of whether the authentication result is OK or NG. You can do it.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 and the server device 240 of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. This processing is started on the condition that the two-dimensional code 161a displayed in the display area of the display device 16A (for example, a liquid crystal display device) of the pachinko gaming machine 1A is captured by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

When the two-dimensional code 161a is photographed by the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing, and based on the image data, the control operation unit 222 displays the two-dimensional code 161a in the mode shown in FIG. 152, for example. A two-dimensional code read display process for displaying the two-dimensional code 222a is performed (step S3401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, the control unit 221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL contained therein, and temporarily stores the URL in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. The two-dimensional code acquisition process that is temporarily stored is executed (step S3402). Next, the control unit 221 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 153), and executes password input display processing for accepting the password (step S3403).

After executing the password input display processing in step S3403, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 cooperates with the server device 240 to perform password authentication processing through the following steps S3404 and S3405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 first monitors the password display field 222c (see FIG. 153) while checking whether or not a password has been input (step S3404), and from the ten-key pad 222b. Process to accept the input of the password of. Here, when the password is input (YES in step S3404), the control unit 221 transmits the input password to the server device 240.

In the server device 240, the password sent from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 is collated with the registered password registered in advance, and it is determined whether the authentication is OK or the authentication NG depending on whether the two match. The server device 240 notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the determination result. As described above, in the present embodiment, only authentication is performed by the server device 240. That is, the server device 240 is configured to return only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

On the other hand, the control unit 221 of the portable wireless communication terminal 220 transmits the input password accepted in step S3404, waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 240, and the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. It is determined whether the password is correct or not (step S3405).

Here, when it is determined that the password is not correct (NO in step S3405), the control unit 221 performs the authentication NG display process of displaying a message indicating that the password is authentication NG on the display operation unit 222 ( (Step S3410), and then the process ends. In the authentication NG display processing, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning" is displayed in the message field 222d.

On the other hand, when the password is determined to be correct (YES in step S3405), the control unit 221 sets the display operation unit 222 to display the setting change/confirmation history information temporarily stored in step S3402. Change/confirmation history display processing is performed (step S3406). In this setting change/confirmation history display processing, the control unit 221 embeds (arranges) the display information in which the setting change/confirmation history information held in step S3402 is embedded according to a preset display format. A process for creating and displaying the setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222 based on this display information (see FIG. 154) is performed.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine 1A of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3.

As shown in FIG. 150, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A, the host control circuit 2100 makes a setting change/confirmation history in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S3302) of FIG. 148. A setting change/confirmation history screen including the information and the two-dimensional code 161a is displayed. As described above, the two-dimensional code 161a displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen includes the setting change/confirmation history information being displayed in the display area of the display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. There is.

When displaying the two-dimensional code 161a in the two-dimensional code display process of step S3302 (see FIG. 148), the host control circuit 2100 displays, for example, “*two-dimensional code on a mobile terminal in the display area of the display device 16A. It may be configured to display a message prompting a shift to the authentication service, such as "Read and access the authentication service."

FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change confirmation procedure of the setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. This set value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of the present embodiment for convenience.

152: is a figure which shows an example of the two-dimensional code display screen in the portable radio|wireless communication terminal 220 of the game system 210 which concerns on the modification 3. FIG. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 displays the two-dimensional code 222a as shown in FIG. 152 on the display operation unit 222 in the two-dimensional code read display processing of S1101.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen in the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. In the password input display processing of step S3403 (see FIG. 149), the portable wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG. 153 on the display operation unit 222.

As shown in FIG. 153, on the password input screen, a numeric keypad 222b having keys of "0" to "9" and "*", "#", and a password display field 222c for displaying a password input by the numeric keypad 222b. Then, a message field 222d is displayed. In the message field 222d, for example, a message prompting the user to enter a password is displayed, such as "*Please enter the password. The setting value will be displayed after the password is entered." In the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, on the password word input screen shown in FIG. 153, the password converted into the hidden character “*” can be displayed in the password display field 222c in which the password has been input by operating the ten keys 222b.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 of the gaming system 210 according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG. 154, in the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g, the setting change/confirmation history information temporarily stored in S1102 is displayed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 119. It is displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 154, in the setting change/confirmation history information, setting values are displayed corresponding to the setting change/confirmation date and time.

In the portable wireless communication terminal 220, the dedicated application installed in advance has the display format described above, the display format of the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. 154, the scrolling of the setting change/confirmation history information, and the batch deletion processing function. Supported. As a result, the control unit 221 performs the setting change/confirmation history display process in S1107 during the setting change/confirmation history processing in FIG. 149, and then executes the decision button displayed on the display operation unit 222 together with the setting change/confirmation history information. A transition is made to a receivable state in which a page update request based on the operation of 222e and the select button 222f can be accepted.

After shifting to the acceptable state, the control unit 221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed (step S3407). When it is determined that the select button 222f has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that the page update operation has been performed (YES in step S3407), and the page update operation is performed. Update processing is executed (step S3408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the page update operation is performed (that is, it is determined that the select button 222f is operated and the last line is reached), page scrolling is continued. A page update process is performed (step S3408).

If the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S3407), that is, if the operation of the select button 222f has been stopped and the enter button 222e has not been pressed, the control unit 222 proceeds to step S3409. If it is determined in this step S3409 that "return" has been determined (YES in step S3071), the control unit 222 executes the hall menu screen display processing (step S3410), and ends the setting change/confirmation history processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that “return” is not determined (NO in step S3409), the control unit 222 returns to step S340.

In the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, the setting change/confirmation history information on the pachinko gaming machine 1A side is converted into a two-dimensional code as so-called raw data and displayed in the display area of the display device 16A (FIG. 148). Processing of step S3301 and step S3302), processing for returning the setting change/confirmation history information to the raw data by photographing the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the display device 16A of the pachinko gaming machine 1A on the portable wireless communication terminal 220 side. (See steps S3401 and S3402 of FIG. 149).

On the other hand, many mobile communication terminals in recent years are equipped with a function of reading and analyzing a two-dimensional code as standard equipment.

Regarding this point, in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, and it is possible to display in a display format equivalent to that of the pachinko gaming machine 1A side by this dedicated application.

In other words, on a mobile communication terminal that does not have the dedicated application installed, even if the setting change/confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data, it must be viewed in the same display format as on the pachinko machine 1A side. However, it is difficult to recognize the setting change/confirmation history information.

Therefore, in this embodiment, by installing and using the dedicated application in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, only authorized persons can see the setting change/confirmation history information with the setting value, which is sufficient confidentiality. Can be secured.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained by the two-dimensional code is taken into the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. However, the above-mentioned data is as shown in FIG. Displayed in. Therefore, if there is no dedicated application having the display format, even if it is read by a general-purpose barcode reader, it is not possible to understand what kind of display the character string obtained by reading the two-dimensional code is. A certain degree of confidentiality can be secured. The application is distributed when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered, and can be acquired only by authorized persons.

In the present embodiment, the authentication of the password is notified from the server device 240 of the authentication result, and it is determined whether the password is correct depending on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 may receive the password from the server device 240, determine whether the entered password matches the password received from the server device 240, and determine whether the entered password is correct or not. , If you want to further secure the confidentiality, after the setting change/confirmation history information is encrypted on the pachinko gaming machine 1A side, a two-dimensional code is generated and displayed, and the dedicated application to be installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is used. A configuration may be added in which a function for decrypting the setting change/confirmation history information corresponding to the above encryption is added.

Next, a setting change/confirmation history information setting value confirmation procedure in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 151.

As shown in FIG. 151, as the first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1A executes the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing. Display the hall menu screen when the user is prompted. As described above, the setting change processing can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is not turned on. The setting confirmation process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. The setting key 328 can be turned on in one direction by turning the setting key switch signal, and turned in the opposite direction (returned to the original position) to turn off the setting key switch signal. It is configured to be able to.

As the second procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A displays the “setting change/confirmation history” by selecting and determining “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 111). ”Is highlighted, and only the date/time data and operation type (corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and browsing) is displayed. A screen (see FIG. 111) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As the third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine 1A is main in a state where "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen (see FIG. 111) of the setting change/confirmation history screen. When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL held in the sub-work RAM 2100a is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change/confirmation history information (FIG. 150). reference).

As the fourth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 photographs the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1A (see FIG. 152). After capturing the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth step, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third step, and confirms the password from the password input screen (see FIG. 153) provided by this dedicated site. Make an input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed by the manufacturer of the gaming system 210 in an instruction manual or the like and registered in association with the gaming system 210, the individual pachinko gaming machine 1A, or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 240 accepts the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, compares it with the registered password, and performs password authentication. Here, when the authentication is OK, the server device 240 notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of that fact.

As a sixth procedure, when the authentication is obtained in the fifth procedure, the portable radio communication terminal 220 displays the setting change/confirmation history information extracted in the fourth procedure in a screen of a predetermined display format (FIG. 154). The contents including the set value are displayed on the display operation unit 222 as a reference). As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm the setting change/confirmation history information together with the set value on the screen displayed on the display operation unit 222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 220.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment controls the display device 16A that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are operation units that receive various operations, and controls related to the game. A main CPU 101, which is a unit, and a host control circuit 2100, which is a display control unit that controls display of the display device 16A, and the control unit can change or confirm a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6). Setting switch 332, and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control section, and the display control section writes data even if the power is off, and receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmission means. Provided with a sub-work RAM 2100a capable of storing and holding the stored information and an RTC 209 for timing the date and time, and the main CPU 101 transmits the setting change or the setting confirmation and the setting value to the host control circuit 2100 by the data transmitting means, When the data received by the data receiving means is the setting change or setting confirmation, the host control circuit 2100 changes the setting or confirms the setting in the sub-work RAM 2100a, and sets and confirms the date and time data from the RTC 209. And a setting display function for displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a in the display area of the display device 16A, and the setting display function displays the setting change or the setting confirmation and date and time data. Then, when the main button 662 which is the operation unit is operated, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code.

With this configuration, since the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data from the sundial time means are stored as the setting change/confirmation history information in the sub-work RAM 2100a, the setting change or the setting confirmation and the date and time data are displayed. Then, when the main button 662 is operated, the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a can be displayed by a two-dimensional code. Therefore, if the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 reads the two-dimensional code and permits the display after password authentication, only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation related to the set value has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment, the host control circuit 2100, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed by the setting display function, the displayed date and time data as the browsing history. The browsing history may be stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a and the browsing history may be displayed in the display area of the display device 16A.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed in the display area of the display device 16A. be able to. Therefore, it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but also to determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1A according to the present embodiment uses the mobile wireless communication based on the information from the predetermined server device 240 when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220. The configuration may be such that the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed on the terminal 220.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, information from a predetermined server device 240, for example, a predetermined password and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is used. The setting change/confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 on condition that the entered password matches. Therefore, since only the authorized person can authenticate with the password known, the cost can be reduced without adding the input means for identifying the authorized person to the pachinko gaming machine 1A side. It should be noted that this password is shown when the pachinko gaming machine 1A is delivered to the hall, and only authorized ones use it when changing settings or confirming settings.

In addition, the gaming system 210 according to the present embodiment includes the above-described pachinko gaming machine 1A and a server device 240 that is connected to the network 230 and manages a site for authentication, and the pachinko gaming machine 1A is a sub-device. The server device 240 further has a generation function for generating the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 2100a and the two-dimensional code of the URL of the site, and the server device 240 uses the password from the portable wireless communication terminal 220 as a preset password. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 has an authentication service machine that performs comparison and authentication and notifies the portable wireless communication terminal 220 of the authentication result. The portable wireless communication terminal 220 has a display operation unit 222 having a display and operation function and a display area of the display device 16A. A camera unit that captures the displayed two-dimensional code, an extraction unit that analyzes the captured two-dimensional code and extracts setting change/confirmation history information and URL, and an input screen that displays a password input screen for entering a password. If the display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit that transmits the input password on the password input screen to the server device 240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 240, and the acquired authentication result is correct, A history information display control unit that displays the setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation unit 222.

With this configuration, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 reads the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko gaming machine 1A, and the mobile wireless communication terminal 220 is authenticated by the server device 240. Can display setting change/confirmation history information. Therefore, since only the person who has the authority to know the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, it is possible not only to judge whether an unnatural operation related to the setting value has been performed but also to make it illegal. You will be able to judge whether it is the opportunity to investigate the action.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, since only the authorized person can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information, it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation regarding the setting value is performed. Alternatively, it is possible to provide the pachinko gaming machine 1A and the gaming system 210 capable of determining whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate an illegal act.

Heretofore, the gaming machine according to each of the embodiments of the present invention has been described, including the effects thereof. However, it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described here and includes various embodiments without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

[10-25. Application example to pachislot]
For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to a pachi-slot. When the invention according to the present embodiment is applied to a pachi-slot, the procedure for executing the setting change processing and the setting confirmation processing is different from that of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the pachi-slot, the setting value can be changed by shifting to the setting changing process on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is OFF. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected or the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is confirmed.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachi-slot confirms that the above-mentioned setting changes were made, the signal generated from the setting switch was input by operating the setting key, and then the start lever was operated. When the signal indicating the above is received, the data indicating that the setting has been changed and the command indicating the current setting value are transmitted to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachi-slot constitutes a control unit that controls the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU, operation type information indicating that the setting has been changed (information indicating the setting change), and the RTC. Then, the date and time data currently measured, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command is received is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a as the setting change confirmation history information. The sub CPU of the pachi-slot constitutes a display control unit that controls display on the display unit. Further, the sub CPU constitutes a receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In the pachi-slot, confirming the set value means operating the setting key (turning to the right) and displaying the current set value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key type switch. .. In this way, the pachi-slot moves to the setting confirmation process on condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is ON, and the set value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The setting switch of the pachi-slot, together with the main CPU, constitutes a setting means that enables the setting value to be changed or confirmed.

In order to display the history of setting value confirmation, the main CPU confirms the setting value when the setting value is confirmed by the above-described operation and the signal generated from the setting switch is input by the operation of the setting key. And the setting confirmation command, which is the current setting value, are transmitted to the sub CPU.

On the other hand, the sub CPU, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed, operation type information (information indicating setting confirmation) indicating confirmation of the setting value, The date and time data currently measured by the RTC, that is, the date and time data when the setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received is stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a functioning as a backup memory as the setting change confirmation history information. The sub-work RAM 2100a can store and retain the written information even in the non-energized state.

Upon receiving the setting change start command or the setting confirmation command, the sub CPU determines that the setting key has changed from OFF to ON. When the sub CPU determines that the setting key has been turned from OFF to ON, the sub CPU performs the hall menu display process of displaying the hall menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device included in the pachi-slot. The hall menu screen displayed on the pachi-slot is "total" instead of "prize ball information" displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 110) displayed on the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as the display of "medal information", the screen is basically the same as the hole menu screen displayed on the display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment.

On the pachi-slot, browse means operating the setting key (rotating to the right) and selecting (highlighting) the “setting change/confirmation history” in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. On condition that the main button is pressed in the state of being displayed, the setting change confirmation history information stored in the sub-work RAM 2100a is displayed, for example, as a setting change/confirmation history screen.

The sub CPU of the pachi-slot executes the same processes as the processes executed by the host control circuit 2100 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, such as hole menu processing, setting change/confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing. can do. When the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is applied to a pachi-slot, the hall menu screen, the setting change/confirmation history screen, the error information history screen, the guide menu screen, and the password request screen described in the embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A screen similar to the screen displayed when the entered password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal, or the like is displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device of the pachi-slot or the mobile wireless communication terminal.

In the pachi-slot, when "bonus winning" is determined by the bonus lottery, any one of "SBB", "BB", and "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by the bonus distribution lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the precursor game. May be.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the “BB precursor flag” is turned on when the precursor game of “SBB” or “BB” is being played. That is, the precursor games of “SBB” and “BB” are managed by the “BB precursor flag”. However, the gaming machine of the present invention may be provided with a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB". In this case, the effect of the aura game corresponding to “SBB” may be different from the effect of the aura game corresponding to “BB”.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the first ART (“SBB”, “BB”, “RB”) and the second ART are finished on condition that they have exhausted the number of stay games, but the first ART The second ART may be configured to end on the condition that a predetermined number of times of navigation (notification of display auxiliary information) has been performed.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the number of stay games of “SBB” in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, “100”, or, like “BB”, the number of games added to the number of stay games in “SBB” may be added. The configuration may be such that addition (addition) is performed.

In addition, in the pachi-slot, the number of games for which the additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be fixed to, for example, “2”. That is, when the effects of the additional addition A, B, and C are determined, the additional addition game number counter may be set to "2". However, the number of games in which the additional additions A, B, and C are produced may be variable. For example, the value to be set in the additional-addition game number counter may be changed according to the type of additional-addition effect (additional addition A, B, C).

Further, in the pachi-slot, the number of stay games of the second ART may be set to a fixed number of games, for example, “50”. Alternatively, a predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, , One set of “50” games) and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of stay games in the second ART may be set to two sets of one set “50” games, that is, a total of “100” games. Further, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided between sets without notifying the stop order and not subtracting the value of the ART game number counter for each game. In addition, an additional game number lottery may be performed for each game in this predetermined period. Then, before the predetermined period ends (when the predetermined period ends when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), the stop order other than the forward push If a stop operation (irregular push) is performed, the predetermined period is forcibly ended, and the value of the ART game number counter is decremented by "1" for each game from the game following the game for which the irregular press is performed. You may.

Further, in the pachi-slot, the rotary accessory unit 122 having the rotary accessory 123 rotated by the drive of the stepping motor is described as an example of the accessory provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the vertical direction, or the front-back direction by driving a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In addition, in the second embodiment of the present invention, the same members as those in the first embodiment or members having the same functions are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[11-1. Game machine configuration]
[11-1-1. Appearance configuration]
The external configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention is the same as the external configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment shown in FIGS.

FIG. 155 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board unit 17 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment is different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 5 in part of the game board configuration. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the configuration and arrangement of the ordinary electric auditors product unit 400 in the first embodiment are different, and the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5) and the special electric auditors product 600 (see FIG. 5). ), a first special winning opening 540a and a first special electric winning accessory 601 and a second special winning opening 540b and a second special electric winning accessory 602 are arranged on the board surface.

The first special winning opening 540a is a portion that can be opened in the big hitting game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. The second big winning opening 540b is a portion that can be opened in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and in a small hitting gaming state that is less advantageous than the big hitting gaming state. A first count switch 541a is arranged at the first special winning opening 540a (see FIG. 158). A second count switch 541b is arranged at the second special winning opening 540b (see FIG. 158). When a game ball wins in either the first big winning opening 540a or the second big winning opening 540b, the winning game ball is detected by the first count switch 541a or the second count switch 541b. When the game balls are detected by the first count switch 541a or the second count switch 541b, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout opening 63 to the lower plate 27). ..

The first special electric accessory 601 includes a shutter 611 that is rotatable in the front-rear direction and a first special winning opening solenoid 620a (see FIG. 158) that drives the shutter 611. The first special electric accessory member 601 is arranged above the outlet 57. The first special electric auditors product 601 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (or easily) into the first special winning opening 540a by driving the shutter 611 by the first special winning opening solenoid 620a. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball into the first big winning opening 540a. The opening drive by the first special electric auditors product 601 (shutter 611) is performed when the big hit game state is entered, based on the result of the big hit determination made when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420. .. The result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 is indicated by the stop display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 73.

The second special electric accessory 602 includes a shutter 612 that is rotatable in the front-rear direction and a second special winning opening solenoid 620b (see FIG. 158) that drives the shutter 612. The second special electric auditors product 602 is arranged on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball with respect to the first special electric auditors product 601. The second special electric auditors product 602 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (or easily) into the second special winning opening 540b by driving the shutter 612 by the second special winning opening solenoid 620b. It is configured so that it can be moved (driven) to a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball into the second special winning opening 540b. The opening drive by the second special electric auditors product 602 (shutter 612) is performed when the big hit game state is entered, based on the result of the big hit determination made when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440. .. The result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 is indicated by the stop display mode of the special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 74. It should be noted that the direction of the first special electric accessory 601 is close to the second special electric accessory 602 so that the ball not picked up by the second special electric accessory 602 can be picked up by the first special electric accessory 601. There may be a passage or a nail to transfer the game ball to.

FIG. 156 is an explanatory view showing a passage route of a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 540b. The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 540b first passes through the second count switch 541b. Head towards the V winning opening 545. At the entrance of the V winning opening 545, a flat plate-shaped shutter 546 that is projectable and retractable with respect to the board surface is arranged. The shutter 546 is driven by the V winning opening solenoid 443 (FIG. 158), and can be switched between a retracted state in which it can pass through the V winning opening 545 and a protruding state in which movement to the V winning opening 545 is restricted. FIG. 156(a) shows the case where the shutter 546 is in the retracted state, and the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 540b enters the V winning opening 545 and passes through the V winning opening switch 442. , Is discharged out of the gaming machine as an out ball. FIG. 156(b) shows the case where the shutter 546 is in a protruding state, and the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 540b comes into contact with the shutter 546 and is guided to another path, and as an out ball. It is discharged outside the gaming machine.

The protrusion drive by the second special electric auditors product 602 (shutter 612) is performed when the small hit game state is entered, based on the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440. Be seen. The result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 is indicated by the stop display mode of the special symbol in the second special symbol display portion 74. Then, when the game ball enters the small hitting game state and enters the second big winning hole 540b, the game ball moves to the big hitting game state when passing through the V winning hole 545, and the first special electric accessory 601 (shutter). The opening drive by 611) is executed.

The first starting opening 420 gives a trigger for a big hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball, and also gives a result of the big hit determination displayed on the display device 16 or a first special symbol display portion 73 described later. To give. A first starting port switch 421 is arranged at the first starting port 420 (see FIG. 158). When the first special symbol display portion 72 displays the big hit mode, the big special game part 601 is opened and the big hit game state is performed.

The second starting opening 440 gives a trigger for a big hit determination on the condition of winning (passing) a game ball, and also causes the result of the big hit determination to be displayed on the display device 16 or a second special symbol display portion 74 described later. To give. When the second special symbol display portion 74 displays the mode of the big hit, it shifts to the big hit game state in which the opening drive of the first special electric auditors product 601 is performed. When the second special symbol display portion 74 displays the mode of the small hit, the second special electric auditors product 602 shifts to the small hit game state in which the opening drive is performed.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 in the second embodiment is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged such that the ordinary electric accessory 460 is located immediately below the passage gate 49. The ordinary electric accessory 460 of the second embodiment transmits the power of the flat plate member 4621 that can project and retract in the front-rear direction, the starting port solenoid 4630 (for example, see FIG. 158), and the starting port solenoid 4630 to the flat plate member 4621. A power transmission mechanism (not shown) is provided. In the ordinary electric accessory 460, when the flat plate member 4621 is driven by the starting opening solenoid 4630, the protruding state in which the game ball can easily pass through the second starting opening 440 shown in FIG. It is configured to be able to transition (drive) between the retracted state in which it is difficult to pass the game ball shown in c). The second starting port 440 is arranged on the left side of the flat plate member 4621 and is open toward the right side. The flat plate member 4621 is inclined downward toward the second starting port 440, and when the game ball rides on the flat plate member 4621 when the flat plate member 4621 is protruding, the game ball is the second starting port 440. Is conveyed toward and wins the second starting opening 440. The drive by the normal electric accessory 460 (flat plate member 4621) is performed a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period when the normal symbol is in a specific stop display mode in the normal symbol display portion 71.

Thus, according to the second embodiment, in the right side area of the game area 21 of the game board unit 17, along the flow-down direction of the right-handed game ball, the passage gate 49, the ordinary electric auditors product 460, the second special electric motor The accessory 602 and the first special electric accessory 601 are arranged in this order.

[11-1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 158.

The control circuit in the second embodiment, instead of the special winning opening solenoid 620 and the count switch 541 in the control circuit of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 9, a first winning opening solenoid 620a and a second winning opening solenoid 620b, The first count switch 541a and the second count switch 541b are connected to the main control circuit 100, and further the V winning opening switch 442 and the V winning opening solenoid 443 are connected. Other configurations are similar to those of the control circuit of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 9, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The first special winning opening solenoid 620a drives the shutter 611 of the first special electric accessory 501 based on the command from the main control circuit 100, and the second special winning opening solenoid 620b receives the command from the main control circuit 100. Based on this, the shutter 612 of the second special electric accessory 502 is driven.

The first count switch 541a detects a game ball that has entered the first special winning opening 540a, and the second count switch 541b detects a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 540b, and is the main control circuit. A detection signal is output to 100. The main control circuit 100 counts the number of game balls entering the first big winning opening 540a and the second big winning opening 540b based on the signals from the first count switch 541a and the second count switch 541b.

The V winning opening solenoid 443 drives the shutter 546 based on a command from the main control circuit 100. The V winning opening switch 442 detects a game ball that has entered the V winning opening 545 and detects the main control circuit. A detection signal is output to 100. In the second embodiment, the main control circuit 100 drives the V winning opening solenoid 443 at the start of the small hit game to cause the shutter 546 to project, and the shutter 546 is received when the detection signal from the V winning opening switch 442 is received. Pull in.

[11-2. Function flow]
Next, a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment does not have the function of shifting to the probability variation in the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. Further, in the second embodiment, the "big hit determination" shown in FIG. 20 also includes the "small hit determination".

Specifically, when the specific stop display mode in the second special symbol display portion 74 is a small hit, it shifts to a small hit game state. Then, in the small hitting game state, the second big winning opening 540b shifts from the closed state to the open state, and a predetermined number of game balls are won, or a game in which the game ball shifts to the closed state after a predetermined time elapses 1 Only done once. That is, in the small hitting game state, the round game is not played like in the big hitting game state.

[11-3. Basic specifications of pachinko machines]
Next, basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described.

[11-3-1. Limiter count]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment, the above [9-1. The limiter count described in "Expansion example 1" is set, and in the pachinko gaming machine 1, "3" is set as the limiter count. Specifically, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment, when the first big hit is included, the big hit that shifts to the time saving game state after the big hit game state is reached 4 times in a row is reached the limiter number and the limiter number is reached. The big hit at the time (the fourth big hit) is controlled so as not to shift to the time saving game state after the big hit game ends. In addition, "4 times in succession" means that the big hit to shift to the time saving game state is executed four times in succession by alternately repeating the big hitting game state and the time saving game state. In the case of a big hit game when the number of limiters reaches, it is controlled so as not to shift to the time saving game state after the big hit game state ends, but this is just a count of a counter that manages whether or not the limiter number is reached. It depends on the number of times. That is, if the limiter number of times is not reached, if you win the big hit that shifts to the time saving game state after the big hit game state (the random number extracted by the special symbol lottery becomes the big hit judgment, and the special symbol that becomes the time saving game state is selected If it is a random number that is generated), the count number of the counter that manages whether or not the limiter number is reached is updated. Then, as a result of the judgment that the number of limiters has been reached, it is controlled so as not to shift to the time saving game state after the big hit game state ends. In addition, in the second embodiment, after the big hit game state, the hour-shortening time shifts to the hour-shortening game state of 1 or 100 times, but tentatively before reaching the limiter number of times (moving to the hour-shortening gaming state after the big-hit gaming state ends). If the big hit that won't shift to the time-saving game state after the big hit game state is won before the big hit is won 4 times in a row), the number of times to manage whether or not the limiter number is reached is reset at that time. (Updated to 0 or the initial value).

[11-3-2. Big hit, small hit probability]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment, when the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420, it extracts the random number for the jackpot determination of the first special symbol from the jackpot determination counter (hereinafter, The first special symbol lottery, or special figure 1 lottery), referring to the first special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown) stored in the main RAM 103, the big hit determination about the extracted big hit determination random numbers I do.

Further, the main CPU 101, when detecting the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440, and extracts the random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol from the jackpot determination counter (hereinafter, the second special symbol lottery, or special symbols 2 lottery), referring to the first special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown) stored in the main RAM 103, the big hit determination for the extracted big hit determination random numbers is performed.

In the second embodiment, the probability of being a big hit judgment in the first special symbol lottery is about 1/319.69, and the probability of being a small hit judgment is 0. The probability of being a big hit judgment in the second special symbol lottery is about 1/319.69, and the probability of being a small hit judgment is 1/3.75. That is, since there is a possibility of a small hit, the probability of losing the second special symbol lottery is lower than that of the first special symbol lottery.

[11-3-3. Number of prize balls]
In the second embodiment, the number of prize balls due to winning in the first major winning opening 540a is “10”, the number of prize balls due to winning in the second major winning opening 540b is “3”, and winning of the first starting opening 420 is achieved. The number of prize balls by "4", the number of prize balls by winning the second starting opening 440 is "1", the number of prize balls by winning the general winning hole 53 is "5", and the winning balls by general winning holes 54, 55 The number of prize balls due to winning is “3”, and the number of prize balls due to winning through the general winning opening 56 is “2”.

[11-3-4. Big hits, small hits game counts]
In the second embodiment, the number of counts (maximum number of balls entered) in the round game in the big hit game state is 9, and the number of counts (maximum number of balls entered) in the small hit game state is 10. In other words, according to the second embodiment, in the big hit game state, the first big winning opening 540a is a prize, so there are 90 award balls to be paid back per round, and in the small hit game state, the second big prize. There are 30 prize balls to be paid back because the prize is paid to the mouth 540b.

[11-3-5. Jackpot distribution]
In the case of jackpot winning by special drawing 1 lottery (hereinafter referred to as special drawing 1 jackpot), jackpot winning by special drawing 2 lottery (hereinafter referred to as special drawing 2 jackpot), as the number of rounds according to the jackpot mode of the special symbol, Either “10 times” or “6 times” is selected. The probability that the number of rounds is "10 times" is 0.5%, and the probability that the number of rounds is "6 times" is 99.5%. In addition, when entering the V winning a prize mouth 545 in the small hitting game state and shifting to the big hitting game state, one of "10 times" and "6 times" as the number of rounds depending on the small hitting mode of the second special symbol. Is selected. The probability that the number of rounds is "10 times" is 0.5%, and the probability that the number of rounds is "6 times" is 99.5%. The special figure 2 big hit is a big hit that does not go through the small hit.

[11-3-6. Shortening the number of times]
In case of special figure 1 big hit and special figure 2 big hit, after the big hit game state ends, it moves to the time saving game state. At this time, either "100 times" or "1 time" is selected as the number of time saving depending on the big hit mode of the special symbol. In the special figure 1 big hit, the probability that the number of working hours is 100 times is 50%, and the probability that the number of working hours is 1 is 50%. More specifically, there are 6R big hit and 10R big hit as special figure 1 big hit, 50% big hit given once per hour and 6R big hit, 49.5% big hit per 100 times shortened per 6R big hit, 10R big hit The jackpot that is given 100 times per hour is 0.5%.

The probability that the number of shortened working hours will be "100 times" in the special figure 2 big hit is 100%. In addition, in the small hitting game state, when entering the V winning a prize mouth 545, it moves to the big hitting game state, after the big hitting game state ends, it moves to the time saving game state, the time saving number “100 times” is given. In addition, in the small hit game state, if the player does not enter the V winning opening 545, the game state after the end of the small hit game state is maintained as the game state before the end of the small hit game state. That is, if the gaming state before the end of the small hitting gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state after the end of the small hitting gaming state becomes the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the ending of the small hitting gaming state is the time saving gaming state. , The gaming state after the small hitting gaming state ends is a time saving gaming state. In this case, the number of times saved will also be the number of times saved before the end of the small hitting game state. In the following description, entering the V winning opening 545 may be simply referred to as V winning.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the special figure 2 lottery is elected to shift to the jackpot gaming state (including the jackpot winning and jackpots via V winning), the jackpot gaming state ends. After that, it will be in a time-saving game state in which 100 hour-hours are always given, but it is not limited to this, and the small-hit game is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, and 100 hours-hour is saved after the big-hit game state through the V winning. When the big hit game state is entered without passing the small hit prize and the V prize in the special drawing 2 lottery, one time reduction may be given after the big hit game state ends. Further, 10% of the 6R jackpot in at least one of the special drawing 2 lottery and the special drawing 1 lottery may be a big jackpot that does not shift to the time saving game state. In the second embodiment, 0.5% is a 10R jackpot, so the remaining 89.5% of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2 is a 6R jackpot that shifts to shorter working hours. In addition, when you win the big hit in the special figure 1 lottery during the time saving game state, you may control so as to always shift to the time saving game state of 100 time saving, or you may win the big hit that does not necessarily shift to the time saving game state. May be controlled as follows. In addition, it is also possible to express not to shift to the time saving game state as "the time saving number is 0 times".

In addition, the big hit game state is capable of performing a round game, while the small hit game state basically does not have a round game. In the small hitting game state, it is possible to open and close the special winning opening (second special winning opening 540b) in which the accessory continuous operation device does not operate. Here, after the big hit game state is over, it is possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a time saving game state), but basically after the end of the small hit game state, it is changed to the small hit game state. The game state is not shifted to a more advantageous game state than before the shift.

However, during the small hitting game state, the special winning opening (the second winning opening 540b) provided with the specific area (V winning opening 545) is opened, and the game ball passes through the specific area (V winning opening 545). When the condition device operates and the accessory continuous operation device operates, after the end of the small hitting game state, the game shifts to the big hitting game state which is a game state advantageous to the player. At this time, the small hit game state may be counted in the number of rounds.

Further, according to the second embodiment, there is no difference in round allocation between the big hit game state triggered by the special figure 2 lottery and the big hit game state triggered by the special figure 1, but triggered by the special figure 2 lottery. The round allocation in the jackpot gaming state may be easier to win the jackpot with a larger number of rounds than the round allocation in the jackpot gaming state triggered by the special figure 1 lottery. Alternatively, the jackpot triggered by the special figure 2 lottery may be larger than the jackpot triggered by the special figure 1 lottery in the size of the number of times saved and shortened after the jackpot gaming state is finished. Further, when the special figure 2 lottery or the special figure 1 lottery is used as a trigger during the time saving game state and the big hit game state is entered, the number of time saving times executed after the big hit game state is 100 times as long as the limiter is not reached. Although desirable, even during the time saving game state, for example, a number less than 100 times may be given. Here, when the special figure 2 lottery or the special figure 1 lottery is used as a trigger during the normal game state to shift to the big hit game state, one time reduction is given, but similarly, as a number less than 100 times, 1 Time may be shortened. Furthermore, even when the limiter count has not been reached, it is possible to set a time reduction of 0 times.

[11-5. Flow of games]
FIG. 159 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of a game using the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment of the present invention.

In many cases, at the beginning of the game, the game is started from the normal game state. In the normal game state, the player is left-handed to advance the game aiming for winning at the first starting opening 420. Special Figure 1 lottery is carried out with the first start opening 420 winning as a trigger, and if the special figure 1 lottery is won, the jackpot game state is entered. Then, after the big hit game state is over, the game shifts to the time saving game state once or 100 times. In the time saving game state, the player makes a right hit and advances the game with the aim of passing the game ball to the passage gate 49. In the time saving game state, since the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 becomes a high probability state, the ordinary electric auditors product 460 becomes easy to operate.

In the case where the number of times saved is “1 time”, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol for the first time stops in a losing manner, the time saving game state ends and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery shifts to a low probability state. At this time, if there is a suspension of fluctuations in Toku-zu 2 then the mode returns to the pullback mode. Toku-zu 2 If there is no suspension of fluctuation, shift to normal mode. Here, if there is a suspension of the special figure 2 fluctuation, it shifts to the time saving game state and the first fluctuation becomes the special figure 2 fluctuation. The fluctuation time of the first fluctuation of the special figure 2 is set to be longer than the four fluctuations of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1. When the special figure 2 fluctuation which is suspended changes to the big hit game state when it stops in the big hit mode, when it stops in the small hit mode it stops in the small hit mode and moves to the small hit game state, the small hit game state When the V prize is won, the game goes to the big hit game state (hereinafter, this big hit game state may be referred to as the V big hit game state). Then, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the time is shortened to the "100 times" time saving game state. In addition, in the second embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol is not counted in the number of times saved. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery is won, and the first win is made. When the time saving "1 time" is given after the big hit game state is finished, the special figure 1 change is suspended, and due to the suspension, the special figure 1 change, Even if the game is stopped, the time saving game state does not end.

According to the above description, in the case where the number of time saving is “1 time”, when the fluctuation of the second special symbol stops in a losing manner, the time saving game state ends and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery is a low probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special winning prize is selected in the special drawing 2 lottery, and the special winning opening (the second special winning opening 540b) is opened by the small hit, and is specified. When the ball does not win the area (V winning opening 545), the time saving game state may end after the small hitting game state ends. Also, in addition to the variation according to the special figure 2, when the end condition of the time saving game state is the variation number according to the special figure 2 is once, the variation according to the special figure 1 is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) It is also possible to control so that the number of winnings of small wins ends a predetermined number of times (for example, once).

In the case where the number of time saving is "100 times", when the fluctuation of the second special symbol at the 100th time stops in a losing manner, the time saving game state ends, and the winning probability of the ordinary symbol lottery shifts to a low probability state. At this time, if the special map 2 is on hold, the process returns to the pullback mode (final battle, which will be described later). When there is no hold of special figure 2, it shifts to the normal game state. If the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped in the big hit mode before the time saving number "100 times" is exhausted, or it is stopped in the small hit mode and shifts to the small hit game state, and the V prize is won in the small hit game state. In this case, the V big hit game state is entered. Then, after the V big hit game state is finished, the time is shortened to the "100 times" time saving game state.

The withdrawal mode shifts when there is a suspension of special map 2 after the end of the time saving game state. Here, the pullback mode is executed in a normal game state (a special symbol lottery, a game state in which the winning probabilities of the ordinary symbol lottery are both low probabilities). In the pull-back mode, when the variation of the second special symbol stops in the big hit mode, or it shifts to the small hit mode by stopping in the small hit mode, and shifts to the V big hit game state when V is won in the small hit game state. To do. Then, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, the time is shortened to the "100 times" time saving game state.

When the number of consecutive big hits reaches the limiter number, in other words, the big hit game state and the time saving game state are alternately switched from the first big hit, and the number of times the big hit game state is four times including the first hit. When it becomes, it shifts to the normal game state after the fourth big hit game state ends. When shifting to the normal game state, the limiter count is reset. When there is a suspension of the special figure 2 fluctuation at the time of shifting to the normal game state, the pullback mode is started. When there is no suspension of special figure 2 fluctuation, it returns to the normal game state.

For this reason, in the second embodiment, when the number of shortening times is 100 times in the first win, or even when the number of shortening times is one, the transition to the V big hit game state is triggered by the pending special figure 2 fluctuation. Then, when 100 times are saved, the chances of winning the limiter number of times are high. Furthermore, even if a big hit corresponding to the number of limiters is obtained, if the special figure 2 is held, the mode returns to the pullback mode. When the mode is changed to the pullback mode, the limiter count is reset to 4 times. Then, if the special figure 2 big hit or small hit in the pullback mode, or a big hit due to a V winning, the chances of winning 100 time saving times and further reaching the limiter number of times are high.

As described above, in the second embodiment, a gaming machine that can provide a high degree of interest that there is a possibility that a big hit for the number of limiters can be obtained and then a big hit for the number of limiters can be obtained. be able to.

[11-6. Outline of drawing control method and audio playback control method]
Also in the second embodiment, [11-4. Outline of Drawing Control Method], [6. The outline of the audio reproduction control method] is executed in the first embodiment.

[11-7. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described.

Also in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main CPU 101 executes the same processing as the processing in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 30 to 51 or a partially modified processing. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in particular, the switch input detection processing shown in FIG. 41, the special symbol display time management processing shown in FIG. 47, and the big hit end interval processing shown in FIG. 49 are partially changed.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. Since the processing of steps S61 to S64 is the same as the switch input detection processing in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 41, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When the process of step S64 ends, the process moves to step S65.
In step S65, the main CPU 101 performs a V winning opening passage detection process. In the V winning opening passage detection process, the V winning flag is set based on the detection of passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 545 (see, eg, FIG. 158) detected by the V winning opening switch 442 (see, eg, 158). It is stored in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process in the second embodiment is obtained by adding the processes of steps S14201 to S14206 to the special symbol display time management process in the first embodiment shown in FIG.

About step S131-step S139, it is as 1st Embodiment shown in FIG.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is not the “big hit” (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S14201.

In step S14201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a “small hit”. When it is determined that the special symbol game is “small hit” (YES in step S14201), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S14202. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not the “small hit” (NO in step S14201), the main CPU 101 shifts the processing to step S140.

In step S14202, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this processing ends, the main CPU 101 moves to the processing of step S14203.

In step S14203, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a small hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the second special symbol in the waiting time timer (step S14204).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S14205). As a result, the small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a small hit LED pattern flag in the main RAM 103 (step S14206). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving count subtraction process. This time reduction processing is as described with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (step S141). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the big hit end interval processing by the main CPU 101.

162, the processing of steps S161 and S162 is the same as the processing in the first embodiment shown in FIG.
When the main CPU 101 determines in step S162 that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S16201.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step 16201). When it is determined that the special symbol game is “big hit” (YES in step S16201), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S163. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not the “big hit” (NO in step S16201), the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing in step S17701.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag. The special winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by an LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not to open and close the first special winning opening 540a a predetermined number of times even during one round. It is a flag for indicating. When the first special winning opening 540a is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol big hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the big hit flag (step S16401), and sets the control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game ending process (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a big hit (time saving big hit) which shifts to the time saving game state after the big hit game is finished (step S176). When it is a short time jackpot (YES in step S176), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S171. When it is not the short-time jackpot (NO in step S176), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S172.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of setting a prescribed number of hour-shortening times in the hour-hour reduction counter (step S172).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a fluctuation pattern table setting process (step S173). The process of step S173 is the same as the process in the first embodiment shown in FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

In step S17701, the main CPU 101 clears the small hit display LED pattern flag, and in step S17702, the main CPU 101 clears the small hit flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area. Here, the specific area refers to the V winning opening 545, and specifically, it is determined whether or not the specific area is passed by turning the V winning flag on and off. If it is determined that the game ball has passed the specific area, the process proceeds to step S17704, and if it is not determined that the game ball has passed the specific region, the process proceeds to step S175.

In step S17704, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the V winning flag and setting a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval process in the control state flag (step S17704).

In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction processing (step S175). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating a special symbol game ending process in the control state flag (step S178). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in the variation pattern determination process of step S88 in the starting mouth winning detection process shown in FIG. 42, the main CPU 101, the first and second after the transition from the time saving game state to the normal game state. 2 Switch the fluctuation pattern determination table to be referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. This variation pattern determination table, if the normal gaming state is started after the jackpot gaming state is ended, such as when the game state is shifted to the normal gaming state after the time saving game state is finished or the limiter count is reached, the provisional figure 2 When there are four holdings, the fluctuation times of the first and second fluctuations of special figure 2 are set to be longer than the fluctuation times of the third and fourth fluctuations of special figure 2. .. As a result, it becomes possible to secure a time for explaining the game in the pullback mode.

[11-8. Processing by sub-control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the sub CPU 201 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described.

Also in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the same processing as the processing in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 52 to 57. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, in particular, processing is added to the sub lottery processing according to the first embodiment shown in step S243 of FIG.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing a sub lottery process by the sub CPU 201.
As shown in FIG. 163, in step S5000, the sub CPU 201 performs a hold information storage process of storing the data indicated by the start winning command in the effect start storage area. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of storing the data indicated by the start winning command in the effect start storage area. In the present embodiment, the production start storage area is from the production start storage area (0) to the production start storage area (4). The analyzed start winning command data is sequentially stored in the effect starting storage area (0) to the effect starting storage area (4). In the following description, the data stored in the effect starting storage area (1) to the effect starting storage area (4) will be referred to as holding information.

The data of the variation pattern is included in the data of the start winning command, and the sub CPU 201 performs derivation display based on the data of the variation pattern stored in the production start storage area (0), and the production start storage. Based on the data of the variation patterns stored in the area (1) to the effect starting storage area (4), it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the hold symbol corresponding to the hold information. Here, the data of the variation pattern may not be included in the data of the start winning command. In this case, an “indeterminate value” indicating that the fluctuation pattern is not fixed is stored.

The sub CPU 201 reads out the hold information stored in the effect starting storage area (1) to the effect starting storage area (4), so that the so-called "pre-reading effect" is possible. Further, the effect starting storage area (0) to the effect starting storage area (4) are the first effect starting storage area (0) to the first effect starting storage area (0) in which data of a start winning command based on the first start mouth winning is stored. From the production start storage area (4) and the second production start storage area (0) to the second production start storage area (4) in which the data of the start winning command based on the second start mouth winning is stored. Become. In addition, for convenience of the following description, the first effect starting storage areas (0) to (4) may be referred to as special figure 1 suspension (0) to (4). Similarly, the second effect starting storage areas (0) to (4) may be referred to as special figure 2 suspension (0) to (4).

Next, the look-ahead rule applied to the second embodiment will be described.
The pre-reading lottery is performed for the main variation pattern and the big hit determination which are determined based on the special symbol lottery, and determines whether or not the pre-reading is performed. However, in the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 prefetch lottery during the big hit and 5G after the big hit when the fluctuation of the special map 2 is suspended in the normal game state, when the special figure 2 is changing in the normal game state. Do not do. Further, when the special figure 2 is won during the prefetch in the normal game state, the sub CPU 201 clears all the effects when the change of the special figure 2 is started in the next change. Also, at the start of the big hit game, if there is prefetch information in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 hold (1) to (4), they are all deleted. Even when the power is turned on and off, if there is prefetch information in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 reservations (1) to (4), they are all erased.

At the time of winning the special figure 1, the prefetch lottery is not executed if any of the above conditions for not performing the prefetch lottery is met. When the conditions for not performing the prefetch lottery described above are not satisfied, the sub CPU 201 performs the prefetch lottery.

When the pre-reading lottery is won, the fact that the pre-reading is reserved is stored as reservation information in the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the special figure 1 winning. When the pre-reading lottery is not won, the fact that pre-reading is not performed is stored as reservation information in the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the special figure 1 winning. If the prefetch lottery is not performed, the fact that the prefetch is not reserved is stored.

FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the prefetching process. In FIG. 166, the special figure 1 hold that stores the reservation of the prefetch is “preread”, and the special figure 1 hold that does not store the preread is “preread”. "No pre-reading", and the special figure 1 reservation in which the fact that the pre-reading is reserved is not stored is described as "no reservation".

For example, as shown in FIG. 166(1), the special map 1 hold (1) and (2) are “no reservation”, and the special map 1 hold (3) pre-reading lottery triggered by the special map 1 winning is performed. When "preread" is selected, the special figure 1 hold (3) is set to "preread" and the special figure 1 hold (1) and (2) are set to "preread". As a result, it is possible to perform an effect having a series of scenarios in the variation of the special figure 1 suspension (1) to (3).

FIG. 166(2) shows a case where there is "prefetch" or "no prefetch" in the special figure 1 reservation. For example, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-1), when the special map 1 hold (1) is “prefetch” and the special map 1 hold (2) and (3) are “no reservation”, Figure 1 If you win "Pre-reading" in the pre-reading lottery triggered by a prize, the special figure 1 hold (4) is set to "pre-read" and the special figure 1 hold (2) and (3) are set to "pre-read". To do. Toku-zu 1 hold (1) is "look ahead" and does not change. In this case, after the look-ahead effect is performed in the change of the special figure 1 hold (1), a new look-ahead effect can be performed in the change of the special figure 1 hold (2) and (3). In other words, when the prefetching effect occurs during the prefetching, only the part of the part that is not digested is used.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-2), the special figure 1 hold (1) and (2) are “prefetch”, and the special figure 1 hold (3) is “no reservation”, When "Pre-reading" is won in the pre-reading lottery triggered by the special figure 1 winning, the special figure 1 holding (4) is set to "pre-reading" and the special drawing 1 holding (3) is set to "pre-reading". Toku-zu 1 hold (1) and (2) are "look ahead" and do not change.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-3), the special figure 1 hold (1) is “prefetch”, and the special figure 1 hold (2) is “no reservation”, and the special figure 1 prize is won. When “No pre-reading” is won in the pre-reading lottery triggered by, the special figure 1 hold (2) and the special figure 1 hold (3) are set to “no pre-read”.

In addition, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-4), the special figure 1 hold (1) is “no prefetch”, and the special figure 1 hold (2) and (3) are “no reservation”. , If you win "Pre-reading" in the pre-reading lottery triggered by the special figure 1 winning, the special figure 1 hold (4) is set to "pre-read" and the special figure 1 hold (2), (3) is "pre-read" ". Toku-zu 1 hold (1) does not change with "no pre-reading".

In step S5021 (see FIG. 165) described later, when the pre-reading process is triggered by the special figure 1 winning, the sub CPU 201 is associated with the main variation pattern if the main variation pattern is stored. The stored information is stored as pending information. When the look-ahead process is performed with the special figure 1 winning as a trigger, if the main variation pattern is not stored, an “indeterminate value” indicating that the variation pattern is not determined is stored as the hold information.

Further, when there is an “indeterminate value” in the suspension of special figure 1 suspensions (1) to (4), the sub CPU 201 makes a read-ahead reservation for a variation after the variation of the “indeterminate value”. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-5), the special figure 1 hold (1) is “undefined value” and the special figure 1 hold (2) and (3) are “no reservation”. In a certain state, when "prefetch" is won in the prefetch lottery triggered by the special map 1 winning, the special map 1 hold (4) is set to "prefetch" and the special map 1 hold (2), (3) Is referred to as "look ahead". Toku-zu 1 hold (1) is "undefined value" and does not change.

In addition, when the specific variation pattern is stored as the suspension information in the special figure 1 suspensions (1) to (4), the sub CPU 201 detects the variation after the variation of the special figure 1 in which the specific variation pattern is stored. Make a read-ahead reservation. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 166 (2-6), the special figure 1 hold (1) is “no reservation”, the special figure 1 hold (2) is “pseudo-gase”, and the special figure 1 hold (3). ) Is “no reservation”, and when “pre-reading” is won in the pre-reading lottery triggered by the special map 1 winning, the special-drawing 1 hold (4) is set to “pre-reading” and the special-drawing 1 hold Let (3) be "look ahead". Special Figure 1 Hold (1) does not change with "no reservation".

Note that winning in the pre-reading lottery means that in addition to winning in the lottery in which actual pre-reading such as “pre-reading” or “pre-reading” in FIG. 166, actual pre-reading such as “no pre-reading” or “indefinite value” is performed. It may also include winning a lottery that does not perform. That is, winning in the prefetch lottery may include winning information related to the prefetch lottery in some form, but it is also possible to call the prefetch lottery winning only when the lottery that actually performs the prefetch is won.

Returning to FIG. 163, when the process of step S5000 is completed, a normal game state effect determination process (step S5001) for determining a normal game state effect mode, and a jackpot game condition effect determination process for determining a jackpot game state effect mode. (Step S5002), the small hitting game state effect determining process (step S5003) for determining the effect mode of the small hitting game state, and the time saving game effect effecting determining process (step S5004) for determining the effect mode of the time saving game state are executed. , This subroutine ends. The processing of steps S5001 to S5004 will be described later.

[Normal game state effect determination process]
FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the normal game state effect determination processing of step S5001 shown in FIG. 163.

As shown in FIG. 164, in step S5011, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not it is in the normal gaming state. If it is determined that the game is in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S5012. When it is not determined that the game is in the normal gaming state, this subroutine is finished.

In step S5012, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the second special symbol is held. If it is determined that there is a hold, the process moves to step S5014. If it is not determined that there is a hold, the process moves to step S5013.

In step S5013, the sub CPU 201 performs normal effect determination processing for determining effects in the normal mode. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

In step S5014, the sub CPU 201 performs a final decisive battle effect determination process. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for determining the final battle effect that is executed during the pullback mode. The details of this process will be described after explaining the time saving game state effect determination process (step S5004 in FIG. 163) described later with reference to FIG. 172. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Normal effect determination process]
FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the normal effect determination process of step S5013 shown in FIG.

In step S5021, the sub CPU 201 performs prefetch lottery. In this process, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the main fluctuation pattern, the big hit information, and the like, which are stored in the special figure 1 hold and transmitted from the main control circuit 100, before the fluctuation starts and determine various effect contents. Draw lots. The effect based on the prefetch lottery may be referred to as the prefetch effect. As the pre-reading lottery, a pre-reading type lottery for determining the type of effect, and a pre-reading rank lottery for determining the strength of the effect content are performed.

In the prefetch type lottery, one or more are selected from a plurality of effect systems classified by type. The pre-reading type includes SB pre-reading, pending change type, variation start symbol notice, chance item type, and the like. The scenario of the prefetching effect is determined by determining the effect system from among them by the prefetching type lottery.

SB pre-reading is a display in which multiple skulls are displayed, and one or several skulls are destroyed for each variation of the production identification pattern, and finally all the skulls are destroyed. Is to develop. The hold change type changes the display mode of the hold. The fluctuation start symbol notice changes the display mode of the effect identification symbol when the fluctuation starts. The chance item type is an effect in which the production identification pattern is stopped and displayed in the display mode of “chance item”.

[Look-ahead rank lottery]
The prefetch rank lottery is performed when the prefetch type lottery is won and determines the strength of the effect pattern. This lottery makes it possible to control the strength of the notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 166(1), when the pre-reading type lottery is performed when the holding information is stored in the special-reading 1 hold (3), and when the pre-reading rank lottery is won at a strong level, the special-drawing 1 hold ( Before the change of 3) starts, the scenario of raising the expectation of the player is announced in the change of (1) and (2) of the special figure 1 hold, and it is hot from the start of the change of the special figure 1 hold (3). It is possible to create a beautiful flow of announcements such as issuing an announcement. Further, in the case of performing the pseudo continuous effect, it becomes possible to create a hot announcement flow in which hot announcements are issued as the pseudo 1 and pseudo 2 proceed. Here, the pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the variation of the effect identification symbol and the temporary stop are repeated a predetermined number of times to stop in the reach mode or the final stop mode. Also, in SB prefetching, several skulls are destroyed in the changes of Toku-zu 1 hold (1) and (2), and pseudo-link is performed in the changes of Toku-zu 1 hold (3), and every time the temporary stop is made, It becomes possible to create a flow such as destroying.

In the second embodiment, "normal reach" is provided as an effect that is executed according to a change in the first effect identification symbol 5021 or the second effect identification symbol 5022. The normal reach is, for example, a simple effect of stopping and displaying the same number of right symbols and left symbols and finally stopping the central symbol. Further, a “super reach” may be provided, which is executed when the variation pattern has a higher selection rate when the big hit is hit than the “normal reach” and the expectation of the big hit is high. At this time, the "super reach" is preferably a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first effect identification symbol 5021 or the second effect identification symbol 5022 is longer than that of the "normal reach". Here, the degree of expectation is a concept including the degree of expectation for a big hit game state rush, a probability variation game state rush, and a time saving game state rush. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit (reliability, etc.) is the degree of expectation that a big hit occurs when each reach variation pattern is selected (ratio of big hits). If the variation is 100 times and the big hit is 70 times, the expectation degree for the big hit of the reach variation pattern is 70% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 70%). In addition, the expectation for the probability variation game state rush or the time saving game state rush is a probability variation game state (the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is high probability after the end of the big hit game state, etc. Probability or low probability state) and time saving game state (so-called Den Chu support state is a high probability that the winning probability of ordinary symbol lottery is a high probability state, mainly the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is a low probability state but in a high probability state , Which may be present), or a composite of various expectations.

In addition, the above-mentioned "strength of production pattern" and "strength of notice" are measures indicating the high degree of expectation and the flashiness of production, and when the production pattern is strong, production with high expectation is executed. There is a strong tendency to be played, and as a result, the production is a production that tends to improve the interest of the player in the game, for example, a more flashy production.

Further, the above-mentioned "hot notice" indicates a notice with high expectation for the above-mentioned various game results, and in general, the player's interest in the game is improved and the player tends to have an uplifting feeling. ..

Further, the above-mentioned "preliminary flow" will be described. The notice is executed by prefetching the information stored in the special figure 1 hold (1) to the special figure 1 hold (4) or the information stored in the special figure 2 hold (1) to the special figure 2 hold (4) before the change. The production identification symbol changes in order to notify the result of whether or not the big hit determination value stored in the special effect 1 hold (0) or the special figure 2 hold (0) is a big hit. Hereinafter, this variation may be referred to as the variation), and a notice effect executed during the variation may be included. Here, even when various types of notices are combined, or even when the notices are individually executed, the execution order and the execution timing of a series of effects may be collectively expressed as a “preliminary notice flow”. By estimating the expectation when various kinds of effects are combined from this series of advance notices, the player can provide a game play that infers the expectation of the effect executed during a change or the like.
When the processing of step S5021 is completed, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S5022.

In step S5022, the sub CPU 201 performs the sub-variation pattern lottery at the start of the variation based on the special figure 1 hold (0). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub variation pattern lottery at the time of starting the variation of the production identification symbol. By this sub-variation pattern lottery, a sub-variation pattern that defines an effect pattern developed on the display device 16 or the like is determined corresponding to the main variation pattern. When pre-reading is in progress, a sub-variation pattern is set using a table corresponding to the pre-reading rank lottery result.

Here, a table used for determining the main variation pattern in the second embodiment will be described.
FIG. 167 is an example of a table referred to for determining the main variation pattern used in the case of a big hit in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167, the random number ranges are assigned to a plurality of variation patterns, which are divided into 10 round big hits in the special figure 1 lottery and 6 round big hits in the special figure 1 lottery. In the example of FIG. 167, [fixed value] per pseudo-3 is the variation pattern that is most easily selected.

Further, according to the table shown in FIG. 167, for example, there are two types of variation patterns prepared for each legend stage: one per legend stage [undefined large hit B] and one per legend stage [fixed value]. .. The selection ratio for the 10R special figure 1 big hit is different from the selection ratio for the 10R special figure 1 big hit, and the fixed ratio for the legend stage [fixed value] is 10R special figure 1 big hit. And the selection ratio in 6R special figure 1 big hit are the same.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in the table that is referred to for determining the main fluctuation pattern, two versions, that is, a ratio identical version and an indefinite version are prepared for one fluctuation pattern. There is something.

As a result, in the main control circuit 100, when the hit of “indefinite large hit B” is selected as the main fluctuation pattern, the main fluctuation pattern cannot be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, but the hit of “fixed value” is selected. In this case, the main fluctuation pattern can be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

That is, for example, if only the [unspecified big hit B] is provided and the probability of hitting the legend stage is changed according to the big hit pattern, pre-reading cannot be performed at the time of hitting the legend stage. Here, in the second embodiment, the ratio of the [fixed value] is set to be large, and the execution ratio (ratio of random numbers) per legend stage according to the big hit symbol is changed by [indefinite big hit B]. Even if it is per stage, when [fixed value] is selected, the prefetch effect is controlled so that it can be executed. On the other hand, the execution ratio (ratio of random numbers) of [unspecified big hit B] is reduced as much as possible. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the probability that the indefinite big hit B is selected and prefetching cannot be performed. Therefore, it is possible to achieve an effect that the look-ahead effect is controlled to be executable as a variation of the effect while maintaining the balance of the effect according to the design (or type) of the big hit mode.

In addition, when the variation pattern of "indefinite big hit B" is selected as the main variation pattern, the variation pattern of "fixed value" may be controlled to be transmitted.

When developing the main variation pattern as a sub variation pattern, the sub CPU 201 sets a large frame according to the information from the main control circuit 100, for example, an effect for an indefinite big hit A, an effect for an indefinite big hit B, or an effect for a fixed value. If a fixed value is selected, a pre-reading effect corresponding to various big hits can be selected, but in the case of an indefinite big hit, the pre-reading effect may not be executed.

As a main variation pattern, for example, when a big hit of the type of [indefinite big hit A] comes, by executing any one of the effects that can be selected by the unfixed big hit A in [fixed value], the result Alternatively, control may be performed so that the same effect as when the [fixed value] is transmitted for the big hit of the type of [unspecified big hit A] can be executed.
When the process of step S5022 ends, the process moves to step S5023.

In step S5023, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery to determine the background. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines by lottery among a plurality of types of backgrounds according to a preset rule. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5024.

In step S5024, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for deciding whether or not to make an SP character appear, and a lottery for deciding an SP character to appear. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5025.

In step S5025, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub variation pattern lottery. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs the sub variation pattern lottery using the table corresponding to the current background when the variation based on the information stored in the special figure 1 hold (0) is started. However, in the case of pre-reading, the sub-variation pattern lottery according to the pre-reading rank lottery result is performed for a change satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, a change time of 2.5 seconds to 12 seconds). Here, when a background change that changes between large-frame backgrounds is performed, the effect determined by the sub-variation pattern lottery may not be performed. For example, in the second embodiment, there is a division stage that displays the production identification symbol in each of the plurality of areas. When a background change is performed on this divided stage, the effect for the stage that displays the effect identification symbol in one area may not be applicable. Therefore, when the background change is performed on the divided stage, the sub CPU 201 performs the sub variation pattern lottery corresponding to the divided stage again (step S5028). When this process ends, the process moves to step S5026.

In step S5026, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining execution of an effect related to the pre-reading variation. Specifically, a lottery is performed to determine a hold change method, a hold change change (an effect that suggests a change in a hold color and does not change). As a hold change method, for example, "spear" is displayed as a hold symbol at the stage of special figure 1 hold (4), and "spear" is displayed by the time shifting to special figure 1 hold (0). "Spear" sticks to the pending design to change the display mode of the pending design, or to give notice that the reach production will be confronted using the "spear". is there. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5027.

In step S5027, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery on the effect identification symbol (decorative symbol). Specifically, a lottery for determining the final stop symbol of the production identification symbol, the re-lottery symbol, the symbols before and after the sliding in the sliding effect, the chance eye symbol, the pseudo continuous pattern, and the like is performed. When this process ends, the process is performed in step S5029.

In step S5029, the sub CPU 201 sets an index (level) for controlling the strength of advance notice of the entire fluctuation. For example, in Lv1 (pseudo 1) and below reach & pseudo 2, use in Lv2 (pseudo 2) and above reach & pseudo 2 use, in Lv3 (pseudo 2) and above reach & pseudo 2 use, in Lv4 (pseudo 3) Used in hot SP and above & pseudo 3. When this process ends, the process goes to step S5030.

In step S5030, the sub CPU 201 performs lottery according to the index set in step S5029, and determines the SB effect scenario. When this process ends, the process is performed in step S5031.

In step S5031, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the pending change according to the index set in step S5029, and determines the type of pending change (design of pending design), scenario of pending change, and pending color. A lottery is conducted to determine the timing of change. The table for determining the type of pending change, scenario, change timing, etc. is selected based on the index set in step S5029 and the result of the SB effect lottery. When this process ends, the process proceeds to step S5032.

In step S5032, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the main notice according to the level set in step S5029, and also performs a lottery for determining the type of the main notice, the scenario, and the like. Examples of the main notice include an hourglass notice and an accessory step-up notice. The hourglass advance notice is a so-called timer advance notice, and the effect is developed when all the sand of the hourglass falls. The display mode of the hourglass may have a message property by changing from normal to "gold" or reducing the amount of sand when the level set in step S5029 is a strong level. In addition, the timing at which the hourglass sand starts to fall may be changed according to the flow of the notice. Furthermore, you may combine an hourglass advance notice and a pseudo continuous production. The accessory step-up notice is a notice in which the aspect of the accessory changes stepwise according to the number of pending changes before the change that is won in the prefetch lottery is held. The table for determining the type of the main notice, the scenario, and the like is selected based on the index set in step S5029 and the lottery result regarding the pending change in step S5031.
As described above, in the second embodiment, the SB lottery is performed, the scenario of the SB effect is confirmed, and then the lottery on the pending change and the main notice is performed. The performance will be decided. When this process ends, the process proceeds to step S5033.

In step S5033, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not to execute the pending change according to the level set in step S5029, and determines the type of pending change (design of pending design), scenario of pending change, and pending color. A lottery is conducted to determine the timing of change. When this process ends, the process proceeds to step S5034.
In step S5034, the sub CPU 201 carries out a lottery for determining whether to execute the special variation. When this process ends, the process is performed in step S5035.

In step S5035, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining various effects to be executed in the normal reach. When this process ends, the process is performed in step S5036.

In step S5036, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining various effects to be executed in SP reach (super reach). When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Big hit game state effect determination process]
FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the big hit game state effect determination processing of step S5002 shown in FIG. 163.

As shown in FIG. 168, in step S5051, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the jackpot gaming state. If it is determined to be in the jackpot gaming state, the process moves to step S5052. When it is not determined that the jackpot is in the gaming state, this subroutine is finished.

In step S5052, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting a big hit game start effect. For example, control is performed to cause the display device 16 to display an image indicating a game method in the big hit game state, such as "Please hit right." When this process ends, the process moves to step S5053.

In step S5053, the sub CPU 201 performs an in-round effect setting process for setting an effect in each round game. This processing will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5054.

In step S5054, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting a big hit game end effect. For example, control is performed to display on the display device 16 an image showing a game method in the time saving game state such as "time saving game state" of "100 times saving time" such as "super death road rush!" When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Round production setting process]
FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the in-round effect setting process of step S5053 shown in FIG. 168.

In step S5151, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of limiters has been reached. If it is determined that the limiter count has been reached, the process moves to step S5152. If it is not determined that the limiter count has been reached, the process moves to step S5155.

In step S5152, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the currently executed big hit game state is due to the special figure 2 big hit. If it is determined that the special figure 2 is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S5154. If it is not determined that the special figure 2 is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S5153.

In step S5153, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not a small hit is a big win due to a V winning. If it is determined that the jackpot is a big win due to V winning, the process proceeds to step S5154. If it is not determined that the jackpot is a big win due to V winning, the process proceeds to step S5155.

In step S5154, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting an effect that suggests that the time saving game state will continue. In this process, the sub CPU 201 is a big hit when the number of limiters is reached by the big hit that is currently being executed, and when there is a big hit that shifts to time saving within the hold of special figure 2, a time saving continuation suggesting effect is produced. Set. Here, when the limiter count is reached, the short-hit gaming state ends with the end of the big-hit gaming state, and then the fluctuation that becomes a big-hit that shifts to a shorter time in the hold is stopped and the big-hit gaming state (or the small-hit gaming state). It is a normal game state and not a time saving game state until it shifts to ). Therefore, strictly speaking, the time saving continuation suggestion effect is an effect which suggests re-entry into the time saving game state. However, from a player's point of view, it can be said that the period of the normal game state is short, and thus suggests that the time duration is substantially continued. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5155.

In step S5155, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting an effect to be executed during the round. That is, in the second embodiment, in the special figure 2 big hit, an effect indicating the number of remaining limiters in the first round is executed. Special case 2 In the case of V big hit by V win from the small hit, the small hit game state is counted in the first round, so an effect that suggests the number of remaining limiters is executed in the second round. In the case of the special figure 1 big hit, the suggestion of the remaining limiter number is not executed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5156.

In step S5156, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to determine whether or not it is the final round. If it is determined that it is the final round, the process moves to step S5157. If it is not determined that it is the final round, this subroutine is finished.

In step S5157, the sub CPU 201 selects, for the player, a mode of effect to be executed during a period in which the pending special figure 2 fluctuation is consumed after the time saving game state ends. In the second embodiment, the player is allowed to select either a first effect mode (single hitting mode) in which the character is determined by automatic lottery or a second effect mode (every time selection mode) in which the player can select the character. I do. That is, in the final round, the effect mode executed in the pullback mode is determined. If the special figure 2 is not held at the start of the final round, the above-described effect mode is not selected. For example, in the case of a big hit that is given one time saving by the special drawing 1 lottery, the above-described effect mode selection is not performed. However, in this case, since there is a high possibility that the suspension of special figure 2 will occur before the time saving is completed, there is a high possibility that the pullback mode will be entered after the time saving game state ends. Therefore, in the case of a big hit that is awarded once per hour, the first effect mode (single striking mode) is selected without selecting the effect mode described above. Then, as a special effect for one time saving in the time saving game state, an effect of notifying the character determined by the automatic lottery is performed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Small hit game state effect determination process]
FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the small hitting game state effect determination processing of step S5003 shown in FIG. 163.
As shown in FIG. 170, in step S5061, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a small hitting game state. If it is determined that the game is in the small hitting game state, the process proceeds to step S5062. When it is not determined that the game is in the small hitting state, this subroutine is finished.

In step S5062, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting a small hit game start effect. In the second embodiment, control is performed to display a character image on the display device 16 that prompts the player to "win the V" to win the second big winning opening 540b (V winning). When this process ends, the process moves to step S5063.

In step S5063, the sub CPU 201 performs V winning effect setting processing. For example, the sub CPU 201 controls to display a large “V” on the display device 16 when a V prize is won. This process will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5064.

In step S5064, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting a small hit game end effect. For example, when a V prize is won, control is performed so that the display device 16 prompts the player to win the first big winning opening 540a. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[V winning effect setting process]
FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the V winning effect setting process of step S5063 shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 171, in step S5191, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not a V prize has been won. If it is determined that the V prize has been won, the process moves to step S5192. If it is not determined that the V prize has been won, this subroutine is finished.

In step S5192, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not the limiter has been reached by winning the V prize. If it is determined that the limiter has been reached, the process moves to step S5193. If it is not determined that the limiter is reached, the process moves to step S5195.

In step S5193, the sub CPU 201 performs prefetching and performs a process of determining whether or not there is a big hit for holding the special figure 2. If it is determined that there is a big hit for the special figure 2 hold, the process moves to step S5194. If it is not determined that there is a big hit for the special figure 2 hold, the process moves to step S5195.

In step S5194, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting an effect that notifies the increase in the number of limiters. Note that the effect here may include an effect that suggests re-entry into the time saving game state, as in step S5154 shown in FIG. 169. Further, not only the number of limiters is increased, but the effect may be changed/updated or may be reset. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5195.

In step S5195, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting an effect for notifying the V winning. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Time saving game state effect determination processing]
FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the time saving game state effect determination processing of step S5004 shown in FIG. 163.

As shown in FIG. 172, in step S5071, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a time saving game state. If it is determined to be in the time saving game state, the process proceeds to step S5072. When it is not determined that the game is in the time saving game state, this subroutine is finished.

In step S5072, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining whether or not there is a hold of the second special symbol. If it is determined that there is a hold, the process moves to step S5073. If it is not determined that there is a hold, this subroutine ends.

In addition, the fact that the second special symbol is held in step S5072 is not limited to the case where there is the holding information in any of the special figure 2 hold (1) to the special figure 2 hold (4), and the special figure 2 hold (0 ) ~ The special jackpot 2 random number value and the main variation pattern are stored in the bonus jack 2 hold (0) in response to the fact that the player has won the start prize at the second starting opening 440 in the state where there is no hold information in the bonus cake 2 hold (4). It is possible to include a situation in which the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

Therefore, when the determination in step S5072 is YES, there is a start winning of the second starting opening 440 related to the second special symbol, until the variation of the second special symbol is started or the variation of the second special symbol. The main control circuit 100 may give a command to the sub-control circuit 200, a command for winning addition, a command for starting variation, a command for starting subtraction, a command for holding subtraction, and the like. Each process may be executed when it is transmitted or under the condition that such a command is transmitted.

In step S5073, the sub CPU 201 performs the sub variation pattern lottery when the suspension information is stored in the special figure 2 suspension. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for developing the main fluctuation pattern as a sub fluctuation pattern. Specifically, based on the main variation pattern, a lottery for determining an effect to be executed is performed to determine the outline of the sub variation pattern. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5074.

In step S5074, the sub CPU 201 performs the pre-reading large frame lottery when the pending information is stored in the special figure 2 pending. In this processing, the sub CPU 201 carries out a lottery that determines a scenario of what frame to prefetch based on the result of the sub variation pattern lottery. In the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not to give a chance notice or a background change notice. This lottery is performed for each hold, and the tables to be used are divided for each of the settings 1 to 6. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5075.

In step S5075, the sub CPU 201 carries out a pre-reading background change notice lottery. In this processing, when the background change notice is selected in the prefetch large frame lottery in step S5074, the sub CPU 201 determines a background change notice scenario by lottery based on the result of the sub variation pattern lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5076.

In step S5076, the sub CPU 201 performs a pre-reading chance advance notice lottery. In this process, when the pre-reading chance advance notice lottery is selected in the pre-reading large frame lottery in step S5074, the sub CPU 201 determines the chance chance and reach eye advance notice scenarios by lottery based on the result of the sub variation pattern lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5077.

In step S5077, the sub CPU 201 performs the sub variation pattern lottery when the production identification symbol changes based on the information stored in the special figure 2 hold (0). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for developing the main fluctuation (the fluctuation of the identification symbol in the second special symbol display portion 74) into the sub fluctuation (the fluctuation of the identification symbol by the display device 16). Specifically, a sub-variation pattern is determined by performing a lottery that determines the outline of the advance notice and the effect based on the lottery result of the main variation pattern. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5078.

In step S5078, if the sub CPU 201 determines the premium notice in the sub variation pattern lottery in step S5077, the sub CPU 201 carries out the lottery for the premium notice. When this process ends, the process is performed in step S5079.

In step S5079, the sub CPU 201 performs background change notice lottery. The background change notice lottery is performed when the background change notice is determined in the sub variation pattern lottery in step S5077 and the background change flag is set, and the background change notice determined in the background change notice lottery is executed. When this process ends, the process goes to step S5080.

In step S5080, the sub CPU 201 carries out chance chance announcement lottery. The chance eye notice lottery is performed when the chance eye notice is determined in the sub-variation pattern lottery in step S5077.

Here, according to the second embodiment, the table used for the chance eye notice lottery is divided according to the result of the background change notice, the value of the tempo counter, and the result of the previous chance eye notice. The tempai counter counts the number of appearances of chance eyes having a particular common aspect, for example, chance eyes having the same two heads and having odd aspects (head odd tempai) such as “112” and “335”. Then, the sub CPU 201 switches the table used for the chance advance notice lottery according to the count number of the tempai counter. Specifically, the table used for the chance advance notice lottery is, as a chance chance, an unbalanced chance, a weak chance (first order, the third odd number), a plurality of odd odd tempais, and a strong chance (the second and third numbers are the same and an odd number). , 7, and random numbers with a predetermined width are assigned to reach. According to this embodiment, the same table is used when the count number of the tempai counter is 0 to +2, and another table is used when the count number of the tempai counter is +3. The table used when the count number of the tempai counter is +3 is smaller than the table used when the count number of the tempai counter is +2. The width of the random number values assigned to (the second and third numbers are the same and odd) is set to be large. In other words, it is a table in which odd odd-numbered tempais are hard to be selected and strong chances (the second and third are the same number and odd) are easily selected. Note that the ten-pie counter is cleared to 0 when all of the "barren's eyes" and "chance eyes" are determined as the outcomes. When this process ends, the process goes to step S5081.

In step S5081, lottery is performed for the other notices determined in the sub-variation pattern lottery in step S5077, and the process of determining the notice is performed. When this process ends, the process proceeds to step S5082.

In step S5082, the sub CPU 201 performs setting suggestion lottery. In the setting suggestion lottery, the setting suggestion pattern is determined based on the result of the chance advance notice lottery in step S5080. In the second embodiment, since the setting suggestion pattern is determined based on the result of the chance eye advance notice lottery, the setting suggestion effect is generated based on the result of the previous change chance eye. When this process ends, the process goes to step S5083.

In step S5083, the sub CPU 201 performs a symbol lottery. The symbol lottery determines the arrangement of the production identification symbols to be displayed on the display device 16. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a fixed symbol lottery, a temporary stop symbol lottery in the pseudo continuous production, and a reach eye lottery to determine the symbol. In addition, the sub CPU201 pre-reads the special figure 2 reservation after the big hit game state which reaches the limiter, when the special figure 2 big hit or special figure 2 small hit is elected, particular design (for example, VVV ) Is displayed. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Final decisive battle production decision processing]
FIG. 173 is a flow chart showing the final battle effect determination process of step S5014 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 173, in step S5091, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub variation pattern lottery. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for developing the main fluctuation pattern as a sub fluctuation pattern. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5094.

In step S5094, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining the final battle effect mode selected by the player based on the operation of the operation button group 66 by the player. The final battle production mode is a first production mode (single striking mode) in which a ally character faces a character determined by lottery by the sub CPU 201, and a ally character can be changed for each change. Two production modes (every time selection mode) are provided. The player can select one of the modes based on the operation of the operation button group 66. When determining that the single striking mode has been selected, the sub CPU 201 shifts the processing to step S5095, and when it does not determine that the single striking mode has been selected (when the selection mode is selected each time), shifts the processing to step S5096. ..

In step S5095, the sub CPU 201 performs a character lottery, and performs a process of setting the character selected by the lottery as an opponent. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5097.

In step S5096, the sub CPU 201 displays the character selection screen on the display device 16 and sets the character selected by the operation of the operation button group 66 by the player as a teammate character. When the player does not operate the operation button group 66, the character designated as the selection target on the initial selection screen of the display device 16 is set as the teammate character. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5097.

In step S5097, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining various effects to be executed in SP reach (super reach). When this process ends, the process moves to step S5098.

In step S5098, the sub CPU 201 carries out a tempai-inspiring lottery. In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines by lottery whether or not to perform an effect that expects that the effect identification pattern (decorative pattern) will be reach, reach, and pseudo continuous occurrence. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5099.

In step S5099, the sub CPU 201 performs a countdown notice lottery. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to execute a countdown notice for notifying that the reach occurrence will be confirmed by counting down to 0. When this process ends, the process moves to step S5100.

In step S5100, the sub CPU 201 carries out a lottery for determining the outline of the main announcement. When this process ends, the process is performed in step S5101.

In step S5101, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining the details of the main announcement. When this process ends, the process goes to step S5103.

In step S5103, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining the outline of the fluctuation start notice. When this process ends, the process is performed in step S5104.

In step S5104, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for determining the sub notice. As the sub-notice, for example, post-loss effect or reach-ahead look-ahead is executed. When this process ends, the process is performed in step S5105.

In step S5105, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of determining a symbol. In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a fixed symbol lottery, a temporary stop symbol lottery in the pseudo continuous production, and a reach eye lottery to determine the symbol. When this process ends, this subroutine ends.

[Explanation of production]
Next, various effects displayed on the display device 16 will be described.

[Direction from the first hit to the end of the pullback mode]
In most cases, the player starts the game from the normal game state. In the normal game state, as described above, the game is advanced while hitting left with the aim of winning the first start opening 420. When the first start opening 420 is won, as shown in FIG. 174(a), the variation of the first effect identification symbol 5021 starts and the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is displayed. The special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 can display five special figure 1 reserved (0) to special figure 1 reserved (4), and in particular, the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 of special figure 1 reserved (0) changes. It corresponds to the first production identification pattern 5021, and at the same time as the changing first production identification pattern 5021 stops. As shown in FIG. 174(b), the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is erased. At this time, if the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 of special figure 1 reserved (1) is displayed, the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 is displayed at the display position of the special figure 1 reserved symbol 5011 of special figure 1 reserved (0). shift.

When the display mode of the first effect identification pattern 5021 is the reach mode as shown in FIG. 174(c), and the jackpot mode in which the same number of numbers are arranged as shown in FIG. 174(d) As shown in FIG. 174(e), the "big hit" notification image is displayed, the big hit game state is entered, and the round game is started as shown in FIG. 174(f). Then, as shown in FIG. 174(g), there is an explanation about the game after the big hit game state after the end of the round game, and the game shifts to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state. When the time saving game state starts, as shown in FIG. 174(h), an image of "right hitting" that prompts the player to hit right is displayed. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 174(d), when the even numbers are aligned, it is a big hit of one hour reduction, so the second starting opening 440 is won, and the second effect identification symbol 5022. The time saving game state ends at the time when the number fluctuates and stops. Here, in the first variation pattern of Toku-zu 2, a pattern having a relatively long variation time is determined by lottery, so as shown in FIGS. 175(a) and 175(b), by the end of one hour reduction. , It is possible to easily display the reserved symbols 5012 of the special figure 2 reservations (1) to (4) by winning four prizes in the second starting opening 440. In the example shown in FIG. 174, since the special figure 1 hold remains at the end of the big hit game state, the change of the special figure 1 hold is executed, but even if the change of the special figure 1 hold is stopped, the time saving game state Does not end. Therefore, it becomes possible to lengthen the variation of the special figure 1 hold, the time of stop, the time of the time saving game state, and display the hold symbol 5012 of the special figure 2 hold (1) to (4). Will be possible more reliably.

The period until the four special maps 2 reservations shown in FIG. 175(b) are exhausted is the “death road” period shown in FIG. 174(g), and this “death road” period is the pullback mode period described above. Correspond. In "Death Road", the image effect of the final battle where the characters face each other is performed, and as shown in FIG. 175(c), when the enemy character is won, the second effect identification symbol 5022 is "big hit" or " It becomes a stop display mode of "small hit". When the big hit is won, the big hit game state is entered, and when the small hit is won, the small hit game state is entered. When the small hitting game state is started, as shown in FIG. 175(e), "Aim for V!" is displayed to prompt the player to win the second big winning opening 540b. When the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening 540b passes through the V winning opening 545, "V" is displayed as shown in FIG. 175(f), and the big hit gaming state is started.

When the big hit game state is triggered by the game ball passing through the V winning opening 545, the limiter count is displayed in the second round. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 175(g), one of the four “GOODBONUS” icons displayed is deleted, and an effect of displaying three “GOODBONUS” icons is performed. As a result, the limiter count is reduced by one by the big hit game, and the limiter becomes three times. In other words, the number of big hits that shifts to the big hit game state in the time saving game state is three, and the third big hit. If so, the player is informed that the game state will shift to the normal game state after the jackpot game state is over. In addition, when the big hit game state is entered by winning the special figure 2 lottery, the limiter count is displayed in the first round.

After the end of the final round, as shown in FIG. 175(h), the character image "Super Death Road plunge!" is displayed, and the time saving game state in which 100 time saving is given and the pullback mode after the time saving game state is completed. After informing the player that it is possible to play the game, as shown in FIG. 176(a), the time saving game state in which 100 time saving is given is started. The background image during the time saving game state may indicate the number of remaining jackpots until reaching the limit number.

Further, as shown in FIG. 176(b), when the small hit is won in the time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 176(c) to FIG. When the game ball passes through the V winning opening 545, "V" is displayed, one of the icons "GOODBONUS" is erased in the second round, and two icons of "GOODBONUS" are displayed. After that, as shown in FIGS. 176(f) to 177(g), the number of limiters decreases each time the jackpot is won or the jackpot is switched from the jackpot in the time saving game state to the jackpot game state by the V prize.

Then, as shown in FIG. 177(g), the player is informed that the limiter count has been reached by the disappearance of the "GOODBONUS" icon during the round game. When the number of limiters is reached, as shown in FIG. 177(h), in the final round, the game selection screen in the pullback mode is displayed, and the player operates the operation button group 66 to select the game. In the second embodiment, there are prepared a single-batting mode in which the game machine side fights against an enemy character determined by lottery, and a selection mode in which an ally character can be changed for each change. The player selects a desired mode from these two modes during the effective time. If the player does not operate the operation button group 66 and the effective time has passed, the single-batting mode is selected. After the end of the round game, as shown in FIG. 178(a), if the big hit game state is entered, an image is displayed on the display device 16 to inform the player that the player will re-enter the time saving game state.

When shifting to the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 178(b), an image prompting the player to left-handed is displayed on the display device 16. Then, as shown in FIGS. 178(c) to 178(f), the small hit is won due to the change in the special figure 2 hold, and "Aim for V!" is displayed at the opening of the small hit game state. “GOODBONUS×4” is displayed. The display of “GOODBONUS×4” indicates that the limiter count has been reset. Then, when V is won in the small hitting game state, "V" is displayed. Further, in the next round, as shown in FIG. 179(a), four "GOODBONUS" icons are displayed side by side, and then one "GOODBONUS" is deleted. Then, in the next round, as shown in FIG. 179(b), after the round game is over, "Super Death Road plunge!" is displayed to notify that 100 hours have been saved, and then in FIG. 179(c). As shown in the figure, it shifts to a time saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 179(d), when the big hit game state is not entered within 100 hour reductions, the normal game state is entered. Then, in the first variation of the special figure 2 which is held, the game explanation is performed as shown in FIG. 179(e). After that, as shown in FIGS. 179(f) to 179(g), when the jackpot gaming state is not transitioned to based on the fluctuation of the reserved special figure 2, as shown in FIG. 179(h) "Death Road finished" is displayed. Here, the death road refers to a period from the time saving game state until all of the special figure 2 suspensions remaining in the normal game state transitioned after the time saving game state is completed are exhausted. As described above, in the second embodiment, since there is no small hit in the special figure 1 and there is a small hit in the special figure 2, a period advantageous for a player who is substantially likely to win the small hit is provided. Can be provided. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 180, even when the limiter count is reached and the big hit game state shifts to the normal game state, and the big hit game state does not shift based on the remaining fluctuation of special figure 2 suspension As shown in FIG. 180(g), “End of death road” is displayed, and the period advantageous for the player who is substantially likely to win the small hit ends. Then, as shown in FIG. 180(h), the first effect identification symbol 5021 is changed and stopped.
In addition, in the second embodiment, since there is no small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery and there is a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery, there is a high possibility that a player actually wins the small hit called death road. An advantageous period can be provided. Here, in the second embodiment, since there are settings 1 to 6, there is a case in which the actual small hit probability also changes due to a change in the big hit probability depending on the setting. In this case, when the jackpot probability setting is low, it may be possible to increase the substantial jackpot probability during the death road or to increase the jackpot probability via the jackpot, as compared to the case where the setting is high.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 177(h), the production in the final battle (the production mode when the normal gaming state and the special map 2 are held) is selected during the round. The second embodiment is not limited to this. For example, when the limiter number is reached as shown in FIG. 201(a), and as shown in FIGS. 201(b) and 201(c), after the jackpot game state is over, the special game state is changed to the special game state. When there is a hold, as shown in FIG. 201(d), the effect mode of the final decisive battle may be selected at the first change in the change due to the special figure 2 hold. Then, as shown in FIG. 201(e), the first variation ends, and as shown in FIGS. 201(f) and 201(g), after the next special figure 2 variation, depending on the effect mode selected in the first variation. The performance is executed. If special jackpot 2 is not held and the big hit game state is not entered, as shown in FIG. 201(h), “Death road end” is displayed as shown in FIG. 179(h), which is advantageous for the player. Period ends.

[Chance eye notice production]
When the process of step S5076 of FIG. 172 or the lottery in step S5080 is won, the chance notice presentation effect is performed.
FIG. 181 shows an example of a chance notice, as shown in FIG. 181(a), the second production identification symbol 5022 changes, and as shown in FIG. 181(b), a left symbol and a right symbol. Is stopped, and when the central symbol is fluctuating, as shown in FIG. 181(c), an effect of swinging the second effect identification symbol 5022 in the front-rear direction is performed, and as shown in FIG. 181(d). Then, the central pattern is stopped and the reach eyes are displayed.

[Setting suggestion]
When the lottery in the process of step S5082 of FIG. 172 is won, the setting suggestion effect is performed.

182 and 183 show an example of the setting suggestion effect, and the case where the setting is "3" will be described as an example.
As shown in FIGS. 182(a) to 182(f), a chance eye notice is given, and as shown in FIG. 182(f), a specific appearance that the middle symbol and the right symbol are the same number and odd number. When stopped by the eye, as shown in FIG. 183(a), a chance eye notice is given in the next change, and as shown in FIG. 183(b), the central symbol displayed at high speed is displayed as "3". At that point, the slow fluctuation display is performed, and as shown in FIGS. 183(c) and 183(d), it is stopped and displayed at the chance. In this way, the setting of the gaming machine is suggested in the next variation when there is a chance that the number of middle symbols and the number of right symbols are the same and odd.

By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 182 and 183, the chances are consecutive four times. Here, as shown in FIGS. 182(b) and 182(c), the first chance and the second chance are the same chances, and the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same number and odd. Is stopped at a specific result (for example, "115" (so-called odd number tempai)). At this time, the value of the ten-pie counter is "1" at the first chance and the value of the ten-pie counter is "2" at the second chance. If the result of "155" shown in FIG. 182(f) is "115", the value of the tempai counter used in the process of step S5080 becomes "3", and the next chance is decided. A different table is used when doing so, and it is easy for a result that is not a specific result (for example, “115”) to occur. Further, when a hit or a reach for notifying the hit appears, the tempai counter may be controlled to be cleared. Further, the reach stitches to be counted by the ten-pie counter are not limited to the continuous numbers and symbols, and symbols or marks may be used. Further, there may be elements such as color, sound and light.

[Freeze production]
The freeze effect executed during the round game will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. In addition, when V is won during the small hitting game state, the small hitting game state is treated as the first round.

FIG. 184 shows a case where the number of limiters is reached by shifting from the small hit prize to the big hit game state by a V win, while any of the four fluctuations of the special maps 2 held is a big hit. Is a display example of. As shown in FIG. 184(a), the variation of the special figure 2 is performed, and as shown in FIG. 184(b), it stops in the small hit mode, and as shown in FIG. 184(c), the V winning is promoted. It is assumed that the player makes a right hit according to the display and wins the V prize. At this time, when the condition that the limiter count has been reached by the big win due to the V winning and the condition that any of the four special drawing 2 lottery held is won the big hit rather than the small hit, When a V prize is won, the screen darkens (freezes) as shown in FIG. 184(d), and as shown in FIG. 184(e), "GOODBONUS" is displayed in large size, and the special figure 2 big hit exists in the hold. Suggest to do. Then, as shown in FIG. 184(f), an image indicating that the limit count has increased to 4 is displayed. In addition, after the jackpot game state is finished, when the jackpot is held in the special figure 2 hold and the jackpot game state is entered, an image indicating that the limit number of times is reduced by one in the second round is displayed. .. With this, it is possible to give the player the impression that good luck is concentrated by suggesting that the limiter is reached by the big hit and the limiter is reset and there is a 10R big hit in the hold. It becomes possible to give the player a greater interest.

FIG. 185 shows that while the number of limiters is reached by shifting to the jackpot gaming state by winning the special figure 2 lottery, one of the four fluctuations of the special figure 2 that has been held wins the big hit. This is an example of a display in the case of being displayed. As shown in FIG. 185(a), the change in Toku-zu 2 is performed, as shown in FIG. 185(b), it stops in the big hit mode, and as shown in FIG. 185(c), the big hit is confirmed. The image that notifies is notified. At this time, in the case where the condition that the limiter count is reached by the big hit and the condition that any one of the four special figure 2 lottery held is won the big hit instead of the small hit, As shown in (d), the screen darkens (freezes), and as shown in FIG. 185(e), "GOODBONUS" is displayed in large size, which suggests that there is a special figure 2 big hit in the hold. Then, as shown in FIG. 185(f), an image indicating that the limit number has increased to 4 in the first round is displayed. As a result, similar to the example shown in FIG. 184, good luck is concentrated by suggesting to the player that the limiter has been reached by the big hit and the limiter has been reset and there is a 10R big hit in the hold. It is possible to give the impression that the player is playing, and it is possible to give the player a greater interest.

In the second embodiment, the first special winning opening 540a and the first special electric winning combination 601, the second special winning opening 540b and the second special electric winning combination 602 are arranged on the board surface, and the big hit game state is achieved. In, the first special electric auditors product 601 is operated, and in the small hitting game state, the second special electric auditors product 602 is operated. Here, since the number of prize balls to the first special winning opening 540a is set to be larger than the number of prize balls to the second special winning opening 540b, the special jackpot game by special drawing 2 lottery is the special drawing 2 lottery. It is more advantageous than the small hit and big hit game that went through the V prize.

In addition, in the second embodiment, not limited to the above-described configuration, only one special electric auditors product is installed on the game board, and a special jackpot 2 lottery game and a jackpot and V prize by the special chart 2 lottery are provided. A common special electric accessory may be used in the past big hit game. In this case, a common special electric accessory is provided with a V winning opening, and the gaming ball can pass through the V winning opening in both the small hit by the special drawing 2 lottery and the big hit game after passing the V winning. In addition, in the big hit game by special drawing 2 lottery and the big hit game that has passed the small hit and V prize by the special drawing 2 lottery, the opening/closing pattern of the special electric auditors is changed, and in the big hit game that has passed the small hit and V prize. The number of prize balls is regulated by making the opening time shorter than the big hit game by special drawing 2 lottery. As a result, it is possible to realize a payout equivalent to the case where there are two special electric auditors' products. Further, if the condition that the limiter count is reached by the big hit and the condition that any of the four special drawing 2 lottery held is won the big hit rather than the small hit, the V winning is won. As an opportunity, as shown in FIG. 185(e), “GOODBONUS” may be displayed large.

[Big hit lookahead production at limit]
In the time saving game state where the number of limiters will be reached in the next big hit, when the big hit or the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the special figure 2 hold and wins the big hit in the hold. Or, determine whether or not there is a small win. When it is determined that there is a big win or a small win in the hold, as shown in FIG. 186(a), the display device 16 displays the second production identification pattern 5022 of the special stop mode of "VVV". To display. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 186(b) to 186(f), due to a change in the second effect identification pattern 5022 based on the winning hold, for example, after a small hit is displayed, a right hit is urged. An image indicating that the number of limiters has increased is displayed on the display device 16 together with the image, and the image “V” is displayed on the display device 16 by V winning.

In addition, when the big hit or small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in the short-time gaming state when the number of limiters remains 2, the pre-reading of the special drawing 2 hold is performed and the big hit or small hit win is 2 Even when there are more than one, the second effect identification symbol 5022 in a special stop mode may be displayed on the display device 16. Further, a random number value for a small hit or a big hit is stored in the hold of the special figure 2, and a special effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, and a small hit or a big hit exists in the hold of the special figure 2. Even after informing that it is done, select the effect mode during the small hit game state or the big hit game state, and depending on the effect mode, the small hit that exists within the hold of the special map 2 that is on hold. It may be possible to execute an effect when the jackpot or the jackpot changes or an effect until the jackpot changes.

[Final battle production]
The final battle effect executed when the special figure 2 is held after the time saving game state ends will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189.
As shown in FIGS. 187(a) and 187(b), after the jackpot gaming state is entered, in the final round, the player is made to select either the "one-shot mode" or the "every time selection mode" as described above. .. As shown in FIG. 187(b), when the "single hitting mode" is selected, as shown in FIG. 187(c), a transition to the normal game state is suggested at the first variation of the special figure 2 suspension. The image of "final decisive battle" is displayed and the game explanation is displayed. In the first variation, neither the second effect identification symbol 5022 nor the reserved symbol 5012 are displayed so far. Then, after displaying the game explanation for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 187(d), an image in which the characters are automatically drawn is displayed, and at the same time, the second effect identification symbol 5022 and the reserved symbol 5012 are displayed. That is, in the first variation, the display that the reserved symbol 5012 decreases is not performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 187(e), the first confrontation image is displayed. As shown in FIG. 187(f), when the image which won the confrontation is displayed, the second effect identification symbol 5022 of the hit mode is displayed, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is entered. When there is no big hit or small hit hold in the special figure 2 hold, after the last change in the special figure 2 hold is stopped, as shown in FIG. 187(h), the display device 16 displays “defeat”. It is said that The mode selection effect shown in FIG. 187(b) may be executed in the first change, as shown in FIG.

Here, as described above, the table is set so that a pattern having a long variation time is determined as the main variation pattern determined based on the first special figure 2 lottery that shifts to the normal game state, and the first half of the variation time In the game explanation is given, and the first confrontation image is displayed in the latter half.

By the way, if there is only one special figure 2 hold at the time when the time saving number is reached and the time saving game state ends or when the limiter number reaches the big hit game state, the time saving game state or the big hit game state ends. After that, it is necessary to display the final decisive battle inrush screen and the final decisive battle result screen in the first variation due to the suspension of the special depiction 2; It is necessary to display the result screen of the final decisive battle in the second change and in the second change.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as the first-half fluctuations in the sub-variation pattern, a normal fluctuation, a fluctuation for the inrush screen of the final decisive battle, and a fluctuation for the fluctuation time for the inrush screen of the final decisive battle and the result screen are newly added. Be prepared for.

When there is only one special map 2 hold at the time when the time saving number is reached and the time saving game state ends or when the limiter number reaches the big hit game state, if there is only one special figure 2 hold, it is the first half fluctuation and the entry screen of the final decisive battle A variation of the variation time for the result screen is selected, and as the second half variation, a common variation for various reach effects and loss is selected.

At the time when the time saving number is reached and the time saving game state is ended, or when the jackpot game state is reached when the limiter number is reached, when there are two special map 2 suspensions, as the first half change in the first change pattern, the final decisive battle The fluctuation of the fluctuation time for the inrush screen is selected, and as the latter half fluctuation, common fluctuations for various reach effects and for losing are selected. Furthermore, the variation of the variation time of the result screen of the final battle is selected as the first half variation in the second variation pattern, and the common variation for various reach effects and loss is selected as the second half variation.

In this way, by preparing the change time of the inrush screen and the result screen individually in the first half change and preparing the change time for various reach production in common in the second half change, depending on the number of holdings and the game state. While the contents displayed by one change are different, it is possible to prepare a common change time for the effect to be executed by the changing character or the like.

FIG. 188 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect screen when the “every time selection mode” is selected.
As shown in FIGS. 188(a) and 188(b), after the jackpot gaming state is entered, in the final round, the player is made to select one of the "single hitting mode" and the "every time selection mode" as described above. .. As shown in FIG. 188(b), when the "every time selection mode" is selected, as shown in FIG. 188(c), an image of "final decisive battle" indicating a transition to the normal gaming state is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 188(d), the character selection screen and the valid time for which the character can be selected are displayed. Then, when the effective time has elapsed, the character is determined, and the confrontation effect is started from the next change in Toku-zu 2 as shown in FIG. 188(e). When the image which won the confrontation is displayed, as shown in FIG. 188 (g), the second effect identification symbol 5022 of the hit mode is displayed, and the big hit game state or the small hit game state is entered. When the image defeated in the confrontation is displayed, as shown in FIG. 188(f), the character selection screen and the valid time for which the character can be selected are displayed. Hereinafter, the same effect is repeated by the number of special figure 2 reservations. When there is no big hit or small hit hold in the special figure 2 hold, the game result is displayed on the display device 16 together with the display of "defeat" as shown in FIG. 188(h). The mode selection effect shown in FIG. 188(b) may be executed in the first change, as shown in FIG. 201.

Further, also in the "every-time selection mode" shown in FIG. 188, as in the single-shot mode, the variation times of the inrush screen and the result screen are individually prepared in the first half variation, and the variation times for various reach effects are shared in the latter half variation. Prepared in.

Further, in the final battle production, the pseudo continuous production may be selected. FIG. 189 is an explanatory view showing a pseudo continuous effect screen when the “every time selection mode” is selected.
As shown in FIG. 189, in the pseudo continuous production in the "every time selection mode", as shown in FIG. 189(b), the character selection screen and the valid time for which the character can be selected are displayed immediately after the temporary stop. Then, the player can select a desired teammate character. Further, the character displayed on the selection screen may be determined by lottery so that a stronger character appears every time the number of temporary stops in the pseudo continuous production increases, and in the case of a big hit or a small hit, a premium character is selected. It may be decided by lottery so that it will appear.

[Repeat production]
Further, in the second embodiment, when the first effect identification symbol 5021 or the second effect identification symbol 5022 is temporarily stopped in a lost manner, the player is made to repeatedly hit the button to change the stop manner, The continuous hit effect for displaying the final stop design may be determined by lottery.

FIG. 190 is an explanatory diagram showing a change in the effect screen in the continuous hit effect. As shown in FIG. 190(a), after the first effect identification pattern 5021 is temporarily stopped in a losing manner, an image prompting continuous button hits and an image showing the remaining time during which the continuous button hits are valid are displayed. Then, when the player repeatedly hits the button, the left symbol is destroyed and a new symbol is displayed after every few strokes, and when the left symbol becomes a new symbol, next, the central symbol is destroyed and a new symbol is displayed. And, when the central symbol becomes a new symbol, the right symbol is destroyed and a new symbol is displayed every few shots, and when the right symbol becomes a new symbol, the left symbol is destroyed and a new symbol every few strokes. Is displayed repeatedly. At this time, as the numbers change, the color of the numbers, the color behind the first effect identification pattern 5021, and the like are changed to give an effect that suggests whether or not to be a big hit. Specifically, the display mode of "224" as shown in FIG. 190(a) is switched to the display mode of "113" as shown in FIG. 190(b) to FIG. 190(e) by repeated button pressing, and When the display mode of “111” is switched by repeated hits, the big hit is confirmed. If the display mode of "113" is switched to the display mode of "113" as shown in FIG. 190(e) and the display mode of "113" does not change even after repeated hits, "113" is the final stop as shown in FIG. 190(h). It becomes a display mode.

FIG. 191 is an explanatory diagram showing a case where three symbols cannot be completely destroyed in the continuous stroke effect. As shown in FIG. 191(a), after the first effect identification pattern 5021 is temporarily stopped in a losing manner, an image prompting repeated button hits and an image showing the remaining time during which the continuous button hits are effective are displayed. When the player repeatedly hits the button, the display mode of the first effect identification symbol 5021 changes as shown in FIGS. 191(b) to 191(d). Here, as shown in FIGS. 191(e) and 191(f), when the left symbol is destroyed and the display mode of the left symbol changes, when the remaining time is gone, in the case of a big hit, As shown in FIG. 191(g), the mode is switched to the big hit mode and stopped and displayed. In the case of a loss, as shown in FIG. 191(h), it is stopped and displayed as it is as a disengagement mode.

[Hourglass production]
Next, the hourglass effect, which is one of the main notices determined in step S5032 shown in FIG. 165, will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193.
FIG. 192 shows an example of suggesting the degree of development of the pseudo continuous production by the hourglass production. As shown in FIG. 192(a), when the first effect identification symbol starts changing and temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 192(b), as shown in FIG. 192(b), the hourglass Display the image. Then, as shown in FIGS. 192(c) and 192(d), the sand of the hourglass falls with the progress of the pseudo-relationship, and as shown in FIG. 192(e), the first effect identification pattern is in the reach mode. If the sand of the hourglass is falling at the time, the reach effect develops (FIG. 192(f)). Here, as shown in FIG. 192(e), even if the first effect identification pattern is in the reach mode, if the sand of the hourglass remains, the normal reach effect is continued.
Note that in FIG. 192, the hourglass is displayed at the pseudo (1) timing, but the hourglass is not limited to this, and may be displayed at the pseudo (2) timing as shown in FIG. 193. In this case, the timer is basically from the pseudo (1), but it is determined whether to display the hourglass in the pseudo (2) or the pseudo (1) depending on the strength of the pseudo (1). Even if the amount of sand is reduced from the beginning, the color of the hourglass may be changed to gold so that the development effect to be executed later can be expected.

[Background change production]
If the lottery in the processing of step S5022, step S5075, or step S5079 of FIG. 165 is won, a background change notice is given.
194 shows an example of the background change notice, and as shown in FIG. 194(a), after the fluctuation of the first effect identification symbol 2021 is stopped on the stage before the background change, it is shown in FIG. 194(b). After displaying the effect image when the background is switched as described above, the display is switched to, for example, the division stage as shown in FIG. 194(c). In the division stage, the result of the special drawing 1 lottery is notified to the player by changing and stopping the first effect division identification symbol 5121 and the second effect division identification symbol 5122. If either the first effect division identification pattern 5121 or the second effect division identification pattern 5122 is stopped in the big hit mode, the big hit game state is entered.

[Pseudo continuous production of split stage]
195 and 196 are explanatory views showing an effect screen in the division stage. As shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the first production divisional identification symbol 5121 and the second production divisional identification symbol 5122 are displayed on the display device 16, and are changed and stopped, respectively. Here, when the pseudo-reminder symbol 5050 is displayed, the roulette symbol 5031 including "NEXT" and "X" is displayed, and when "NEXT" is displayed, the pseudo-representative effect is performed. When "x" is displayed, the operation is stopped in the disengagement mode or the normal reach effect is started. For the sake of convenience of the following description, the variation from the first temporary stop in the pseudo continuous effect is simulated (1), the variation from the second temporary stop is simulated (2), and the variation from the third temporary stop is simulated. (3) The change from the fourth temporary stop is referred to as pseudo (4).

Specifically, in the division stage, the first production division identification pattern 5121 and the second production division identification pattern 5122 start changing at the same time, and the first production division identification pattern 5121 and the second production division identification pattern are started. Stop in the order of 5122. Before the first effect split identification symbol 5121 and the second effect split identification symbol 5122 are stopped, the pseudo-repeated notice symbol 5050 is displayed (FIG. 195(b)), which includes "NEXT" and "X". When the roulette pattern 5031 is displayed (FIG. 195(c)) and "NEXT" is displayed (FIG. 195(d)), the process shifts to pseudo (1). At this time, since the second effect division identification pattern 5122 is displayed later, the temporary stop mode of the second effect division identification pattern 5122 is displayed small in the right corner of the screen.

In the pseudo (1), as shown in FIG. 195(e), the first effect division identification pattern 5121 and the second effect division identification pattern 5122 are changed again. Similarly, when the pseudo-reminder symbol 5050 is displayed (Fig. 195(f)), the roulette symbol 5031 is displayed (Fig. 195(g)), and "NEXT" is displayed (Fig. 195(h)). , Transition to pseudo (2). At this time, the temporary stop mode of the second effect divisional identification pattern 5122 is displayed small in the right corner of the screen. That is, the second effect division identification symbol 5122 becomes the final stop symbol.

In the pseudo (2), the first effect division identification pattern 5121 and the second effect division identification pattern 5122 are changed again, and the third effect division identification pattern 5123 is added to the first effect division identification pattern 5121. , And the second production-use split identification pattern 5122 (FIG. 196(a)). That is, there are three effective lines. Similarly, when the pseudo-reminder symbol 5050 is displayed (FIG. 196(b)), the roulette symbol 5031 to which “development” is added is displayed (FIG. 196(c)), and “NEXT” is displayed. (FIG. 196(d)), and shifts to pseudo (3). At this time, the temporary stop mode of the first effect divisional identification pattern 5121 is displayed small in the right corner of the screen. That is, the first effect division identification symbol 5121 becomes the final stop symbol.

In the pseudo (3), as shown in FIG. 196(e), the first production division identification pattern 5121, the second production division identification pattern 5122, and the third production division identification pattern 5123 are changed again, and at the same time, 4 effect division identification pattern 5124 is added and changes along with the first effect division identification symbol 5121, the second effect division identification symbol 5122, and the third effect division identification symbol 5123. Similarly, the pseudo-recommendation symbol 5050 is displayed (FIG. 196(f)), and the roulette symbol 5031 to which “decision battle” is added is displayed (FIG. 196(g)).

Here, when a display other than "NEXT" is displayed (FIG. 196(h)), an effect such as development into SP reach is performed. At this time, the temporary stop mode of the second effect divisional identification pattern 5122 is displayed small in the right corner of the screen. That is, the second effect division identification symbol 5122 becomes the final stop symbol. When "NEXT" is displayed in FIG. 196(g), the process shifts to pseudo (4). In this case, the first effect division identification symbol 5121 to the fourth effect division identification symbol 5124 are changed again. In the second embodiment, since the pseudo (4) is the final stage, the temporary stop is not performed after the change of the pseudo (4), and the SP reach is developed.

195 and FIG. 196 exemplify the case of reach of even symbols, but in the second embodiment, in the case where even one reach pattern of odd symbols is displayed in a plurality of activated lines in the division stage, the next time In the re-variation of, the symbols are determined so that the plurality of effective lines are all reach patterns of odd symbols.

197 and 198 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a case where even one reach pattern of an odd symbol is displayed on a plurality of activated lines in the division stage. As shown in FIGS. 197(a) to 197(c), the reach mode of even symbols is displayed in the pseudo (1) variation, but in the pseudo (2) variation shown in FIG. 197(e), As shown in 197(f), it is assumed that the reach mode of odd-numbered symbols is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 197(g) and FIG. 197(h), a temporary stop occurs, and when the pseudo (3) changes, a plurality of effective lines in the pseudo (3) change are all odd symbols. Reach mode (FIG. 198(a), FIG. 198(b)). Then, as the reach develops and three odd numbers with the same number are stopped, the player is informed of the big hit (FIGS. 198(c) to 198(f)).

Here, the variable symbol lottery over the reach in the split stage (the process of step S5027 shown in FIG. 165) will be described. First, the symbol before re-lottery to be stopped at the final pseudo stop line is determined by lottery. Next, the symbols to be stopped on the pseudo effective line before the final pseudo are drawn down based on the symbols before the re-drawing. For example, when the final pseudo is pseudo (3), after determining the symbol of pseudo (3), pseudo (2) and pseudo (1) are determined by lottery based on this symbol. In addition, each pseudo effective line is determined before the drawing of the symbols.

When performing the descending lottery, first, classification is performed. Specifically, if the symbol before re-lottery determined by lottery is an odd number, it is determined by lottery whether all the symbols on the activated line before the final pseudo are made odd, or whether they are promoted from even to odd by the final pseudo. .. In addition, when the symbol before re-lottery determined by the lottery is an even number, it is determined that all the symbols on the activated line before the final pseudo are even numbers.

Next, when it is decided to promote from an even number to an odd number by the final pseudo, the stage before the final pseudo in the downward lottery is decided by the lottery. Next, a lottery is used to determine how many symbols are to be used as the final symbols (how many symbols are used for tempai). Then, based on the classification of the symbols before the re-lottery and the stop icon, the symbols at each stage in the pseudo-link or other symbols are determined by lottery. In this way, a series of temporary stop symbols and final stop symbols in the pseudo continuous production are determined, and it is possible to express the rise from the even symbols to the odd symbols. In the second embodiment, in the case of a big hit stopped with an odd number of symbols, 100 times may be given after the end of the big hit game state. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a new interest in the pseudo continuous production in which one of the plurality of activated lines is expected to be an odd number.

As a special case, only in the case of long reach (normal reach in which the variation time of the third symbol is long), since the stop icon "x" for notifying that the pseudo-relation does not continue is passed through, a random selection is made.

The pseudo continuous pattern of the divided stages has been described above, but in the second embodiment, it is also possible to make full use of prefetching to excite the pseudo continuous effect. As shown in FIG. 199, an effect of displaying the pseudo-reminder and stopping in a losing manner may be performed from the change of the second previous hold with respect to the special figure 1 hold for performing the pseudo-representative effect. When the pseudo-reminder is given by the change of special figure 1 hold (3), the pseudo-reminder is displayed by the change of the previous special figure 1 hold (1), (2) and stopped in a lost manner. As a result, the pseudo-relation production can be started in a state in which the expectation that the pseudo-repetition notice may be issued next time is amplified. In the example shown in FIG. 199, pseudo-announcement is continuously issued, but the character pattern "pseudo?" or "pseudo" is displayed on the reserved symbol 5011 of the special figure 1 suspension (2), It is also possible to set the number of effective lines to three at the start of the change of the special figure 1 hold (3).

Further, for the pseudo-announcement, for example, as shown in FIG. 200(a), a variation mode different from the normal one such as horizontally rotating the production identification symbol, or as shown in FIG. 200(b), By changing the display mode of the background of the business identification pattern, for example, by setting it to a green or red background, it may be suggested that the number of pseudo-repetitions may increase.

[Other configuration of game board unit 17]
FIG. 202 is a front view showing another configuration of the game board unit 17 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In the game board unit 17 shown in FIG. 202, the same members as those of the game board unit 17 shown in FIG. 155 or members having the same functions are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The game board unit 17 shown in FIG. 202 and the game board unit 17 shown in FIG. 155 differ in the types of the normal electric auditors product unit 400 and the second special electric auditors product 602. The normal electric auditors product unit 400 in the game board unit 17 shown in FIG. 202 is one in which the shutter member rotates forward to capture the game ball, and the second special electric auditors product 602 is the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 156. Like the accessory unit 400, the flat plate member is projected, and the game ball on the flat plate member is guided to the second starting port 440 arranged on the left side of the flat plate member and opening on the right side.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above as an embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix A>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is opened a plurality of times for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out with respect to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during the small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening/closing area, allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and since the opening/closing area is easily opened, the game ball is won in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state changes, so that the number of gaming balls that the player can obtain changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor, in the process of earnestly studying the above-mentioned gaming machine, improves the interest of the player in the game and makes the player's motivation for the game by devising a device regarding the relevance of a plurality of types of effects. I came up with the idea that I could improve.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game and improving a player's motivation for the game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) Game control means capable of controlling the execution of a game based on one of a plurality of set values,
Identification information control means capable of stopping and displaying after the identification information (special symbol) is variably displayed,
First effect execution means capable of executing any effect (display of effect identification symbol) of a plurality of predetermined effects,
Second effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect) capable of suggesting the set value;
And an effect selecting unit capable of selecting an effect that can be executed by the first effect executing unit based on one effect selecting table of the plurality of effect selecting tables,
When the one effect is continuously executed by the first effect executing means, the effect selecting means can switch the effect selecting table according to the number of times of the effect,
The second effect execution means, when a predetermined effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed by the first effect execution means, next change display by the identification information control means. It is possible to execute the suggestive effect while
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute any one of a plurality of predetermined effects (display of the effect identification symbol) (first effect). , When a predetermined effect (display of a specific effect identification pattern (predetermined chance eye)) is executed as the first effect, an effect (setting suggestion effect) (second effect) that can suggest a set value is executed. It is possible to That is, the second effect is executed according to the type of effect selected as the first effect. Then, the selection of the first effect can be controlled according to the fact that one effect is continuously executed as the first effect. Through such a relationship between the first effect and the second effect, it is possible to realize an attractive effect and increase the player's expectation for the development of the effect.

As the plurality of effect selection tables, for example, effect selection table A and effect selection table B can be provided. The effect selection table B can be configured so that the probability of selecting one effect (specific effect) is lower than that in the effect selection table A. Alternatively, in the effect selection table B, the probability that a particular effect is selected may be 0. Then, when the number of consecutive specific effects (for example, the value of the tempai counter) is less than the predetermined number, the first effect (effect identification symbol) is selected by referring to the effect selection table A, while specifying When the number of continuous productions of (1) reaches a predetermined number (for example, when a specific production is executed in a continuous predetermined number of special symbol variations), referring to the production selection table B, the first production (production) It can be configured to select (for identification pattern). Even when the number of consecutive times of a specific effect reaches a predetermined number, if the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), the effect selection table A The first effect (identification pattern for effect) may be selected with reference to. That is, when the number of consecutive times of a particular effect reaches a predetermined number, for the effect selection, on the condition that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) corresponding to the special symbol variation related to the first effect is a loss. It is also possible to switch to table B.

In the second embodiment, the first effect has been described as an effect for displaying the effect identification symbol. In the present invention, the content of the first effect is not limited to the display of symbols, and any effect can be appropriately adopted. For example, an effect of displaying a symbol, a mark, or the like may be adopted as the first effect, or an effect using color, sound, or light may be adopted as the first effect. Further, the specific effect may be the same effect as the predetermined effect or may be an effect different from the predetermined effect. For example, while adopting an effect that displays a predetermined chance eye as the predetermined effect, adopting an effect that displays a chance eye different from the predetermined chance eye (for example, odd-numbered tempo) as the specific effect. May be Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of effects as the specific effect and the predetermined effect. For example, when a plurality of types of effects (effect A, effect B, effect C, etc.) are provided as a specific effect, even when any of the effects of the plurality of effects is selected. The value of the tempai counter may be added, while the value of the tempai counter may be cleared if none of the plurality of types of effects are selected.

(A-2) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) related to the game, based on one of the plurality of set values.
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game that can be shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player State control means,
First effect execution means capable of executing any one of a plurality of predetermined first effects (display of the effect identification symbol),
When a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed by the first effect execution means, a second effect (setting suggestion effect) that can suggest the set value Second effect executing means capable of executing
When the predetermined first effect is not executed by the first effect execution means, a third effect (background change notice) that may indicate that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result is executed. And a third effect execution means capable of
The first effect executing means can indicate that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result by continuously executing the predetermined first effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute any first effect (display of the effect identification symbol) out of a plurality of predetermined first effects, Performing a second effect (setting suggestion effect) capable of suggesting a set value when a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification pattern (predetermined chance eye)) is executed as the first effect Is possible. Further, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), it is possible to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, When a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is not executed as one effect, the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit). ), it is possible to execute the third effect (background change notice). On the other hand, the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit) by continuously executing the predetermined first effect (display of the specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)). It is also configured so that it can be suggested that it has become a hit. Through the relationship between the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect as described above, it is possible to realize an attractive effect and increase the player's expectation for the development of the effect.

As a mode of suggesting that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result, it is possible that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result by combining the first effects that are successively executed. That can be recognized (as a result, it is suggested that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result), or one of the first effects that are continuously executed. A mode in which the player can recognize that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result (as a result, it is suggested that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result) It is possible to say that these modes also "indicate that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result by continuously executing the predetermined first effect". It should be noted that the third effect is not particularly limited, and it is possible to appropriately employ an arbitrary prefetching effect other than the background change notice.

(A-2′) The gaming machine of (A-2) above,
Identification information control means capable of stopping and displaying after the identification information (special symbol) is variably displayed,
A first effect selecting unit capable of selecting the first effect that can be executed by the first effect executing unit, based on one effect selecting table of a plurality of effect selecting tables;
When the predetermined first effect is executed by the first effect executing unit, the second effect executing unit executes the second effect while the next variable display is being performed by the identification information control unit. Is possible to run,
When the predetermined first effect is continuously executed by the first effect execution unit, the first effect selection unit switches the effect selection table according to the number of times the predetermined first effect is continued. Is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the predetermined first effect (display of the specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed, the next variable display is performed. Where it is possible to execute the second effect in the meantime, when the predetermined first effect (display of the specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is continuously executed, The effect selection table can be switched according to the number of consecutive times of the first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance)). Thereby, it is possible to change the content of the first effect according to the number of times of the predetermined first effect (display of the specific effect identification pattern (predetermined chance eye)), and to realize a more interesting effect. can do.

(A-3) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) related to the game, based on one of the plurality of set values.
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game that can be shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player State control means,
First effect execution means capable of executing any one of a plurality of predetermined first effects (display of the effect identification symbol),
When a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed by the first effect execution means, a second effect (setting suggestion effect) that can suggest the set value A second effect executing means capable of executing
A plurality of first effects are provided as the predetermined first effects,
The first effect execution means can suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result through the type of the predetermined first effect.
When the predetermined first effect is executed by the first effect execution unit, the second effect execution unit can suggest the set value with a probability according to the type of the predetermined first effect. Is
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to execute any first effect (display of the effect identification symbol) out of a plurality of predetermined first effects, Performing a second effect (setting suggestion effect) capable of suggesting a set value when a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification pattern (predetermined chance eye)) is executed as the first effect Is possible. Further, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), it is possible to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, As a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)), a plurality of first effects are provided, and a predetermined first effect (specific effect identification symbol (predetermined effect) It is configured such that it is possible to indicate that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) has become a predetermined result (big hit or small hit) through the type of (display of chance). On the other hand, in the second effect, when a predetermined first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed as the first effect, the predetermined first effect (specific effect) It is possible to suggest the set value with a probability according to the type of the use identification pattern (display of a predetermined chance). Thereby, for example, the reliability of the first effect (how much the predetermined lottery result (big hit determination) can be expected to be a predetermined result (big hit or small hit)) and the reliability of the second effect (implication To what extent the set value that is set is reliable), and the player's expectation for the development of the effect can be increased.

For example, a plurality of first effects provided as a predetermined first effect are a first effect A, a first effect B, and a first effect C. When the first effect A is executed, the probability that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the predetermined result (big hit or small hit) is 20%, and when the first effect B is executed. There is a 50% probability that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), and when the first effect C is executed, the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is predetermined. The probability of being the result (big hit or small hit) is 100%. On the other hand, when the first effect A, the first effect B, or the first effect C is executed, the second effect (setting suggestion effect) may be executed, and the first effect A is the predetermined first effect. When it is executed, the probability that the set value suggested in the second effect (setting suggestion effect) matches the actual set value is 20%, and the first effect B is executed as the predetermined first effect. In this case, there is a 50% probability that the set value suggested in the second effect (setting suggestion effect) matches the actual set value, and when the first effect C is executed as the predetermined first effect. The probability that the set value suggested in the second effect (setting suggestion effect) matches the actual set value is 100%. Alternatively, when the first effect A is executed, the second effect (setting suggestion effect) is executed with a probability of 20%, and when the first effect B is executed, the second effect (with a probability of 50% is performed. The setting suggestion effect) may be executed, and when the first effect C is executed, the second effect (setting suggestion effect) may be executed with a probability of 100%.

(A-3′) The gaming machine of (A-3) above,
Identification information control means capable of stopping and displaying after the identification information (special symbol) is variably displayed,
A first effect selecting unit capable of selecting the first effect that can be executed by the first effect executing unit, based on one effect selecting table of a plurality of effect selecting tables;
When the predetermined first effect is executed by the first effect executing unit, the second effect executing unit executes the second effect while the next variable display is being performed by the identification information control unit. Is possible to run,
When the predetermined first effect is continuously executed by the first effect execution unit, the first effect selection unit switches the effect selection table according to the number of times the predetermined first effect is continued. Is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the predetermined first effect (display of the specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is executed, the next variable display is performed. Where it is possible to execute the second effect in the meantime, when the predetermined first effect (display of the specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance eye)) is continuously executed, The effect selection table can be switched according to the number of consecutive times of the first effect (display of a specific effect identification symbol (predetermined chance)). Thereby, it is possible to change the content of the first effect according to the number of times of the predetermined first effect (display of the specific effect identification pattern (predetermined chance eye)), and to realize a more interesting effect. can do.

(A-4) Symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols,
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, display control means capable of stop display after the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display means,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game that can be shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player State control means,
And a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect (prefetch effect) that can suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery has become the predetermined result,
The specific effect executing means,
It is suggested that the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result through the continuous appearance of a specific display mode (head odd tempai) as a display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed by the display control means. A first specific effect execution means capable of;
When a display mode other than the specific display mode appears as the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed by the display control unit, while the next variable display is being performed by the display control unit, the predetermined lottery A second specific effect executing means capable of suggesting that the result has reached the predetermined result (giving a background change notice),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination), it is possible to display the symbols in a variable manner and then stop the display, and also to perform the predetermined lottery (big hit determination). When the result of () is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), it is possible to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player, and a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) It is configured to be able to execute a specific effect (prefetch effect) that can suggest that the result of (1) has become a predetermined result (big hit or small hit). Specifically, as a particular display mode (head odd tempai) appears as the display mode of the symbols that are stopped and displayed, the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the predetermined result (big hit or small hit). ) Can be suggested (first specific effect), on the other hand, when a display mode other than the specific display mode (head odd tempai) appears as the display mode of the symbols to be stopped and displayed, It becomes possible to suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) has become the predetermined result (big hit or small hit) (second specific effect) while the next variable display is being performed. There is. That is, suggesting that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) has become a predetermined result (big hit or small hit) is performed in different presentation modes depending on whether or not a particular display mode (head odd tempai) appears. You can do it. Through such a relationship between the first specific effect and the second specific effect, it is possible to realize an attractive effect and increase the player's expectation for the development of the effect.

The display mode of the symbols to be stopped and displayed can be determined based on the symbol lottery table. As the symbol lottery table, a winning symbol lottery table and a losing symbol lottery table can be provided. The winning symbol lottery table can be configured so that the probability of being selected in a specific display mode (head odd number pie) is higher than that of the losing symbol lottery table. When the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is a predetermined result (big hit to small hit), while determining the display mode of the symbol by referring to the winning symbol lottery table, the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) When the result of () is not a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), the display mode of the symbol can be determined with reference to the symbol lottery table for loss. The winning symbol lottery table and the losing symbol lottery table may each be provided as a kind of the effect selecting table A described above.

<Appendix B>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is opened a plurality of times for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out with respect to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during the small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening/closing area, allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and since the opening/closing area is easily opened, the game ball is won in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state changes, so that the number of gaming balls that the player can obtain changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor, in the process of earnestly studying the above-mentioned gaming machine, improves the interest of the player in the game by devising the scene for generating a specific effect, and the motivation of the player for the game. I came up with the idea that I could improve.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game and improving a player's motivation for the game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) Identification information display means (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information,
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, display control means capable of stop display after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means,
When the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit or small hit) and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode by the display control means, a specific game state advantageous for the player (big hit game state) ) Specific game state control means that can be transferred to,
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the predetermined result before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode by the display control means. And a suggestion means capable of suggesting that
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including a specific result (big hit) are provided,
The suggestion means, after shifting to the specific game state a specific number of times (number of times less than the limiter number), identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, and triggers the stop display. When the result of the one predetermined lottery performed after the predetermined lottery is the specific result, it is possible to execute a specific effect (freeze effect),
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination), identification information display means (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74, display device 16), the identification information can be variably displayed and then stopped and displayed, while the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), and the identification information is displayed in a specific manner. When stopped and displayed, it is possible to shift to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player. In addition, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode. It is possible to suggest that the result is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit). Here, as the predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a plurality of types of results including a specific result (big hit) are provided, and a specific number of times (1 more than a limiter number) to a specific game state (big hit game state). (A small number of times), the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode, and one predetermined lottery performed after the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) that triggered the stop display. When the result of (big hit determination) is a specific result (big hit), a specific effect (freeze effect) can be executed. That is, if the specific number of times (the number of times less than the limiter number) is expressed as (N-1) times, after the specific game state (big hit game state) has occurred (N-1) times, the Nth specific game state ( The condition for generating the big hit game state) is established, and after the N-th specific game state (big hit game state) ends, the specific game state (big hit game state) is further set based on the specific result (big hit). It is possible to execute a specific effect (freeze effect) when it is determined that the effect can be generated. As a result, a specific game state (big hit game state) based on a specific result (big hit) may occur even after the Nth specific game state (big hit game state) ends through a specific effect (freeze effect). Since it is possible to inform the player, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the execution of a specific effect (freezing effect). Then, when a specific effect (freeze effect) is executed, the player's feelings can be raised and the game can be excited.

The predetermined result includes the special figure 1 big hit, the special figure 2 big hit, and the small hit, and the specific result may be the special figure 2 big hit or the small hit. Further, the specific number may be one less than the limiter number, or may be the same number as the limiter number.

(B-2) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game that can be shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player State control means,
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, a suggestion means capable of suggesting that the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result,
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including a first predetermined result (small hit) and a second predetermined result (big hit) are provided,
As the specific game state, a first specific game state corresponding to the first predetermined result (big hit game state via small hit) and a second specific game state corresponding to the second predetermined result (via small hit) Not a big hit game state) is provided,
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, the specific game state control means shifts to the first specific game state on condition that a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. Is possible,
In the suggestion means, the result of the predetermined lottery becomes the first predetermined result, the predetermined prize is established, and the result of the one predetermined lottery performed after the predetermined lottery is the above-mentioned. In the case of the second predetermined result, it is possible to suggest that it is possible to shift to the second specific game state by executing a specific effect (freeze effect) triggered by the establishment of the predetermined prize. Is
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game state advantageous for the player (big hit game) It is possible to shift to a state), and it is possible to suggest that the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) has become a predetermined result (big hit or small hit). As the predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a plurality of types of results including a first predetermined result (small hit) and a second predetermined result (big hit) are provided, and a specific game state (big hit game state) As a first specific game state (big hit game state via small hit) corresponding to a first predetermined result (small hit) and a second specific game state (small hit) corresponding to a second predetermined result (big hit) Big hit game state that does not go through) is provided. Here, if the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the first predetermined result (small hit), the first specific game state (, if the predetermined prize (V prize) is established. It is possible to shift to the big hit game state via the small hit. In addition, the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes the first predetermined result (small win), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and it is performed after the predetermined lottery (big hit determination). When the result of the one predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the second predetermined result (big hit), a specific effect (freeze effect) is executed when a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that it is possible to shift to the second specific game state (a big hit game state that does not go through a small hit). That is, the condition for generating the first specific game state (big hit game state via small hit) is satisfied, and the second after the end of the first specific game state (big hit game state via small hit) When it is determined that a specific game state (a big hit game state that does not go through a small hit) can be generated, it is possible to notify the player of that through a specific effect (freeze effect). There is. The trigger for executing such a specific effect (freeze effect) is the establishment of a predetermined prize (V prize). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that a specific effect (freeze effect) will be executed when a predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and at the same time, a specific effect (freeze effect) will be executed. In the case of playing, the player's feelings can be raised and the game can be lively.

(B-3) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game that can be shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player State control means,
A predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the specific game state,
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, a suggestion means capable of suggesting that the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result,
The lottery means,
A first lottery means capable of performing a first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) when the first condition (winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 420) is established,
A second lottery means capable of performing a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) when the second condition (winning of a game ball into the second starting opening 440) is established is provided. ,
When the second condition is satisfied, the control can be performed more advantageously for the player than when the first condition is satisfied,
In the predetermined game state, the second condition is easily established as compared with the non-predetermined game state,
The predetermined game state control means is controllable so as not to shift to the predetermined game state after the end of the one specific game state when a specific condition (reach of the limiter count) is satisfied, And a predetermined game state re-transfer means capable of re-transferring to the predetermined game state after the end of the one specific game state which is transferred after the specific game state,
In the case where the suggestion means is able to shift to the predetermined game state again by the predetermined game state re-shift means, by executing a specific effect (freeze effect), one of the second predetermined lottery It is possible to suggest that the result is the predetermined result,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game state advantageous for the player (big hit game) It is possible to shift to a state), and after the end of the specific game state (big hit game state), it is possible to shift to a predetermined game state (time saving game state). The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is triggered by the establishment of the first condition (the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420) or the second condition (the winning of the playing ball into the second starting opening 440). Where, when the second condition (the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) is established, the first condition (the winning of the playing ball into the first starting opening 420) is fulfilled. Than the non-predetermined game state in the predetermined game state (time saving game state), the second condition (winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) can be controlled more advantageously for the player. Is easily established. In this respect, the predetermined game state (time saving game state) is a game state advantageous to the player. Here, if a specific condition (reach of the limiter number) is satisfied, it is possible to control not to shift to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of one specific game state (big hit game state). However, after the end of the one specific game state (big hit game state) that shifts after the specific game state (big hit game state), it is possible to shift again to the predetermined game state (time saving game state). Then, when it is possible to shift to the predetermined game state (time saving game state) again in this way, by executing a specific effect (freeze effect), one second predetermined lottery (second) It is configured to be able to suggest that the result of the special symbol lottery is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit). That is, even when a specific condition (reaching the limiter count) is satisfied and the generation of the predetermined game state (time saving game state) is temporarily interrupted, the generation of the predetermined game state (time saving game state) is restarted. When it is decided to obtain, it is possible to notify the player of the fact through a specific effect (freeze effect). As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that a specific effect (freeze effect) will be executed, and to raise the player's feelings when the specific effect (freeze effect) is executed. It is possible to excite the game.

(B-3′) The gaming machine of (B-3) above,
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including a first predetermined result (small hit) and a second predetermined result (big hit) are provided,
As the specific game state, a first specific game state corresponding to the first predetermined result (big hit game state via small hit) and a second specific game state corresponding to the second predetermined result (via small hit) Not a big hit game state) is provided,
When the result of the second predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, the specific game state control means sets the first specific game state on condition that a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. Can be migrated,
In the suggestion means, the result of the second predetermined lottery becomes the first predetermined result, the predetermined prize is established, and the second predetermined one performed after the second predetermined lottery. When the result of the lottery is the second predetermined result, it is possible to execute the specific effect when the predetermined prize is established.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, as the predetermined result (big hit to small hit), a plurality of types of results including a first predetermined result (small hit) and a second predetermined result (big hit) Is provided, as the specific game state (big hit game state), the first specific game state (big hit game state via small hit) and the second predetermined result corresponding to the first predetermined result (small hit) A second specific game state (a big hit game state that does not go through a small hit) corresponding to (big hit) is provided. Here, if the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) is the first predetermined result (small hit), on the condition that a predetermined prize (V prize) is established, It is possible to shift to one specific game state (big hit game state via small hit). In addition, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), a predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the second predetermined lottery (second If the result of one second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed after the special symbol lottery is the second predetermined result (big hit), a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. It is configured to be able to execute a specific effect (freeze effect) when the above is done. That is, the condition for generating the first specific game state (big hit game state via small hit) is satisfied, and the second after the end of the first specific game state (big hit game state via small hit) When it is determined that a specific game state (a big hit game state that does not go through a small hit) can be generated, it is possible to notify the player of that through a specific effect (freeze effect). There is. The trigger for executing such a specific effect (freeze effect) is the establishment of a predetermined prize (V prize). As a result, it is possible to further increase the player's expectation that a specific effect (freezing effect) is executed when a predetermined prize (V prize) is established.

In the second embodiment, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small win), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the second predetermined If the result of the one second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed after the lottery (second special symbol lottery) is the second predetermined result (big hit), a predetermined prize (V prize) It has been described that the specific effect (freeze effect) is executed when the above condition is established. In the present invention, the trigger for executing the specific effect (freezing effect) and the condition for executing the specific effect (freezing effect) are not limited to this example. For example, a specific effect (freeze effect) may be executed during the first specific game state (a big hit game state that goes through a small hit). In addition, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the second predetermined lottery (second If the result of the one second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed after the special symbol lottery is the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established. It may be possible to execute a specific effect (freeze effect) by using this as an opportunity (or during the first specific game state (a big hit game state that passes through a small hit)).

In addition, in particular, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the second predetermined lottery ( Second special symbol lottery) The result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed first among the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed after the second predetermined symbol lottery In the case of a result (big hit), a specific effect (freeze effect) may be executed when a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. That is, the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) becomes the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined prize (V prize) is established, and the second predetermined lottery (second Even if the result of one second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed after the special symbol lottery) is the second predetermined result (big hit), the second predetermined one If the lottery (second special symbol lottery) is not the second predetermined lottery that was initially performed (second special symbol lottery ... special map 2 hold that is digested immediately after reaching the limiter count), specified The effect (freeze effect) may not be executed. When the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the first predetermined result (small hit), the variation time (variation time A) of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination), and the predetermined And the variation time (variation time B) of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) when the result of the lottery (big hit determination) is the second predetermined result (big hit) The fluctuation time B may be shorter than the fluctuation time A. Even in this case, the result of the first predetermined second lottery (second special symbol lottery ... special figure 2 hold that is exhausted immediately after reaching the limiter count) is the second predetermined result Even if a specific variation time (variation time longer than the variation time A) is determined as the variation time of the identification information based on the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) in the case of (big hit) Good.

In the second embodiment, when the second condition (winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) is met, the first condition (winning of the playing ball into the first starting opening 420) is met. It has been described that the control can be performed more advantageously for the player than the case. "When the second condition (the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) is established, the player is more than the case where the first condition (the winning of the playing ball into the first starting opening 420) is established. Means for "controllable advantageously for" is not particularly limited. For example, it is possible to configure the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) to have a higher probability of being a small hit than the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery). The probability of a small hit in the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) may be 0 or may not be 0. Further, it is possible to configure the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) to have a higher jackpot probability than the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery). Further, it is possible to configure the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) to have a lower probability of being lost than the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery). Further, it is possible to configure the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) to have a higher probability of a big hit with a larger number of rounds than the first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery). is there.

Further, the second predetermined lottery (the second special symbol lottery) than the first predetermined lottery (the first special symbol lottery) is a big hit (including a big hit via a small hit) with a large number of saved time. It is possible to configure so that the probability that In the second embodiment, the number of time-savings given after the end of the big hit game state (the big hit game state that goes through the small hit and the big hit game state that does not go through the small hit) generated based on the second special symbol lottery is the limiter number. As long as it has not reached, it is explained as 100 times. However, in the present invention, the number of shortening times is not particularly limited, and even after the jackpot gaming state generated based on the second special symbol lottery, a number of shortening times less than 100 times may be given. Good. For example, after the end of the big hit game state that occurred based on the first special symbol lottery, the number of times saved may be one, or even if the number of times limiter has not been reached, the number of times saved It may be 0.

In addition, with the special winning opening which is opened in the 1st specific game state (the big hitting game state which goes through the small hit), the big winning opening which is opened in the 2nd specific game state (the big hitting game state which does not go through the small hit) The same special winning opening may be used, or different special winning openings may be used. A big winning opening (big winning opening A) that is opened in the first specific game state (big winning game state that goes through the small hit), and a large opening in the second specific game state (big hit gaming state that does not go through the small hit) When the special winning opening (big winning opening B) is a different big winning opening, the number of prize balls due to winning at the special winning opening A may be greater than the number of prize balls due to winning at the big winning opening B. The number of prize balls for winning in the special winning opening B may be larger than the number of prize balls for winning in the special winning opening A, or these prize balls may be equal. As the special winning opening B, a special winning opening different from the first special winning opening 540a and the second special winning opening 540b may be provided.

<Appendix C>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is opened a plurality of times for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out with respect to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during the small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening/closing area, allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and since the opening/closing area is easily opened, the game ball is won in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state changes, so that the number of gaming balls that the player can obtain changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The inventor of the present invention improves the interest of the player in the game by devising the scene controlled in the effect mode selected by the operation of the player in the process of earnestly examining the game machine as described above. This led to the idea that the player's willingness to play the game could be improved.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game and improving a player's motivation for the game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game that can be shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player State control means,
A predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the specific game state,
Production mode control means capable of controlling in any one of a plurality of production modes (single hitting mode and selection mode each time),
An operation unit (operation button group 66) capable of receiving an operation for selecting the effect mode,
The lottery means,
A first lottery means capable of performing a first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) when the first condition (winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 420) is established,
A second lottery means capable of performing a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) when the second condition (winning of a game ball into the second starting opening 440) is established is provided. ,
When the second condition is satisfied, the control can be performed more advantageously for the player than when the first condition is satisfied,
In the predetermined game state, the second condition is easily established as compared with the non-predetermined game state,
The predetermined game state control means, when the number of the specific game state transitioned in the predetermined game state reaches a specific number (limiter number), after the specific number of times of the specific game state, the predetermined game state. While it is possible to control not to shift to the state, it is possible to shift to the predetermined gaming state again after the end of the one specific gaming state that shifts after the specific number of times of the specific gaming state,
The operation means is capable of accepting an operation for selecting the effect mode during the specific game state of the specific number of times,
The effect mode control means is selected by the operation of the operation means during a predetermined period (pullback zone) until the specific game state is transferred to the one specific game state after the specific number of times the specific game state is finished. It is possible to control in production mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game state advantageous for the player (big hit game) It is possible to shift to a state), and after the end of the specific game state (big hit game state), it is possible to shift to a predetermined game state (time saving game state). The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is triggered by the establishment of the first condition (the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420) or the second condition (the winning of the playing ball into the second starting opening 440). Where, when the second condition (the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) is established, the first condition (the winning of the playing ball into the first starting opening 420) is fulfilled. Than the non-predetermined game state in the predetermined game state (time saving game state), the second condition (winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) can be controlled more advantageously for the player. Is easily established. In this respect, the predetermined game state (time saving game state) is a game state advantageous to the player. Here, when the number of specific game states (big hit game state) transferred in a predetermined game state (time saving game state) reaches a specific number (limiter number), the specific game state (big hit) of the specific number (limiter number) After the end of the (gaming state), it is possible to control not to shift to a predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state), but to shift after the specific number of times (limiter number) of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) After the end of the specific game state (big hit game state), it is possible to shift again to the predetermined game state (time saving game state). Therefore, after the specific number of times (limiter number) of the specific game state (big hit game state) is finished, a predetermined period (pullback zone) until the one specific game state (big hit game state) occurs is from the player. If it tries, the fate of whether or not the predetermined game state (time saving game state) can be generated again is at stake, and this is an extremely important period. Then, in such a predetermined period (pullback zone), it is configured to be controllable to the effect mode (single hitting mode or every-time selection mode) selected by the operation of the player. As a result, during the period (pullback zone), through the effect mode (single hit mode or every-time selection mode), an effect regarding whether or not the predetermined game state (time saving game state) can be generated again (through the character battle, the second predetermined It is possible to perform an effect that suggests the result of the lottery (second special symbol lottery), and it is possible to greatly enliven the game during the period (return zone). Further, the operation for selecting the effect mode (single hitting mode or every-time selection mode) can be accepted during the specific game state (big hit game state) of the specific number of times (limiter number). Therefore, it is possible for the player to realize that the predetermined period (return zone) will soon start through his/her own action of selecting the production mode (single hit mode or every-time selection mode), and the predetermined period (return zone). Can provide an opportunity to prepare for the beginning.

(C-2) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game that can be shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player State control means,
A predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the specific game state,
Production mode control means capable of controlling in any one of a plurality of production modes (single hitting mode and selection mode each time),
An operation unit (operation button group 66) capable of receiving an operation for selecting the effect mode,
The lottery means,
A first lottery means capable of performing a first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) when the first condition (winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 420) is established,
A second lottery means capable of performing a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) when the second condition (winning of a game ball into the second starting opening 440) is established is provided. ,
When the second condition is satisfied, the control can be performed more advantageously for the player than when the first condition is satisfied,
In the predetermined game state, the second condition is easily established as compared with the non-predetermined game state,
The predetermined game state control means does not shift to the predetermined game state after the end of the final specific game state in one of the sets, assuming that the specific game state of a specific number of times (limiter number) is one set. While it is controllable, it is possible to generate the next set which is started from the one specific game state that shifts after the final specific game state,
The effect mode control means, in a predetermined period (pullback zone) from the end of the final specific game state in the one set to the transition to the first specific game state in the next set, in the operating means It is possible to control to the effect mode selected by operation,
The effect mode selectable via the operation means has contents according to the number of times the set has occurred,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game state advantageous for the player (big hit game) It is possible to shift to a state), and after the end of the specific game state (big hit game state), it is possible to shift to a predetermined game state (time saving game state). The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is triggered by the establishment of the first condition (the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420) or the second condition (the winning of the playing ball into the second starting opening 440). Where, when the second condition (the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) is established, the first condition (the winning of the playing ball into the first starting opening 420) is fulfilled. Than the non-predetermined game state in the predetermined game state (time saving game state), the second condition (winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) can be controlled more advantageously for the player. Is easily established. In this respect, the predetermined game state (time saving game state) is a game state advantageous to the player. Here, if a specific number of times (limiter number) of a specific game state (big hit game state) is set once, after a final specific game state (big hit game state) in one set, a predetermined game state (time saving) It is controllable not to shift to the gaming state), but generates the next set starting from one specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that shifts after the final specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) It is possible. Therefore, after the final specific game state (big hit game state) in one set ends, the predetermined period (pullback zone) until the first specific game state (big hit game state) in the next set occurs from the player. If it tries, the fate of whether or not the predetermined game state (time saving game state) can be generated again is at stake, and this is an extremely important period. Then, in such a predetermined period (pullback zone), it is configured to be controllable to the effect mode (single hitting mode or every-time selection mode) selected by the operation of the player. As a result, during the period (pullback zone), through the effect mode (single hit mode or every-time selection mode), an effect regarding whether or not the predetermined game state (time saving game state) can be generated again (through the character battle, the second predetermined It is possible to perform an effect that suggests the result of the lottery (second special symbol lottery), and it is possible to greatly enliven the game during the period (return zone). Further, the repeated occurrence of the set means that the advantageous state for the player continues, but the effect modes selectable by the player have contents according to the number of times the set is generated. There is. Therefore, letting the player realize how long the advantageous state continues through his/her own action of selecting the production mode, and the desired production due to the increase in the number of times the set is generated. Greater satisfaction can be provided if the mode can be selected.

As described in the second embodiment, it is performed after the second predetermined lottery (the second special symbol lottery) that has triggered the generation of the specific game state (big hit game state) of the specific number (limiter number). The result of the other second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit) (big hit or small hit in the special figure 2 hold at the time when the particular gaming state occurs) In the case of), a specific game state (a big hit game state via a small hit game state, or a small hit game state that occurs based on the one second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) It is possible to generate a predetermined game state (time saving game state) again after the end of the big hit game state which does not pass through. In addition, a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) performed after the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) that triggered the generation of the final specific game state (big hit game state) in one set If the result of the 2 special symbol lottery) is a predetermined result (big hit to small hit) (the big hit or the small hit is included in the special figure 2 hold at the time when the particular game state occurs), if the one Starting from a specific game state (a big hit game state that goes through a small hit game state, or a big hit game state that does not go through a small hit game state) that occurs based on a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) It is possible to generate the next set. The effect mode selectable by the player has a content corresponding to the number of times the set has occurred. For example, the type of character that the player can select differs depending on the number of times the set has occurred. Is possible. For example, a predetermined character may be selected each time in the selection mode on condition that the number of times the set has been generated reaches a predetermined number.

In addition, as described in the second embodiment, the information included in the start winning command based on the second start mouth winning is stored in the second effect start storage area as the hold information. The hold information includes information (judgment result information) indicating the result of the big hit judgment. In the pullback zone, an effect is performed in the single striking mode or the selection mode every time, and the second effect start storage area (0) (or the second effect start storage area (1) to the second effect start is performed through the effect. It is suggested whether or not hit information (information indicating that it is a big hit or information indicating that it is a small hit) is included in the storage area (4) as the determination result information. Here, when the hit information is included in the second effect start storage area (a big hit or a small hit is included in the special figure 2 hold), a special effect (for example, freeze effect) is entered before entering the pullback zone. ) May be performed to notify that a big hit or a small hit is included in the special figure 2 hold. In this case, even after the notification by the special effect, the player is allowed to select the effect mode (single hitting mode or every-time selection mode) during the big hit game state (or the small hit game state) and is selected. The above suggestion may be performed through the effect in the effect mode (the effect performed at the time of changing the special symbol corresponding to the hold or before the change). The pullback zone is a period corresponding to the pullback mode.

<Appendix D>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is opened a plurality of times for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out with respect to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during the small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening/closing area, allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and since the opening/closing area is easily opened, the game ball is won in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state changes, so that the number of gaming balls that the player can obtain changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The inventor of the present invention has come to the idea that in the process of earnestly examining the above-mentioned gaming machine, a desired effect can be achieved by devising the variation time of the identification information.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a desired effect.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(D-1) Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information,
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, display control means capable of stop display after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means,
A variation time determining means capable of determining a variation time which is the time from the start of variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of the identification information,
And a predetermined game state ending means capable of ending a predetermined game state (big hit game state) when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The variable time determination means is the number of the predetermined lottery that have been executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied, in which the variation display and the stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery have not been executed. According to the above, it is possible to determine the fluctuation time in the first fluctuation display after the predetermined condition is satisfied,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to change the display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) and then stop the display, and display the change of the identification information. It is possible to determine the variation time which is the time from the start of the process until the identification information is stopped and displayed. Here, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined game state (big hit game state) can be ended. However, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the variation time in the first variation display is a predetermined condition. Of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) that has been executed at the time when is established, the number of items (holding balls) for which the variable display and stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) have not been executed. It is configured so that it can be determined according to. Prior to the present invention, when the present inventor, after entering a predetermined game state (big hit game state), enters a period during which the reserved balls are exhausted, an effect indicating that the player enters the period and the predetermined game state (big hit) I wanted to do both of the effects that show the game results during the game state. However, when the number of holding balls is small, the fluctuation display for the number of holdings ends quickly, so the time required for those effects is longer than the time when the fluctuation display is performed, and the fluctuation time concerned I faced the problem of not being able to complete those staging within. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the variation time in the first variation display after the predetermined condition is satisfied can be determined according to the number of retention balls, so the retention ball Even when the number of is small (for example, one), by increasing the variation time in the first variation display, both effects can be completed within the variation time. In this way, the present inventor has found that a desired effect can be realized while the variable display of the identification information is being performed.

(D-1′) The gaming machine of (D-1) above,
The fluctuation time is a total time of the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time),
The fluctuation time determining means,
First variation time determining means capable of determining the first variation time;
A second variation time determining means capable of determining the second variation time,
The first variation time determination means has not yet performed variable display and stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery among the predetermined lottery that has been executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to determine the first fluctuation time according to the number of things,
The second variation time determination means can determine the second variation time according to the result of the predetermined lottery.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the variation time is the total time of the first variation time (first half variation time) and the second variation time (second half variation time), and the first variation time (first half variation time). (Variation time) indicates that the variation information and stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) are not executed in the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) that has been executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied. While it is possible to determine according to the number of certain things (holding balls), the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time) can be determined according to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit judgment). Is configured. Prior to the present invention, the present inventor has an effect unrelated to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) during the period in which the reserved ball is consumed (for example, an explanation of what kind of game performance the period has). I wanted to do a production with a screen). However, when the number of holding balls is small, the fluctuation display for the number of holdings ends early, so the time required for the effect is longer than the time when the fluctuation display is being performed, and within the fluctuation time. Faced the problem that the production could not be completed. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the first variation time (first half variation time) can be determined according to the number of holding balls, so that the number of holding balls is small. Even if the first variation time (first half variation time) is lengthened, the effect can be completed within the variation time. In this way, the present inventor has found that a desired effect can be realized while the variable display of the identification information is being performed. Further, the first variation time (first half variation time) is used for the effect (for example, the effect accompanied by the above-mentioned explanation screen) unrelated to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) as described above, and the second variable time. The (second half variation time) can be determined (in accordance with the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination)) regardless of the time required for the effect. Therefore, when designing the second variation time (second half variation time) and the effect (effect according to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination)) performed using the second variation time (second half variation time), the first variation Since it is not necessary to consider the time (first half variation time) (for example, the time required for the presentation accompanied by the explanation screen), it is possible to improve the convenience of the design.

As an effect unrelated to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination), an effect indicating that a predetermined game state (big hit game state) ends and a reserved period is consumed (pullback zone) is entered ( There is an effect for displaying a rush screen) and an effect for displaying a game result in a predetermined game state (big hit game state) (effect for displaying a result screen). For example, when there is one holding ball at the time when the jackpot gaming state at the time of reaching the limiter number is one, both the rush screen and the result screen are the first special symbol in the predetermined period (pullback zone). Displayed during fluctuation. Further, for example, when there are two holding balls at the time when the big hit game state at the time of reaching the limiter count is two, the rush screen is displayed during the first special symbol change in the predetermined period (pullback zone). , The result screen is displayed during the second special symbol change in the predetermined period (withdrawal zone). On the other hand, examples of effects according to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) include reach effects and effects using characters or the like (for example, final battle effects). According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, an effect (time required for the effect) that is unrelated to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is different depending on the gaming state or the number of holding balls. The first variation time (first half variation time) is individually provided as the variation time for the effect. On the other hand, as the variation time for the effect depending on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination), regardless of whether or not an effect unrelated to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed, Two fluctuation times (second half fluctuation time) are provided in common. As a result, it is possible to efficiently insert (display) the unrelated effects (the rush screen, the result screen, etc.). It should be noted that the result screen may be displayed when all the reserved balls are out of order, and the result screen may not be displayed when there is a big hit or a small hit in the reserved balls.

It should be noted that during the predetermined period (pullback zone), an image that prompts the player to left-hand may be displayed, or an image that prompts the player to right-hand may be displayed. In addition, when the number of limiters is written as N times, the player is urged to right-hand in the (N−1)th big hit game state after the end of the big hit game state or in the Nth big hit game state. It is also possible to display an image (an image prompting the user to save the special figure 2 hold). During the big hit game state, the second condition (winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440) is not established (the time for shifting to a state where the game ball can easily pass through the second starting port 440 is very short). ) May be configured.

(D-2) Identification information display means (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information,
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, display control means capable of stop display after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means,
A variation time determining means capable of determining a variation time which is the time from the start of the variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of the identification information,
The fluctuation time is a total time of the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time),
The fluctuation time determining means,
First variation time determining means capable of determining the first variation time;
A second variation time determining means capable of determining the second variation time,
The first variation time determining means determines the first variation in accordance with the number of unexecuted variable displays and stop displays of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery among the executed predetermined lottery. It is possible to determine the time,
The second variation time determination means can determine the second variation time according to the result of the predetermined lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to change the display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) and then stop the display, and display the change of the identification information. It is possible to determine the variation time which is the time from the start of the process until the identification information is stopped and displayed. Here, the fluctuation time is the total time of the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) and the second fluctuation time (second half fluctuation time), and the first fluctuation time (first half fluctuation time) is the predetermined lottery that has been executed. While it is possible to determine according to the number of things (holding balls) for which the variable display and the stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) have not been executed (the big hit determination), The second variation time (second half variation time) is configured to be determined according to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination). Prior to the present invention, the present inventor has an effect unrelated to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) during the period in which the reserved ball is consumed (for example, an explanation of what kind of game performance the period has). I wanted to do a production with a screen). However, when the number of holding balls is small, the fluctuation display for the number of holdings ends early, so the time required for the effect is longer than the time when the fluctuation display is being performed, and within the fluctuation time. Faced the problem that the production could not be completed. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the first variation time (first half variation time) can be determined according to the number of holding balls, so that the number of holding balls is small. Even if the first variation time (first half variation time) is lengthened, the effect can be completed within the variation time. In this way, the present inventor has found that a desired effect can be realized while the variable display of the identification information is being performed. Further, the first variation time (first half variation time) is used for the effect (for example, the effect accompanied by the above-mentioned explanation screen) unrelated to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) as described above, and the second variable time. The (second half variation time) can be determined (in accordance with the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination)) regardless of the time required for the effect. Therefore, when designing the second variation time (second half variation time) and the effect (effect according to the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination)) performed using the second variation time (second half variation time), the first variation Since it is not necessary to consider the time (first half variation time) (for example, the time required for the presentation accompanied by the explanation screen), it is possible to improve the convenience of the design.

(D-3) Identification information display means (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information,
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, display control means capable of stop display after the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display means,
A variation time determining means capable of determining a variation time which is the time from the start of variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of the identification information,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game that can be shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player State control means,
And a predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the specific game state,
The lottery means,
A first lottery means capable of performing a first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) when the first condition (winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 420) is established,
A second lottery means capable of performing a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) when the second condition (winning of a game ball into the second starting opening 440) is established is provided. ,
When the second condition is satisfied, the control can be performed more advantageously for the player than when the first condition is satisfied,
In the predetermined game state, the second condition is easily established as compared with the non-predetermined game state,
The predetermined game state control means, when the number of the specific game state transitioned in the predetermined game state reaches a specific number (limiter number), after the specific number of times of the specific game state, the predetermined game state. While it is possible to control not to shift to the state, it is possible to shift to the predetermined gaming state again after the end of the one specific gaming state that shifts after the specific number of times of the specific gaming state,
The variation time determining means determines the variation time according to the number of times of the second predetermined lottery performed after the second predetermined lottery that triggered the transition to the specific game state of the specific number of times. It is possible to determine,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game state advantageous for the player (big hit game) It is possible to shift to a state), and after the end of the specific game state (big hit game state), it is possible to shift to a predetermined game state (time saving game state). The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is triggered by the establishment of the first condition (the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420) or the second condition (the winning of the playing ball into the second starting opening 440). Where, when the second condition (the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) is established, the first condition (the winning of the playing ball into the first starting opening 420) is fulfilled. Than the non-predetermined game state in the predetermined game state (time saving game state), the second condition (winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) can be controlled more advantageously for the player. Is easily established. In this respect, the predetermined game state (time saving game state) is a game state advantageous to the player. Here, when the number of specific game states (big hit game state) transferred in a predetermined game state (time saving game state) reaches a specific number (limiter number), the specific game state (big hit) of the specific number (limiter number) After the end of the (gaming state), it is possible to control not to shift to a predetermined gaming state (time saving gaming state), but to shift after the specific number of times (limiter number) of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) After the end of the specific game state (big hit game state), it is possible to shift again to the predetermined game state (time saving game state). Therefore, from the player's point of view, the period until the one specific game state (big hit game state) occurs after the specific number of times (limiter number) of the particular game state (big hit game state) is finished, It is an extremely important period because it is destined whether or not the predetermined game state (time saving game state) can be generated again.

On the other hand, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to variably display the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) and then stop the display. It is possible to determine the variation time which is the time from the start of the variable display of to the stop display of the identification information. In particular, in the above period, the variation time is set after the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) that has triggered the transition to the specific game state (big hit game state) of the specific number (limiter number). It is configured so that it can be determined in accordance with the number of times of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) (reserved ball) that has been taken. Prior to the present invention, the present inventor, when the number of times of a specific game state (big hit game state) occurred in a predetermined game state (time saving game state) reaches a certain number of times (number of limiters), and then plunges into the above period , I wanted to perform both an effect that shows that the game enters the period and an effect that shows the game result up to the period. However, when the number of holding balls is small, the fluctuation display for the number of holdings ends quickly, so the time required for those effects is longer than the time when the fluctuation display is performed, and the fluctuation time concerned I faced the problem of not being able to complete those staging within. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to determine the variation time according to the number of holding balls, so even if the number of holding balls is small, the variation time By increasing the time, it is possible to complete both effects described above within the fluctuation time. In this way, the present inventor has found that a desired effect can be realized while the variable display of the identification information is being performed.

<Appendix E>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is opened a plurality of times for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out with respect to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during the small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening/closing area, allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and since the opening/closing area is easily opened, the game ball is won in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state changes, so that the number of gaming balls that the player can obtain changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor improves the player's interest in the game and enhances the player's motivation for the game by making ingenuity in the production using the symbols in the process of earnestly examining the above-mentioned gaming machine. I came to the idea that it could be done.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game and improving a player's motivation for the game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(E-1) Symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols,
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
Display control means capable of stopping and displaying N symbols in the symbol display means based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means,
An operation means (production button) capable of accepting an operation by a player,
The operation means, in the predetermined operation effective period before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started in the symbol display means, can accept an effective operation,
The display control means tentatively displays one symbol each time the operating means is operated during the predetermined operation valid period, and when the number of symbols tentatively displayed reaches N. While it is possible to restart the variable display of all the symbols, it is possible to perform a control to finally stop and display the symbols according to the display mode of the symbols when the predetermined operation valid period has expired. is there,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to stop and display N symbols on the symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination). However, after the variable display of the symbols is started and before the symbols are finally stopped and displayed, in the predetermined operation effective period, one symbol is provisionally set every time the player operates the operation means (production button). It is possible to restart the variable display of all the symbols when the number of symbols temporarily displayed reaches N. Then, according to the display mode of the symbol when the predetermined operation valid period has expired, it is possible to perform control to finally stop and display the symbol. Thereby, it is possible to repeat the temporary display (temporary stop) and the variable display of the symbols in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (buttons for effect), and the display mode of the symbols changes momentarily in the process. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that the display mode of the symbols finally stopped and displayed will be an advantageous mode (for example, a display mode corresponding to a big hit). In addition, even when the display mode of the symbol when the predetermined operation valid period has expired (display mode when the period expires) and the display mode of the symbol that should be finally stopped (final display mode) do not match, the period expires. By changing the display mode of the symbols according to the hour display mode, the final display mode can be appropriately derived. Then, through the change from the display mode at the time of expiration of the period to the final display mode, the player's feeling of hope that an advantageous mode (for example, a display mode corresponding to a big hit) is derived, is enhanced, and a game is played. Can be heaped up.

(E-2) Symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols,
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, display control means capable of stop display after the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display means,
As an effect related to the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, suggestive effect execution means capable of performing any suggestive effect (change of background color) of a plurality of suggestive effects,
An operation means (production button) capable of accepting an operation by a player,
The operation means, in the predetermined operation effective period before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed after the variable display of the symbol is started in the symbol display means, can accept an effective operation,
The display control means is capable of tentatively displaying a symbol by operating the operation means during the predetermined operation effective period,
The suggestive effect execution means can change the effect from one suggestive effect to another suggestive effect in accordance with the display mode of the provisionally displayed symbol.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to stop and display the symbols on the symbol display means (display device 16 and the like) after the symbols are variably displayed based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination). However, after the variable display of the symbol is started, and before the symbol is finally stopped and displayed for a predetermined operation effective period, the player operates the operation means (button for effect) to change the symbol. It is possible to display it temporarily. Then, according to the display mode of the tentatively displayed symbols, an effect (indication effect (background color)) related to the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is changed from one suggestion effect (background color) to another suggestion effect. It is configured so that it can be changed to (background color). Thereby, in conjunction with the operation of the operating means (production button), the symbols are displayed temporarily (temporary stop), and a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is performed according to the display mode of the temporarily stopped symbols. It is possible to change the effect related to the result (for example, an effect that indicates the degree of expectation regarding the big hit). Then, through the correlation between the temporary stop of the design and the change of the suggestive effect (background color), it is possible to realize the attractive effect and increase the player's expectation for the development of the effect. it can.

In the present invention, while the temporary display (temporary stop) and the variable display of the symbols are repeated in conjunction with the operation of the operation means (production button), the operation means (production button) is operated once. It may be possible that the symbol is temporarily stopped (variable display is restarted) every time it is moved, or that the symbol is temporarily stopped (variable display is restarted) each time the operation means (production button) is operated a plurality of times. Good. In addition, when the effect regarding the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) changes (for example, the effect suggesting the degree of expectation regarding the big hit) changes according to the display mode of the temporarily stopped symbol, the scenario of the change is determined in advance. It may be that. For example, a plurality of stages of background colors having different expectations (for example, none, white, blue, green, purple, red, and rainbow) are provided, and the display mode of the temporarily stopped design and the degree of change of the background color are set. After associating with, the display mode of the temporarily stopped symbol may be determined in advance. For example, when the display mode A is temporarily stopped, the background color is changed in three steps (for example, no→green), and when the display mode B is temporarily stopped, the background color is changed in two steps (for example, green→red). When the display mode C is temporarily stopped, the background color can be changed by one step (for example, red→rainbow). In the present specification, “stop” refers to the final stop of the design (identification information) (when the variation time has expired), and the final stop of the design (identification information) ( This is a concept that includes both a temporary stop (in the middle of the change time).

<Appendix F>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is opened a plurality of times for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out with respect to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during the small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening/closing area, allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and since the opening/closing area is easily opened, the game ball is won in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state changes, so that the number of gaming balls that the player can obtain changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor, in the process of earnestly studying the above-mentioned gaming machine, improves the interest of the player in the game by devising a device for determining the variation pattern of the identification information, and the motivation of the player for the game. I came up with the idea that I could improve.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game and improving a player's motivation for the game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(F-1) A game machine provided with a first control means (main control circuit 100) for performing control regarding execution of a game, and a second control means (sub control circuit 200) for performing control regarding effect,
The first control means is
Identification information display means (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information,
A predetermined lottery execution means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the predetermined lottery execution means, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of the identification information is determined. Specific lottery execution means capable of performing a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) for
In a variation pattern according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means, a display control means capable of displaying the identification information in the identification information display means in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
Transmission means capable of transmitting information (data indicating a variation pattern) according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means to the second control means,
When the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit) and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode on the identification information display means, a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is obtained. With a specific game state control means that can be transferred,
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including a first predetermined result (10 round big hit) and a second predetermined result (6 round big hit) are provided,
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, it is possible to control the player more advantageously than when the result of the predetermined lottery is the second predetermined result.
As a result of the specific lottery, there are provided a plurality of types of results including a first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite large hit B]) and a second specific result (per chance 2 [fixed value]),
The specific lottery execution means,
Probability that the result of the specific lottery will be the first specific result when the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, and the result of the predetermined lottery will be the second predetermined result. When the result of the specific lottery is different from the probability of becoming the first specific result, the result of the specific lottery is determined when the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result. The probability that the second specific result will be the same as the probability that the specific lottery result will be the second specific result when the predetermined lottery result is the second predetermined result. And when the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result and when the result of the predetermined lottery is the second predetermined result, the result of the specific lottery is the first It is possible to perform the specific lottery so that the probability that the result of the specific lottery is the second specific result is higher than the probability that the specific result is 1.
The second control means
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode in the identification information display means, the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result. Equipped with a suggestion means that can suggest that (because the look-ahead effect),
The transmitting means is
When the result of the specific lottery is the first specific result, and when the result of the specific lottery is the second specific result, the result of the specific lottery is It is possible to send corresponding information to the second control means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination). It is possible to carry out a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) for determining the, but when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the first predetermined result (10 round big hit), the specific lottery The probability that the result of (variable pattern lottery) will be the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite big hit B]) and the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) will be the second predetermined result (six round big hit) If the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite big hit B]), the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the first predetermined When the result (10 big jackpot) is reached, the probability that the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) will be the second specific result (per chance 2 [fixed value]) and the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) When the result is the second predetermined result (6 round big hit), the probability that the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result (per chance 2 [fixed value]) is the same. As described above, it is possible to perform a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery). Then, the first control means (main control circuit 100), when the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite big hit B]), and the specific lottery In both cases where the (variable pattern lottery) result is the second specific result ([fixed value] per chance 2), information (variable pattern) corresponding to the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) Is transmitted to the second control means (sub-control circuit 200). Accordingly, in both of these cases, before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode in the second control unit (production control unit) (sub control circuit 200) based on the transmitted information. It is possible to perform an effect (indication effect) that can suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) has become the predetermined result (big hit).

Here, in the conventional gaming machine, the result I and the result II having mutually different degrees of advantage are provided as a predetermined result (big hit), and the result X is provided as a result of a specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery). In such a form, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the result I, the probability that the result of the specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) is the result X and the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) are In the case where the result II is obtained, the probability of the result X of the specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) being the result X may be designed to be different. As a result, the probability that the variation pattern corresponding to the result X appears depending on whether the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the result I or the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the result II. I tried to improve the interest of the game by making a difference in. However, in such a gaming machine, when the result of a specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) is the result X, information corresponding to the result of the particular lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) is transmitted to the effect control means. Due to the fact that it was not performed, the suggestive effect according to the result X was not performed.

The present inventor pays attention to this point, and separately from the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite large hit B]) (corresponding to the result X in the conventional gaming machine), the second specific result (per chance 2 [ Fixed value]) and the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the first predetermined result (10 round big hit), the result of the specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) is the second specific result (chance). The probability of being 2 [fixed value] and the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the 2nd predetermined result (6 round big hit), the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the 2nd By configuring so that the probability of being a specific result ([fixed value] per chance 2) is the same, the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the second specific result (per [chance 2 [fixed value]]. Value]) and also when the result of the specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) is the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite big hit B]), the specific lottery (variation pattern lottery) ) Information (data indicating a variation pattern) according to the result of (1) is transmitted to the second control means (sub-control circuit 200). As a result, not only when the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the second specific result ([fixed value] per chance 2), the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific Even when the result (per chance 2 [indefinite large hit B]) is obtained, it is possible to perform the suggestive effect based on the transmitted information. As a result, the inventor has found that the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) result is the first predetermined result (10 round big hit) and the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is the second predetermined result (6 When a round big hit occurs, the probability that a variation pattern corresponding to the first specific result (per chance 2 [undefined big hit B]) to the second specific result (per chance 2 [fixed value]) appears While making a difference, the succeeding suggestion production was successful according to the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite large hit B]) to the second specific result (per chance 2 [fixed value]).

(F-1′) The gaming machine of (F-1) above,
The display control means,
When the result of the specific lottery is the first specific result and when the result of the specific lottery is the second specific result, the identification information display means has the same variation pattern. In, it is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display.
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the variation pattern corresponding to the first specific result (per chance 2 [indefinite big hit B]) and the second specific result (per chance 2 [fixed value]) are obtained. Where the corresponding variation patterns are the same, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the first predetermined result (10 round big hit) and when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit judgment) is the second predetermined When the result (six rounds of big hits) is produced, the suggestion effect corresponding to the variation pattern can be performed while making a difference in the probability that the variation pattern appears.

(F-2) A gaming machine including first control means (main control circuit 100) for performing control relating to execution of a game, and second control means (sub control circuit 200) for performing control relating to effect,
Identification information display means (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information,
A predetermined lottery executing means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) related to the game when a predetermined condition (winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 to the second starting opening 440) is established,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the predetermined lottery execution means, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of the identification information is determined. Specific lottery execution means capable of performing a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) for
In a variation pattern according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means, a display control means capable of displaying the identification information in the identification information display means in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
When the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit) and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode on the identification information display means, a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is obtained. Specific game state control means that can be transferred,
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode in the identification information display means, the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result. Suggestive production execution means capable of performing suggestive production (prefetch production) that can suggest that
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, a suggestive effect determination means capable of determining whether to perform the suggestive effect, and,
As a result of the specific lottery, a plurality of types of results including a first specific result (“indefinite big hit”) and a second specific result (“fixed value”) are provided,
The first control means is
A transmission unit capable of transmitting information (data indicating a variation pattern) according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution unit to the second control unit,
The transmitting means is
When the result of the specific lottery is the first specific result, the information according to the result of the specific lottery is not transmitted to the second control means, while the result of the specific lottery is the first 2 When a specific result is obtained, it is possible to transmit information according to the result of the specific lottery to the second control means,
The suggestive effect execution means,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, the result of the specific lottery performed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition among the plurality of times the predetermined condition is satisfied is the first result. When a specific result is obtained and it is determined that the suggestive effect is performed based on satisfaction of the Nth predetermined condition after the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the variable display of the identification information is displayed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. While the suggestion effect is not performed while it is performed, while the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the Kth predetermined condition (K is an arbitrary integer of 1 to N) after the predetermined predetermined condition is satisfied. Is able to perform the above-mentioned suggestion,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination). Where it is possible to perform a specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) for determining, the first control means (main control circuit 100) determines that the result of the specific lottery (variation pattern lottery) is the first specific result. In the case of (“unspecified big hit”), information (data indicating a fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) is not transmitted to the second control means (sub-control circuit 200). If the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the second specific result (“fixed value”), information (variation pattern is shown) according to the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery). (Data) can be transmitted to the second control means (sub-control circuit 200). As a result, when the result of the specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result (“fixed value”), the second control means (production control means) is performed based on the transmitted information. In the (sub-control circuit 200), it is possible to suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) has become the predetermined result (big hit) before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode (indication effect). (Pre-reading effect) can be performed, but when the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific result (“unspecified jackpot”), the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) The effect (prefetch effect) is not performed due to the fact that the information according to the result of () is not transmitted. Here, when a predetermined condition (winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 to the second starting opening 440) is satisfied a plurality of times, one of the plurality of predetermined conditions is satisfied. The result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) performed based on the satisfaction of the condition of is the first specific result (“unspecified big hit”), and based on the satisfaction of the Nth predetermined condition after the satisfaction of the one predetermined condition. When it is determined to perform the suggestive effect (prefetch effect), the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is not performed while the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. While the variable information of the identification information is displayed based on the Kth predetermined condition (K is an arbitrary integer from 1 to N) after the condition is satisfied, the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) can be performed. Has been done. Where N can be an arbitrary integer of 1 or more, for example, when N=3, the identification performed based on the satisfaction of one predetermined condition (for example, the first holding ball). The result of the lottery (variable pattern lottery) becomes the first specific result (“unspecified big hit”), and the third predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the fourth holding ball) after the first predetermined condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is to be performed, the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is displayed while the identification information is variably displayed based on the satisfaction of the one predetermined condition (for example, the first holding ball). ) Is not performed, while the identification information is variably displayed based on the first satisfaction of the predetermined condition (for example, the second holding ball) after the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, While variable display of the identification information is performed based on the second predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, the third holding ball), and the third predetermined condition being satisfied after the one predetermined condition is satisfied ( For example, while the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the fourth holding ball, it is possible to perform the suggestive effect (prefetch effect). By providing such a first specific result (“unspecified jackpot”) and a second specific result (“fixed value”) as a result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery), various suggestive effects (prefetch effect) ) Can be realized, and the player's interest in the suggested effect (prefetch effect) can be increased.

(F-3) A game machine including first control means (main control circuit 100) for performing control relating to execution of a game, and second control means (sub control circuit 200) for performing control regarding effect,
Identification information display means (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information,
A predetermined lottery executing means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) related to the game when a predetermined condition (winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 to the second starting opening 440) is established,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the predetermined lottery execution means, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of the identification information is determined. Specific lottery execution means capable of performing a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) for
In a variation pattern according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means, a display control means capable of displaying the identification information in the identification information display means in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
When the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (big hit) and the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode on the identification information display means, a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is obtained. Specific game state control means that can be transferred,
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode in the identification information display means, the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result. Suggestive production execution means capable of performing suggestive production (prefetch production) that can suggest that
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, a suggestive effect determination means capable of determining whether to perform the suggestive effect, and,
As a result of the specific lottery, a plurality of types of results including a first specific result (“indefinite big hit”) and a second specific result (“fixed value”) are provided,
The first control means is
A transmission unit capable of transmitting information (data indicating a variation pattern) according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution unit to the second control unit,
The transmitting means is
When the result of the specific lottery is the first specific result, the information according to the result of the specific lottery is not transmitted to the second control means, while the result of the specific lottery is the first 2 When a specific result is obtained, it is possible to transmit information according to the result of the specific lottery to the second control means,
The suggestive effect execution means,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied a plurality of times, it is determined that the suggestive effect is to be performed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition among the plurality of times the predetermined condition is satisfied. After the condition is satisfied, it is determined that the suggestive effect is not performed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition for the first time to the N-th time, and the suggestive effect is performed based on the satisfaction of the (N+1)th predetermined condition after the predetermined condition is satisfied. When it is determined that the predetermined effect is to be performed, while the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the satisfaction of the one predetermined condition, the suggestion effect based on the satisfaction of the one predetermined condition is performed, and While the variation information of the identification information is displayed based on the Kth predetermined condition (K is an arbitrary integer of 1 to (N+1)) after the condition is satisfied, the (N+1)th time is satisfied after the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to perform the suggestive effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information to the stop display of the identification information based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination). Where it is possible to perform a specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) for determining, the first control means (main control circuit 100) determines that the result of the specific lottery (variation pattern lottery) is the first specific result. In the case of (“unspecified big hit”), information (data indicating a fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) is not transmitted to the second control means (sub-control circuit 200). If the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the second specific result (“fixed value”), information (variation pattern is shown) according to the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery). (Data) can be transmitted to the second control means (sub-control circuit 200). As a result, when the result of the specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) becomes the second specific result (“fixed value”), the second control means (production control means) is performed based on the transmitted information. In the (sub-control circuit 200), it is possible to suggest that the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) has become the predetermined result (big hit) before the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode (indication effect). (Pre-reading effect) can be performed, but when the result of the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is the first specific result (“unspecified jackpot”), the specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) The effect (prefetch effect) is not performed due to the fact that the information according to the result of () is not transmitted. Here, when a predetermined condition (winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 to the second starting opening 440) is satisfied a plurality of times, one of the plurality of predetermined conditions is satisfied. It is determined that the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is performed based on the satisfaction of the condition (1), and it is determined that the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is not performed based on the satisfaction of the first to Nth predetermined conditions after the predetermined condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is to be performed based on the satisfaction of the (N+1)th predetermined condition after the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the change of the identification information based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. While the display is performed, the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) based on the satisfaction of the one predetermined condition is performed, and the Kth time (K is an arbitrary integer from 1 to (N+1)) after the one predetermined condition is satisfied. While the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, it is possible to perform the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) based on the (N+1)th predetermined condition being satisfied after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Is configured. It is possible to adopt an arbitrary integer of 1 or more as N. For example, if N=2, a suggestive effect (prefetching) based on the satisfaction of one predetermined condition (for example, the first holding ball). It is decided to perform an effect, and a suggestive effect (prefetch effect) is performed based on satisfaction of the first and second predetermined conditions (for example, the second and third holding balls) after the predetermined condition is satisfied. If it is determined not to perform, and it is determined to perform the suggestive effect (prefetch effect) based on the third predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, the fourth holding ball) after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the one While the variable display of the identification information is performed based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (for example, the first holding ball), the suggestive effect based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (for example, the first holding ball) While performing the (prefetch effect), while the variable information of the identification information is displayed based on the satisfaction of the first predetermined condition after the satisfaction of the predetermined condition (for example, the second holding ball), the predetermined condition is displayed. While the variable information of the identification information is displayed based on the second predetermined condition being satisfied (for example, the third holding ball) after the condition is satisfied, and the third predetermined condition after the first predetermined condition is satisfied. While variable display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment (for example, the fourth holding ball), the third predetermined condition is established (for example, the fourth holding ball) after the one predetermined condition is established. It is possible to perform a suggestive effect (prefetch effect) based on the above. As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to realize various suggestive effects (prefetch effects), and increase the player's interest in the suggestive effects (prefetch effects). be able to.

As the information corresponding to the result of the above specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery), in addition to the information indicating the variation pattern, information indicating the result of a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) (information indicating whether or not it is a big hit) You can If the result of a specific lottery (variable pattern lottery) is a "fixed value" (variable pattern with the same selection probability regardless of the type of jackpot), information that indicates whether or not it is a jackpot and information that indicates a variation pattern Is transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 100) to the second control means (sub-control circuit 200), the result of the specific lottery (fluctuation pattern lottery) is “undetermined jackpot” (depending on the type of jackpot). If the variation patterns have different selection probabilities), only the information indicating whether or not it is a big hit is transmitted from the first control means (main control circuit 100) to the second control means (sub control circuit 200), and the variation pattern It is possible to configure such that the information indicating is not transmitted. In this case, if the selection probability of the "fixed value" is made higher than the selection probability of the "unspecified jackpot", the selection rate of the "unspecified jackpot" is relatively lowered, and the suggestive effect (prefetching effect) is performed. The frequency can be increased.

In the second embodiment, as the predetermined result (big hit), the first predetermined result (10 round big hit) and the second predetermined result (6 round big hit) are provided. In the present invention, the type of jackpot is not particularly limited, and as the first predetermined result and the second predetermined result, a jackpot with a large number of time saving times and a jackpot with a small number of time saving times may be adopted, respectively. There may be a big hit and a short-time no big hit, or a probability variation big hit and a probability variation no big hit.

<Appendix G>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is opened a plurality of times for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out with respect to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during the small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening/closing area, allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and since the opening/closing area is easily opened, the game ball is won in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state changes, so that the number of gaming balls that the player can obtain changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor improves the player's interest in the game and enhances the player's motivation for the game by making ingenuity in the production using the symbols in the process of earnestly examining the above-mentioned gaming machine. I came to the idea that it could be done.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game and improving a player's motivation for the game. To do.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(G-1) Symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols,
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, display control means capable of stop display after the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display means,
The display control means can perform re-variation display a plurality of times to temporarily stop the variable display of the symbols and then restart the variable display of the symbols before finally stopping and displaying the symbols in the symbol display means. Equipped with re-variation display control means,
The re-variation display control means,
It is possible to perform variable display and temporary stop display of the symbols so that the symbols displayed along the plurality of virtual lines (effective lines) are in the reach mode, respectively,
In the one re-variation display, while the first symbol (odd symbol) is displayed along with at least one virtual line of the plurality of virtual lines in a reach mode, the virtual lines other than the virtual line are displayed. When the second symbol (even number symbol) is displayed along with the reach mode, the display control is performed so that the first symbol is in the reach mode along all virtual lines in the next re-variation display. Is possible to do,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination), it is possible to display the symbols in a variable manner and then stop the symbols, but finally stop the symbols. Before the display, the variable display of the symbols is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display of the symbols is restarted, so that the variable display can be performed a plurality of times. Then, it is possible to perform variable display and temporary stop display of the symbols so that each of the symbols displayed along the plurality of virtual lines (effective lines) is in the reach mode, and in one re-variation display, Along with at least one virtual line (effective line) of the plurality of virtual lines (effective line), the first symbol (odd number symbol) is displayed in a reach mode, while the other than the virtual line (effective line). When the second symbol (even symbol) is displayed along the virtual line (effective line) so as to be in the reach mode, in the next re-variation display, the first symbol along all virtual lines (effective line) The display control can be performed so that the (odd number pattern) is in the reach mode. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to be interested in that the first symbol (odd number symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed on at least one virtual line (effective line), and all the virtual lines (effective line) ), the first symbol (odd number symbol) becomes the reach mode, so that the player's expectation can be increased.

The first symbol (odd symbol) and the second symbol (even symbol) may be provided in plural types. For example, as the first symbol (odd symbol), "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" are provided, while as the second symbol (even symbol), "2", " “4”, “6”, and “8” may be provided. In this case, in the above-mentioned "the first pattern (odd number symbol) is the reach mode along all virtual lines (effective line)", the first symbol (odd number) which constitutes the reach mode in each virtual line (effective line) Other than the case where all the symbols are the same first symbol (odd symbol), one first symbol (odd symbol) as the first symbol (odd symbol) that constitutes the reach mode in each virtual line (effective line) and The case where other 1st symbols (odd symbols) are mixed is included.

(G-2) Symbol display means (display device 16 or the like) capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols,
A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means, display control means capable of stop display after the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol display means,
The display control means can perform re-variation display a plurality of times to temporarily stop the variable display of the symbols and then restart the variable display of the symbols before finally stopping and displaying the symbols in the symbol display means. Equipped with re-variation display control means,
The re-variation display control means,
It is possible to perform variable display and temporary stop display of the symbols so that the symbols displayed along the plurality of virtual lines (effective lines) are in the reach mode, respectively,
When a specific symbol (“NEXT”) appears as a symbol that is not displayed along the virtual line in the one re-variation display, it is possible to generate the next re-variation display,
It is possible to increase the number of the virtual lines as the number of occurrences of the re-variation display increases.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, based on the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination), it is possible to display the symbols in a variable manner and then stop the symbols, but finally stop the symbols. Before the display, the variable display of the symbols is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display of the symbols is restarted, so that the variable display can be performed a plurality of times. Then, the variable display and the temporary stop display of the symbols can be performed so that the symbols displayed along the plurality of virtual lines (effective lines) are in the reach mode, respectively. When a specific symbol (“NEXT”) appears as a symbol that is not displayed along the line (valid line), it is possible to generate the next re-variation display and the number of re-variation display occurrences. The number of virtual lines (effective lines) can be increased as the number of virtual lines increases. As a result, the number of virtual lines (effective lines) is increased due to the appearance of a specific symbol (“NEXT”), which makes the player interested and the increased virtual lines (effective lines). Through the appearance of the reach mode along the line, the player's expectation can be increased.

In the present specification, the “virtual line” refers to a (virtual) line that cannot be visually recognized by the player. In the second embodiment, the symbol (identification information) is finally displayed (when the variation time expires) along one line, but until the final stop of the symbol (identification information) ( The temporary stop (temporary stop) in the middle of the change time may be performed along a plurality of lines. In the above, the plurality of lines (lines different from the final result display line) are referred to as “virtual lines”.

<Appendix H>
In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, when a player launches a game ball, which is a game medium, into a game area by a launching device, and the game ball wins a winning opening or the like provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls Will be paid out. Further, some pachinko gaming machines execute a big hit game in which the normally-closed special winning opening is opened a plurality of times for a predetermined period of time. In the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out with respect to the game balls that have won the special winning opening. Here, some of the special winning openings have a blade member, and such a special winning opening performs a big hit game by repeatedly operating the blade members to change from the closed state to the open state. In addition, some pachinko game machines execute a small hit game in which the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined period from the closed state.

For example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, during the small hitting game, the blade member changes its posture to an open posture that opens the opening/closing area, allowing the game ball to enter the opening/closing area. There is a pachinko game machine. In this pachinko gaming machine, a V winning opening is provided in the opening/closing area, and a gaming ball is won in the V winning opening during the small hitting game, whereby the big hitting game state is controlled. In this pachinko game machine, when a game ball wins the V winning opening during the small hit game and is controlled to the big hit game state, the small hit pattern showing the result of the special symbol determination that triggered the big hit game state this time. Depending on the type, the game state after the big hit game is finished is determined. It should be noted that, by changing the gaming state, for example, the transition probability to the big hit gaming state will change. Therefore, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes, which may change whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous for the player.

By the way, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-233375, it is easy to win the small hitting game during the time saving game, and since the opening/closing area is easily opened, the game ball is won in the V winning opening. There is a possibility of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even if the time saving game is not in progress, it may shift to the big hit game state and the game state may be changed. By changing the game state as described above, as a result, the number of game balls that the player can obtain changes. As described above, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the gaming state changes, so that the number of gaming balls that the player can obtain changes not at a fixed rate. Therefore, it is suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

The present inventor appropriately realizes the game play intended by the developer of the game machine by carefully devising the end condition of the predetermined game state in the process of earnestly examining the above-mentioned game machine. I came to the idea that I could do it.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of achieving desired game playability.

In this respect, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(H-1) A first winning device (first starting opening 420) into which a game ball can enter,
A second winning device (second starting opening 440) into which a game ball can enter,
The state regarding the possibility of entering the game ball into the second winning device is the first state (closed state) where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning device and the game ball enters the second winning device. Winning state control means capable of changing between an easy second state (open state),
Specific game state control means capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first winning device.
After the end of the specific game state, a predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) which can be easily controlled to the second state by the winning state control means,
Identification information display means (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information,
Display control means capable of changing and displaying the identification information on the identification information display means based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second winning device, and then stopping the display.
The predetermined game state control means, when the variable display of the identification information performed by the display control means is started for the first time after the end of the specific game state, ends the predetermined game state and causes the winning state control means to It is possible to shift to a non-predetermined game state that is easy to control in the first state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first winning device (first starting opening 420), a specific game state advantageous for the player (big hit game state) It is possible to shift to, and after the specific game state (big hit game state) is over, the second state (open state) where the game ball can easily enter the second winning device (second starting opening 440) It is possible to shift to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) that is easy to control. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second winning device (second starting port 440), it is possible to display the identification information in a variable manner and then stop the display, in a specific game state (big hit game state). ) Is started for the first time after the variation display of the identification information is started, the predetermined game state (time saving game state) is ended, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning device (second starting opening 440). It is configured to be able to shift to a non-predetermined game state that is easy to control in the first state (closed state). Thereby, for example, even when the variable display is performed for a long time, it is possible to end the predetermined game state (time saving game state) without waiting for the end of the variable display. It is possible to reduce the possibility that a large number of game balls will enter the second winning device (the second starting opening 440) (the reserved balls will be accumulated) during the variable display. In this respect, if a situation occurs in which more reserve balls accumulate than the game machine developer has expected, there is a concern that the game play intended by the developer may not be realized. To be done. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(H-1′) The gaming machine of (H-1) above,
A displacement member (normal electric accessory) that is arranged laterally of the second winning device and is capable of changing its position between a first position (retracted state) and a second position (projected state). 460),
In the second winning device, the side on which the displacement member is arranged is open,
The winning state control means controls the displacement member to the first position by arranging the displacement member in the first position, while controlling the displacement member to the second state by arranging the displacement member in the second position. It is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory 460) changes its position between the first position (retracted state) and the second position (protruded state). Where it is possible, the displacement member (normal electric accessory 460) is arranged beside the second winning device (second starting port 440), while the second winning device (second starting port 440) is The side on which the displacement member (normal electric accessory 460) is arranged is open. As a result, by changing the position of the displacement member (ordinary electric accessory 460), the state relating to the possibility of entering the game ball into the second winning device (second starting opening 440) is the first state (closed state). And it is possible to switch between the second state (open state), it is possible that a large number of game balls enter the second winning device (second starting opening 440) (holding balls are accumulated) Can be reduced to

(H-2) A lottery means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (big hit determination) regarding the game,
When the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the lottery means is a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game that can be shifted to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player State control means,
And a predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) after the end of the specific game state,
The lottery means,
A first lottery means capable of performing a first predetermined lottery (first special symbol lottery) when the first condition (winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 420) is established,
A second lottery means capable of performing a second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) when the second condition (winning of a game ball into the second starting opening 440) is established is provided. ,
In the predetermined game state, the second condition is easily established as compared with the non-predetermined game state,
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including a first predetermined result (small hit) and a second predetermined result (big hit) are provided,
When the result of the second predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, the specific game state control means shifts to the specific game state on condition that a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. Is possible
When the result of the second predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, the predetermined game state control means terminates the predetermined game state and ends the predetermined game state even if the predetermined prize is not established. It is possible to shift to a non-predetermined game state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the result of the predetermined lottery (big hit determination) becomes a predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a specific game state advantageous for the player (big hit game) It is possible to shift to a state), and, after the end of the specific game state (big hit game state), it is possible to shift to a predetermined game state (time saving game state). The predetermined lottery (big hit determination) is triggered by the establishment of the first condition (the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420) or the second condition (the winning of the playing ball into the second starting opening 440). However, in the predetermined game state (time saving game state), as compared with the non-predetermined game state, the second condition (winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440) is easily established. Here, as the predetermined result (big hit or small hit), a plurality of types of results including a first predetermined result (small hit) and a second predetermined result (big hit) are provided, and the second predetermined lottery When the result of the (second special symbol lottery) is the first predetermined result (small win), a specific game state (big win game state) is established on condition that a predetermined prize (V prize) is established. It is possible to transfer. Then, when the result of the second predetermined lottery (second special symbol lottery) is the first predetermined result (small hit), the predetermined game is achieved even if the predetermined prize (V prize) is not established. It is configured so that the state (time saving game state) can be ended and a non-predetermined game state can be entered. As a result, for example, even if the player intentionally hits such that the predetermined prize (V prize) is not established, regardless of whether the predetermined prize (V prize) is established or not. Since it is possible to end the predetermined game state (time saving game state), it is possible to prevent the timing of ending the predetermined game state (time saving game state) from changing depending on how the player strikes. In this regard, there is a concern that if the player plays a game by a method different from the one assumed by the developer of the gaming machine, the game play intended by the developer cannot be realized. To be done. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

(H-3) A first winning device (first starting opening 420) into which a game ball can enter,
A second winning device (second starting opening 440) into which a game ball can enter,
The state regarding the possibility of entering the game ball into the second winning device is the first state (closed state) where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning device and the game ball enters the second winning device. Winning state control means capable of changing between an easy second state (open state),
Specific game state control means capable of shifting to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first winning device.
After the end of the specific game state, a predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) which can be easily controlled to the second state by the winning state control means,
Identification information display means (first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74, display device 16, etc.) capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information,
Display control means capable of changing and displaying the identification information on the identification information display means and then stopping the display based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first winning device or the second winning device. Prepare,
The predetermined game state control means, as a variable display of the identification information by the display control means, when the variable display based on the game ball entered the second winning device is performed a predetermined number of times, the predetermined game state On the other hand, even if the number of times of the variable display performed based on the game ball entering the second winning device does not reach the predetermined number, the first A non-predetermined game that is easy to end the predetermined game state and control to the first state by the prize state control means when the variable display based on the game ball entering the winning device is performed a specific number of times. It is possible to shift to the state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first winning device (first starting opening 420), a specific game state advantageous for the player (big hit game state) It is possible to shift to, and after the specific game state (big hit game state) is over, the second state (open state) where the game ball can easily enter the second winning device (second starting opening 440) It is possible to shift to a predetermined game state (time saving game state) that is easy to control. Then, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first winning device (first starting opening 420) or the second winning device (second starting opening 440), the identification information can be variably displayed and then stopped. Where possible, as a variation display of the identification information, when a variation display based on the game ball entering the second winning device (second starting opening 440) is performed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined game state (time saving game While it is possible to end the state), the number of times of the variable display performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second winning device (second starting opening 440) has not reached the predetermined number. Even if there is a variable display based on the game balls entering the first winning device (first starting opening 420) a certain number of times, the predetermined game state (time saving game state) is ended, It is configured so that the game ball can be shifted to a non-predetermined game state in which it is easy to control the game ball to the first state (closed state) where it is difficult to enter the second winning device (second starting opening 440). Thereby, for example, the player may hit the game ball into the first winning device (first starting opening 420) instead of the second winning device (second starting opening 440). Even if it is possible to end the predetermined game state (time saving game state) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first winning device (first starting opening 420), the second winning device (second winning device) It is possible to prevent a situation in which the predetermined game state (time saving game state) continues for an excessively long period of time due to the game ball not entering the starting opening 440). In this regard, if a situation occurs where the predetermined gaming state (time-saving gaming state) continues for a longer period of time than is expected by the gaming machine developer, the game play intended by the developer is realized. There is a concern that you will not be able to do it. According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

As the specific number of times, an arbitrary number of times (for example, 5 times) can be appropriately adopted, and may be less than a predetermined number of times, more than a predetermined number of times, or the same number as the predetermined number of times. May be

[Other expandability of gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment may be configured such that, for example, six-step set values of "1" to "6" can be set by a person involved in the hall. When the set value is changed, for example, the jackpot probability (internal winning probability) in the internal lottery is changed.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a game medium and a privilege is awarded based on the result of the game. In other words, the main control circuit itself does not only play a game medium by shooting or throwing in the game medium according to the physical action of the player and paying out the game medium based on the result of the game. The game medium owned by a person may be electromagnetically managed to allow a game played by circulating the enclosed game class or a game played without medals. Further, the game medium owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game medium management device mounted (connected) to the main control circuit and managing the game medium.

When the game medium management device connected to the main control circuit manages, the game medium management device has a ROM and an RWM (or RAM), is a device provided in the game machine, and is an external game medium not shown. It is connected to the handling device via a predetermined interface so as to be able to perform two-way communication, and lends a game medium (that is, an action to provide a necessary game medium when a player inserts the game medium). ) Or a prize relating to the payout of the game medium (the win is achieved), the payout operation of the game medium (that is, the player obtains the necessary game medium for paying out the game medium). Operation), or the operation of electromagnetically recording the game medium used for the game may be performed. Further, the game medium management device not only manages these actual numbers of game media, but also holds the number of game media to be held, for example, on the front surface of the gaming machine 1 based on the management result of the number of game media. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the retained game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may record and display the total number of game media available to the player for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media to an external game medium handling device, and In addition to the case where the player directly operates, the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the game machine handling device and an external game media handling device. , It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game media only through the external connection terminal board, but the game medium management device plays the game through a dedicated unit or the like. When transmitting and receiving signals to and from the machine, it is also possible to receive game information and the like through a dedicated unit or board for transmitting and receiving signals.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with a lending operation means, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (For example, an IC card), a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money or the like from a mobile terminal, various lending operation means, various operation means such as return operation means, and a game medium handling device-side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all are not shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted valuable value from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays the game and repeats the above operation when a game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, one of the return operation means is operated to transmit the number of game media from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device, thereby playing the game. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored therein when transmitting the number of game media. The player brings the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange the prize, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the game media are transmitted to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is transmitted on the game machine or the game medium handling device side, and the game medium possessed by the player is changed. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is ejected, but cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game hall can be inserted and stored in the member recording medium so that the game can be played again later.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown). Good. In that case, information such as a one-time password that is only known to the player may be set, or the player may be recorded by an image pickup means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to a pachi-slot gaming machine has been described, but a pachi-slot machine, a slot machine using a game ball, or an enclosed game machine also has the same gaming medium management device. It may be provided so that the game medium of the player is managed.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, the number of components inside the game machine can be reduced as compared with the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player from directly contacting the game medium, improve the gaming environment, reduce noise, and reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity via the game medium or the game medium insertion port or payout port. That is, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed game machine configured so that the game media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and data relating to the consumption of the game media, the increase/decrease of the game media associated with the rent, and the payout of the game media are transmitted to the communication cable. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected via an optical signal via a game medium management device, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed game machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed punch pushes the game ball in the standby state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Further, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When the game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of balls held. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is launched from above in the game area, the so-called return ball (foul ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a certain number (for example, 50) of game balls are circulated in a series of paths in the game machine.

Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside of the game machine in the enclosed game machine, the upper plate and the lower plate for temporarily holding the game ball are not provided. Since the game ball is not discharged to the outside in the enclosed game machine, the game ball does not actually exist at the player's hand, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing the game. In an enclosed game machine, a player starts a game after he or she has acquired a ball from a game medium management device. Here, to obtain a possessed ball means that the player obtains a game medium for data management. Then, the game balls are shot from the launching device, the balls that are held are consumed, and the number of balls that are held is reduced. Further, when the game balls pass through the respective winning openings or the like provided in the game area, the number of balls to be held is increased by paying out according to the conditions set according to the winning openings. Further, the number of balls held also increases by lending from the game medium management device. It should be noted that "consumption, lending and payout of game media" means that the possession ball is consumed, lended and paid out. Further, “increasing or decreasing the number of game media” indicates that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending and payout. Further, "data regarding consumption of game media, increase/decrease in game media associated with lending/paying" is data relating to a decrease in the number of balls held due to a game ball being shot and an increase in the number of balls held due to lending and paying out.

The enclosed game machine may have a payout control circuit and operation means (for example, a touch panel type liquid crystal display device, which may be provided separately or integrally with the game machine). However, the game medium management device may be an operation means (for example, a liquid crystal display device of a touch panel type, and may be provided separately or integrally with the game machine. In the payout control circuit, each game ball has a winning opening. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held, for example, when a game ball passes through each winning port, the payout of the game ball by that The number of balls to be held is added to the number of balls to be held, and the number of balls to be held is subtracted when the game ball is fired.The payout control circuit transmits data on the number of balls to be held to the game medium management device by the operation of the player. Although the liquid crystal display device (or touch panel) is not particularly limited in its installation position, it is mainly located in the lower part of the game machine, and the game value managed by the game medium management device is converted into a ball. It accepts requests for (ball lending) and counting (returning) of balls held, and these requests are sent to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit provides data on the current number of balls held. It is instructed to transmit to the medium management device.Here, "gaming value" is money/banknote, prepaid medium, token, electronic money, ticket, etc., and can be converted into a ball by the game medium management device. In the present embodiment, the game medium management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, etc. Also, the number of balls held is the game. It can be used for exchanging prizes at a game hall where the system is installed.

Further, the enclosed game machine has a backup power source. Thus, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before being turned off can be retained. Further, the backup power supply may be used to continuously detect the door frame opening by the door opening sensor, for example. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Further, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The data transmitted and received are the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the game. Information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. Is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, at the transmission source, by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determining whether or not they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not tampered with, It can be confirmed that it is sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the above gaming system, the transmission source has a modulator that modulates a signal, the signal modulated by the modulator is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the destination receives the signal modulated by the modulator. A demodulation unit that demodulates may be included.

As a result, even if a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and a transmission/reception signal between the gaming machine and the game medium management device is transmitted. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received to the transmission source separately from the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted.

With this, by comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, not only is it confirmed that the regular signal was transmitted and received, but also that the regular signal was transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further suppress fraud.

(2) Expandability 2
The big hit game state can play a round game, while the small hit game state basically does not have a round game, and it is possible to open and close the big winning opening in which the accessory continuous differential device does not operate. It is possible to shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player after the big hit game state is finished, but basically it is more advantageous after the small hit game state is finished than before it is shifted to the small hit game state. It does not shift to a different gaming state.
However, when the small winning opening with a specific area is opened during the small hitting game state and the game ball passes through the specific area, the condition device operates, and the accessory continuous differential device operates. After the winning game state is over, the game state is shifted to the big hitting game state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, and at this time, the number of rounds may be counted even after the small hitting game state.

Compared to "Normal Reach" and "Normal Reach", a higher proportion is selected as a big hit for productions that are executed in response to changes in special symbols, and "Super" is executed when there is a high expectation of a big hit. It may have a reach effect. At this time, it is desirable that the “super reach” is a variation pattern having a longer variation time than the “normal reach”. The expectation level is a concept that includes the expectation level for a big hit, a certainty change, and a reduction in working hours. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit (reliability, etc.) is the degree of expectation of a big hit (ratio of big hits) when each reach variation pattern is selected. For example, the reach variation is performed 100 times. If it is a big hit 70 times, the expectation for the big hit is 70% (the appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears is 70%). In addition, the expectation for the probability change and the shortened time means the probability change state (high probability state of special figure, high probability of ordinary figure or low probability of ordinary figure) and short time state (normal state in electric support state after completion of big hit etc.). It is a high-probability state of, and is mainly a low probability state of special maps, but it may be a high probability of special maps) good.

(3) Expandability 3
In the gaming machine of the present invention, the door opening may be a condition for setting change on software. When the power is turned on, the setting key can be turned ON + the RWM (RAM) clear switch can be turned ON to further monitor (detect) the opening of the door to change the setting. When the set value is not set, "E" is displayed in all four digits of the performance display monitor. At this time, a predetermined sound is also generated, but not only the predetermined sound but also a sound "RWM abnormal error." may be generated. When changing the settings, a specific sound is generated (a voice saying "Settings are being changed." may be generated), and all the lamps are turned on. On the back of the gaming machine, the set value changes each time the RWM clear switch is pressed, and when the setting key is returned (pulled out), the normal state is restored. If you open the door and turn on the power with the key turned, you can check the setting value on the back side in the setting confirmation state, and the message "Settings are being changed." is displayed on the screen.

Further, a maintenance mode may be installed. In the maintenance history, the time when the power is turned on, the time when the setting is confirmed, the time when the RWM (RAM) abnormality occurs, the error related to the setting, etc. are recorded. In this case, for example, a maximum of about 200 maintenance histories may be recorded. In the setting history, it is possible to confirm the history of setting change and setting confirmation, and the set value. Note that this history cannot be viewed without a setting key.

Further, the setting change may be displayed only by the control on the sub side, but may be displayed by turning on all the special figure related displays by the control on the main side. In addition, when the setting change display and the special figure related display are performed by full lighting, the full lighting pattern is not provided in the display pattern of the special symbol. Further, the setting change history can be recorded up to about 100, for example, and the maintenance mode can be operated only during the setting confirmation. Moreover, the history cannot be deleted in the hall (game hall).

Further, since the power supply board is provided with a backup function, an RWM error occurs and the performance display monitor is cleared when the boards are switched. Note that no delay is inserted at the final confirmation of setting the set value. The setting is changed during delay.

(4) Expandability 4
In a pachinko gaming machine, a first sensor that detects the opening of the front door and a second sensor that detects that the main body (holding frame of the board) has moved (opening operation, etc.) from the outer frame (machine frame, etc.) And a sensor.

The setting may not be changed when the first sensor detects the opening, and the setting may be changed when the second sensor detects the opening. In this case, the switch that is pressed to change the setting is provided on a board or the like on the rear side of the game machine, and an operator of the game room moves the main body to move the game machine forward (outer frame of the game machine). It is possible to change the settings while being guaranteed to work from the front. The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be changed when both the first sensor and the second sensor detect the opening, or the first sensor may detect the opening. The configuration may be changed when the setting is performed.

[11. Note]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment described above, the following gaming machine can be provided.

[11-1. Each gaming machine in Appendix 1-1 to Appendix 1-8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this kind of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering the ball into the ball entrance and the tendency of paying out the ball is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set to a state corresponding to (see, for example, JP-A-2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payouts from being uniform for each game store or each game table.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, a structural element that influences the entrance rate to the entrance and the tendency toward payout. Alternatively, the state of the control element can only be changed according to the set value, and it cannot be said that the degree of contribution to the improvement of the amusement of the game is necessarily large.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest. is there.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 1-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 1-1
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118),
With a display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for performing variable display of symbols (for example, special symbols) in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time,
A fluctuation pattern determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S78) that determines the fluctuation pattern performed on the display means based on the result of the lottery,
A fluctuation pattern table storage unit (for example, a main ROM 102) that stores a fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation pattern,
The symbol display control means (the variable display of the symbol is performed over the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means (for example, the variation display of the special symbol), and the stop display is performed in a mode showing the result of the lottery ( For example, a main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S93,
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table storage means,
A variation pattern table (for example, a figure The variable time determination table table of the special symbol shown in 23) is stored.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the variation time. Therefore, the higher the set value, the larger the number of times of lottery per unit time, and eventually the result of the lottery. Expectations are increased, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In addition to a lottery number counting means (for example, the main CPU 101) that counts the number of times the lottery is executed from a specific time,
The fluctuation pattern table storage means,
Another variation pattern table (for example, in FIG. 25) defined such that the probability that the short variation pattern is determined as the setting value set by the setting change control unit becomes higher becomes higher than that of the variation pattern table (for example, in FIG. 25). The fluctuation time determination table table of the special symbol when the number of fluctuations shown is 1001 or more is further stored,
The fluctuation pattern determining means,
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when the jackpot lottery of 1001 or more special symbols is performed after the jackpot gaming state is finished), It is configured such that the variation pattern can be determined using the other variation pattern table.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the number of executions of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the variation pattern can be determined by using another variation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value, the more the number of times of lottery per unit time increases remarkably, and the expectation of the player is increased when the number of times of execution of the lottery is a certain number of times of execution, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. The "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, a case where a special jackpot lottery of a predetermined symbol or more (for example, 1001 times or more) is performed after the jackpot gaming state is finished, but is not limited thereto.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, a lottery for variable display of the symbols is performed. Even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a manner showing the result, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when variable display of symbols (for example, variable display of special symbols) is being performed, suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. It may be done. In this case, even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a manner showing the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbol, if it is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of suitability of the game information, It is structured so that the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 1-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machines in Appendix 1-2,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118),
A display means (for example, a display device 16) in which a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) by a predetermined symbol is performed, and the result of the lottery can be shown by a stop mode of the symbol,
A stop mode determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S205) that determines the stop mode of the symbol that can be displayed on the display means based on the result of the lottery,
A stop mode table storage unit (for example, a sub-main ROM 2050) that stores a stop mode table (for example, a decorative pattern determination table in FIG. 24) that is used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determination unit,
A symbol effect control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S207) that controls the symbols to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination unit,
When the symbols are displayed in a mode (for example, the first mode, the second mode, the specific mode) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of profits advantageous to the player (For example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certainty big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certainty big hit) Profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the big hit game control of FIG. 20), which gives a profit.
Equipped with
The profit giving means is
When the symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), and the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of profits Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit that has a relatively high degree of advantage (for example, 10R probability variation big hit),
The stop mode determination means,
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode is It is characterized in that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so as to be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in a specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among a plurality of profits. It is possible to increase the probability that the game will be played, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The stop mode determination means,
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting value set by the setting change control means is the same regardless of the setting value, even though the probability that the specific profit is given is the same. Is higher, the stop mode of the symbol is configured to be determined so that the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode is increased.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting is changed while the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting. Since the probability of being stopped in the specific stop mode is increased as the set value set by the control means is increased, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the adequacy determining means while the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. And even if the stop mode determining means determines that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, the game control means for controlling the game so that it cannot proceed (for example, the process of step S722 is executed. Main CPU 101),
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is being performed, it is determined whether or not the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate. Sometimes. In this case, even if the result of the lottery is a specific result and it is determined that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode, it is unsuitable for determining whether the game information is appropriate or not. If it is determined that the game is not progressed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary notes 1-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machines in Appendix 1-3,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, including a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118, a big jackpot lottery and a main symbol determination lottery),
Lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used in the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol of FIG. 26 or FIG. 27 is a jackpot),
At least display means for performing variable display of symbols (for example, first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74),
A symbol display control unit (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of the symbols and stops and displays the results of the lottery,
In the mode (for example, special figure 1-1 to special figure 1-8, special figure 2-1 to special figure 2-4) showing that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, big hit), the symbol is When displayed, a profit giving means for giving one of a plurality of profits advantageous to the player (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R probability big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R probability big hit) (eg, FIG. 20). With a main CPU 101) that executes a big hit game control,
Equipped with
The lottery table storage means,
A plurality of lottery tables are stored in which the lottery probabilities for specific profits (for example, 10R certainty variation big hits) having a relatively high degree of advantage among the plurality of profits differ according to set values,
The lottery means,
The lottery table is configured to be able to perform the lottery using a lottery table corresponding to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the lottery is performed by using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probability for the specific profit having a relatively high degree of advantage is different depending on the set value. Therefore, the setting change control means sets the lottery. It is possible to change the degree of profit given to the player according to the set value thus set, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The profit giving means is
As the specific profit, at least a special game state advantageous to the player and a high-probability game state in which the profit is provided with a relatively high probability of the game state after the special game state is finished are given. And
The lottery table storage means,
It is characterized in that a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the high-probability game state differs depending on a set value are stored.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the probability of being controlled in the high-probability gaming state varies depending on the set value, so that it becomes possible to improve the gaming interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The profit giving means is
As the specific profit, a specific game state in which the lottery is promoted (for example, a time saving game state) is further given,
The lottery table storage means,
It is characterized in that a plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the specific game state varies depending on a set value are stored.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state varies depending on the set value, so that it becomes possible to improve the gaming interest.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, the lottery related to the variable display of the symbols is performed. Even if the result is the result of giving the specific profit, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed,
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (4), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined while the variable display of the symbols is being performed. In this case, even if the result of the lottery related to the variable display of the symbols is the result of giving the specific profit, the game cannot be advanced. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary notes 1-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machines in Appendix 1-4,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of starting openings including a first starting opening and a second starting opening provided in the game area,
A special lottery means (for example, step S73, step S83, step S118 that can perform a special lottery in a different lottery mode based on the entry (eg, acceptance) of a game ball into each of the plurality of starting openings. CPU 101),
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit) (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the big hit game control in FIG. 20),
Based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit), a specific game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game,
Equipped with
The special lottery means,
When performing the special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening, the probability that the particular result will be the specific lottery depends on the set value set by the setting change control means. Can be done differently, and
The specific game execution means,
Regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, it is more frequent when the game ball enters the second starting opening than when the game ball enters the first starting opening. The specific game is configured to be executable.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of a specific result may differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means, The specific game is executed with a higher frequency when the game ball enters the second starting opening than when the game ball enters the starting opening. That is, if a game ball is won in the second starting opening, it is possible to change the execution frequency of the specific game according to the set value, on the assumption that the specific game is executed with high frequency. It becomes possible to improve the interest.

In addition, "the specific game can be executed more frequently when the game ball enters the second starting opening than when the game ball enters the first starting opening" means the first When the game ball enters the starting opening, the winning judgment (including the probability 0) for the specific result is performed, but the probability that a specific result is obtained in the winning judgment, the game ball enters the second starting opening. Not only a mode lower than the time, but also a mode in which when the game ball enters the first starting opening, the win/loss determination situation for a specific result is not included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Ordinary starting opening provided in the game area (for example, passage gate 49),
An ordinary lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 for making an ordinary hit determination in the ordinary game of FIG. 20) for performing an ordinary lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of the game ball into the ordinary start opening.
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (e.g., normal winning), a variable starter control means (e.g., accepting) that facilitates entry (e.g., acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening. , Main CPU 101),
The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening (first starting opening 420), and the game ball to the second starting opening (first starting opening 440). Special symbol variable display control means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs variable display of the second special symbol based on the entry,
A first game state (for example, both probability variation flag and time saving flag are set to OFF) which is long enough to affect the progress of the game by the time (for example, average time 1000 sec) of the variable display of the second special symbol. State), or the second gaming state (eg, average time 1 sec) is shorter than the variation display time of the first special symbol (eg, average time 10 sec) (eg, average time 10 sec) A gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to an advantageous gaming state in which the probability variation flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF,
Is further provided.

According to the (2) gaming machine, in the second gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the first special symbol, so that the specific game is executed with high frequency. , It is possible to realize that the execution frequency of the specific game is changed according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the normal lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the adequacy determination means is unsuitable before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the start opening (for example, the second start opening). When it is determined that, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the specific game execution means cannot execute the specific game without executing the specific game. And a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722)
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening), a special lottery (for example, a lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening) is performed. Before the result of the second special lottery) is displayed (for example, during the variable display of the special symbol), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening) is a specific result (for example, a small hit). Even if it is determined that the game information is not appropriate in the suitability/unsuitability determination, the game cannot be advanced before the specific game (for example, the small hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 1-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machines in Appendix 1-5,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting opening provided in the game area,
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening,
A first special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on a result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
Ordinary starting opening provided in the game area (for example, passage gate 49),
An ordinary lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 for making an ordinary hit determination in the ordinary game of FIG. 20) for performing an ordinary lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of the game ball into the ordinary start opening.
Based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (e.g., normal winning), a variable starter control means (e.g., accepting) that facilitates entry (e.g., acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening. , Main CPU 101),
Based on that the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is a specific result (for example, a small hit), within a specific area where the specific opening is provided. Specific region variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so that game balls can easily enter (for example, be received)
Second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on the fact that a game ball is received in the specific mouth provided in the specific area,
Equipped with
The specific region variable control means,
It is configured such that the predetermined movable piece can be actuated so that the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area can differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since the probability of a specific result can be changed depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined value is set according to the set value set. The operation frequency of the movable piece is different, and thus the opportunity to be given the privilege can be made different according to the set value set, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific region variable control means,
The ease of entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening is changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the probability of a normal hit is different, a normal symbol is By changing the execution frequency of the special lottery according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is set. It is characterized in that it is carried out in a different manner depending on the situation.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the ease with which the game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening 440) may vary depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of privilege granted based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area varies depending on the set value, which makes it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific region variable control means,
Ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area by changing the probability of the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Is performed so that it can be changed according to the set value.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the ease with which the game ball enters the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening 440) may vary depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is carried out, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area varies depending on the set value set, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the adequacy determination means before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the starting opening, Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means for controlling the specific area variable control means so that the game cannot proceed without activating the predetermined movable piece (for example, the processing of step S722 is performed. Main CPU 101) to execute,
It is characterized by including.

According to the (4) gaming machine, even if the game ball enters the starting opening, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is shown (for example, a special symbol). During the variable display), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is a specific result, it is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of suitability of game information. Is configured so that the game cannot proceed before a predetermined movable piece operates. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 1-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machines in Appendix 1-6,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118),
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result (eg, big hit), a special game state control means (eg, big hit game control in FIG. 20) that can be controlled to a special game state (eg, big hit game state) is executed. Main CPU 101),
A game state control means (eg, step S169) that can control the game state after the special game state is finished to an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (for example, a high-probability game state) With the main CPU 101) that advances the game after setting the flag,
Counting means for counting the number of times (for example, the number of loops) in which the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state after being controlled to the special game state (for example, main CPU 101),
Equipped with
The game state control means,
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous game state is the special result, the special game state is controllable,
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a prescribed number, the game state after the special game state is finished is controlled to the normal game state,
The specified number of times is
It is characterized in that it can be changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to repeat the special game state and the advantageous game state up to a prescribed number of times, and the prescribed number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means, It is possible to improve the interest in playing games.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined number determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery,
The specified number of times determining means,
The lottery for determining the specified number of times is configured so that the expected value for the specified number of times is different according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the prescribed number of times that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for this prescribed number of times is set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because it depends on the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, the counting unit counts even if the number of times counted by the counting unit is less than the specified number. And a game control means for controlling the game so that the number of times counted by does not reach the specified number of times (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722),
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated without being controlled to the normal gaming state (that is, the number of loops) does not reach the prescribed number of times (that is, in the loop). ), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if it is in the loop, if it is determined that the game information is not suitable in the suitability/unsuitability determination, it is configured so that the game cannot proceed without the loop count reaching the specified number. There is. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the first problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 1-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machines in Appendix 1-7,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
With a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting opening 440) (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118). ,
A game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, the big hit game control in FIG. 20). Main CPU 101) to execute,
Production control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 (display control circuit 2300)) capable of at least executing an opening production performed at the start of the special game state and an ending production performed at the end of the special game state,
Equipped with
The lottery means,
While performing the lottery in a mode in which the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the higher the degree of advantage,
The effect control means,
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed such that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect can be lengthened as the set value set by the setting change control means increases. It is characterized in that it is configured to do.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value that is set, the more advantageous the lottery is, while at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. Can be longer as the set value is set higher. Therefore, in the high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time while improving the enjoyment of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variable display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
Further equipped with,
The lottery means,
Regardless of whether or not it is controlled to the special game state, it is possible to extract a random number based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening,
The adequacy determining means,
Even when it is controlled to the special game state, it is configured to be able to determine whether the game information is appropriate or not,
The game control means,
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, the game progress disapproval is performed so that the game cannot be progressed even if the special game state is controlled. It is characterized by having means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S722).

According to the gaming machine of (2), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information may be determined even when the gaming machine is being controlled to the special gaming state. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state, so security is ensured. At the same time, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In order to solve the first problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 1-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machines in Appendix 1-8 are
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (e.g., character continuously operating left gate 1100) and a second entrance (e.g., character continuously operating right gate 1110);
An entry permitting means (for example, a sorting device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances,
Different profits when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance (for example, if the number of rounds is different, or if there is a starting entrance below the entrance, a lottery will be conducted). Profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the big hit game control of FIG. 20) capable of giving the player whether or not it is executed)
Equipped with
The approach permitting means is
Of the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball can be changed according to the set value set by the setting change control means. To do.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, there is a possibility that the profit to be given to the player will be different depending on whether the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. In the first entrance and the second entrance, the accessibility of the game ball can be changed depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Moreover, since the player can aim as to which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, the state of the game element according to the setting while aiming to improve the enjoyment of the game. Can be suitably changed.

In addition, "it is possible to give the player different profits when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance" is, for example, a game at the first entrance. Other than when the number of rounds in the big hit game state is different when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is the starting opening that triggers the lottery For example, the case where the prize is a general winning opening that is not a trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A starting opening (for example, a first starting opening 420, a second starting opening 440) provided in the game area,
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the starting opening (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118),
A display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Game information related to the progress of the game including information on the setting value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of holding storages stored in the holding storage means, a lottery result for the holding storages and variable displays, setting values) A game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
An adequacy determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processes of steps S72 and S82) that determines whether the game information stored in the game information storage unit is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
When the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, even if a game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, the player is informed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed without giving a profit,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), during the variable display of the symbols, when the game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance, but the profit is not yet given, etc., it is stored in the game information storage means. Appropriate/unsuitable for the game information being played may be determined. In this case, if it is determined that the player is not profitable in the suitability/unsuitability of the game information despite the possibility of being profitable, the game proceeds without giving a profit to the player. It is configured so that it cannot be done. This makes it possible to ensure security.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Based on the result of the lottery being a special result, at least the first entrance and the second entrance, the entry validating means for validating the entry of the game ball (for example, a main device for activating a condition device). CPU101) is further provided,
The profit giving means is
When a game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player,
When a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, 16R big hit game state) having a profit ratio higher than the predetermined profit can be given to the player.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the player plays the game by aiming at the second entrance where there is a possibility that a specific profit with a larger profit may be given, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Becomes

According to each of the gaming machines of supplementary notes 1-1 to 1-8 having the above-described configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element in accordance with the setting while improving the interest.

[11-2. Game machine in Appendix 2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this kind of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering the ball into the ball entrance and the tendency of paying out the ball is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set to a state corresponding to (see, for example, JP-A-2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payouts from being uniform for each game store or each game table.

(Second task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, for example, an abnormality may occur in the game set value or the like, and the security is perfect. Is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the state of a gaming element according to settings while improving security.

In order to solve the above-mentioned second problem, the gaming machine of appendix 2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 2
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) And game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
A lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) that performs a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting opening 440).
A symbol variable display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
An adequacy determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) that determines whether the game information is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of accepting the game ball into the first starting opening 440). ,
If the game information stored in the game information is determined to be unsuitable by the adequacy determining means while the variable display of the symbols is being performed, it is determined that the variable display of the symbols is being performed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls so that the game cannot proceed,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information may be determined while the variable display of the symbols is being performed. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is unsuitable, the progress of the game is not permitted even if the variable display of the symbols is displayed, so security is improved. It is possible to improve.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 2 having the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the security.

[11-3. Game machine of Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this kind of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering the ball into the ball entrance and the tendency of paying out the ball is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set to a state corresponding to (see, for example, JP-A-2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payouts from being uniform for each game store or each game table.

(Third subject)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2005-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming machine can be arbitrarily set, changing the payout tendency according to the set value does not necessarily impose a light design load. It is hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to settings while reducing the design load. It is in.

In order to solve the third problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 3,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
Random number generating means for generating a random number within a predetermined width (for example, the main CPU 101 for generating a random number value by executing a program),
Random number extraction means for extracting random numbers based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S73),
Table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) for storing a lottery table (for example, jackpot random number determination table) that defines total random numbers (for example, a range of jackpot determination random numbers) and specific random numbers (for example, jackpot determination value data) ,
A lottery is performed using the random number extracted by the random number extraction means (for example, the process of step S118), and when the extracted random number is a specific random number (for example, jackpot determination value data), a special game state is controlled. Possible special game state control means,
Equipped with
The table storage means is
Stores a lottery table in which at least the total number of random numbers is different according to the setting value set by the setting change control means,
The random number generating means,
The number of total random numbers specified in the lottery table is generated according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for jackpot determination) having a larger number of digits than the numerator (number of jackpot determination value data), the probability of being controlled to a special gaming state (that is, Since the jackpot probability) is changed, the jackpot probability for each set value can be set more finely than the method of changing the number of jackpot determination value data according to the set value with the range of random numbers for jackpot determination fixed. It will be possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A symbol variable display control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
When a random number is extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the appropriateness determining means (step) for determining whether the total random number generated by the random number generating means is suitable or not before the variable display of the symbol is started (step A main CPU 101) that performs the processing of S72 and step S82,
When the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means, game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S722) that controls the game so that it cannot proceed,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of (2), when it is determined that the total random number generated by the random number generating means is unsuitable, the game cannot proceed, so that the set value is ensured while ensuring security. It is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 3 having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[11-4. Each of the gaming machines in Appendix 4-1 and Appendix 4-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this kind of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering the ball into the ball entrance and the tendency of paying out the ball is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set to a state corresponding to (see, for example, JP-A-2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payouts from being uniform for each game store or each game table.

(Fourth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming machine, while the player is suspicious of being able to arbitrarily set the payout tendency. , The interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suppressing a decrease in interest while changing a state of a gaming element according to a setting. Especially.

In order to solve the fourth problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 4-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 4-1
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, the general winning openings 53 to 56) provided in the game area and including the starting opening,
A privilege giving means (for example, a payout device 350) for giving a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on the fact that the game ball is received in any of the plurality of winning openings
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the starting opening (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118),
Display means (for example, the display device 16) for performing at least symbol variation effect based on the result of the lottery,
When a variation effect of the symbol is being performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific prize hole of the plurality of prize holes Setting suggesting means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of suggesting the setting value information about the setting value set by the setting change controlling means based on the acceptance of the game ball in
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the setting change control is performed based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening when the variation effect of the symbol is performed in the specific mode (for example, reach effect). Since there is a possibility that the setting value information about the setting value set by the means will be suggested, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming suspicious. Further, when the variation effect of the symbols is performed in the specific mode, the player may stop the firing of the game ball, but such a situation can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined number determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number lottery) for determining the specified number of times by lottery,
A specific mode determining unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) that determines whether or not to perform the variable effect of the symbol in the specific mode (for example, reach effect),
When it is determined by the specific aspect determination means that the variation effect of the symbol is to be performed in the specific aspect, a specific winning opening determination means that randomly determines any one of the plurality of winning openings as the specific winning opening. (For example, the main CPU 101),
Is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specific winning opening is randomly determined to be one of a plurality of winning openings instead of a fixed winning opening, so that it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game. It should be noted that it is preferable to keep the specific winning openings randomly determined secret, without disclosing it. As a result, the player has an interesting point in which of the winning openings should be aimed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
If the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storing unit is inappropriate, the setting change control unit sets the game ball even if the game ball is received in the specific winning opening. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the variation effect of the symbol is performed, or when the game ball is received in the specific winning opening but the set value information is not yet suggested, the game information storage The suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the setting value information may be suggested, if it is determined to be unsuitable in the suitability/unsuitability determination of the game information, the setting value set by the setting change control means It is configured so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the setting value information. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the fourth problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 4-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 4-2,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting opening (for example, a first starting opening 420, a second starting opening 440) provided in the game area,
A lottery means for performing a lottery based on the fact that a game ball has been received in the starting opening (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S73, S83, and S118),
A display means (for example, a first special symbol display section 73, a second special symbol display section 74) for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
A game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game including controlling the special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, the big hit game control in FIG. 20). Main CPU 101) to execute,
Setting of the set value set by the setting change control means based on satisfying a predetermined condition for accepting the game ball to the starting opening (for example, the overflow point has reached a predetermined point) Setting suggesting means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of suggesting value information,
It is characterized by including.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the current set value (the set value set by the setting change control means) is satisfied based on the fact that the predetermined condition for receiving the game ball into the starting opening is satisfied. Since the set value information can be suggested, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming suspicious. In addition, the execution of the game is prompted so that the game ball is accepted in the starting opening. It should be noted that "to satisfy the predetermined condition regarding acceptance of the game ball into the starting opening" is, for example, held even though the game ball is accepted into the starting opening, because the holding upper limit has been reached. It is assumed that there is not, or when the game ball is accepted at the starting opening and it is not held because it was the upper limit for holding, and points are accumulated and the point reaches a predetermined point. But not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Stores game information relating to the progress of the game including the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of hold storages stored in the hold storage means, a lottery result for the hold storage and variable display, and a set value) With possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)),
Adequacy determination means (main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S72 and S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing.
Further equipped with,
The game control means,
If the adequacy determining unit determines that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is inappropriate, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition may be satisfied when the game ball is received in the starting opening ( For example, even if the overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc.), a game progress disapproval means (for example, a game progress disapproval means for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means) , The main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S722.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the suitability/unsuitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined while the variable display of the symbols is being performed. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be satisfied when the game ball is received in the starting opening, in the determination of suitability or unsuitability regarding the game information made by the game ball being received in the starting opening. When it is determined that the game is not suitable, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to ensure security.

According to the gaming machine of supplementary note 4-1 and the gaming machine of supplementary note 4-2 configured as described above, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in interest while changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting.

[11-5. Amusement machine of Appendix 5]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this kind of gaming machine, the state of the game element (structural element or control element) that influences the rate of entering the ball into the ball entrance and the tendency of paying out the ball is set by a preset setting input means. There is disclosed a pachinko game machine which is set to a state corresponding to (see, for example, JP-A-2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming table, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and accessories. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the tendency of payouts from being uniform for each game store or each game table.

(Fifth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2005-065977, although the payout tendency for each gaming table can be arbitrarily set, payout management may not be easy.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can easily perform payout management.

In order to solve the fifth problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 5
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is displayed. A setting change control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values of 6 levels of setting 1 to setting 6);
Game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means,
A payout means (for example, a payout device 350) for paying out a game medium based on a winning as a result of the game,
Based on the result of the lottery performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition being a specific result (for example, a big hit), a special game executing means (for example, a special game executing means capable of executing a special game in which the frequency of winning is increased). Main CPU101) which executes the big hit game control of FIG. 20, and
A data totaling unit (for example, a payout/launch control circuit 300) capable of totaling data relating to the game media paid out by the payout unit,
A data display control unit (main CPU 101) for displaying the data aggregated by the data aggregation unit in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334);
Equipped with
The data aggregation means,
All history totaling means for totaling the data based on the entire game history,
And a set value-based history totalizing means for totaling the data based on the game history for each set value,
The data display control means,
A gaming machine, which is configured to be able to display data aggregated by the all history aggregate means and/or data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregate means.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to display either one or both of the data aggregated by the all history aggregation unit and the data aggregated by the set value-based history aggregation unit. It becomes possible to easily perform ball management.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 5 having the above configuration, it is to provide a gaming machine that can easily perform payout management.

[11-6. Amusement machine of Appendix 6]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, the big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. If the above big hit is a probability variation big hit, after the big hit game is over, it is controlled to a high-probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine whose specifications can be changed has been disclosed (for example, see JP 2011-010833 A).

According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2011-010833, the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, so that the storage means storing the effect data necessary for executing the effect is replaced. Is unnecessary and waste can be eliminated.

(Sixth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a possibility that it will be uninteresting just by changing the specifications.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 6 having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 6
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, a pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and an ON operation of the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game property is set according to the set value. Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) capable of being set to any of a plurality of setting values different from each other (for example, setting values in 6 stages of setting 1 to setting 6),
Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game with the game property based on the set value set by the setting change control means,
Equipped with
The game control means,
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, the processing of step S73, step S83, step S118) based on the game property according to the set value set by the setting change control means,
Based on the result of the lottery, special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, jackpot game control in FIG. 20) in which a privilege according to the set value set by the setting change control means is given,
At least.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it becomes possible for one gaming machine to execute a game with different game characteristics based on the set value set by the setting change control means. It is possible to have a wide range of ways of using the gaming machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game control means,
When set to the first set value among the plurality of set values, in the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state unless the lottery is won within a predetermined period. A first game control means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a game under a game property (for example, ST specification) for ending
When the second setting value among the plurality of setting values is set, in a high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game control hand (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a game under a continuous game property (for example, a probability variation loop specification),
At least.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are common in that they are controlled to a high probability game state, but the first game control means. Depending on the game property, the high-probability game state may end midway without continuing until the next big hit game state, and the game property by the second game control means controls the high-probability game state to the next special game state. The difference is that it is continuously executed until. In this way, by allowing two game features that are similar in appearance but are substantially different from each other to be executed by being switched, it is possible to allow the manager of the game machine to use the pachinko machine. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interests.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 6 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

[11-7. Each gaming machine in Appendix 7-1 to Appendix 7-12]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Seventh task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change the set value or check the set value, or the set value may be changed by noise. There is a concern that various problems such as changes in the number will occur.

Further, since the above set values are important elements for both the hall and the player, they must be strictly managed by a person who has the authority, and the management is required to be convenient.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 7-1
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, a sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as the history information,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) on which the history information is displayed based on a predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen that restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during the execution of the game. A limiter (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when NO is determined in step S301, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when YES is determined in step S316). Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 7-2,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value is changed or confirmed, and the one setting value. And a transmission unit capable of transmitting the setting value information (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55),
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, a sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing the set value information as history information,
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation,
The display control means,
First screen display control means for displaying a first screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 124) showing history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information based on the predetermined operation. (For example, the host control circuit 2100 that displays the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 124),
Second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) in which history information including at least the setting value information is displayed on condition that the first screen is displayed. (For example, the host control circuit 2100 that displays the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 126).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information, the time information related to the setting operation information, and the set value information are shown as history information. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, the first screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 124) showing the history information that does not include the setting value information among the history information is displayed. On condition that the screen is displayed, the second screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) showing the history information including the setting value information is displayed.

The transmitting means capable of transmitting various kinds of information to the second control means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been confirmed. This is the setting value confirmation information indicating that Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second screen display control means,
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the second screen showing the history information including the setting value information is displayed only when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the setting value information can be easily browsed. This prevents the setting value information from being browsed for the purpose of fraud. The specific condition is, for example, the case where a proper password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The display control means,
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and information that limits the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during the game. It is characterized by having a screen limiting means.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 7-3,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received), A second storage means (for example, sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as history information,
Display control means capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command for generating an effect control object is received), but when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the information is displayed. An information screen display limiting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the hole menu display prohibiting process of step S318) for limiting the display of the screen is included.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, the displayed information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is limited when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, once the predetermined condition is met, the information screen cannot be viewed, so even if an unauthorized person attempts to view it illegally, it cannot be viewed easily and security can be ensured. Becomes

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 7-4,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, a sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as the history information,
A normal screen (for example, a guide initial image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific screen (for example, game machine manager) A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying any one of a plurality of screens including an information screen showing history information (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) on the display unit; Has,
The display control means,
The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is turned on when at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON). It is characterized in that it is configured to display.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the predetermined display means has a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (for example, a player) and a specific person (for example, a gaming machine manager). Only the information screen that can be viewed is displayed. The normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, while the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on, and the power is turned on at least when the setting operation means is operated. It is configured not to be displayed unless it is displayed. Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and it is possible to prevent unauthorized viewing.

By the way, the above-mentioned normal screen may not be construed as being viewable by an unspecified person, for example, when only the player who has registered as a member can view it. It can be said that it is a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person, because anyone can view it (ie, if there is an intention to view it). On the other hand, the information screen is not a screen that can be viewed even if there is an intention to view it, and is a screen that can be viewed only by a person who has the authority such as a gaming machine administrator.

Further, since the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information on the information screen that can be viewed only by a specific person, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting value. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen restriction means for restricting the display of the information screen during execution of the game (for example, NO in step S301) It is characterized by having a host control circuit 2100 which terminates the hall menu task when determined and a host control circuit 2100 which executes the processing of step S317 when determined YES in step S316.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 7-5,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, a sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as the history information,
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
An information erasing unit that erases the history information from the second storage unit when a specific operation is received (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of step S3066 and step S3160),
The information erasing means,
It is configured such that the specific operation is accepted only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, the history information is erased when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the item “clear”) is accepted. It can be accepted only when the conditions are satisfied (for example, when the entered password is correct). Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person tries to erase the history of changing or confirming or browsing the set value for the purpose of fraud, if the specific condition is not satisfied, the erase cannot be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized history from being intentionally deleted. Further, for the authorized person, the history information can be deleted, so that the convenience can be improved.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
It is possible to display an information screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 126) in which the history information includes the setting value information,
The information erasing means,
The history information including the setting value information is deleted from the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, such useful information can be erased by the authorized person, so that the convenience can be improved.

The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The information erasing means,
When erasing the history information from the second storage unit, only a part of the history information stored in the second storage unit as history information can be erased.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the history information to be deleted among the history information stored in the second storage means can be selected by the authorized person, so that the convenience is enhanced. For example, the history information is displayed by associating one setting operation information, one date and time information, and one setting value information (for example, see FIG. 126). The information erasing means may erase the associated history information (for example, each No shown in FIG. 126), or may erase for each item of information of a plurality of items included in the history information ( For example, all of the items of the date and time item, the operation type item, and the setting value item shown in FIG. 126 may be deleted).

In order to solve the seventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 7-6,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, a sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as the history information,
A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation,
The setting operation information is
It is information capable of distinguishing the operation type whether it is information indicating that the one setting value has been changed or information indicating that the one setting value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means,
Regardless of the type of the setting operation information, a list information screen (for example, a list screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information are all displayed as history information,
A specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) in which the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information corresponding to a specific type of the setting operation information are displayed as history information can be selectively displayed. It is characterized by being configured into.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Moreover, regardless of the type of the setting operation information, the setting operation information, the time information and the set value information all correspond to a specific type of setting operation information, and an information screen of a list showing as history information, Since the setting operation information, the time information, and the specific information screen in which the setting value information is displayed as history information can be selectively displayed, the convenience of the operator (for example, a gaming machine manager) is improved. You can

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the information screen of the list and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the list information screen and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied, so that the history information is browsed for the purpose of fraud. Can be suppressed. The specific condition is, for example, the case where a proper password is input.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The transmitting means is
It is possible to further transmit setting value information about the one setting value,
The second storage means,
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means,
An information screen in which the set value information is included in the history information can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to browse more useful information such as setting value information. Moreover, such useful information can be erased by the authorized person, so that the convenience can be improved.

The transmitting means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 7-7 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, a sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as the history information,
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (the information screen that displays the history information is displayed. For example, a display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying a setting change/confirmation history screen,
Although the information screen can be displayed until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S314, step S315, or step S316), when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the display of the information screen is restricted. Information screen display limiting means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when YES is determined in step S314, step S315, or step S316).
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Even if the number of times the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen is multiple until the display of the information screen is limited, it is regarded as one browsing history. It is characterized by being configured to store.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Further, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied, but the display is limited when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

The information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the information screen is displayed more than once due to a predetermined operation on the normal screen until the display of the information screen is limited, it is recorded as one setting history information. To be done. As a result, it is possible for a person who has changed the setting, confirmed the setting, browsed the information screen, etc. for the purpose of fraud to intentionally create a large number of browsing histories. In particular, in the case of browsing history, unlike changing or confirming the set value, browsing is performed a plurality of times without going through a process in which the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state). It is possible to do so, and therefore it is easy to intentionally create a large number of histories, so that the effect is great.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machines in Appendix 7-8,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information capable of distinguishing whether the one setting value is changed or the one setting value is confirmed (for example, A transmission means capable of transmitting a setting operation command (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55),
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as and history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information,
Based on a predetermined operation, a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) in which the history information is not displayed can be displayed, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen (the information screen that displays the history information is displayed. For example, a display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying a setting change/confirmation history screen,
The second storage means,
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Furthermore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated,
When the confirmation of the one setting value and the browsing of the information screen are performed, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed,
When the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

By the way, when a fraud accompanied by a setting change is made, it is possible to detect that there is a possibility of fraud with a change history of the setting that is not remembered by the gaming machine administrator. It is difficult to detect that there is a possibility of fraud only with the setting confirmation history. Further, it is considered that a person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the setting rather than browsing after changing the setting. Therefore, when the setting value is checked and the information screen is browsed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, both the setting confirmation history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Is displayed, and when one set value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed. As a result, the amount of history information displayed on the display unit can be suppressed as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the total number of history records from unnecessarily increasing and making it difficult to detect fraud.

It should be noted that "when the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed, only the browsing history information is displayed among the setting change history information and the browsing history information" By storing only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information in the second storage means, only the browsing history information is displayed” and “both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although it is stored in the second storage means, only the browsing history information among these pieces of information may be displayed under the control of the display control means", but from the viewpoint of reducing the load on the second storage means. From the viewpoint, the former is preferable.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-9 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machines of Appendix 7-9,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). , The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, a sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as the history information,
Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage unit exceeds a predetermined amount, a history erasing unit that executes control to erase at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage unit (for example, , And a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S306).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

By the way, the above history information is stored in the second storage means (for example, the sub-work RAM 2100a), but since the history information amount that can be stored in the second storage means has an upper limit, it is stored in the second storage means. If the amount of history information stored is large, there is a possibility that history information cannot be recorded when it is desired to record it in the second storage means. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased to record new history information. It prevents the occurrence of situations such as being unable to do so.

Note that "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased" means The history information may be erased as a result by overwriting the history information already stored in the storage means with new history information, or the new history information may be stored in the second storage means. At this time, if there is a possibility that the amount exceeds the predetermined amount, at least a part of the history information stored in the second storage means may be erased before storing the history information. Further, even when new history information is not stored in the second storage means, if more history information is stored in the second storage means and the upper limit may be exceeded, the history information is stored in the second storage means. You may make it erase|eliminate at least one part of the historical information which exists.

The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been checked. It is the setting value confirmation information indicating that it has been performed. Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means,
Information that can display the information screen when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and information that limits the display of the information screen even when the predetermined operation is performed during the game. A screen limiting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that terminates the hall menu task when NO is determined in step S301, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when YES is determined in step S316). Is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Is a screen whose display is restricted. That is, unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the information screen is not displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily browse the information screen for the purpose of fraud, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-10 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 7-10,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state capable of changing the one setting value or the one setting value is confirmed. A setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26) for controlling the setting confirmation state that can be performed,
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S55,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, a sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as the history information,
An information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting change state or/and the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display means, and the setting change state or/and the setting A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of limiting the display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state ends,
The display control means,
At least when the setting change state ends, even if the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without limiting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses (for example, step S312, step S313). Process can be executed) and
Even if the setting change state ends, control can be performed so that the display of the information screen is not limited as long as a predetermined operation is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends ( The processing of steps S313 to S316 can be repeated).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to browse at least the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as the history information, so that various problems related to the setting value are caused. It becomes possible to cope with. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Further, since the above information screen is displayed in the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state, security is ensured, for example, that an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen. Moreover, at least when the setting change state is controlled, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses after the setting change state ends, as long as a predetermined operation is performed on the information screen. It is also possible to improve the convenience of the operator.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
When at least the one set value is changed, it is also possible to transmit the set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
In the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state, an information screen in which the setting value information about the one setting value is included in the history information can be displayed on the display unit.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the history screen is displayed, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. .. In particular, since the set value information about one set value is useful for business, it can be used for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The display control means,
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is finished, when the receiving unit receives the specific information related to the progress of the game, the information screen is displayed. Is included (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when YES is determined in step S316).

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the display of the information screen is forced when the receiving device receives the specific information related to the progress of the game. The game is not interrupted because the game ends. Therefore, it is possible to secure the convenience of the operation by the authorized person while suppressing the state in which the game can be executed, and to prevent the fraud by the unauthorized third party.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
On the information screen displayed after the setting change state is completed, it is possible to grasp that the game is executable without hindering the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example, While all the LEDs 25 are lit in white while the settings are being changed or the settings are being confirmed, all the LEDs 25 are lit in red when the settings are changed or the settings have been confirmed).

According to the above-mentioned (4) gaming machine, in the information screen displayed after the setting change state is finished, a state in which the game can be executed without hindering the predetermined operation on the information screen from being performed. Since it is possible to understand that, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game cannot be executed even though the game can be executed and the game cannot be executed.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-11 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 7-11,
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), the setting state control means controls the setting value to change or confirm the one set value. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26),
First storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing at least the setting value information for the one setting value,
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least a transmitting means (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, a setting operation command). The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S55,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, a sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as the history information,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying on the display unit an information screen (for example, a hole menu screen, a screen for a hole menu item) in which various kinds of information can be shown in the setting state. Then
The information screen is
A history screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information, and a non-history screen (for example, a hall screen) where the history information is shown by performing a predetermined operation although the history information is not shown. A plurality of information screens including at least a menu screen),
The display control means,
A screen updating unit that controls to display another information screen when a predetermined operation is performed while any one of the plurality of information screens is displayed on the display unit (for example, step A host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of S3051, S3057, S3073, etc.;
In the setting state, when the non-history screen is displayed, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, the hole menu display process of step S302 is executed. If none of the items is selected in the process of step S303, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed. On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or longer. For example, a specific display control unit that controls the display of the history screen to be ended (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S317 when YES is determined in step S3072). ..

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), since at least the history screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are shown as history information can be browsed, various problems related to the setting value are caused. It becomes possible to cope with. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that the setting value was changed or the setting value was confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, the history screen is browsed to check whether the above-mentioned fraud has been performed. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

In addition, non-history screens that do not show history information are continuously displayed even if a predetermined operation is not performed, but history screens that show history information are terminated unless a predetermined operation is performed for a predetermined time or longer. To do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being continuously displayed and being viewed by an unauthorized third party. It should be noted that the above-mentioned “continuously displaying” also includes ending the display once and displaying again. That is, it is important whether the predetermined operation is displayed or not even if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
When at least the one set value is changed, it is also possible to transmit the set value information about the one set value,
The display control means,
When the history screen is displayed on the display unit in the setting state, the setting value information about the one setting value is also displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the history screen is displayed, the setting value information for one setting value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can browse more detailed history information. .. In particular, since the set value information about one set value is useful for business, it can be used for hall management.

In order to solve the seventh problem, the gaming machine according to supplementary note 7-12 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 7-12 is
A control related to the progress of the game can be executed based on any one of the plurality of set values, and information about the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value can be stored. First control means having one storage means (for example, main control circuit 100),
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the first storage means,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When the specific operating means is operated and the power is turned on while the setting operating means is operated (for example, the setting key is in an ON state), the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed is set. Setting change state control means for controlling (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24),
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least the setting change information (for example, a setting change start command) indicating that the one setting value is changed, and the setting value for the one setting value. When the erasing process for erasing the information (for example, the changed setting value information when the setting value is changed) and the information stored in the first storage means is executed, the erasing process is executed. And a transmission unit (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S55) capable of transmitting information (for example, an initialization command) indicating that
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting change information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting change information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting change information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a second storage unit (for example, a sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as the history information,
An information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information on the display means at least in the setting change state;
Erase execution information notifying means capable of notifying that the erasing process has been executed (for example, the display/control circuit 2300, the sound/LED control circuit 2200 for controlling the sound output of the speaker 24, and the sound/LED for controlling the lighting mode of the LED 25. And a control circuit 2200),
The erasure execution information notification means,
When the erasing process (for example, the backup clear process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, it is possible to know that the erasing process has been executed (for example, in the display area of the display device 16). A first notification means (host control circuit 2100) for displaying a character display such as "RAM cleared", a voice output such as "RAM cleared", and LED 25 (all red lighting).
It is more difficult to understand that the erasing process is executed so that the visibility of the information screen is not hindered when the erasing process is executed due to being controlled to the setting change state. Second notification means (host which does not perform display on the display device 16 but outputs only the audio data such as "settings have been changed. RAM has been initialized" and LED 25 all red lighting) And a control circuit 2100).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to browse at least the information screen in which the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information are displayed as history information. It becomes possible to cope with. In particular, when there is a possibility that unauthorized persons have changed the setting values for the purpose of fraud, for example, by browsing the information screen, it is possible to trace whether or not the above fraud has been performed. It becomes possible to do it. Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

Further, the erasing process (for example, the backup clear process) for erasing the information stored in the first storage means is executed without being controlled to the setting change state and is controlled to the setting change state. It may be executed by When the erasing process is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, the first mode that allows the user to know that the erasing process has been executed is notified. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed due to being controlled to the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one set value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second mode, which is harder to understand than the first mode. Further, when the erasing process is executed due to the control to the setting change state, the information screen showing the history information is displayed, but in the second mode, the visual confirmation of the information screen is not disturbed. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, it is possible to ensure convenience.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In addition to a voice output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined voice,
The second control means
It further has a voice control unit (for example, a voice/LED control circuit 2200) capable of controlling the voice output from the voice output unit,
The first notification means,
Notifying that the erasing process has been performed using both the display unit and the voice output unit,
The second notification means,
The fact that the erasing process is executed is configured to be informed by using only the audio output means of the display means and the audio output means.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, when the erasing process (for example, the backup clear process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, both the display means and the voice output means are used for notification. Therefore, it is possible to clearly understand that the erasing process has been executed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed as a result of the control being changed to the setting change state, only the audio output means of the display means and the audio output means is used to notify, so that the visibility of the information screen is obstructed. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasing process while preventing the deletion, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the erasing process by, for example, an unauthorized third party while improving the convenience.

According to each of the gaming machines of supplementary notes 7-1 to 7-12 having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to the set value.

[11-8. Game machine of Appendix 8]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Eighth task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change or check the set value, or noise may cause the set value to change. There is a concern that various problems may occur, such as that the control is changed or the control board is illegally replaced.

Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the eighth problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 8 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Equipped with
The first control means is
When at least the setting operation means is operated, a setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24 or step S26) that controls the setting value to change or confirm the one setting value. )When,
Storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information for at least the one setting value,
Transmission means capable of transmitting various kinds of information to the second control means and capable of transmitting at least the setting value information for the one setting value (for example, the command output port 106 or the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S55). And have,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the setting value information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
Based on the reception of the setting value information by the receiving means, the propriety of the one setting value is determined by using the received setting value information and the setting value information received prior to the setting value information. Setting determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that determines whether or not the previously set value and the currently set value match),
An abnormal condition process executing unit that executes abnormal condition processing when the setting judgment unit judges that the one set value is inappropriate (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes set value abnormal process). It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means determines the suitability of the one set value by using the set value information about the one set value transmitted from the first control means a plurality of times. It becomes possible. That is, even if the first control means can determine the suitability of the one set value, the one set value is normal when, for example, the first control means is illegally replaced. Whether the setting value is normal or abnormal, the first control unit determines that the one set value is normal. Therefore, by allowing the second control means to determine the suitability of the one set value, even if the first control means is illegally replaced, for example, even if the first control means is illegally replaced, It becomes possible to immediately discover the suitability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
It is also possible to transmit setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed.
The second control means
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information are stored separately from the storage means capable of storing history information. Means (eg, sub-work RAM 2100a),
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information on a predetermined display unit based on a predetermined operation. Is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen in which the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall.

In addition, when transmitting both the setting operation information and the setting value information, the transmitting unit capable of transmitting various information to the second control unit may transmit these information together or separately. The setting operation information is set value change information indicating that the set value has been changed when the set value has been changed, and the set value has been confirmed when the set value has been confirmed. This is the setting value confirmation information indicating that Further, when the setting operation information is the setting value change information, the setting value information is the setting value information for one changed setting value. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information for the one setting value that has been set may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the setting value information to the second control means.

The “time information related to the setting operation information” may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It may be time.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 8 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can deal with a problem related to a set value.

[11-9. Game machine of Appendix 9]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to a player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine having one device having a plurality of functions has been proposed. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-170505, a player is pushed down and, in order to give an impact to the player, pops out to a position that largely protrudes from the main body of the game machine, regardless of the operation of the player. A push button is disclosed.

(9th subject)

By the way, when confirming the operation of the accessory, various sensors, etc., the maintainability of the push button described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-170505, which has a plurality of functions in one device, deteriorates. There is a concern.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions. is there.

In order to solve the ninth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to supplementary note 9 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 9
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and executing a game advantageous to a player based on the result of the lottery,
An accessory (eg, an accessory group 1000) operable based on the result of the lottery;
A composite means (for example, a production button 62) having one or more functions,
Various sensors (for example, the first start port switch 421 etc.) used for the progress of the game,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
At least maintenance item determination means (for example, the process of step S3084, which determines a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the complex means, and detection confirmation of the various sensors). An executable host control circuit 2100),
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen that allows selection of any of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the accessory, function confirmation of the complex unit, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, in FIG. 132). A maintenance screen display control means for displaying at least a maintenance screen (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S3083),
Equipped with
The maintenance item determination means,
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
Regarding the above-mentioned compounding means having one function, but having a plurality of functions, the selection screen is configured so that it can be displayed so that an item can be selected for each function (for example, an item of “effect button 1” in FIG. 132). (Displayed so that you can select one of the items of "Production button 2")
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), with regard to the compound means having one function, but having a plurality of functions, it is possible to select an item for each function on the selection screen in which any one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since it is displayed, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The composite means is
At least, it has an operation function and a production function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery,
The maintenance item determination means,
When the item of the operation function (for example, effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, it is determined as the maintenance item for the operation function, and the item of the effect function (for example, effect button 2) is selected. In this case, the maintenance item related to the performance function can be determined.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the item of the operation function is selected, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and when the item of the effect function is selected, the maintenance item related to the effect function is selected. Since it is configured to be determinable, it is possible to appropriately perform maintenance on both the operation function and the effect function.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 9 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[11-10. Amusement machine of Appendix 10]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on a result of a lottery that is performed based on establishment of a predetermined condition, a gaming machine that includes a movable accessory that operates based on a result of the lottery is known. There is.

As this type of gaming machine, there is disclosed a gaming machine provided with a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory each having a different drive source as a movable accessory that operates based on the result of the lottery (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-242242). See JP-A-2018-15273).

(Tenth task)
By the way, in a gaming machine provided with a plurality of movable accessory having different drive sources, for example, the maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is particularly noticeable when there is a possibility that a plurality of movable accessory objects having different drive sources will interfere with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to be able to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work even when a plurality of movable accessory members having different drive sources are provided. Providing a gaming machine.

In order to solve the tenth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to supplementary note 10 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 10
A gaming machine capable of performing a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and executing a game advantageous to a player based on the result of the lottery,
A first accessory and a second accessory that are operable based on the result of the lottery and have different drive sources,
Various sensors (for example, the first start port switch 421 etc.) used for the progress of the game,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Maintenance item determination means for determining a maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including at least operation confirmation of the first accessory, operation confirmation of the second accessory, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, step A host control circuit 2100) capable of executing the processing of S3084,
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen capable of selecting any one of a plurality of maintenance items including operation confirmation of the first accessory, operation confirmation of the second accessory, and detection confirmation of the various sensors (for example, , A maintenance screen display control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S3083) for displaying at least the maintenance screen of FIG. 132,
Equipped with
The maintenance item determination means,
It is possible to determine the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means,
The maintenance screen display control means,
Not only the operation confirmation of each of the first accessory and the second accessory, but also the operation confirmation when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated are selected on the selection screen. It is configured so that it can be displayed (for example, the item of “effect product 1+2” in FIG. 132 is displayed).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), not only the operation check of the first accessory and the second accessory alone, but also the operation check when both the first accessory and the second accessory are operated Can also be selected on the selection screen, so that it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The maintenance screen display control means,
The operation confirmation when the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, "Production accessory 1→2" in FIG. 132). Items are displayed)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the operation start timing of the first accessory and the operation start timing of the second accessory can be different, the second accessory is operated after the first accessory is operated. Since it is possible to select the operation confirmation when the is operated on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of the maintenance work and further improve the maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
A third accessory that is operable based on the result of the lottery and has a drive source different from that of both the first accessory and the second accessory;
The maintenance screen display control means,
When there is a possibility that they will interfere with each other when the first accessory or/and the second accessory and the third accessory operate, the first or/and the second accessory The selection screen is configured to be displayed in such a manner that neither of the above and the third accessory can be operated (for example, it is displayed so that the item of "effect product 1+3" in FIG. 132 cannot be selected. Become)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when there is a possibility that the first accessory or/and the second accessory and the third accessory both interfere with each other, the first screen or Since it is not possible to select the mode in which both the first accessory and/or the second accessory and the third accessory are operated, it is possible to improve the maintainability.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 10 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of one device having a plurality of functions.

[11-11. Each of the gaming machines in Appendix 11-1 and Appendix 11-2]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(11th subject)

By the way, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, the set value is an important element for both the hall and the player because it relates to payout. However, there is a possibility that the set value may become abnormal due to, for example, the occurrence of power failure.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of properly maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the eleventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 11-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 11-1,
A memory that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values and can store the information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value. Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103),
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
A specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the storage means,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The control means is
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the state control means controls the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, , The main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S24,
The state control means,
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without the ON operation of the setting operation means and/or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the control is performed in the setting change state. Possible or power can be restored in the setting change state when power supply is stopped (for example, the process of step S24 is executed when NO is determined in step S21)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if, for example, an electric power cutoff occurs while being controlled to the setting change state, if the power is turned on after that, the setting control is performed or the power is turned on. Since the power is restored in the setting changed state when the supply is stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is properly maintained. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of unintended power interruption or the like in the setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The control means is
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, the one set value setting means for setting the one set value to the changed set value (for example, , Further having a main CPU 101) that executes the processing of step S2480,
The set value determination means,
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned on. When the OFF operation is further performed after that, the one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is performed. Although it is necessary to turn on the operation means once, it is possible to confirm one set value by performing an operation that is the same as usual, such as turning off the setting operation means. Thus, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the complicated operation is performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

In order to solve the eleventh problem described above, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 11-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 11-2,
A memory that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and can store information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value. Control means having means (for example, the main control circuit 100),
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
A specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the storage means,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The control means is
According to the operating state of the setting operating means and the operating state of the specific operating means, the state after the power is turned on is a setting change state and the one setting in which the one set value can be changed. It has a state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24, step S26, step S28, etc.) capable of controlling any of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state capable of confirming a value. Then
The state control means,
When the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state and then the power is turned on, control is performed to any one of the plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation unit and the operation state of the specific operation unit. (For example, the processing of steps S22 to S28 is executed),
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state and then the power is turned on, control is possible in the setting change state or the power supply is stopped regardless of the operation states of the setting operation means and the specific operation means. Power can be restored in the setting change state at that time (for example, the process of step S24 is executed when NO is determined in step S21).
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to the occurrence of power interruption or the like, while ensuring the convenience of the operator. In other words, the setting confirmation state is a state in which only one set value can be confirmed but the one set value cannot be changed. Is unlikely to affect. On the other hand, the setting change state is a state in which one set value can be changed, and therefore, for example, if an unintended power interruption or the like occurs, the one set value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power is subsequently turned on, one of a plurality of states is set depending on the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. The power is restored so that the convenience of the operator is ensured and the situation in which the set value is not set due to unintentional power interruption or the like is prevented from occurring.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The state control means,
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on with the setting operation means being turned on, the setting change state is controlled.
The control means is
When the setting operation means is turned off after the one set value is changed in the setting change state, a set value confirming means for confirming the one set value to the changed set value is further provided. Have,
The set value determination means,
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting operation means is turned on. When the OFF operation is further performed after that, the one set value is configured to be fixed to the changed set value.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting is performed. Although it is necessary to turn on the operation means once, it is possible to confirm one set value by performing an operation that is the same as usual, such as turning off the setting operation means. Thus, even if the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned on or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the complicated operation is performed. Without this, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

According to each of the gaming machines of Supplementary Note 11-1 and Supplementary Note 11-2 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the set value can be appropriately maintained.

[11-12. Amusement machine of Appendix 12]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Twelfth task)
By the way, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set, the set value is an important element for both the hall and the player because it relates to the payout. However, there is a possibility that the set value may become abnormal due to noise or fraudulent activity.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of properly maintaining a set value.

In order to solve the twelfth problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 12 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 12,
A memory that can execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values and can store the information related to the progress of the game including the set value information about the one set value. Control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means (for example, main RAM 103),
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
A specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of deleting the information stored in the storage means,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The control means is
Setting change state control means for controlling to a setting change state capable of changing the one set value when the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24),
An adequacy determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S721) that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit is appropriate or not,
When it is determined that the information stored in the storage unit is inappropriate, the abnormality control unit (the process of Steps S722 to S727) that controls to an abnormal state (for example, the state in which the processes of Steps S722 to S727 are executed) Main CPU 101) that executes
When the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state, if the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed. On the other hand, it is controlled so that it cannot be performed (for example, the processing of step S1790 is not executed when it is determined to be NO in step S1770), while the game is controlled to be executed when it is controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on (for example, step It is characterized by having a game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 which executes the processing of step S17) which executes the processing of step S1790 when it is determined to be YES in S1770 and YES in step S1780.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, generation of noise or cheating, and the supply of power is stopped in such an abnormal state, the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on. In that case, the game cannot be executed even if the operation of erasing the information stored in the storage means is performed, and the game can be executed when the setting is changed after the power is turned on. .. When an abnormal state occurs, it is highly possible that the one set value information stored in the storage means is abnormal.Therefore, only when the one set value is controlled to the setting change state so that it is changed. The game is allowed to be executed, and the set value is appropriately maintained.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 12 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the set value can be appropriately maintained.

[11-13. Amusement machine of Appendix 13]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and variably displays symbols based on the result of the lottery. Then, when the result of the lottery is displayed with a specific display result indicating that it is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of setting values indicating the probability that the result of the lottery is a specific result, which is related to the advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value that has been set (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-206588). The above set values can be set by a person who has the authority, such as a game machine manager of a hall.

(Thirteenth task)
However, in the gaming machine in which the progress of the game is controlled based on the set value, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change the set value or check the set value, or the set value may be changed by noise. There is a concern that various problems such as changes in the number will occur.

Further, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the player, they should be strictly managed by authorized persons.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of dealing with a problem related to a set value.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to supplementary note 13 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 13 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control relating to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values,
A predetermined display means (for example, the display device 16),
Second control means (for example, sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of the image displayed on the display means,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) used for an operation related to the one set value,
Power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when the power is turned on,
Equipped with
The first control means is
At least when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on (for example, the setting key is turned on), the state control means controls the setting value so that the one set value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24, step S26, step S28, etc.),
Although the game cannot be executed in the setting state, a game executing means that can be controlled so that the game can be executed when the setting state ends (for example, the game is executed in the setting process of step S20 in which the game return process of step S30 is not yet executed). Although not possible, when the setting process of step S20 ends, the game return process of step S30 is executed to execute the power-on process that enables execution of the game, and the main CPU 101),
Various kinds of information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least transmission means (for example, operation type information) indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed (for example, operation type information). The command output port 106 and the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S55,
The second control means
A receiving unit (for example, a relay board 2010) capable of receiving the information transmitted from the transmitting unit,
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be executed in the setting state in which the game cannot be executed (for example, setting operation effect executing unit). , A host control circuit 2100) for executing control to turn on all LEDs 25 in red through the voice/LED control circuit 2200,
The setting operation effect execution means,
Even if the setting state ends and the game can be executed, it is possible to execute an effect indicating that the one set value is changed or confirmed until a predetermined period elapses. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed in a setting state in which the game cannot be executed. Further, even if the setting state is finished and the game can be executed, an effect indicating that one set value is changed or confirmed is executed until a predetermined period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the fraud when the setting value is changed or the setting value is checked fraudulently, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The setting operation effect execution means,
A mode in which after the setting state is finished and a game can be executed, an effect indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can be visually recognized that the game can be executed. It is characterized by being configured to be executable with.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed in a manner in which it is possible to visually recognize that a game can be executed, It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the setting value has been changed or confirmed has been executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The state control means,
In addition to having a setting change state control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) for controlling the setting change state capable of changing the one setting value,
The second control means
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving unit, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving unit and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or an interruption recovery command is received). And a storage means (for example, the sub-work RAM 2100a) capable of storing as the history information,
An information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting state can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is not displayed when the setting state ends. A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of limiting the display,
The display control means,
When the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received by the receiving unit, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses. The information screen can be displayed (for example, the processes of steps S312 to S316 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (3), the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means in the setting state, and the display of the information screen is limited when the setting state ends. Therefore, in the set state, by browsing the information screen showing the history information, it becomes possible to deal with various problems related to the set value. In particular, if there is a possibility that a setting value was changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, for example, by browsing the information screen, it can be determined whether or not the above fraud has been made. It is possible to trace Further, by browsing the past history information, it is possible to improve convenience, for example, it can be utilized for sales of a hall. Further, when the setting operation state information display is limited when the setting state ends, when the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, until the predetermined time elapses. Can display the information screen. Therefore, even if a fraud is performed, it is possible to easily find the fraud, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 13 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can cope with a problem related to a set value.

[11-14. Amusement machine of Appendix 14]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and a big hit game is performed when the result of the lottery is a big hit.

As a gaming machine of this kind, a long press effect that changes the execution mode of the specific game effect is performed on the operation means on condition that a predetermined long press operation is performed by the player, and a short time shorter than the long press operation. There is known a game machine capable of executing a continuous stroke effect on condition that a continuous stroke operation in which a push operation is performed a plurality of times is performed (for example, see JP-A-2015-065977). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, if a long press operation is performed within a long press operation acceptance valid period for determining whether or not a long press operation is performed, a long press effect is executed.

(14th task)
As in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, if the control is performed by determining whether the long-pressing operation or the continuous hitting effect has been performed on the operating means, the control load increases, which is not preferable. ..

However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest by performing an effect that can give a further visual impact.

In order to solve the fourteenth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to supplementary note 14 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 14 is
A gaming machine capable of executing main processing (for example, main loop processing) in which various processing (for example, various request control processing) is performed every predetermined time (for example, 33.3 msec),
A predetermined operation means (for example, a main button),
A control in which an interrupt process is performed every time period shorter than the predetermined time period (for example, 1 msec), and input information can be generated in the main process based on an input state of the operation unit detected by the interrupt process. Means (eg, host control circuit 2100),
Equipped with
The control means is
As the input information, after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state,
As the input information, after the input state of the operation means is changed from the OFF state to the ON state, it is determined that the ON state is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 10 frames), and then the input state of the operation means is Input information for generating information (for example, ON edge information with a repeat function) capable of determining that an ON state has occurred periodically as long as the ON state continues for a time shorter than a certain time (for example, 4 frames) Generating means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1309),
And a device control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of controlling a predetermined device based on the information generated by the input information generation unit (for example, the ON-edge information with the repeat function). Characterize.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), after the input state of the operating means changes from the OFF state to the ON state based on the input state of the operating means (for example, the input information of the sub device), the ON state is constant. As long as the input state of the operating means remains in the ON state for a time shorter than the fixed time after it is determined that the time has continued, by generating the information capable of determining that the ON state has occurred periodically, It is possible to easily perform control such as continuous hit production of the sub device, control of long press production, and the like.

Further, according to the gaming machine of appendix 14, it is possible to execute the control according to the mode of the operating means while reducing the control load.

[11-15. Each gaming machine in Appendix 15-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine including a display device that emits light with a backlight is disclosed (see, for example, JP-A-2016-159026).

(15th subject)
However, if the luminance of the light emitting means of the backlight is unstable, the display of the effect image on the display device may become unstable, which is not preferable.

In order to solve the fifteenth problem, the gaming machine of supplementary note 15-1 and the gaming machine of supplementary note 15-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 15-1,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner (for example, a backlight),
Data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) for storing drive data (for example, brightness data) corresponding to a light emission mode emitted by the light emitting means in a predetermined area;
A light emission drive unit (for example, an LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage unit to the light emission unit;
A data setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) that sets the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage unit,
Equipped with
The data setting means,
The drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means is configured to set new drive data when the number of drive data settable in the predetermined area reaches a reference data number. And

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 15-1 of (1) above, when the drive data number set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number, the new drive data can be stored in the predetermined area. Is set, it is possible to output a control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) output by the light emission drive means, and the light emission means is output via a driver. It is possible to stably emit light without the need.

Note that the above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a data area of a FIFO) of the data storage means is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number is 2 or more. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 15-2,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner (for example, a backlight),
A data storage unit (for example, a FIFO data region) for storing drive data (for example, brightness data) corresponding to the light emission mode emitted by the light emitting unit in a predetermined region (for example, a FIFO data region);
A light emission drive unit (for example, an LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in a predetermined area of the data storage unit to the light emission unit;
A data setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) that sets the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage unit,
A time measuring means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1356) capable of measuring the elapsed time after the drive data is set in a predetermined area of the data storage means,
Equipped with
The data setting means,
The drive data can be set in a predetermined area of the data storage means (the processing of step S1354 can be executed) based on the time measured by the time measuring means having passed a predetermined time or more. And

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 15-2 of (1) above, the drive data is data based on the elapsed time after the drive data is set in the predetermined area of the data storage means for a predetermined time or more. It is set in a predetermined area of the storage means. For example, if some processing takes time, there is no drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage unit until the timing for setting the drive data in the predetermined area of the data storage unit. There is a risk that In this respect, according to this gaming machine, even if it is not the timing for setting the drive data in the predetermined area of the data storage means, the drive data is set in the data storage means based on the elapse of the predetermined time or more. Since it is set in the area of No. 3, it is possible to prevent the drive data set in the predetermined data area from becoming empty. Therefore, a control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) output by the light emission drive unit can be output, and the light emission unit can be stably provided without a driver. It becomes possible to emit light.

Further, according to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 15-1 and the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 15-2, it becomes possible to prevent the light emission of the light emitting means from becoming unstable.

[11-16. Each gaming machine in Appendix 16-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that is used for performance and decoration by causing a light emitting device, which is provided on the front side and is composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs, to emit light in a predetermined manner. .. Further, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(16th task)
By the way, in recent years, the production has become flashy including a light emitting device including a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the brightness of the light emitting device is high, some players may feel stress. If a player or the like can operate the brightness of the light emitting device, the player can adjust the brightness to a desired brightness, but this may not be enough.

In order to solve the sixteenth problem, the gaming machine of appendix 16-1 and the gaming machine of blowing 16-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 16-1 is
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode;
An operation unit (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting unit to any one of a plurality of levels;
A first light emission control unit (for example, a host control circuit that executes the process of step S1384) that can change the brightness of the first light emission unit to one of a plurality of levels based on the operation of the operation unit. 2100),
Second light emitting means (for example, board side LED or frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
Second light emission control means capable of changing the brightness of the second light emission means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1385),
Equipped with
The second light emission control means,
The brightness of the second light emitting means is changed to one of the plurality of steps at a timing different from the timing of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by being configured as possible.

According to the above-mentioned (1) gaming machine, when the operation means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the second light is emitted at a timing different from the timing at which the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed. While the brightness of the light emitting means is also changed, the brightness of the second light emitting means is also changed to any one of a plurality of levels, so that it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom for the player to change the brightness. ..

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) for storing drive data corresponding to a light emission mode emitted by the first light emission means in a predetermined area,
Light emission drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emission means,
A data setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) that sets the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage unit,
Equipped with
The data setting means,
When the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means has a reference data number that can be stored in the predetermined area, the new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the drive data after the brightness is changed is set as the new drive data.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the drive data set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number when the drive data number that can be stored in the predetermined area reaches the reference data number, new drive data is set. A control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) that is output by the light emission drive means can be output, and the light emission means stably emits light without using a driver. It becomes possible. Moreover, since the changed drive data is set as new drive data when the brightness is changed, it is possible to cause the first light emitting means to stably emit light in accordance with the set brightness.

Note that the above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a data area of a FIFO) of the data storage means is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number is 2 or more. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 16-2 is
Lottery means for performing lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S45),
Display means for displaying a predetermined effect image (for example, a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16),
Based on the result of the lottery, a variable display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) that performs a variable display of a symbol (for example, a production identification symbol) on the display means,
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode;
An operation unit (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting unit to any one of a plurality of levels;
Based on the operation of the operation unit, the first light emission control unit capable of changing the brightness of the first light emission unit to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, host control for executing the process of step S1394). Circuit 2100),
Second light emitting means (for example, board side LED or frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
Second light emission control means for controlling the light emission mode of the second light emission means based on a predetermined request (host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of step S1392),
Equipped with
The second light emission control means,
Based on the operation means being operated, the brightness of the second light emitting means is changed after the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed and after the variable display of the symbols is finished. (For example, the processing of step S1399 is executed).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the brightness of the first light emitting means can be changed when the operating means is operated. Further, the brightness of the second light emitting means is changed after the brightness of the first light emitting means is changed and after the variable display of the symbols is finished. Here, since the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is controlled based on a predetermined request, the control load is minimized by changing the brightness of the second light emitting means after the variable display of the symbols ends. It is possible to change the brightness of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means while suppressing the brightness to the limit.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) for storing drive data corresponding to a light emission mode emitted by the first light emission means in a predetermined area,
Light emission drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emission means,
A data setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) that sets the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage unit,
Equipped with
The data setting means,
When the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means has a reference data number that can be stored in the predetermined area, the new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the drive data after the brightness is changed is set as the new drive data.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the drive data set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number when the drive data number that can be stored in the predetermined area reaches the reference data number, new drive data is set. A control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) that is output by the light emission drive means can be output, and the light emission means stably emits light without using a driver. It becomes possible. Moreover, since the changed drive data is set as new drive data when the brightness is changed, it is possible to cause the first light emitting means to stably emit light in accordance with the set brightness.

Note that the above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a data area of a FIFO) of the data storage means is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number is 2 or more. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

Further, according to the gaming machine of supplementary note 16-1 and the gaming machine of supplementary note 16-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player or the like can more appropriately adjust the brightness of the light emitting device.

[11-17. Amusement machine of Appendix 17]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that is used for performance and decoration by causing a light emitting device, which is provided on the front side and is composed of a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs, to emit light in a predetermined manner. .. Further, there is disclosed a gaming machine in which the brightness of these light emitting devices can be adjusted by a player or the like within a preset range (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(17th subject)
By the way, in recent years, the production has become flashy including a light emitting device including a plurality of light emitting bodies such as LEDs provided on the front side. Therefore, if the intensity of light received from the light emitting device is high, it may be stressed by some players.

In order to solve the seventeenth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to supplementary note 17 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 17,
The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A first light emitting means (for example, a backlight) capable of emitting light in a predetermined mode;
An operation unit (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16) capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting unit to any one of a plurality of levels;
Based on the operation of the operation means, the first light emission control means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emission means to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, a host control circuit that executes the processing of step S1394). 2100),
Second light emitting means (for example, board side LED or frame side LED) provided separately from the first light emitting means,
Second light emission control means capable of changing the light emission mode of the second light emission means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1406),
Equipped with
The second light emission control means,
Based on the operation of the operation means, the mode of the light emission effect executed by the second light emission means is limited and executed at a timing different from the timing when the brightness of the first light emission means is changed. It is characterized by being configured as possible.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the operation means capable of changing the brightness of the first light emitting means is operated, the mode of the light emission effect executed by the second light emitting means is limited. Therefore, the intensity of the light received from the second light emitting means can be suppressed by a simple process.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Data storage means (for example, a FIFO data area) for storing drive data corresponding to a light emission mode emitted by the first light emission means in a predetermined area,
Light emission drive means (for example, LSI) that outputs a control signal based on the drive data stored in the data storage means to the first light emission means,
A data setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1346) that sets the drive data in a predetermined area of the data storage unit,
Equipped with
The data setting means,
When the drive data set in the predetermined area of the data storage means has a reference data number that can be stored in the predetermined area, the new drive data is set.
When the operating means is operated, the drive data after the brightness is changed is set as the new drive data.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the drive data set in the predetermined data area becomes the reference data number when the drive data number that can be stored in the predetermined area reaches the reference data number, new drive data is set. A control signal (for example, a signal corresponding to PWM continuously output from the serial data output terminal of SPI) that is output by the light emission drive means can be output, and the light emission means stably emits light without using a driver. It becomes possible. Moreover, since the changed drive data is set as new drive data when the brightness is changed, it is possible to cause the first light emitting means to stably emit light in accordance with the set brightness.

Note that the above-mentioned "reference data number" corresponds to 1 to 64 if the number of data that can be set in a predetermined area (for example, a data area of a FIFO) of the data storage means is, for example, 64. Considering that it is necessary to prevent the number of data set in a predetermined area of the storage means from becoming 0, it is preferable that the number is 2 or more. Further, the number of brightness data that can be set in the data area of the FIFO is not limited to 64, and it is sufficient if at least two brightness data can be set. When the number of pieces of luminance data that can be set in the FIFO data area is two or more, if the number of pieces of luminance data set in the FIFO data area is less than the first number (two, for example), the second number is set. The brightness data (for example, one piece) may be supplemented.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 17, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the intensity of light received from the light emitting device can be suitably adjusted by the player or the like.

[11-18. Amusement machine of Appendix 18]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, for example, gaming machines in which an effect depending on an RTC (real time clock) is performed are known.

In this type of gaming machine, an RTC abnormality determination is performed when the power is turned on, the date and time is notified if there is an abnormality, and if an RTC abnormality is recognized, a gaming machine that can quickly cope with this is provided. It is publicly known (see, for example, JP-A-2017-51853 (for example, paragraph [0094])).

(18th subject)
According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-51853, if there is an abnormality in the RTC, the date and time is notified, so it may be possible to quickly deal with it, but if the date and time cannot be acquired due to an RTC abnormality, it depends on the RTC. It may not be possible to perform the effect.

In order to solve the eighteenth problem, there is provided a gaming machine according to supplementary note 18 having the following configuration.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 18 is
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) capable of outputting time information,
Time information management means that can acquire time information from the real-time clock and update the acquired time to current time information (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1413),
Production execution means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of executing a specific production (for example, RTC production) based on that the current time information is specific time information (for example, designated time),
An abnormality determining means for determining an abnormality of the real-time clock (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1414),
Equipped with
The time information management means,
When it is determined that the real-time clock is abnormal, the previous time information acquired last time by the time information management unit is maintained as the current time information (for example, step S1415), and it is determined that the real-time clock is normal. Then, the previous time information can be updated to the current time information (for example, the process of step S1416),
The effect execution means,
The specific effect is executed on condition that the current time information is the specific time information (YES in step S1417) and the previous time information and the current time information do not match (YES in step S1418) (step S1419). ) Is configured as follows.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the RTC is abnormal, it is possible to suitably perform the effect depending on the RTC.

[11-19. Note 19-1 and each game machine of note 19-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a display device or the like based on the result of this lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that decodes compressed image data, appropriately converts the decoded image data, stores it in a frame buffer, and outputs it to a display device. (For example, JP-A-2014-87402 (see paragraph [0100])).

(19th task)
In recent years, the variation of the effect image displayed on the display device has increased, and the control relating to the effect image tends to be complicated. In such a case, it is desired to efficiently control the effect image.

In order to solve the above-mentioned nineteenth problem, the gaming machine of appendix 19-1 and the gaming machine of appendix 19-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 19-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing processing (for example, bank flip) for switching the functions of a drawing output destination buffer having a drawing function and a frame buffer having a display function,
Registration means capable of registering image information (eg composition) relating to the effect image displayed on a predetermined display means in the drawing output destination buffer (eg display control circuit 2300 capable of executing step S1449 or step S1458). When,
After the drawing output destination buffer is switched to the frame buffer (for example, after the process of step S1446 is performed), an effect image is displayed on the predetermined display unit based on the image information registered by the registration unit. An effect image display control means (for example, a display control circuit 2300) for controlling the display,
Equipped with
The registration means is
When the image information registered in the frame buffer switched from the drawing output destination buffer includes image information for temporarily stopping the image (for example, when YES is determined in step S1447), First registration means for registering image information in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1449),
Even if there is no image information registered in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, even if NO is determined in step S1444), the effect image displayed on the predetermined display means is registered in the frame buffer. When the upper limit of the displayed image information is reached (for example, when YES is determined in step S1450), a second registration unit that registers the image information in the drawing output destination buffer (for example, step S1458 can be executed). Display control circuit 2300).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), while the image information is registered on condition that the image information is not registered, even if the image information is registered, the image information specific to the registered image information is specified. Since the image information is registered when the image information is included, it is possible to efficiently control the effect image.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 19-2 is
A plurality of display means (for example, a display) capable of reproducing a predetermined effect image,
A display control unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300) capable of controlling image information relating to the effect image reproduced on the plurality of display units;
Equipped with
The display control means,
A layer number determination unit (for example, a display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1441) that determines the appropriateness of the layer number related to the image information that is simultaneously reproduced on the display unit,
When the number of layers is appropriate (for example, when YES is determined in step S1441), the number of display means determining means that determines the appropriateness of the number of display means used to reproduce the effect image (for example, step A display control circuit 2300 for executing the processing of S1442),
When there is an appropriate number of display units used for reproducing the effect image (for example, when YES is determined in step S1442), there is a display unit that determines the presence of the display unit that is the registration target of the image information. Determination means (for example, the display control circuit 2300 that executes the process of step S1443),
When there is a display unit to which the image information is to be registered (for example, when YES is determined in step S1443), the image information registration unit that registers the image information reproduced on the display unit (for example, step S1449). And a display control circuit 2300 for executing the processing of step S1458),
After registering the image information reproduced by one of the plurality of display units by the image information registration unit, the image information is registered in another display unit different from the one display unit. Further, the display means number determination means and the display means presence determination means are determined (the processing of step S1459 is performed and then the processing of returning to step S1442 is performed).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when there are a plurality of display means and the number of layers relating to the image information is appropriate, after the image information relating to the effect image displayed on one display means is registered. Since the image information related to the effect image displayed on the other display means different from the one display means is registered, it is possible to efficiently register the image information determined to have the appropriate number of layers. Become.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 19-1 and the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 19-2, it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of efficiently controlling the effect image.

[11-20. Each gaming machine of Supplementary Note 20-1 and Supplementary Note 20-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, audio effects are also output.

As this type of gaming machine, it is determined whether or not the timing for determining the abnormality of the digital amplifier is reached, and for example, when the operation determination timing is determined at a time interval of about several seconds, the input port Pi2 There is known a gaming machine that obtains the abnormality notification signal ERR and determines whether or not the digital amplifier is at an abnormal level (see JP-A-2016-209723 (for example, paragraphs [0178] and [0179])).

(Twentieth subject)
In recent years, due to an increase in variations of effect images displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like, the effect contents have become more sophisticated and the interest has been improved. However, with the sophistication of the effect contents, the effect contents of the game sound are also becoming more sophisticated, and in order to output a normal game sound, it is necessary to appropriately perform the determination process of the amplification device that amplifies the game sound. There is.

In order to solve the twentieth problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 20-1 and a gaming machine according to supplementary note 20-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 20-1,
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (for example, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time has passed,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a game sound,
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means,
An abnormality determining unit that performs abnormality determination processing as to whether or not the amplifying hand is normal (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing of steps S1503, S1511, S1515, etc.),
Equipped with
The abnormality determination means,
The abnormality determination processing can be divided into a plurality of times of abnormality determination processing (for example, processing of step S1503, step S1511, step S1515, etc.), and
A part of the abnormality determination processing (for example, step S1503, step S1511, step S1515) divided into the plurality of times in one predetermined processing (for example, one frame) executed within the predetermined time is executed, It is characterized in that a part or all of the remaining abnormality determination processing can be executed in the predetermined processing after the next time.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a part of the abnormality determination processing of the amplification means (for example, the normal amplifier or the deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within the predetermined processing (for example, one frame). It is possible to execute all the abnormality determination processing of each amplification means over a plurality of frames.

(2) Another example of the gaming machine in Appendix 20-1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (for example, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time has passed,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a game sound,
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means,
Setting information confirmation means for confirming the setting information of the amplification means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of steps S1506 to S507, steps S1522 to S523, etc.),
Equipped with
The setting information confirmation means,
The confirmation process can be executed by dividing it into a plurality of confirmation processes,
Part of the confirmation processing (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of steps S1506 to S507, steps S1522 to S523, etc.) divided into the plurality of times in the predetermined processing performed once within the predetermined time. Is executed, and a part or all of the remaining confirmation processing can be executed in the predetermined processing after the next time.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), a part of the confirmation processing of the setting information of the amplification means (for example, the amplifier for normal use and the amplifier for heavy bass) is performed over a plurality of frames within the predetermined processing (for example, one frame). Therefore, it is possible to perform all the confirmation processing of the setting information of each amplification means over a plurality of frames.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 20-2 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (for example, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time has passed,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a game sound,
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means,
The abnormality determination process for determining whether or not the amplifying unit is normal can be divided into a plurality of abnormality determination processes (for example, check status=0, 2, and 3) and can be executed. An abnormality determining unit that performs determination processing over a plurality of times of the predetermined processing (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes processing such as step S1503, step S1511, step S1515);
A progress degree management means for managing the progress degree of the abnormality determination processing (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for managing the check status),
Equipped with
The progress management means,
It is possible to determine whether or not one of the plurality of abnormality determination processes (for example, the process of check status=0, 2, 3) is completed in one predetermined process,
The abnormality determination means,
When the one abnormality determination process (for example, the check status 0 process) is completed in the one predetermined process, another predetermined abnormality process different from the one abnormality determination process in the next and subsequent (for example, the next frame and subsequent) predetermined processes. When the abnormality determination processing (for example, the processing of the check status 2) is executed and the one abnormality determination processing (for example, the processing of the check status 0) is not completed in the one predetermined processing, the next predetermined processing is performed. It is characterized in that the one abnormality determination process (for example, the process of check status 0) can be executed again.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, a part of the abnormality determination processing of the amplification means (for example, the normal amplifier or the deep bass amplifier) is performed over a plurality of frames within the predetermined processing (for example, one frame). It is possible to execute all the abnormality determination processing of each amplification means over a plurality of frames. In addition, when one abnormality determination process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, one frame main process or interrupt process), the one abnormality determination is performed in the next or subsequent (for example, next frame) predetermined process. Since the process is executed again, any abnormality determination process will be executed until it is completed.

(2) Another example of the gaming machine in Appendix 20-2 is
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined process (for example, a main process or an interrupt process) every time a predetermined time has passed,
An output unit (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a game sound,
Amplifying means (for example, digital audio power amplifier 2620) capable of amplifying the game sound output from the output means,
The confirmation processing of the setting information about the amplifying unit can be divided into a plurality of confirmation processings (for example, the processing of check status=1, 5), and the plurality of confirmation processings can be performed a plurality of times of the predetermined processing. Setting information confirmation means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of steps S1506 to S507, steps S1522 to S523, etc.)
A progress degree management unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that manages a check status) that manages the progress degree of the setting information confirmation processing,
Equipped with
The progress management means,
It is possible to determine whether or not one confirmation process of the plurality of confirmation processes (for example, the process of check status=1, 5) is completed in one predetermined process,
The setting information confirmation means,
When the one confirmation process (for example, the process of check status=1) is completed in the one predetermined process, another confirmation process different from the one confirmation process (for example, check status= 5) is performed, and when the one confirmation process is not completed in the one predetermined process, the one confirmation process can be executed again in the next and subsequent predetermined processes. ..

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), a part of the confirmation processing of the setting information of the amplification means (for example, the amplifier for normal use and the amplifier for heavy bass) is performed over a plurality of frames within the predetermined processing (for example, one frame). Therefore, it is possible to perform all the confirmation processing of the setting information of each amplification means over a plurality of frames. Moreover, when one confirmation process is not completed in one predetermined process (for example, one frame main process or interrupt process), the one confirmation process is performed in the next and subsequent (for example, next frame) predetermined processes. Since it is executed again, any confirmation processing will be executed until it is completed.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 20-1 and the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 20-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately performing the determination process of the amplification device.

[11-21. Note 21-1 and each game machine of Note 21-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, game sounds are also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine that writes a SAC number in a voice control register to cause a simple access controller to function and output voice data such as a game sound from a voice memory (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-242242). See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2017-79971).

(Twenty-first task)
In recent years, variations in game sounds have been increasing along with an increase in variations in effect images. However, if a plurality of game sounds are overlapped with each other, the effect of the game sounds may be reduced to half.

In order to solve the twenty-first problem, the gaming machine of supplementary note 21-1 and the gaming machine of supplementary note 21-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 21-1
Setting means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of assigning and setting sound information (for example, SAC number) related to game sound data to a channel,
Sound output means (for example, a voice/LED control circuit) capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel;
Equipped with
The setting means,
In assigning sound information to one channel, when a plurality of sound information is set to the one channel (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S1542),
When the plurality of sound information is specific sound information (for example, chain reproduction of SHOT reproduction and LOOP reproduction), one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is at least a predetermined time. A first setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1544) that delays and sets (for example, one frame) or more;
Without delaying the predetermined time or more, provided that the plurality of pieces of sound information are non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example, NO is determined in the process of step S1543) ( For example, it is characterized by including a second setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1546 or step S1547) that sets the plurality of pieces of sound information (in the frame).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of sound information is set in one channel, when the plurality of sound information are specific sound information, one of the sound information is delayed. Since it is set, it is possible to enjoy a sound effect by delaying (for example, a sound effect by muffling). On the other hand, if the plurality of pieces of sound information are non-specific pieces of sound information, the plurality of pieces of sound information are set without delay, so that the processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the promptness of the processing while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The specific sound information is
It includes at least first sound information reproduced only once (for example, SHOT reproduction) and second sound information reproduced plural times (LOOP reproduction),
The first setting means,
After the first sound information is set, the second sound information can be set with a delay of a predetermined time or more.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, since the first sound information to be reproduced only once is set, the second sound information to be reproduced plural times is set with a delay of a predetermined time or more. It is possible to prevent the first sound information reproduced only once from becoming difficult to hear.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 21-2,
Setting means (for example, voice/LED control circuit) capable of assigning and setting sound information (for example, SAC number) relating to game sound data to a channel,
Sound output means capable of outputting a game sound based on the sound information assigned to the channel;
Equipped with
The setting means,
In assigning sound information to one channel, when a plurality of sound information is set to the one channel (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S1542),
When the plurality of sound information is specific sound information (for example, SHOT+loop chain reproduction), one of the plurality of sound information (for example, loop reproduction) is at least a predetermined time (for example, A first setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1544) that delays the setting by one frame) or more, and
Without delaying the predetermined time or more, provided that the plurality of pieces of sound information are non-specific sound information different from the specific sound information (for example, NO is determined in the process of step S1543) ( For example, a second setting unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S1546 or step S1547) that sets the plurality of pieces of sound information (in the frame),
Have
The second setting means,
When mute is set for all channels (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S1545), sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting (for example, the process of step S1546 is performed). On the other hand, when the mute setting is not for all channels but for one channel (for example, when NO is determined in step S1545), the mute setting is overwritten to set the sound information (for example, step S1547). Is performed).

(1) According to the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, when a plurality of sound information is set for one channel, when one of the plurality of sound information is specific sound information, one of the sound information is delayed. Since it is set as described above, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect by delaying (for example, the sound effect by muffling). On the other hand, if the plurality of pieces of sound information are non-specific pieces of sound information, the plurality of pieces of sound information are set without delay, so that the processing can be performed quickly. That is, by delaying or not delaying depending on the situation, it is possible to ensure the promptness of the processing while utilizing the game sound effect due to the delay. Furthermore, when a plurality of sound information is non-specific sound information, when the mute setting is set for all channels, the sound information is set without overwriting the mute setting, and the mute setting for all channels is not set. When it is the mute setting for the channel, the sound information is set by overwriting the mute setting, so that it is necessary (for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished, the variable display of the next special symbol is started. ) Can be secured.

As described above, according to the gaming machines of Supplementary Note 21-1 and Supplementary Note 21-2, it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of suitably outputting the game sound.

[11-22. Amusement machine of Appendix 22]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, game sounds are also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine that outputs a sound that excites the game in conjunction with an effect image displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like (see, for example, JP-A-2014-144066).

(Twenty-second task)
However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2014-144066, the secondary volume is maintained at a fixed value, and the volume of the effect sound is controlled by the primary volume, so to increase the variation of the volume of the effect sound. There is a limit.

In order to solve the above-mentioned 22nd subject, the gaming machine of supplementary note 22 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 22 is
Output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Sound data setting means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of setting sound data (for example, voice data) relating to the game sound output from the output means,
Volume control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request) having a plurality of reproduction channels (for example, CH1 to CH31) and capable of controlling the volume output from the output means;
Equipped with
The volume control means,
First volume control means (for example, capable of changing volume-related information for all of the plurality of reproduction channels based on a predetermined operation (for example, hardware switch operation or screen operation by a user) being performed. A host control circuit 2100 which executes a volume control 2810 by a hardware switch, a user volume control 2820 by a volume setting screen, and a debug volume control 2830 at the time of debugging,
Second volume control means (for example, a first reproduction channel primary control 2840, a second reproduction channel primary control 2850, and, which can change the information related to the volume for each reproduction channel of the plurality of reproduction channels, A host control circuit 2100) which executes the volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 incorporated in the audio data;
And is configured to be able to change the volume output from the output means by multiplying the information relating to the volume by the first volume control means and the information relating to the volume by the second volume control means. ,
The second volume control means,
A volume control (first reproduction channel primary control 2840) that controls so that the information related to the volume is changed for each reproduction channel when the predetermined operation is performed,
Even if the predetermined operation is performed for each playback channel, a volume that controls to output information (for example, an error sound or an alarm sound at the time of illegal activity) related to a constant volume before and after the operation is performed. The control (second reproduction channel primary control 2850) can be executed.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the game sound output from the output means is defined by multiplying the information related to the volume by the first volume control means and the information related to the volume by the second volume control means. Therefore, it is possible to give variety to the volume of the game sound. Moreover, the second volume control means controls such that, even if a predetermined operation is performed for each reproduction channel, information relating to a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. As a result, even if a predetermined operation is performed, it is possible to perform control of outputting information relating to a constant volume before and after the operation is performed only on a specific reproduction channel, not on the entire channel. ..

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The first volume control means,
It is characterized in that it is possible to control the volume-related information by controlling the debug volume during debugging.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), the game sound data used in the game can be used as it is at the time of debugging, and the work efficiency at the time of debugging can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine of appendix 22, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of providing variations in the volume of the effect sound.

[11-23. Each gaming machine of Appendix 23-1 to Appendix 23-58]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. In addition to such effect images, game sounds are also output from the speaker.

As this type of gaming machine, there has been disclosed a gaming machine capable of adjusting a volume of a gaming sound output from a speaker by a player's operation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-229766).

(Twenty-third task)
However, if the volume of the game sound output from the speaker can be adjusted by operating the game sound, it may affect sounds that you do not want to change, such as error sounds and warning sounds. , Not preferable.

In order to solve the twenty-third problem, the gaming machine according to supplementary note 23-1 to supplementary note 23-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 23-1,
A plurality of output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Operation means capable of operating the volume output from the output means (for example, volume setting screen),
A sound control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process) capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation unit;
Equipped with
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information having the constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850). Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840) having volume information that is changed based on the operation of the operation means. Is
The plurality of output means include a dedicated output means (for example, a dedicated speaker) used for outputting a specific sound, and a shared output means (for example, a shared speaker) used for outputting a sound other than the specific sound. Contains at least and
The sound control means,
Regarding the dedicated output means, even if the operation means is operated, a specific sound control means capable of executing control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed (for example, step A host control circuit 2100 that executes S1559,
Regarding the shared output means, a non-specific sound control means (for example, a host that executes step S1558) capable of executing control to output the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. And a control circuit 2100).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the dedicated output means used for outputting a specific sound outputs a constant volume before and after the operation is performed even if the operating hand capable of operating the volume is operated. To be controlled. That is, although the volume can be operated, the constant volume is output without the volume changing before and after the operation of the operating means. Further, regarding the common output means used to output a sound other than the specific sound, the second information in which the volume information is changed based on the operation of the operating hand capable of operating the volume is output. It is possible to preferably adjust the volume.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The dedicated output means is a speaker for vibration.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), it is possible to output a specific sound (for example, an error sound or a warning sound) at a constant volume from the vibration speaker.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the power is turned on (for example, during various initialization processing in step S1201), dedicated output setting means (for example, the processing in step S1201 is executed to set which of the plurality of output means is to be the dedicated output means. Further comprising a host control circuit 2100)
The data relating to the specific sound (for example, the voice data relating to the specific sound designated by the SAC number) defines that the output destination of the specific sound is the dedicated output means. And

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the power is turned on, the output destination of the data relating to the specific sound is defined in the dedicated output means, so it is possible to set which of the output means is the dedicated output means. At the same time, since it is stipulated that audio data relating to a specific sound of which a constant volume is output will be output from the dedicated output means, it is possible to enhance versatility.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 23-2 is
Output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Operation means capable of operating the volume output from the output means (for example, volume setting screen),
A sound control unit having a plurality of reproduction channels and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process),
Equipped with
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information having the constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850). Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840) having volume information that is changed based on the operation of the operation means. Is
The plurality of reproduction channels include at least a dedicated channel used to output a specific sound and a shared channel used to output a sound other than the specific sound,
The sound control means,
For the dedicated channel, even if the operating means is operated, a specific sound control means capable of executing control to output the first information so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed (for example, step S1580). A host control circuit 2100) for executing
For the shared channel, non-specific sound control means capable of executing control for outputting the second information so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means (for example, host control executing step S1581). And a circuit 2100).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the operation means is operated for the dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound, a certain volume is controlled before and after the operation is performed. .. That is, although the volume can be operated, the volume is not changed before and after the operation of the operation means, and constant volume information is output. Also, for shared channels used to output sounds other than specific sounds, the volume is controlled to be changed based on the operation of the operator's hand that can operate the volume, so volume adjustment is preferable. It becomes possible to do it.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the power is turned on, a dedicated channel (for example, CH31, CH32) used for outputting the specific sound and a shared channel (for example, CH1 to CH30) used for outputting the sound other than the specific sound are set. Channel setting means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1201),
Sound information registration means for registering sound information (for example, SAC number) related to the specific sound and data other than the specific sound to the dedicated channel or the shared channel (for example, host for registering SAC number) Control circuit 2100),
Is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of (2), when the power is turned on, a dedicated channel used for outputting a specific sound and a shared channel used for outputting a sound other than the specific sound are set and specified. Since the sound information related to the data of each sound other than the specific sound and the specific sound is registered in each channel, versatility can be improved.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 23-3 is
Output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Operation means capable of operating the volume output from the output means (for example, volume setting screen),
A sound control unit having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process),
Equipped with
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information having the constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850). Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840) having volume information that is changed based on the operation of the operation means. Is
The sound control means,
Data discrimination means for discriminating whether or not the data of the game sound being reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific data of the specific sound (for example, the host control circuit 2100 which executes step S1599),
When the data discrimination means determines that the data of the game sound being reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. Specific sound control means capable of executing the control for outputting the first information (for example, the host control circuit 2100 executing step S1600),
When the data discrimination means determines that the data of the game sound being reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific data, the second information is set so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. And a non-specific sound control means capable of executing output control (for example, the host control circuit 2100 executing step S1601).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the data of the game sound being reproduced is determined to be the specific data, a constant volume is output before and after the operation means is operated even if the operation means is operated. When it is determined that the data of the game sound being reproduced is non-specific data, the volume is controlled so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operating means. It becomes possible to perform suitably.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 23-4,
Output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Operation means capable of operating the volume output from the output means (for example, volume setting screen),
A sound control unit having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process),
Equipped with
The volume output from the output unit is at least the first information having the constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 2850). Audio signal) and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840) having volume information that is changed based on the operation of the operation means. Is
The sound control means,
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced on the reproduction channel is specific sound information, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed even if the operation unit is operated. As described above, specific sound control means capable of setting the first information to the reproduction channel (for example, the host control circuit 2100 executing step S1621),
When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the game sound reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific sound information, the reproduction is performed so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. It is characterized by having a non-specific sound control means capable of setting the second information in a channel (for example, a host control circuit 2100 executing step S1623).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), if the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the sound output reproduced on the reproduction channel is the specific sound information, the constant volume is maintained even if the operation means is operated. When the sound information (for example, SAC number) corresponding to the game sound reproduced on the reproduction channel is non-specific sound information while being controlled to be output, the volume is changed based on the operation of the operation means. Since it is changed, it is possible to preferably adjust the volume.

(1) For the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 23-5,
Output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined game sound,
Operation means capable of operating the volume output from the output means (for example, volume setting screen),
A sound control unit having a reproduction channel and capable of controlling the volume based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes a sound request control process),
Equipped with
The volume output from the output means is at least the first information (for example, output by the second reproduction channel primary control 285) having constant volume information before and after the operation is performed even if the operation means is operated. Audio signal), and second information (for example, an audio signal output by the first reproduction channel primary control 2840) having volume information that is changed based on the operation of the operation means, and Third information having volume information included in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel (for example, audio signal output by volume control 2860, 2870, 2880 included in audio data) ) And
The sound control means,
When the sound data specified by the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel is specific sound data (for example, sound data not affected by the volume adjustment), Identification information setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S1632) that presets identification information (for example, a flag indicating whether or not each channel is affected by volume adjustment) capable of identifying that there is ,
When setting the volume to the playback channel, when the identification information can identify that the sound data specified by the sound information (for example, SAC number) is the specific sound data (for example, determined as YES in step S1637). Even if the operating means is operated, a first volume setting means (for example, a step) that can set the first information to the reproduction channel so that a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed. A host control circuit 2100) capable of executing the processing of S1641,
When setting the volume to the reproduction channel, when the sound data specified from the sound information can be identified by the identification information unless the sound data is the specific sound data (for example, when NO is determined in step S1637), the operation is performed. Second volume setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S1638) capable of setting the second information in the reproduction channel so that the volume is changed based on the operation of the means.
When setting the volume to the reproduction channel, the reproduction channel is provided with a third volume setting means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 capable of executing the process of step S1644) for setting the third information to the reproduction channel.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the identification information capable of identifying that the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is the specific sound data is set in advance and specified from the sound information. When the sound information can be identified as the specific sound data by the identification information, a certain volume is set to be output even if the operation unit is operated. Also, the volume is set to be changed based on the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel. Further, the third information having the volume information incorporated in the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is set in the reproduction channel. In this way, it is possible to preferably adjust the volume.

In the above gaming machine, when the sound data specified by the sound information (for example, SAC number) registered in the reproduction channel can be identified by the identification information as the specific sound data (for example, YES in step S1637). Even if the operation means is operated, a constant volume is output before and after the operation is performed.In this case, the constant volume is always information related to the maximum volume. Is also good. However, even if the sound data specified from the sound information registered in the reproduction channel is the specific sound data (first information relating to a certain volume), the sound information registered in the reproduction channel (for example, SAC number). ) Is multiplied by the volume incorporated in the sound data specified by the), the output volume may not be a constant volume.

As described above, according to each of the gaming machines of Supplementary Note 23-1 to Supplementary Note 23-5, it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of suitably adjusting the volume.

[11-24. Amusement machine of Appendix 24]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is known a game in which a light emitting means including a light emitting body such as an LED is provided on the front side of the gaming machine, and a light emitting effect of lighting or blinking the light emitting means in a predetermined mode is performed. ing.

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine in which the brightness of the light emitting means can be adjusted, for example, by an operation of a player or the like (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-295551).

(Twenty-fourth task)
According to the gaming machine described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2008-295551, the brightness of the light emitting means can be challenged by the operation of the player or the like, but when the light emitting means can emit light in full color, the brightness is changed. The color may change significantly.

In order to solve the above-mentioned twenty-fourth problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 24 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine in Appendix 24 is
A predetermined light emitting means (for example, a lamp (LED) group 25),
Operation means operable to select the brightness of the light emitting means (for example, a brightness setting screen displayed on a liquid crystal display device used as the display device 16);
A storage unit (for example, an attenuation table) storing a brightness information table (for example, an attenuation table) in which the brightness information is set for each of a plurality of colors (for example, RGB) as the brightness information (for example, the brightness attenuation rate) related to the brightness of the light emitting unit. Sub-main ROM 2050),
When the brightness is selected by the operation means, a brightness control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of controlling the brightness of the light emitting means based on the brightness information table,
Equipped with
The storage means is
Corresponding to the brightness selectable by the operating means, stores a brightness information table in which the brightness information is set for each of the plurality of colors,
The brightness control means,
Based on the luminance information table corresponding to the luminance selected by the operating means, the luminance of the light emitting means can be controlled so that the blue attenuation rate and the red attenuation rate among the plurality of colors are the largest and the red one are the smallest. It is characterized in that

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, based on the luminance information set for each of the plurality of colors, the light emitting means is arranged so that among the plurality of colors, the blue attenuation rate is the largest and the red attenuation rate is the smallest. Since the emission of light is controlled, even if the brightness of the light emitting means is changed by the operation of the player or the like, it is possible to suppress the change in the emission color, that is, maintain the white balance.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the brightness while suppressing the change in the emission color.

[11-25. Amusement machine of Appendix 25]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a movable body is provided on a game board, and the movable body is operated to give an impact to the player and thereby increase the motivation for the game. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-288694).

(Twenty-fifth task)
For example, in a gaming machine in which a movable body is actuated as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-288694, the movement of the movable body has been diversified in recent years, and the control for operating the movable body has been complicated accordingly. Therefore, in recent years, there has been a demand for a gaming machine capable of suppressing the control load while allowing the movable body to have various movements.

In order to solve the twenty-first problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 25 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 25 is
A predetermined accessory,
Control means capable of controlling the operation of the predetermined accessory (for example, host control circuit 2100),
An actuating member (for example, a solenoid) capable of actuating a member that constitutes the accessory,
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, LEDs),
A plurality of connecting portions (for example, Port0 to Port23) capable of transmitting a signal to the connected light emitting means by being connected to any one of the plurality of light emitting means,
A light emission control means (for example, a voice/LED control circuit 2200) capable of controlling the light emission means by transmitting a signal to the light emission means through the connection portion,
Equipped with
The operating member is
It is connected to any one of the plurality of connecting portions, and is configured to be able to operate a member constituting the accessory by a signal from the light emission control means,
The control means is
The operating member connected to any one of the plurality of connecting portions can be operated in synchronization with the predetermined accessory.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if the number of actuating members increases due to the diversification of the movement of the accessory, the control for operating the accessory while maintaining the variety of the movement of the accessory. It is possible to suppress the load and synchronize the accessory and the operating member.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to provide the gaming machine capable of suppressing the control load.

[11-26. Amusement machine of Appendix 26]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of gaming machine, compressed data is read from a CGROM that stores compressed data of still images and moving images displayed on a liquid crystal display, and the read compressed data is expanded and output to a liquid crystal display. There is known a gaming machine that generates a game (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-159026).

(Twenty-sixth task)
However, as described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-159026, for example, when the compressed data is read from the CGROM and the image data to be output is generated, if the data amount is large, it takes time for the loading process. .. In this case, the watchdog reset may occur even though the loading process is normally proceeding, which is not preferable.

In order to solve the twenty-sixth problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 26 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 26 is
A read-only storage area (for example, a sub-main ROM 2050 or CGROM 2060) in which game data relating to a game is stored,
A volatile storage area (for example, SRAM 2100b or built-in VRAM 2370) capable of reading and writing game data relating to a game,
A transfer execution unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the data load process of FIG. 93) that executes a load process that reads the game data stored in the read-only storage region and writes the game data in the volatile storage region,
A watchdog timer,
Clearing means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) for clearing the timekeeping of the watchdog timer when a predetermined time has passed,
Equipped with
The transfer execution means is
When the load processing exceeds a predetermined time, the watchdog timer is reset, and the load processing is performed again (the host control circuit 2100 which executes the processing of step S1656).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), when the time required for the load processing by the transfer executing means exceeds the predetermined upper limit value, the load processing is ended and the load processing is executed again. Even if it takes time, it is possible to automatically recover.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 26, even when the loading process takes time, it is possible to preferably proceed with the loading process.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The clearing means,
When the load process does not exceed the predetermined time, the watchdog timer is cleared (for example, the process of step S1655), and the watchdog timer is clocked only when the load process exceeds the predetermined time. The error processing (for example, the processing of step S1656) is configured to be executed without clearing,
The transfer execution means is
The load process is executed again as the error process.

According to the above-mentioned (2) gaming machine, the watchdog timer is cleared when the load processing does not exceed the predetermined time, while the watchdog timer is not cleared only when the load processing exceeds the predetermined time. Since the error processing is executed in the above, it is possible to grasp that the load processing could not be completed due to the occurrence of the error.

[11-27. Appendix 27-1 and each gaming machine of Appendix 27-2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed when a game ball is won at a starting opening, and a big hit game is performed when the result of the lottery is a big hit. Further, for example, a liquid crystal display device for displaying the effect image is provided, and the effect image determined by the lottery is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

In this type of gaming machine, lottery is performed in various scenes, and the lottery is performed by generating and acquiring a random number. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-023629, the number of digits of a newly acquired random number value is determined, a one-digit numerical value is calculated from the determined random number value, and only the determined number of digits is calculated. It describes how to place and get new numbers.

(Twenty-seventh task)
In the random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number, it is required that the acquired random number is unlikely to have regularity. However, if the processing is complicated, the control load becomes large, which is not preferable. Therefore, it is preferable to perform a random number acquisition process in which regularity does not easily occur while suppressing an increase in control load.

In order to solve the twenty-seventh problem, the gaming machine of supplementary note 27-1 and the gaming machine of supplementary note 27-2 having the following configurations are provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 27-1,
A gaming machine that performs a lottery using a predetermined random number,
A real-time clock (for example, RTC) capable of outputting time information,
Random number generation means for generating a random number used in a predetermined lottery (for example, a host control circuit 2100 for executing the processing of FIG. 95 or FIG. 96),
Equipped with
The random number generation means,
An initialization unit that acquires time information from the real-time clock and generates an initial value of a random number using the acquired time information (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes random number initialization processing),
An unsteady updating unit (a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of FIG. 96) that updates the random number when the generated random number is used in the lottery;
A steady updating means (a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of FIG. 95) that regularly updates the random numbers even if the generated random numbers are not used in the lottery;
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the initial value of the random number is generated by using the time information acquired from the real-time clock, the acquired random number can be randomized, and the acquired random number is biased. Can be suppressed. In particular, since the initial value of the random number is related to the time when the power is turned on in units of minutes and seconds, it is possible to change the initial value each time.

(1) For the gaming machine of Appendix 27-2,
A gaming machine that performs a lottery using a predetermined random number,
Random number table creating means for creating a random number table in which a plurality of random numbers are registered by using any one of a plurality of random number seeds (for example, random number seeds a to h) (for example, executes the process of step S1704). A host control circuit 2100),
A random number acquisition unit that acquires a random number used for a predetermined lottery by referring to the random number table created by the random number table creation unit (for example, in the random number acquisition process of step S1706, from the random number table created in step S1704). A host control circuit 2100) for obtaining a random number,
Reference position updating means for updating the reference position of the random number table at a timing different from the timing of creating the random number table (a host control circuit for updating the reference position of the random number table when a random number is acquired from the random number table in step S1706). 2100),
Equipped with
The random number acquisition means,
After obtaining the random number by referring to the random number table, it is possible to obtain the random number provided for the predetermined lottery by referring to the same random number table in which the reference position is updated without creating the random number table (for example, The packet reception loop of FIG. 98 can be used to execute the random number acquisition process of step S1706).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), even if there are a plurality of random number acquisition opportunities, the reference position is only updated by using the same random number table that has already been created, and a random number is acquired. It is possible to reduce the control load while providing randomness to the random numbers.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of supplementary note 27-1 and the gaming machine of supplementary note 27-2, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing processing in which regularity is unlikely to occur while suppressing an increase in control load. ..

[11-28. Appendix 28 Gaming Machine]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines, lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variable display of symbols is displayed in the display area based on the result of the lottery. Then, when this symbol is stopped in a specific combination, it shifts to a special game state advantageous to the player. Also, when the variable display of symbols is being performed, various effects are performed,

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that produces an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor. Then, in a gaming machine that performs an effect using such a movable accessory, when a problem occurs in which the movable accessory does not return to the initial position, processing for returning the movable accessory to the initial position (retry processing ) Has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-268038).

In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-268038, a reference position sensor that detects whether or not the movable accessory exists at the operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and based on the detection result of this reference position sensor. Retry processing is being executed. Then, when a problem occurs such that the movable accessory does not return to the initial position, if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position even if the retry process is continuously performed, it is determined as an error and a predetermined error occurs. Processing is being performed.

(The 28th task)
However, as a defect related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is a slight error that is solved when the variable display of the symbol is executed a plurality of times. If even such a slight error is determined to be an error, there is a problem that unnecessary error processing increases.

In order to solve the twenty-eighth problem, a gaming machine according to supplementary note 28 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 28 is
When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol (for example, a special symbol) is started, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol is stopped to execute a game once. For example, the main CPU 101) of the main control circuit 100,
An effect control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control related to the operation of the movable member (for example, the role object group 1000 or the like);
Equipped with
The game control means,
At least, it is possible to transmit start information of the variable display of the symbol and stop information of the variable display of the symbol to the effect control means (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55),
The effect control means,
First determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19141) that determines whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at the timing when the variable display of the symbol is started,
When it is determined in the determination by the first determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the first recovery processing (for example, initial position recovery operation transition setting in step S19147) can be executed so as to be normalized. First recovery control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19147),
Second determination means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19171) that determines whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at the timing when the variable display of the symbols is stopped,
When it is determined in the determination by the second determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the second restoration process (for example, the motor driver reset process in step S19176) that can be normalized is executed. 2 restoration control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19176),
The first determination means,
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the predetermined accessory or the movable member is normal at the timing when the variable display of the symbol is started,
The first restoration control means,
Each time the first determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games, the first recovery process is executable.
The second determination means,
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the predetermined accessory or the movable member is normal at the timing when the variable display of the symbol is stopped,
The second restoration control means,
Each time the second determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games, the second recovery process is executable.
The effect control means further includes
A first counting unit that counts the number of times the first restoration process is performed by the first restoration control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19144),
A second counting unit that counts the number of times the second restoration process is performed by the second restoration control unit (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19177);
The result of counting by the first counting means is a first specified number of times (for example, 10 times), and the result of counting by the second counting means is a second specified number of times (for example, 10 times). When at least one of the above is satisfied, a accessory operation incapable means (for example, host control circuit 2100) that brings the movable member into an inoperable state in which the movable member is inoperable (for example, an error motor operation stop state) is provided. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1), the first determination processing does not make the operation inoperable state merely by determining that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, and the first recovery process is performed. Similarly, if the second determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled and the second recovery process is performed. Then, when the number of games in which the first recovery process is executed reaches the first specified number of times, or when the number of games in which the first recovery process is executed reaches the first specified number of times, the movable member is moved. The operation is disabled. Therefore, even if a minor error occurs, it will not be inoperable, and it will be inoperable when the first recovery process or the second recovery process cannot be recovered despite being executed over a plurality of games. Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious errors.

Moreover, whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal is determined at each of the timing at which the variable display of the symbol is started and the timing at which the variable display of the symbol is stopped. Then, at the timing when the variable display of the symbol is started and the timing when the variable display of the symbol is stopped, the recovery process and the number of games in which the recovery process is executed are separately counted, and the number of times the recovery process is executed. When either one of them has reached the specified number of times, the operation is disabled, so that it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a serious error.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member exists at a specific position (for example, initial position);
Drive means capable of operating the movable member from the specific position toward a prescribed position (for example, maximum range of motion);
Further equipped with,
The first determination means,
It is determined that the movable member is not normal when it does not exist at least in the specific position,
The second determination means,
It is determined that the movable member is not normal when the movable member cannot be operated from the specific position toward at least the specified position (for example, when a motor error is detected).

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), it is determined whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member, which is performed at the timing when the variable display of the symbol is started, is normal, and the timing at which the variable display of the symbol is stopped. Since the determination as to whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member that is performed in step 2 is performed is performed from different viewpoints, the accuracy of error determination can be increased. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a serious error with higher accuracy while avoiding the inoperable state due to the occurrence of a minor error.

As described above, according to Supplementary Note 28, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing error processing.

[11-29. Each of the gaming machines in Appendix 29-1 to Appendix 29-3]
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines and pachislot machines, lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a variable display of symbols is displayed in the display area based on the result of the lottery. Then, when this symbol is stopped in a specific combination, it shifts to a special game state advantageous to the player. Also, when the variable display of symbols is being performed, various effects are performed,

As this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that produces an effect using a movable accessory driven by a motor. Then, in a gaming machine that performs an effect using such a movable accessory, when a problem occurs in which the movable accessory does not return to the initial position, processing for returning the movable accessory to the initial position (retry processing ) Has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-268038).

In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-268038, a reference position sensor that detects whether or not the movable accessory exists at the operation reference position (initial position) is provided, and based on the detection result of this reference position sensor. Retry processing is being executed. Then, when a problem occurs such that the movable accessory does not return to the initial position, if the movable accessory does not return to the initial position even if the retry process is continuously performed, it is determined as an error and a predetermined error occurs. Processing is being performed.

(Twenty-ninth subject)
However, as a defect related to the operation of the movable accessory, there is a slight error that is solved when the variable display of the symbol is executed a plurality of times. If even such a minor error is determined to be an error, unnecessary error processing increases, which is not appropriate. On the other hand, since the effect using a movable accessory is an important element for enhancing the entertainment of the game, if the game is played on a gaming machine in which an error related to the operation of the movable accessory occurs, the decline in the entertainment can be denied. Absent. Therefore, it is preferable that the gaming machine, in which the movable accessory cannot operate normally, be managed by an authorized hall-related person, including the determination of whether to continue the operation or stop the operation.

In order to solve the twenty-ninth problem, the gaming machine of appendix 29-1 to the gaming machine of appendix 229-3 having the following configurations is provided.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 29-1,
It is possible to execute the control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol (for example, the special symbol) is started, and the predetermined value is set. When the ending condition is satisfied, a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping the variable display of the symbols,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) operated when changing at least the one setting value;
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control relating to the operation of the movable member,
When a power-on operation is performed, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means,
Equipped with
The game control means,
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control means controls the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, in step S24). Having a main CPU 101 capable of executing processing, it is possible to transmit various information (for example, information relating to the progress of a game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55),
The effect control means,
Determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19141 or step S19147),
If it is determined in the determination by the determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, a restoration process is performed so as to be normalized (for example, initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 or motor driver reset process in step S19176). And a recovery control means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of executing
While having, it is possible to receive various information transmitted from the game control means,
The determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game,
The recovery control means,
It is configured to be able to execute the restoration process each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further includes
A counting unit that counts the number of times the restoration process is performed by the restoration control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of step S19144 and step S19177);
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a prescribed number (for example, 10 times), the accessory cannot operate (for example, error motor operation stopped state) in which the movable member cannot operate (for example, error motor operation stopped state). A host control circuit 2100 which executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179;
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the releasing means for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, the processing of step S311 is executed. And a host control circuit 2100).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the inoperative state is not set and the recovery process is performed only when the determining unit determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number, the movable member is put into the inoperable state. Therefore, it does not become inoperable just by the occurrence of a minor error, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though the recovery process has been executed over multiple games, a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

By the way, since the effect using the movable member is an important factor for enhancing the entertainment of the game, it is inevitable that the entertainment will be deteriorated when the game is played on the gaming machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the above (1), the movable member operates by enabling the inoperable state to be released based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed. It is possible to make an important decision as to whether or not to operate the game machine that cannot be performed by an authorized hall-related person, and to prevent the unauthorized motor operation stop state from being released by an unauthorized person.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member exists at a specific position (for example, initial position),
The determination means is
A position determining unit that determines that the movable member is not normal when the movable member does not exist at least in the specific position,
The recovery control means,
Each time the position determining means determines that the movable member does not exist at the specific position, a position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147) is executed. Position recovery control means (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19147),
The releasing means is
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one setting value has been changed, the number of times the position restoration process counted by the counting means is reset (for example, in step S323). processing)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if the game machine is not in the inoperable state, the position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position is performed once or more times, the position restoration process is performed. Can be reset based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. Therefore, the reset of the number of times the position restoration process is performed is performed by the authorized hall-related person and not by the unauthorized person, and the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further, a drive unit (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) toward a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination means is
An operation determination unit that determines that the movable member is not normal when the drive unit cannot operate the movable member from the specific position toward at least the specified position (for example, when a motor error is detected) (for example, A host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171,
The recovery control means,
Operation recovery control that executes operation recovery processing (for example, motor driver reset processing in step S19176) that resets the driver of the drive means each time the operation determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Means (eg, host control circuit 2100),
The releasing means is
On the basis of receiving the setting change information indicating that the one setting value has been changed, the number of times the operation recovery process counted by the counting means is reset (for example, in step S323). processing)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the operation recovery process for resetting the driver of the driving means is executed once or more, even if the operation recovery process is not performed, the operation recovery process is performed. The number of executions can be reset based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that one setting value has been changed. Therefore, the reset of the number of times the operation recovery process is performed is performed by the authorized hall-related person and not by the unauthorized person, and the gaming machine can be appropriately managed.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 29-2 is
It is possible to execute control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and to have storage means (for example, main ROM 102) capable of storing the game information related to the progress of the game, When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol (for example, a special symbol) is started, and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbol is stopped to execute a game once. For example, the main CPU 101) of the main control circuit 100,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) operated when changing at least the one setting value;
At least specific operation means (for example, backup clear switch 330) operated when deleting the game information stored in the storage means,
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control relating to the operation of the movable member,
When a power-on operation is performed, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means,
Equipped with
The game control means,
Setting change state control for controlling to the setting change state capable of changing the one set value when the operation of the specific operation means and the operation of turning on the power are performed while the setting operation means is operated Means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S24),
When at least the operation of the specific operating means and the operation of turning on the power are performed, the game information erasing means capable of erasing the game information stored in the storage means (for example, the processing of step S2420 can be executed. Main CPU 101),
In addition to having various information (for example, information relating to the progress of the game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed, information indicating that the game information has been deleted) to the effect control means. Transmission is possible (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the processing of step S55),
The effect control means,
Determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19141 or step S19147),
If it is determined in the determination by the determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, a restoration process is performed so as to be normalized (for example, initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 or motor driver reset process in step S19176). ) And a recovery control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100) capable of executing
The determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game,
The recovery control means,
It is configured to be able to execute the restoration process each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further includes
A counting unit that counts the number of times the restoration process is performed by the restoration control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S191444 or step S19177),
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a prescribed number (for example, 10 times), the accessory cannot operate (for example, error motor operation stopped state) in which the movable member cannot operate (for example, error motor operation stopped state). A host control circuit 2100 which executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179;
Release means for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S311),
The releasing means is
When the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, even if an operation to erase the game information stored in the storage unit is performed, the operation disabled state by the accessory operation disabled unit is not released, It is configured to release the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, execute the processing of step S311) when the setting change state is controlled after the power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the inoperative state is not set and the recovery process is performed only when the determining unit determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number, the movable member is put into the inoperable state. Therefore, it does not become inoperable just by the occurrence of a minor error, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though the recovery process has been executed over multiple games, a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

By the way, since the effect using the movable member is an important factor for enhancing the entertainment of the game, it is inevitable that the entertainment will be deteriorated when the game is played on the gaming machine in which the movable member cannot operate normally. Therefore, in the above-mentioned (1) gaming machine, when the setting change state is not controlled, the inoperable state is not released even if the operation for deleting the game information stored in the storage means is performed, and the setting is not performed. The inoperable state is released when controlled to the changed state. As a result, an important hall-related person can make an important decision as to whether or not to operate the game machine in which the movable member cannot operate, and an unauthorized person cannot release the error motor operation stop state. You can

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising drive means (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from the specific position toward a specified position,
The determination means is
An operation determination unit that determines that the movable member is not normal when the drive unit cannot operate the movable member from the specific position toward at least the specified position (for example, when a motor error is detected) (for example, A host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171,
The recovery control means,
Even if the determination unit determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation is not disabled until the count result by the counting unit reaches a specified number (for example, 10 times), And a character product disapproval means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the process of step S19180) that sets the character product disapproval state so that the effect using the movable member cannot be executed.
The releasing means is
When the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, even if an operation to erase the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the operation disabled state by the accessory operation disabled means is not released. It is characterized in that the state in which the character effect is not permitted by the character effect prohibiting means can be released.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), even if it is determined that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, the operation cannot be performed until the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number (for example, 10 times). Without the state, the accessory production is not permitted so that the production using the movable member cannot be executed. Then, when the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, even if an operation for deleting the game information stored in the storage means is performed, the operation disabled state is not released, but the role product performance not permitted state. I'm trying to cancel it. As a result, important decisions are made by authorized personnel in the hall, and when the error is not serious enough to be inoperable, such as when the character production is not permitted, the operation information is erased. By canceling the production non-permission state, it is possible to ensure convenience.

(1) The gaming machine of Appendix 29-3 is
It is possible to execute the control related to the progress of the game based on any one of the plurality of set values, and when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variable display of the symbols is started, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, With game control means (for example, main CPU 101 of main control circuit 100) capable of executing one game by stopping variable display of symbols,
Setting operation means (for example, a setting key 328) operated when changing at least the one setting value;
Display means (for example, the display device 16) on which a predetermined image is displayed,
An effect control means (for example, a host control circuit 2100 having a CPU processor) capable of executing control relating to the operation of the movable member,
When a power-on operation is performed, power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the game control means and the effect control means,
Equipped with
The game control means,
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated, the setting change state control means controls the setting change state in which the one set value can be changed (for example, in step S24). Having a main CPU 101 capable of executing processing, it is possible to transmit various information (for example, information relating to the progress of a game, setting change information indicating that one set value has been changed) to the effect control means. Yes (for example, the main CPU 101 can execute the process of step S55),
The effect control means,
Determination means for determining whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in the one game (for example, the host control circuit 2100 that executes the processing of step S19141 or step S19147),
If it is determined in the determination by the determination means that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal, a restoration process is performed so as to be normalized (for example, initial position restoration operation transition setting in step S19147 or motor driver reset process in step S19176). And a recovery control means (for example, host control circuit 2100) capable of executing
While having, it is possible to receive various information transmitted from the game control means,
The determination means is
In a plurality of games, it is possible to determine whether or not the state related to the operation of the movable member is normal at a predetermined timing in each game,
The recovery control means,
It is configured to be able to execute the restoration process each time the determination means determines that the game is not normal in the plurality of games.
The effect control means further includes
A counting unit that counts the number of times the restoration process is performed by the restoration control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100 that executes the processes of step S19144 and step S19177);
When the result of counting by the counting means reaches a prescribed number (for example, 10 times), the accessory cannot operate (for example, error motor operation stopped state) in which the movable member cannot operate (for example, error motor operation stopped state). A host control circuit 2100 which executes the processing of steps S19146 and S19179;
Based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the releasing means for releasing the inoperable state by the accessory inoperable means (for example, the processing of step S311 is executed. Host control circuit 2100) for
Based on the fact that the accessory cannot be operated by the operation disable means, the storage means that can store the time information in the operation disabled state as history information (for example, the history recording processing of step S306 and step S307 is performed. A sub-work RAM 2100a) that stores history information when performed,
Display control means capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation (for example, a host control circuit 2100 displaying the error information history screen of FIG. 116 via the display control circuit 2300), It is characterized by having.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the inoperative state is not set and the recovery process is performed only when the determining unit determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Then, when the number of times the restoration process is executed reaches the specified number, the movable member is put into the inoperable state. Therefore, it does not become inoperable just by the occurrence of a minor error, but when the recovery process cannot be recovered even though the recovery process has been executed over multiple games, a serious error occurs. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the information screen showing the time information in the inoperable state as history information is displayed, it becomes possible to manage the history of serious errors.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Position detecting means (for example, accessory detection sensor group 1002) capable of detecting that the movable member exists at a specific position (for example, initial position),
The determination means is
A position determination unit (eg, host control circuit 2100) that determines that the movable member is not normal when the movable member does not exist at least in the specific position (eg, NO in step S19141),
The recovery control means,
Each time the position determining unit determines that the movable member does not exist at the specific position (for example, NO in step S19141), a position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position (for example, A position recovery control unit (for example, a host control circuit 2100) that executes the initial position recovery operation transition setting of step S19147),
The releasing means is
On the basis of receiving the setting change information indicating that the one set value has been changed, the number of times the position restoration process counted by the counting means is reset (for example, in step S323). Execute the process),
The storage means is
It is possible to store at least one of position restoration processing history information including time information when the position restoration processing is executed, and position restoration processing number reset history information in which the number of times the position restoration processing is executed is reset. ,
The display control means,
Information indicating at least one of the position restoration processing history information and the position restoration processing count reset history information based on receiving setting change information indicating that the one setting value has been changed It is characterized by being able to display a screen.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), every time it is determined that the movable member does not exist at the specific position, the position restoration process for returning the movable member to the specific position is executed, and the one set value is changed. The number of times the position restoration process is executed is reset based on the information. Then, based on the change of the one set value, the position recovery processing history information including the time information when the position recovery processing is executed, and the time information when the number of times the position recovery processing is executed are reset. An information screen is displayed that shows at least one of the position recovery processing count reset history information that is included. Therefore, although serious errors such as inoperable state have not been reached, by browsing the position recovery process history information and position recovery process count reset history information, it is possible to know in advance the serious error such as inoperable state. It is possible to manage the gaming machine appropriately.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further, a drive unit (for example, a motor for operating the accessory group 1000) capable of operating the movable member from a specific position (for example, an initial position) toward a specified position (for example, a maximum operating range) is further provided. Prepare,
The determination means is
An operation determination unit that determines that the movable member is not normal when the drive unit cannot operate the movable member from the specific position toward at least the specified position (for example, when a motor error is detected) (for example, A host control circuit 2100) that executes the process of step S19171,
The recovery control means,
Operation recovery control that executes operation recovery processing (for example, motor driver reset processing in step S19176) that resets the driver of the drive means each time the operation determination means determines that the state related to the operation of the movable member is not normal. Means (eg, host control circuit 2100),
The releasing means is
On the basis of receiving the setting change information indicating that the one setting value has been changed, the number of times the operation recovery process counted by the counting means is reset (for example, in step S323). Execute the process),
The storage means is
It is possible to store at least one of operation recovery processing history information including time information when the operation recovery processing is executed, and operation recovery processing count reset history information in which the number of times the operation recovery processing is executed is reset. ,
The display control means,
Information indicating at least one of the operation recovery processing history information and the operation recovery processing frequency reset history information based on the reception of the setting change information indicating that the one setting value has been changed. It is characterized in that the screen can be displayed (for example, the hole menu display process of step S302 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), every time it is determined that the state related to the movable member is not normal, the operation recovery process of resetting the driver of the drive means is executed and the one set value is changed. Based on this, the number of times the operation recovery process is executed is reset. Then, based on the fact that the one set value is changed, the operation recovery process history information including the time information when the operation recovery process is executed and the time information when the number of times the position recovery process is executed are reset. An information screen is displayed that shows at least one of the operation recovery process count reset history information that is included. Therefore, although serious errors such as inoperable state have not been reached, by browsing the operation recovery process history information and operation recovery process count reset history information, it is possible to know in advance the serious error such as inoperable state. It is possible to manage the gaming machine appropriately.

As described above, according to each of the gaming machines of Supplementary Note 29-1 to Supplementary Note 29-3, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing error processing and management of the gaming machine.

[12. Other expansion examples, etc.]
In addition, in the present embodiment, the embodiment when applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but all the inventions described in this specification are within a range not departing from the spirit of the invention, a pachinko machine, a game machine, and a slot. It can be applied to machines and all other game machines.

In addition, the above-described embodiments, examples, and modified examples, including the above-mentioned supplementary notes, are merely examples. It goes without saying that the configurations shown in the embodiments, the examples, and the modified examples can be partially replaced or combined in the other embodiments, the modified examples, and the modified examples. Yes. That is, the components described in the embodiments, the examples, and the modified examples can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

16 liquid crystal display 24 speaker 35 power switch 100 main control circuit 101 main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 RWM (main RAM)
106 Command output port 201 Sub CPU
203 Subwork RAM
328 Setting key 330 Backup clear switch 338 Power supply circuit 420 First starting port 440 Second starting port 460 Normal electric prized object 540a 1st big prize hole 540b 2nd big prize hole 545 V prize hole 601 1st special electric prize object 602 Second special electric accessory
662 Main button 664 Select button 1000 Roles group 1002 Roles detection sensor group 2010 Relay board 2100 Host control circuit

The present inventor, in the process of earnestly studying the above-mentioned gaming machine, improves the interest of the player in the game by devising the device for determining the variation pattern of the identification information, and the motivation of the player for the game. I came up with the idea that I could improve the.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in a game and improving a player's motivation for the game. To do.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
A gaming machine provided with a first control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) that performs control regarding execution of a game, and a second control means (for example, a sub control circuit 200) that performs control regarding an effect,
The first control means is
Identification information display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information (for example, first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74, etc.),
A predetermined lottery execution means capable of performing a predetermined lottery (for example, a big hit judgment) relating to the game;
Based on the result of the predetermined lottery performed by the predetermined lottery execution means, the variation pattern of the identification information from the start of the variation display of the identification information in the identification information display means to the stop display of the identification information is determined. Specific lottery execution means capable of performing a specific lottery (for example, a variation pattern lottery) for
In a variation pattern according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means, a display control means capable of displaying the identification information in the identification information display means in a variable manner and then stopping the display.
Transmission means capable of transmitting information (for example, data indicating a variation pattern) according to the result of the specific lottery performed by the specific lottery execution means to the second control means,
When the result of the predetermined lottery becomes a predetermined result (for example, a big hit), and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode on the identification information display means, a specific game state advantageous for the player (for example, a big hit) A specific game state control means capable of shifting to a game state),
As the predetermined result, a plurality of types of results including a first predetermined result (for example, 10 round jackpot) and a second predetermined result (for example, 6 round jackpot) are provided,
When the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, it is possible to control the player more advantageously than when the result of the predetermined lottery is the second predetermined result.
As a result of the specific lottery, a first specific result (for example, per pseudo 3 [indefinite big hit A] or a chance 2 per [undefined big win B]) and a second specific result (for example, per pseudo 3 [fixed value] There are multiple types of results, including [fixed value] per chance 2 and
The specific lottery execution means,
Probability that the result of the specific lottery will be the first specific result when the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result, and the result of the predetermined lottery will be the second predetermined result. When the result of the specific lottery is different from the probability of becoming the first specific result, the result of the specific lottery is determined when the result of the predetermined lottery is the first predetermined result. The probability that the second specific result will be the same as the probability that the specific lottery result will be the second specific result when the predetermined lottery result is the second predetermined result. It is possible to carry out the specific lottery,
The second control means
If the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result, before the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode in the identification information display means, the result of the predetermined lottery is the predetermined result. A suggestion means capable of suggesting that it has become (for example, performing lookahead production),
When the result of the specific lottery is the first specific result, the first specific result is the first specific result of the first type and the first specific result of the second type. Determination means capable of determining which one of the first specific results is the result.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, a player's interest in a game can be improved and the player's motivation for the game can be improved .

Claims (1)

A first winning device that allows game balls to enter,
A second winning device that allows game balls to enter,
The state regarding the possibility of entering the game ball into the second winning device is the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the second winning device and the second state in which the game ball is easily entering into the second winning device. Winning state control means capable of changing between states,
Specific game state control means capable of shifting to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first winning device.
A predetermined game state control means capable of shifting to a predetermined game state that is easily controlled to the second state by the winning state control means after the end of the specific game state;
Identification information display means capable of performing variable display and stop display of identification information,
Display control means capable of changing and displaying the identification information on the identification information display means and then stopping the display based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first winning device or the second winning device. Prepare,
The predetermined game state control means, as a variable display of the identification information by the display control means, when the variable display based on the game ball entered the second winning device is performed a predetermined number of times, the predetermined game state On the other hand, even if the number of times of the variable display performed based on the game ball entering the second winning device does not reach the predetermined number, the first A non-predetermined game that is easy to end the predetermined game state and control to the first state by the prize state control means when the variable display based on the game ball entering the winning device is performed a specific number of times. It is possible to shift to the state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.